PDF Vodavi Starplus SPD 1428 2856 Installation
Starplus SPD 1428-2856 Installation Starplus SPD 1428-2856 Installation
User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 560
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
STARPLUS" digital systems HYBRID KEY TELEPHONESYSTEMS . GENERAL DESCRIPTION, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL / TM MM vo3Avl COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital QUICK REFERENCE SECTION 100 INTRODUCTION Key Telephone Systems TABLE OF CONTENTS ....................................................................................... 108-l SECTION 200 KEY STATION SECTION 210 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE SECTION 220 ATTENDANT SECTION 300 STATION SECTION 310 SLT FEATURE SECTION 320 AITENDANT SECTION 400 GENERAL SECTION 500 INSTALLATION SECTION 600 CUSTOMER SECTION 610 SYSTEM PARAMETERS SECTION 620 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES SECTION 630 STATION ATTRIBUTES SECTION 640 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION SECTION 645 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (VM) ................................................................ 645-l SECTION 650 EXCEPTION SECTION 655 LEAST COST ROUTING PROGRAMMING SECTION 660 INITIALIZE SECTION 665 PRINTING SYSTEM DATA BASE PARAMETERS SECTION 700 SYSTEM CHECKOUT SECTION 800 MAINTENANCE APPENDIX A CUSTOMER APPENDIX B DIGITAL SYSTEMS APPENDIX C ICLID GENERAL issue 1, November 1991 FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS FEATURE DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION FEATURE OPERATION ...................................200-l ............210-1 220-l ......................................... 300-l .................................................... OPERATION ............................................................... 31 o-1 320-l FEATURE OPERATION ............................................. DESCRIPTION .................................................................... 400-l ........................................................................................ DATA BASE PROGRAMMING TABLES PROGRAMMING ................................. 500-l 600-l ...................................610-l PROGRAMMING ......................................620-l PROGRAMMING .....................................630-l (UCD) ......................................... 640-l ......................................... 650-l PROGRAMMING DATA BASE PARAMETERS ....................................655-l 680-l ........................................ ...................... 665-l 700-1 ............................................................................ AND TROUBLESHOOTING DATABASE PROGRAMMING PART NUMBERS DESCRIPTION ................................ 800-l ....................................... A-l ................................................ B-l C-I ........................................................... i Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 100 100.1 100.2 100.3 100.4 SECTION 200 200.1 200.2 200.3 200.4 200.5 200.6 200.7 200.8 200.9 200.10 200.11 200.12 200.13 200.14 200.15 200.16 200.17 200.18 200.19 200.20 ii INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... 100-l PURPOSE ....................................................................................................... REGULATORY INFORMATION (USA) .......................................................... A. Telephone Company Notification ................................................... B. Incidence of Harm .......................................................................... C. Changes in Service ........................................................................ D. Maintenance Limitations.. ............................................................... E. Notice of Compliance ..................................................................... F. Hearing Aid Compatibility.. ............................................................. G. OPX Circuit .................................................................................... REGULATORY INFORMATION (CANADIAN) ............................................... A. Notice ............................................................................................. B. Explanation of Load Number .......................................................... C. Maintenance Limitations.. ............................................................... D. Notice of Compliance ..................................................................... E. OPX Circuit .................................................................................... UUCSA SAFETY COMPLIANCE ................................................................... KEY STATION FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS 100-l 100-l 100-l 100-l 100-l 100-l 100-l 100-2 100-2 100-2 100-2 100-2 loo-2 100-2 100-3 100-3 .................................... 200-l ACCOUNT CODES ........................................................................................ ATTENDANT RECALL ................................................................................... AUTOMATIC LINE ACCESS ......................................................................... AUTOMATIC NIGHT SERVICE ..................................................................... AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION WITH SPEED DIAL.. .............................. AUTOMATIC PRIVACY ................................................................................. AUTOMATIC SELECTION ............................................................................. BACKGROUND MUSIC ................................................................................. BATTERY BACK-UP (MEMORY). ................................................................. BUSY LAMP FIELD (BLF) ............................................................................. CALL ANNOUNCE - PRIVACY ...................................................................... CALL BACK ............................. ..~................................................................... CALL FORWARD: STATION ......................................................................... A. Call Forward . All Calls .................................................................. B. Call Forward . Busy ........................................................................ C. Call Forward . No Answer ............................................................. D. Call Forward . Busy/No Answer .................................................... E. Call Forward . Off-Net ................................................................... CALL FORWARD: PRESET ........................................................................... A. Preset Call Forward . Stations ...................................................... B. Preset Call Forward . Hunt Groups ............................................... C. Preset Call Forward . UCD Groups.. ............................................. D. Preset Call Forward . VM Groups ................................................. E. Preset Call Forward . Off-Net.. ............ ........................................... CALLING STATION TONE MODE OPTION ................................................. CALL PARK .................................................................................................... CALL PICK-UP. ................................................................................................ A. Group Pick-up ............................................................................... B. Directed Call Pick-up .............................................. ..” .................... CALL TRANSFER ........................................................................................... CAMP-ON ....................................................................................................... CAMP-ON RECALL ......................................................................................... .200-l .200-l .200-l -200-l .200-l -200-l .200-l .200-l .200-l .200-l 200-l .200-l .200-l .200-l 200-7 .200-7 .200-7 .200-7 200-7 .200-7 .200-7 .200-7 .200-7 200-7 .200-8 200-8 200-8 .200-8 200-8 200-8 200-8 200-8 Issue 1, November 1991 200.21 200.22 CANNED TOLL RESTRICTION.. ................................................................... 200-8 CENTREX COMPATIBILITY.. ................................................................ h.. .... 200-8 A. Flex Button Programming .............................................................. 200-8 B. Off-hook Preference ...................................................................... 200-8 C. Private Line appearance.. .............................................................. 200-8 D. Programmable Flash Timer.. ......................................................... 200-8 E. Programming l , #, and Hook-Flashes into Speed Dial .................. 200-9 CENTREX/PBX TRANSFER.. ........................................................................ 200-9 CHAINING SPEED BINS ............................................................................... 200-9 CO LINE ACCESS ......................................................................................... 200-9 CO LINE CLASS OF SERVICE.. .................................................................... 200-9 CO LINE CONTROL (CONTACT). ................................................................. 200-9 CO LINE GROUPS.. ....................................................................................... 200-9 CO LINE LOOP SUPERVISION.. ................................................................... 200-9 CO LINE QUEUE ........................................................................................... 200-9 CO LINE INCOMING RINGING ASSIGNMENT.. ........................................... 200-9 CO RING DETECT ......................................................................................... 200-9 CONFERENCE ............................................................................................ 200-l 0 A. Add On Conference ..................................................................... 200-l 0 B. Multi-Line Conference.. ................................................................ 200-l 0 C. Unsupervised Conference ........................................................... 200-l 0 CONFERENCE ENABLE/DISABLE.. ........................................................... 200-10 DATA BASE PRINTOUT (DUMP) ................................................................ 200-l 0 DAY/NIGHT CLASS OF SERVICE (COS) ................................................... 200-10 DEFAULT BUTTON MAPPING.. .................................................................. 200-l 0 DIAL PULSE SENDING ............................................................................... 200-l 0 DIALING PRIVILEGES.. ............................................................................... 200-l 0 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) ............................................. 200-10 A. Programmable Access.. ............................................................... 200-l 0 B. CO Line Group Access.. .............................................................. 200-l 0 C. Station Access.. ........................................................................... 200-l 0 D. Trunk-to-Trunk: ............................................................................ 200-l 0 DIRECT STATION SELECTION .................................................................. 200-10 DIRECTED CALL PICKUP.. ......................................................................... 200-12 A. Call Pick-up - Station ................................................................... 200-12 B. Call Pick-up - UCD Groups.. ........................................................ 200-12 DISABLE OUTGOING CO LINE ACCESS.. ................................................. 200-12 DO NOT DISTURB (DND). ........................................................................... 200-12 A. One-Time Do Not Disturb ............................................................ 200-12 DTMF SENDING .......................................................................................... 200-12 EMERGENCY TRANSFER.. ........................................................................ 200-12 END TO END SIGNALLING.. ....................................................................... 200-12 EXCLUSIVE HOLD ..................................................................................... 200-l 2 EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE ............................................................................. 200-l 2 EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY TRANSFER.. .................................................... 200-12 EXTERNAL NIGHT RINGING.. .................................................................... 200-12 FLASH .......................................................................................................... 200-12 FLASH ON INTERCOM ............................................................................... 200-l 3 FLASH WITH SPEED DIAL.. ........................................................................ 200-13 FLEXIBLE ATTENDANT .............................................................................. 200-l 3 FLEXIBLE BUT-TON ASSIGNMENT ............................. A.. ........................... 200-13 FORCED ACCOUNT CODES.. .................................................................... 200-13 FORCED LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR) ................................................... 200-13 GROUP CALL PICK-UP.. ............................................................................. 200-13 200.23 200.24 200.25 200.26 200.27 200.28 200.29 200.30 200.31 200.32 200.33 200.34 200.35 200.36 200.37 200.38 200.39 200.40 200.41 200.42 200.43 200.44 200.45 200.46 200.47 200.48 200.49 200.50 200.51 200.52 200.53 200.54 200.55 200.56 200.57 200.58 200.59 Issue 1, November 1991 .. . III Digital Key Telephone 200.60 200.61 200.62 200.63 200.64 200.65 200.66 200.67 200.68 200.69 200.70 200.71 200.72 200.73 200.74 200.75 200.76 200.77 200.78 200.79 200.80 200.81 200.82 200.83 200.84 200.85 200.86 200.87 iv Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 HEADSET COMPATIBILITY ......................................................................... 200-l 3 HEADSET MODE ......................................................................................... 200-l 3 HEARING AID COMPATIBLE ...................................................................... 200-l 3 HOLD PREFERENCE ................................................................................... 200-l 3 HOLD RECALL ............................................................................................. 200-l 4 HOT LINE/RING DOWN ............................................................................... 200-14 HUNT GROUPS ............................................................................................ 200-l 4 A. Pilot Hunting ................................................................................ .200-14 B. Station Hunting ............................................................................ .200-14 C. Hunt Group Chaining ................................................................... 200-l 4 INCOMING CO LINES OFF-NET FORWARD (VIA SPEED DIAL). ............ .200-14 INTERCOM CALLING .................................................................................. .200-14 INTERCOM SIGNALING SELECT .............................................................. .200-l 4 LAST NUMBER REDIAL (LNR) .................................................................... 200-14 LCD INTERACTIVE DISPLAY ..................................................................... .200-l 4 LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR) ................................................................... .200-l 4 A. LCR 3-Digit Table ......................................................................... 200-l 4 B. LCR 6-Digit Table (Off ice Codes). ............................................... .200-l 5 C. Route List Tables ......................................................................... 200-l 5 D. Insert/Delete Tables ..................................................................... 200-l 5 E. Weekly Time Tables ..................................................................... 200-l 5 F. Daily Start Time Tables ............................................................... .200-l 5 G. Exception Tables .......................................................................... 200-l 5 H. Default LCR Database ................................................................ .200-15 I. LCR Routing for Toll Information ................................................. 200-l 5 LOOP BUTTON CO LINE ACCESS ............................................................. 200-l 5 MEET ME PAGE ........................................................................................... 200-l 5 MESSAGE WAITING .................................................................................... 200-15 MESSAGE WAITING REMINDER TONE ..................................................... 200-l 5 MUSIC ON HOLD ......................................................................................... 200-l 5 MUTE KEY .................................................................................................... 200-l 6 NAME IN LCD DISPLAY ............................................................................... 200-l 6 NIGHT SERVICE .......................................................................................... 200-16 A. Manual Operation ......................................................................... 200-l 6 B. Automatic Night Mode Operation ................................................ .200-16 C. Weekly Night Mode Schedule ...................................................... 200-l 6 D. Night Class of Service (COS). ..................................................... .200-16 E. Universal Night Answer (UNA). ................................................... .200-i 6 F. Night Ringing Assignments ......................................................... .200-l 6 G. External Night Ringing.. ................................................................ 200-l 6 OFF-HOOK PREFERENCE .......................................................................... 200-l 6 A. Auto Line Access ......................................................................... 200-16 B. Auto Feature Access .................................................................... 200-l 6 C. Hot Line/Ring Down ..................................................................... 200-l 6 D. Intercom Access ........................................................................... 200-I 6 E. User Programmable Preference .................................................. 200-l 6 OFF-HOOK SIGNALLING ............................................................................ .200-l 7 OFF-PREMISE EXTENSIONS (OPX) ......................................................... .200-l 7 ON HOOK DIALING ...................................................................................... 200-l 7 ON LINE PROGRAMMING ........................................................................... 200-l 7 PAGE/RELAY CONTROL .......................................................... .................. .200-l 7 PAGING ....................................................................................................... .200-l 7 A. External Paging ........................................................................... .200-17 B. Internal Paging ............................................................................ . 200-17 Issue 1, November 1991 SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ Key Telephone Systems C. Paging Access Restriction ........................................................... 200-l 7 PAUSE TIMER ......................................................................................... t ... 200-17 PBX DIALING CODES ................................................................................. 200-17 PERSONALIZED MESSAGES ..................................................................... 200-17 A. Personalized Message Code on a Flex Key.. .............................. 200-17 POOL BUTTON OPERATION ...................................................................... 200-18 PREFERRED LINE ANSWER.. .................................................................... 200-18 PRIVACY RELEASE .................................................................................... 200-l 8 A. Per Station Option ....................................................................... 200-l 8 B. Per CO Line Option ..................................................................... 200-l 8 PRIVATE LINE ............................................................................................. 200-l 8 PULSE-TO-TONE SWITCHOVER ............................................................... 200-l 8 RANGE PROGRAMMING ............................................................................ 200-18 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION ..................................................................... 200-18 REMOTE SYSTEM MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE.. ............................... 200-18 A. Remote System Monitor .............................................................. 200-l 8 B. Remote System Maintenance.. .................................................... 200-l 9 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL (SNR) .................................................................. 200-19 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE (SLT) COMPATIBILITY.. ................................ 200-19 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR). ................................ 200-19 SPEAKERPHONE.. .......... ............................................................................ 200-19 STATION CLASS OF SERVICE .................................................................. 200-19 STATION SPEED DIAL ................................................................................ 200-l 9 SYSTEM CAPACITY ................................................................................... 200-l 9 A. Up to 14x28 Configuration: .......................................................... 200-19 B. Up to 28x56 Configuration.. ......................................................... 200-19 SYSTEM HOLD ............................................................................................ 200-l 9 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL ................................................................................. 200-19 TOLL RESTRICTION (TABLE DRIVEN). ..................................................... 200-19 TRANSFER RECALL ................................................................................... 200-20 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) ..................................................... 200-20 A. Alternate UCD Group Assignments.. ........................................... 200-20 B. Overflow Station Assignments.. ................................................... 200-20 C. Incoming CO Direct Ringing ........................................................ 200-20 D. Recorded Announcements (RAN) ............................................... 200-20 E. Number of Calls in Queue Display.. ............................................. 200-20 F. UCD Auto Wrap-Up w/Timer ...................................................... 200-20 G. UCD No-Answer Timer ................................................................ 200-20 H. UCD Available / Unavailable Mode.. ............................................ 200-20 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (UNA) ......................................................... 200-20 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (VM). ....................................................................... 200-21 A. 200-21 VM In-Band Signaling Integration.. .............................................. B. VM Message Waiting Indication .................................................. 200-21 C. VM CO Disconnect Signal - Pass Thru.. ...................................... 200-21 D. VM Tone Mode Calling Option.. ................................................... 200-21 VOLUME CONTROLS ................................................................................. 200-21 200.88 200.89 200.90 200.91 200.92 200.93 200.94 200.95 200.96 200.97 200.98 200.99 200.100 200.101 200.102 200.103 200.104 200.105 200.106 200.107 200.108 200.109 200.110 200.111 200.112 200.113 SECTION 210 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE 210.1 210.2 210.3 210.4 210.5 210.6 Issue 1, November Digital FEATURE DESCRIPTION.. ..........210-1 ACCOUNT CODE .......................................................................................... AUTOMATIC LINE ACCESS.. ........................................................................ CALL FORWARD ............................................................ ............................... CAMP ON ....................................................................................................... CONFERENCE .............................................................................................. CONFERENCE /WITH PERSONAL PARK.. .................................................. 1991 210-l 21 O-l 210-l 210-l 210-l 21 O-l V Digital Key Telephone 210.7 210.8 210.9 210.10 210.11 210.12 210.13 210.14 210.15 210.16 210.17 210.18 210.19 210.20 Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 DIRECT OUTSIDE LINE ACCESS.. ............................................................. DIRECT OUTSIDE LINE RINGING ............................................................... DIRECTED CALL PICK UP ............................................................................ DO NOT DISTURB ......................................................................................... GROUP CALL PICK UP ................................................................................. INTERCOM CALLING .................................................................................... MESSAGE WAITING/CALL BACK.. .............................................................. NIGHT SERVICE ........................................................................................... OFF-HOOK PREFERENCE.. ......................................................................... PERSONAL PARK .......................................................................................... QUEUING ....................................................................................................... STATION SPEED DIAL .................................................................................. SYSTEM SPEED DIAL .................................................................................. TRANSFER .................................................................................................... ..210- 1 .2.10-l 21 o-1 210-l .21 o-1 .210-l .21 O-l .21 o-2 .21 O-2 210-2 21 o-2 21 o-2 .210-2 .21 o-2 4 SECTION 220 220.1 220.2 220.3 220.4 220.5 220.6 220.7 220.8 220.9 220.10 220.11 220.12 220.13 SECTION 300 300.1 300.2 300.3 300.4 300.5 300.6 300.7 300.8 300.9 300.10 300.11 300.12 300.13 300.14 vi AlTENDANT FEATURE DESCRIPTION ......................................... 220-I ATTENDANT DISABLE OUTGOING ACCESS.. ........................................... AlTENDANT OVERFLOW ............................................................................. All-ENDANT OVERRIDE .............................................................................. ATTENDANT POSITION ............................................................................... ATTENDANT RECALL ................................................................................... AUTOMATIC NIGHT MODE .......................................................................... INCOMING CO LINE OFF-NET FORWARD.. ............................................. TIME AND DATE PROGRAMMING .............................................................. ATTENDANT SEARCH.. ................................................................................ BUSY LAMP FIELD INDICATORS.. .............................................................. DIRECT STATION CALLING ......................................................................... MAPPING OPTIONS ..................................................................................... RELEASE KEY ............................................................................................... .220-l 220-l .220-l .220-l .220-l .220-l .0.220-l .220-l .220-2 .220-2 .220-2 -220-2 220-3 STATION .-.300-l FEATURE OPERATION .................................................. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ KEY TELEPHONE STATION FEATURES .................................................... ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL ................................................................ PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL ON HOLD ..................................................... ANSWERING A RECALL .............................................................................. ACCOUNT CODES ........................................................................................ DISABLE OUTGOING CO LINE ACCESS.. .................................................. PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL (Automatic Line Selection) ........................... BACKGROUND MUSIC (Optional) ................................................................ AUTOMATIC SELECTION ............................................................................. CALL BACK ................................................................................................... CALL FORWARD: STATION ......................................................................... A. Call Forward - All Calls.. ................................................................ B. Call Forward - No Answer ............................................................. Call Forward - Busy ....................................................................... C. D. Call Forward - Busy/No Answer .................................................... E. Call Forward - Off-Net (via speed dial). ......................................... F. Call Forward - UCD Groups .......................................................... G. Call Forward - Voice Mail Groups ................................................. H. Call Forward - Hunt Groups .................................... I...................... CALL FORWARD: PRESET .......................................................................... CALL FORWARD: CO LINES ........................................................................ A. Incoming CO Lines Off-Net (via speed dial). ................................. Issue 1, November .300-l .300-l .300-4 .300-4 .300-4 .300-4 .300-4 .300-4 .300-4 .300-4 .300-4 .300-5 .300-5 -300-5 .300-5 .300-5 .300-5 .300-6 .300-6 300-6 .300-6 .300-6 .300-6 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 300.15 300.16 300.17 300.18 Systems CALLING STATION TONE MODE OPTION .................................................. 300-7 CALL PARK ............................................................................................ r.. ..... 300-7 CALL PICK-UP: GROUP ................................................................................ 300-7 CALL TRANSFER .......................................................................................... 300-7 TRANSFERRING CO CALLS TO A STATION FORWARDED TO VM ........ .300-7 CAMP-ON ....................................................................................................... 300-8 CO LINE ACCESS ......................................................................................... 300-8 QUEUING ....................................................................................................... 300-8 CONFERENCE COMBINATIONS .................................................................. 300-8 DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP ............................................................................ 300-9 DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA) ............................................... 300-9 DO NOT DISTURB ......................................................................................... 300-9 A. One-Time Do Not Disturb .............................................................. 300-9 EXCLUSIVE HOLD ........................................................................................ 300-9 EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE ............................................................................. 300-10 EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY TRANSFER.. .................................................... 300-l 0 FLASH .......................................................................................................... 300-10 FLASH ON INTERCOM ............................................................................... 300-I 0 FLEXIBLE BUITON ASSIGNMENT ............................................................ 300-l 0 HEADSET MODE ......................................................................................... 300-l 1 INTERCOM CALLING .................................................................................. 300-l 1 INTERCOM TRANSFER .............................................................................. 300-12 LAST NUMBER REDIAL .............................................................................. 300-12 LEAST COST ROUTING .............................................................................. 300-12 LCR QUE CANCEL ...................................................................................... 300-12 MEET ME PAGE .......................................................................................... 300-12 MESSAGE WAITING ............. ...................................................................... 300-12 MUTE KEY ................................................................................................... 300-l 3 OFF-HOOK PREFERENCE ......................................................................... 300-l 3 PAGING ........................................................................................................ 300-13 PBX/CENTREX TRANSFER ........................................................................ 300-l 3 PERSONALIZED MESSAGES ..................................................................... 300-13 PERSONALIZED MESSAGE CODE ON A FLEX KEY ............................... 300-l 3 PRIME FLEX BU-ITON PROGRAMMING ................................................... 300-13 PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME INTO THE LCD DISPLAY ......................... .300-14 PULSE TO TONE SWITCHOVER ............................................................... 300-l 4 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL ............................................................................. 300-14 PROGRAMMING PBX/CENTREX CODES ONTO A FLEX BUTTON ......... 300-14 SPEAKERPHONE ........................................................................................ 300-14 STATION SPEED DIAL ................................................................................ 300-15 STORING SPEED NUMBERS ..................................................................... 300-15 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL ................................................................................. 300-15 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) ..................................................... 300-15 A. Number of Calls in Queue Display.. ............................................. 300-15 B. Available/Unavailable Mode ........................................................ 300-15 No-Answer Timer ......................................................................... C. 300-16 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (UNA) ......................................................... 300-16 VOICE MAIL OPERATION (VM) .................................................................. 300-16 A. VM Tone Mode Calling Option.. ................................................... 300-l 6 VOLUME CONTROLS ................................................................................. 300-16 300.19 300.20 300.21 300.22 300.23 300.24 300.25 300.26 300.27 300.28 300.29 300.30 300.31 300.32 300.33 300.34 300.35 300.36 300.37 300.38 300.39 300.40 300.41 300.42 300.43 300.44 300.45 300.46 300.47 300.48 300.49 300.50 300.51 300.52 300.53 300.54 300.55 300.56 300.57 300.58 300.59 SLT FEATURE SECTION 310 OPERATION ............................................................... 31 o-l INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ ACCOUNT CODE ......................................................................................... 310.1 310.2 Issue 1, November Digital Key Telephone 1991 31 o-1 310-l vii 310.3 310.4 310.5 310.6 310.7 310.8 310.9 310.10 310.11 310.12 310.13 310.14 310.15 310.16 310.17 310.18 310.19 310.20 310.21 310.22 310.23 310.24 310.25 310.26 310.27 310.28 310.29 310.30 310.31 310.32 310.33 SECTION 320 320.1 320.2 320.3 320.4 320.5 320.6 320.7 320.8 320.9 320.10 320.11 320.12 320.13 320.14 320.15 320.16 320.17 320.18 320.19 320.20 320.21 . .. VIII CALL BACK ................................................................................................... CALL FORWARDING .................................................................................... CALLING STATION TONE MODE OPTION ................................................. CAMP-ON ...................................................................................................... CALL PARK (System) .................................................................................... CALL TRANSFER .......................................................................................... CLEAR CALL FORWARD, DND, PERSONALIZED MESSAGES.. ............... CO LINE QUEUING ........................................................................................ CONFERENCE .............................................................................................. CONFERENCE WITH PERSONAL PARK .................................................... DIRECT OUTSIDE LINE ACCESS ................................................................ DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP ............................................................................ DO NOT DISTURB ......................................................................................... PBX/CENTREX TRANSFER (Flash Command to CO Line) ......................... GROUP CALL PICK-UP ................................................................................ PLACING CALLS ON EXCLUSIVE HOLD .................................................... INTERCOM CALLING .................................................................................... LCR QUEUING (Automatic) ........................................................................... LCR QUE CALL BACK .................................................................................. LCR CANCEL ................................................................................................ MESSAGE WAITING ..................................................................................... OFF-HOOK PREFERENCE ........................................................................... PERSONALIZED MESSAGES ...................................................................... PAGING ......................................................................................................... PERSONAL PARK (Flip-Flop) ........................................................................ PROGRAMMING YOUR NAME INTO THE LCD DISPLAY.. ........................ STATION SPEED DIAL .................................................................................. STORING STATION SPEED NUMBERS ...................................................... SYSTEM SPEED DIAL .................................................................................. UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (UNA) ........................................................... UCD AVAILABLE/UNAVAILABLE ................................................................. .310-l .310-l .310-l .31 O-l .310-2 .31 O-2 .31 O-3 31 o-3 -31 o-3 .310-3 .31 o-3 31 o-3 310-3 .31 O-3 .31 o-3 .31 o-4 .310-4 -31 o-4 .310-4 .310-4 .310-4 .31 o-4 .310-4 .310-4 31 o-5 .310-5 310-5 .31 o-5 .31 o-5 .31 o-5 .31 o-5 AlTENDANT -320-l FEATURE OPERATION ............................................ INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ .320-l A-ITENDANT KEY TELEPHONE STATION FEATURES ............................. ..320- 1 ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL ................................................................ .320-4 PLACING OUTSIDE LINE ON HOLD ............................................................ .320-4 ANSWERING A RECALLING OUTSIDE LINE .............................................. .320-4 ATTENDANT DISABLE OUTGOING ACCESS ............................................. .320-4 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE .............................................................................. .320-4 ATTENDANT RECALL ................................................................................... .320-4 EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE ............................................................................... .320-4 INTERCOM CALLING .................................................................................... .320-4 INCOMING CO LINES OFF-NET (via speed dial) ......................................... .320-5 NIGHT SERVICE ........................................................................................... .320-5 SElTlNG SYSTEM TIME AND DATE ........................................................... .320-5 STORING SYSTEM SPEED NUMBERS ....................................................... .320-5 ATTENDANT TRANSFER SEARCH ............................................................. .320-6 PLACING AN OUTSIDE CALL (Automatic Line Selection) ........................... .320-6 CALL PARK ................................................................................................... .320-6 DO NOT DISTURB INDICATION .............................................. ..‘.................... 320-6 RETRIEVING A PARKED CALL .................................................................... .320-6 CALL TRANSFER ........................................................................................... 320-6 CAMP-ON ................................................................................................... ..-. 320-6 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ Digital SPD 1428 & 2858 Systems FLEXIBLE BUT-l-ON PROGRAMMING .......................................................... MEET ME PAGE ............................................................................................ PAGING.. ........................................................................................................ A. External Paging ............................................................................. B. Internal Paging.. ............................................................................. C. All Call Paging (Internal/External). ................................................. RELEASE BUTTON ....................................................................................... LCD DISPLAYS.. ........................................................................................... 320.22 320.23 320.24 320.25 330.1 GENERAL SECTION 400 400.3 400.4 400.5 400.6 400.7 400.8 400.9 INSTALLATION SECTION 500 500.2 500.3 500.4 500.5 500.6 1991 400-l 400-2 400-2 400-4 400-6 400-7 400-8 400-8 400-8 400-l 1 400-l 2 400-l 3 400-13 400-13 400-13 400-l 3 400-14 400-l 4 400-l 6 400-17 400-18 400-18 400-18 400-19 ........................................................................................ 500-l SITE PLANNING ............................................................................................ A. System Grounding ......................................................................... B. Lightning Protection ....................................................................... SPD 1428 INSTALLATION PLANNING ......................................................... SPD 1428 COMMON EQUIPMENT.. ............................................................. A. Basic Key Service Unit with Power Supply (BKSU). ...................... B. Expansion KSU with Power Supply (EKSU). ................................. C. 2x4 CO/STA Expander Module ................................................... D. 4x8 CO/STA Expander Module ................................................... SPD 2856 INSTALLATION PLANNING ....................................................... SPD 2856 SYSTEM COMPONENTS.. ......................................................... A. Equipment Cabinet With Power Supply (KSU) ............................ B. Cabinet Installation ...................................................................... C. Central Processor Board (CPB) ................................................... D. 4 x 8 CO/Station Key Interface Board (CKB):. ............................. 4x8 CO/SLT Interface Board (CSB) (Future). .............................. E. APPLICATION MODULE(S) INSTALLATION:. ............................................ A. SPD 1428 Expansion I/O Module (IOM). ..................................... 500.1 320-6 320-6 320-7 320-7 320-7 320-7 320-7 330-I DESCRIPTION .................................................................... 400-l SYSTEM TECHNOLOGY.. ............................................................................. SPD 1428 COMMON EQUIPMENT.. ............................................................. A. Basic Key Service Unit with Power Supply (BKSU) ....................... B. SPD 1428 Expansion KSU with Power Supply (EKSU) ................ C. 2x4 CO/Station Expander Module ................................................. D. 4x8 CO/Station Expander Module ................................................. SPD 2856 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ............................................................. A. Equipment Cabinet With Power Supply (KSU) .............................. B. Central Processor Board (CPB) ..................................................... C. 4 x 8 CO/Station Key Interface Board (CKB). .............................. D. 4x8 CO/SLT Interface Board (CSB) (Future). .............................. APPLICATION MODULES ........................................................................... A. SPD 1428 Expansion I/O Module (IOM). ..................................... B. SPD 2856 Expansion I/O Module (IOM). ..................................... C. 1200 Baud Modem Module (MM) ................................................ D. DTMF Receiver Module (RM) ...................................................... SPD 1428 & SPD 2856 TERMINALS.. ......................................................... A. 34 Button Digital Terminal (Enhanced) ........................................ B. 34 Button Digital Display Terminal (Executive). ........................... C. Digital DSS/DLS Console ............................................................ SLT ADAPTER / OFF-PREMISE EXTENSION MODULE.. ......................... RELAY / SENSOR INTERFACE MODULE.. ................................................ POWER FAILURE TRANSFER UNIT (PFTU) ............................................. SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITY ............................................ 400.1 400.2 Issue 1, November Key Telephone 500-l 500-l 500-I 500-l 500-2 500-2 500-8 500-l 0 500-l 2 500-14 500-14 500-l 4 500-l 6 500-l 7 500-21 500-23 500-26 500-26 ix Digital Key Telephone 500.7 500.8 500.9 SECTION 600 , 600.1 600.2 600.3 600.4 600.5 600.6 600.7 SECTION 610 610.1 610.2 610.3 610.4 610.5 610.6 610.7 X Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 B. SPD 2856 Expansion I/O Module (IOM) ..................................... C. 1200 Baud Modem Module (MM). ................................................ D. Installing the DTMF Receiver Module (RM) ................................ SPD 1428 & SPD 2856 TERMINALS .......................................................... A. Digital Terminal Installation: ........................................................ Digital DSS/DLS Installation ......................................................... B. C. Wall Mounting the Telephone.. .................................................... D. Single Line Telephone Installation: (future). ................................ E. SLT Adapter / Off-Premise Extension Module ............................ POWER FAILURE TRANSFER ................................................................... A. Relay / Sensor Interface Module ................................................. Stat-plus Power Failure Transfer Unit (PFTU) .............................. B. INSTALLING RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT DEVICE (RAN). ................ CUSTOMER DATA BASE PROGRAMMING ..................................600-l INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ PROGRAM MODE ENTRY (Key Station). ..................................................... PROGRAM MODE ENTRY (Data Terminal or PC) ....................................... BEGINNING TO PROGRAM ......................................................................... INITIALIZATION ............................................................................................. CUSTOMER DATA WORKSHEETS ............................................................. DATA BASE FIELDS ..................................................................................... SYSTEM PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING .500-26 500-26 .500-30 .500-31 .500-31 500-31 .500-31 .500&l .500-34 .500-36 .500-36 500-36 .500-40 .600-l .600-l .600-8 .600-8 .600-8 -600-8 .600-8 .................................... 61 O-l SYSTEM TIMERS .......................................................................................... A. System Hold Recall Timer ............................................................. B. Exclusive Hold Recall Timer .......................................................... C. Attendant Recall Timer ................................................................... D. Transfer Recall Timer .................................................................... E. Preset Forward Timer .................................................................... F. Call Forward No/Answer Timer ..................................................... G. Pause Timer .................................................................................. H. Call Park Recall Timer ................................................................... I. Conference/DISA Timer ................................................................ Paging Timeout Timer.. ................................................................. J. K. CO Ring Detect Timer ................................................................... L. SLT DTMF Receiver Timer ........................................................... M. Message Wait Reminder Tone.. .................................................... SLT Hook Flash Timer .................................................................. N. 0. SLT Hook Flash Debounce Timer ................................................. SYSTEM FEATURES PROGRAMMING ..................................................... Attendant Override ...................................................................... A. Hold Preference .......................................................................... B. External Night Ring ..................................................................... C. Exec Override Warning Tone.. .................................................... D. Page Warning Tone .................. i.. ............................................... E. F. Music Channel ............................................................................. G. LCR Enable ................................................................................. H. Account Codes - Forced ............................................................. ATTENDANT STATION ASSIGNMENT ...................................................... SEl-fING SYSTEM TIME AND DATE ...................................... I................... PBX DIALING CODES ................................................................................. EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY PAIRS .............................................................. RELAY/SENSOR PROGRAMMING ............................................................ .61 O-l -61 O-2 .61 O-2 610-3 .61 O-3 610-4 .61 O-4 .610-5 .61 O-5 .610-6 .61 O-6 .610-7 .61 O-7 .610-8 .61 O-8 .61 O-9 .610-10 .610-l 1 .610-l 1 .610-12 .61 O-12 .610-13 61 O-13 .610-14 .61 O-14 .61 O-15 610-15 .610-16 .610-16 ;610-17 Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Systems A. 61 O-18 Programming relay for External Paging: ...................................... B. Programming relay for RAN Starting: .................................... h.. .. 61 O-18 C. Programming relay for Power Failure Transfer:. .......................... 61 O-18 D. Programming relay for Loud Bell Control:. ................................... 61 O-19 E. Programming relay for CO Line Control: ..................................... 61 O-19 F. Assign Relay/Sensor Interface Module to a station: .................... 61 O-20 G. Program sensing ciruit as a RAN Sensing (RAN END) circuit: .... 610-20 610-21 BAUD RATE ASSIGNMENTS.. .................................................................... 61 O-22 ACCESS CODES ......................................................................................... A. DISA Access Code ...................................................................... 61 O-22 B. 610-22 Set Data Base Admin. Password.. ............................................... 610-23 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR). ................................ A. SMDR Enable/Disable.. ............................................................... 61 O-23 B. Long Distance/Local Assignment ................................................ 61 O-23 C. Character Print Assignment.. ....................................................... 61 O-24 D. Baud Rate Display.. ..................................................................... 610-24 E. 61 O-24 SMDR Port Assignment.. ............................................................. WEEKLY NIGHT MODE SCHEDULE.. ........................................................ 610-25 A. Automatic/Manual Operation ....................................................... 61 O-25 B. programming .......................................................... 61 O-25 Day of Week HUNT GROUPS ........................................................................................... 61 O-26 A. 610-26 Hunt Group Programming.. .......................................................... B. Station/Pilot Hunting Assignment ................................................ 61 O-26 610.8 610.9 610.10 610.11 610.12 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES SECTION 620 PROGRAMMING ......................................620-l INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ A. DTMWDial Pulse Programming.. ................................................... B. CO/PBX Programming.. ................................................................. C. UNA Programming.. ....................................................................... D. DISA Trunk-to-Trunk (Per CO Line) .............................................. E. Privacy ........................................................................................... F. Loop Supervision Programming .................................................... DISA Programming.. ...................................................................... G. H. Flash Timer Programming ............................................................. I. Line Group Programming .............................................................. J. Class of Service (COS) Programming.. ......................................... K. CO Line Ringing Assignment.. ....................................................... DIAL PULSE PARAMETERS.. ....................................................................... 620.1 620.2 STATION AlTRIBUTES SECTION 630 PROGRAMMING 620-l 620-2 620-2 620-2 620-3 620-4 620-5 620-5 620-6 620-6 620-7 620-8 620-9 .....................................630-l INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 630-l A. Paging Access.. ............................................................................. 630-2 B. Do Not Disturb ............................................................................... 630-3 630-3 C. Conference Enable/Disable (Per Station). ..................................... Executive Override ........................................................................ 630-4 D. E. Privacy (Per Station). ..................................................................... 630-5 F. Speed Dialing Access.. .................................................................. 630-6 G. Line Queuing ................................................................................. 630-6 H. Preferred Line Answer.. ................................................................. 630-7 630-7 I. Off-Hook Voice Over (Future). ....................................................... Call Forwarding ............................................. . ................................ 630-8 J. Forced Least Cost Routing ............................................................ 630-8 K. 630-10 L. Station Identification .................................................................... I.. .......... 630-12 M. Station Class of Service (COS) ...................................... 630.1 Issue 1, November Digital Key Telephone 1991 xi N. 0. P. cl. R. S. T. U. v. SECTION 640 640.1 640.2 640.3 SECTION 645 645.1 645.2 645.3 SECTION 650 650.1 650.2 650.3 SECTION 655 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION 630-13 630-13 .630-l 4 .630-l 5 .630-16 .630-l 6 630-17 .630-l 8 .630-20 (UCD) ..................-................-......640-l UCD GROUP PROGRAMMING .................................................................... A. Alternate UCD Group Assignment ................................................ B. Overflow Station Assignment ........................................................ C. UCD Station Assignment(s) .......................................................... D. Recorded Announcement Assignment(s) ..................................... UCD TIMERS ................................................................................................. A. UCD Ring Timer ............................................................................ B. UCD Message Interval Timer.. ...................................................... C. UCD Overflow Timer ..................................................................... D. UCD Auto Wrap-Up Timer ............................................................ E. UCD No-Answer Timer ................................................................. UCD RAN ANNOUNCEMENT TABLES ........................................................ .640-l .640-l .640-2 .640-2 .640-2 .640-3 .640-3 .640-4 -640-4 .640-4 .640-5 .640-6 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (VM) ..............~............................*..............-.*... 645-1 VOICE MAIL PROGRAMMING ...................................................................... A. Alternate Voice Mail Group ........................................................... B. “Leave” Mail Index Entry ................................................................ C. “Retrieve” Mail Index Entry ............................................................ D. Station Assignment(s) ................................................................... VOICE MAIL OUTPULSING TABLE .............................................................. A. Voice Mail In-Band Signaling* ........................................................ B. Voice Mail Disconnect Table:. ....................................................... VOICE MAIL IN-BAND DIGITS ...................................................................... EXCEPTION TABLES PROGRAMMING .......................................... INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................... RELATED ITEMS TO TOLL RESTRICTION ................................................. A. CO/PBX Lines ............................................................................... B. Forced Account Codes .................................................................. C. SLT DTMF Receivers .................................................................... LCR VS. Toll Restriction ............................................................... D. TOLL RESTRICTION PROGRAMMING ........................................................ A. Entering Toll Table Programming.. ................................................ B. Allow Table Programming ............................................................. C. Deny Table Programming ............................................................. D. Special Table Programming.. ........................................................ E. Displaying Toll Table Entries.. ....................................................... LEAST COST ROUTING PROGRAMMING A. B. C. D. xii Speakerphone Programming ....................................................... Pick-Up Group(s) Programming.. ................................................. Paging Zone(s) Programming ..................................................... Preset Call Forward Programming.. ............................................ CO Line Group Access ............................................................... LCR Class of Service.. ................................................................ Off-Hook Preference Programming.. ............................................ Flexible Button Programming ...................................................... Display Flexible Buttons .............................................................. .645-l .645-2 645-2 .645-2 -645-3 .645-4 .645-4 .645-5 .645-6 650-l ..650- 1 .650-2 .650-2 .650-2 .650-2 .650-2 -650-4 .650-4 .650-5 .650-7 .650-8 .650-g .0...............~......~.~......... 655-l Introduction .............................................................. :. ................... -655-l LCR Operation .............................................................................. .655-l .655-3 LCR Programming ........................................................................ 3-Digit Area/Off ice Code Table ....................................................... 655-4 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. INITIALIZE SECTION 660 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. DATA BASE PARAMETERS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 655-5 -....... 655-6 655-7 655-8 655-9 655-l 0 655-l 1 655-l 2 ........................................ 660-l Introduction.. .................................................................................. Initialize System Parameters ......................................................... Initialize CO Line Attributes ........................................................... Initialize Station Attributes ............................................................. Initialize Group Parameters ........................................................... Initialize Toil Tables ....................................................................... Initialize System Speed ................................................................. Initialize LCR Tables.. .................................................................. Initialize Entire System and Reset (all parameters). .................... Initialize ICLID Table.. .................................................................. PRINTING SYSTEM DATA BASE PARAMETERS SECTION 665 660-i 660-2 660-4 660-5 660-7 660-8 660-9 660-I 0 660-l 1 660-l 2 ...................s..665-l Introduction.. .................................................................................. Printing System Parameters.. ........................................................ Printing CO Line Attributes ............................................................ Printing Station Attributes .............................................................. Printing Group Parameters.. .......................................................... Printing Toll Tables ...................................................................... ‘Printing System Speed Bins ........................................................ Printing LCR Tables.. ................................................................... Printing Entire System Data Base ............................................... 665-l 665-2 665-4 665-6 665-8 665-l 0 665-i 2 665-l 4 665-24 SYSTEM CHECKOUT ............................................................................ 700-l SECTION 700 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES.. ................................................................... POWER UP SEQUENCE.. ............................................................................. 700.1 700.2 700.3 MAINTENANCE SECTION 800 PRINTED REMOTE A. B. C. D. E. F. G. REMOTE A. B. C. D. E. F. 800.1 800.2 800.3 Issue 1, November 6-Digit Office Code Table .............................................................. Exception Code Table ............................................................ Route List Table.. ........................................................................... Insert/Delete Table ........................................................................ Daily Start Time Table ................................................................... Weekly Schedule Table.. ............................................................. LCR Routing for Toll Information ................................................. Default LCR Data Base ............................................................... Systems 1991 AND TROUBLESHOOTING 700-l 700-l 700-l ................................800-l CIRCUIT BOARD (PCB) TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS .......... 800-l MAINTENANCE.. ........................................................................... 800-4 800-4 General Overview .......................................................................... Overview of Maintenance Commands.. ......................................... 800-4 Maintenance Password ................................................................. 800-4 Exit Maintenance ........................................................................... 800-4 System Configuration .................................................................... 800-5 CO/Station Configuration ............................................................... 800-6 Event Trace Buffer.. ....................................................................... 800-7 SYSTEM MONITOR ...................................................................... 800-8 General Overview.. ........................................................................ 800-8 Monitor Password .......................................................................... 800-8 Help Menu (?) ............................................... .‘................................ 800-8 Dump Memory Data.. ..................................................................... 800-8 800-9 Event Trace Mode ......................................................................... . ........... 800-l 0 Modify Memory command ............................................... .-. XIII Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 G. H. Baud Rate Command ................................................................. Exit the Monitor mode .................................................................. APPENDIX A CUSTOMER APPENDIX B DIGITAL SYSTEMS APPENDIX C ICLID GENERAL c.1 c.2 c.3 c.4 C.5 C.6 c.7 C.8 xiv DATABASE PROGRAMMING ..800-10 800-l 0 .... .....s.........D.m.m..n.m.q..s..m. A-l PART NUMBERS .*..................m........................... B-l DESCRIPTION ................................-..........*...~.....~.~.~~ C-l C-l introduction ........................................................................................................ System Configuration ......................................................................................... C-l C-l Functional Performance ..................................................................................... C-2 C.3.1 Calling Number/Name Display.. ........................................................ C-2 C.3.2 Incoming Number/Name SMDR.. ...................................................... C-2 C.3.3 Unanswered Call Management.. ....................................................... C.3.4 Local Name Translation .................................................................... c-3 C-3 C.3.5 ICLID Display Phone Operation ........................................................ c-4 Implementation Plan .......................................................................................... C.4.1 ICLID KTU Display Phone.. ............................................................... C-4 C.4.2 Table Structures ................................................................................ c-5 C.4.3 Logic Operation ................................................................................. C-6 C-6 C.4.4 ICLID Input Device Data Format.. ..................................................... Potential Additional Features for Later Implementation ..................................... C-7 Direction of Specific Numbers to Special Handling (Favored Customer Treatment).C-7 C-7 Features Implemented External to the KSU Software ....................................... C-8 ICLID Programming ........................................................................................... C.8.1 Local Name Translation .................................................................... C-8 C-l 0 C.8.2 ICLID Features ................................................................................ Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems LIST OF FIGURES SECTION 100 INTRODUCTION SECTION 200 KEY STATION Figure 200-l Default Button Mapping .. ... ... . .... .. ... .. .. ... ... . ... .. ... . ... .. ... ... .. ... . ... .. .. . .... . ... .. 100-l FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS .............................. 200-l ......................................................................................... SECTION 210 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE SECTION 220 All-ENDANT SECTION 300 STATION FEATURE FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPERATION DESCRlPTlON...........210- SLT FEATURE SECTION 320 ATTENDANT Figure 320-l 34 Button Attendant GENERAL SECTION 400 Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 400-l 400-2 400-3 400-4 400-5 400-6 400-7 400-8 400-9 ............................................ ..................................................... FEATURE OPERATION ...................................... 310-l 320-l DESCRIPTION 400-l INSTALLATION 1991 300-2 320-2 ......................................................... .......................................................................... 500-i SPD 1428 Mounting Arrangements.. ........................................................................ 500-2 SPD 1428 Mounting Dimensions.. ............................................................................ 500-3 SPD 1428 RS-232C Connections ............................................................................ 500-4 Expansion KSU & Main Key Service Bd (EKSU) ..................................................... 500-5 SPD 2856 Basic Cabinet with Power Supply ......................................................... 500-6 SPD 2856 Mounting Dimensions ............................................................................ 500-7 Central Processor Board (CPB) ............................................................................. 500-8 SPD 2856 CPB RS-232C Connections.. ................................................................ 500-9 SPD 2856 Shielded Cable Terminations ................................................................ 500-l 0 CO/STA Interface Board (CKB) ............................................................................ 500-l 1 CO/SLT Interface Board (CSB) ............................................................................ 500-12 SPD 1428 Basic KSU Plug-in Card Locations.. .................................................... 500-l 3 SPD 1428 Expansion I/O Module Pin-outs.. ......................................................... 500-l 4 SPD 2856 Expansion I/O Module Pin-outs.. ......................................................... 500-l 5 Station Modular Block Wiring.. .............................................................................. 500-16 Wall Mounting the Starplus Digital Terminal.. ....................................................... 500-l 7 Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Module.. ................................................................ 500-l 8 Relay / Sensor Interface Module .......................................................................... 500-i 9 Power Failure Transfer Wiring Options.. ............................... .I .............................. 500-20 CO and SLT RAN Connections.. .......................................................................... Issue 1, November 300-l Digital Terminal.. ...................................................................... Starplus Basic KSU & Main Key Service Board ....................................................... Starplus Expansion KSU (EKSU) ............................................................................ 2x4 Expander Module.. ............................................................................................. 4x8 Expander Module.. ............................................................................................. Starplus SPD 2856 Equipment Cabinet (KSU). ........................................................ Central Processing Board (CPB) ............................................................................ 4x8 CO/Station Interface Board (CKB) ................................................................... 4x8 CO/SLT Interface Board (CSB) ....................................................................... Digital 34 Button Terminal ...................................................................................... SECTION 500 Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure OPERATION 1 . .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... . ... .. ... . 220-l Figure 300-l 34 Button Digital Display Terminal.. .......................................................................... SECTION 310 200-l 1 400-3 400-5 400-6 400-7 400-9 400-l 0 400-l 1 400-l 2 400-l 5 500-l 500-3 500-4 500-6 500-9 500-15 500-l 6 500-l 8 500-I 9 500-20 500-22 500-24 500-27 500-28 500-29 500-32 500-33 500-35 500-37 500-39 500-41 xv Digital Key Telephone Systems SECTION 600 STARPLUS@ CUSTOMER DATA BASE PROGRAMMING SPD 1428 & 2856 ...m.......m.m*D....m.m.m..m 606-l Figure 600-l Data Terminal Program Codes Cross Reference .................................................... Figure 600-2 Starplus SPD Programming Button Mapping ........................................................... SECTION 610 SYSTEM PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING .600-2 .600-3 ............................. 610-l Figure 61 O-1 Hook Switch Activity ................................................................................................. Figure 61 O-2 Example of System Parameters Pgmng Form.. ..................................................... 4 SECTION 620 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES SECTION 630 STATION SECTION 640 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION SECTION 645 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (VM) . .. ...~.......................................~...... 645-l SECTION 650 EXCEPTION SECTION 655 LEAST COST ROUTING PROGRAMMING Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 655-l 655-2 655-3 655-4 655-5 Ex: Ex: Ex: Ex: Ex: AlTRIBUTES TABLES ................................ PROGRAMMING 620-l .. ... .... .. .. . .... ...m......... 630-l (UCD) D...........m*n.....m*..e..,.a.... 646-l PROGRAMMING .. ... .. ... .. ..rn...B........‘......650-l .............................. 655-l 3-Digit Area/Office Code Table Pgm Form ........................................................ 6-Digit Office Code Table Pgm Form ................................................................. Exception Code Table Pgm Form ...................................................................... Insert/Delete Pgm Form ..................................................................................... LCR Toll Information Routing Pgm Form.. ....................................................... INITIALIZE SECTION 660 PROGRAMMING .610-g .61 O-l 0 DATA BASE PARAMETERS .655-4 .655-5 .655-6 .655-8 .655-l 1 ................................. 660-l .660-6 Figure 660-l Default Button Mapping ............................................................................................ SECTION 665 Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 665-i 665-2 665-3 665-4 665-5 665-6 665-7 PRINTING SYSTEM DATA BASE PARAMETERS DB DB DB DB DB DB DB Printout Printout Printout Printout Printout Printout Printout of of of of of of of .................. 665-l System Parameters .......................................................................... CO Line Attributes ............................................................................ Station Attributes .............................................................................. Group Parameters ............................................................................ Exception Tables ............................................................................ System Speed Numbers ................................................................. LCR Default ..................................................................................... SECTION 700 SYSTEM CHECKOUT ................................................................ SECTION 800 MAINTENANCE Figure Figure Figure Figure 800-l 800-2 800-3 800-4 AND TROUBLESHOOTING A CUSTOMER DATABASE APPENDIX B DIGITAL SYSTEMS APPENDIX C ICLID GENERAL Figure C-l ICLID System Configuration xvi PROGRAMMING PART NUMBERS DESCRIPTION 700-l ........................... 800-l Remote Maintenance Help Menu ............................................................................. System Configuration w/LCR ................................................................................... CO/Station Configuration .......................................................................................... Event Trace as it appears on Display .................................................................... APPENDIX .665-3 .665-5 .665-7 .665-g .665-l 1 .665-l 3 665-l 5 .800-4 .800-5 800-6 .800-l 0 ................................ A-l .. ... ... .. .. ... .. ... ..mm......e......m.. B-l ................................................. ............................................................................................ Issue 1, November C-l c-i 1991 LIST OF TABLES SECTION 100 SECTION 200 INTRODUCTION KEY STATION Table 200-l Alphabetical SECTION 210 DESCRIPTIONS SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE ..,........................... 200-l FEATURE FEATURE Alphabetical STATION DESCRIPTION OPERATION ............................................ Table 300-l Star-plus Digital Terminal Numbering Plan.. ............................................................... Table 300-2 Flex Button Programming Codes.. ........................................................................... SECTION 310 SLT FEATURE OPERATION A-ITENDANT FEATURE OPERATION ...................................... Table 320-l Starplus Digital Attendant Numbering Plan.. .............................................................. Table 330-l Liquid Crystal Displays (LCD). ................................................................................... SECTION 400 Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table DESCRIPTION ......................................................... 400-l . SPD 1428 and SPD 2856 System Capacities.. ..................................................... 400-2 . Electrical Specifications.. ....................................................................................... 400-3 . Environmental Specifications.. ............................................................................... 400-4 - Loop Limits ............................................................................................................ 400-5 Dialing Specifications .............................................................................................. 400-6 . FCC Registration Numbers for SPD 1428.. ........................................................... 400-7 . FCC Registration Numbers for SPD 2856.. ........................................................... 400-8 . Dimensions and Weight ......................................................................................... 400-9 . Miscellaneous Specifications.. ............................................................................... 400-l 0 . Digital Terminal Audible Signals .......................................................................... 400-l 1 . Single Line Telephone Audible Signals ............................................................... 400-12 . OPX Telephone Audible Signals ......................................................................... 400-l 3 . DSS/BLF Button Visual Indicators.. ..................................................................... 400-14 . CO Line Button Visual Indicators.. ....................................................................... 400-l 5 . Function Button Visual Indicators ........................................................................ SECTION 500 Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table GENERAL 500-l 500-2 500-3 500-4 500-5 500-6 500-7 500-8 SECTION 600 INSTALLATION .......................................................................... SPD 1428 Basic KSU Jl 1 Station Connections ....................................................... SPD 1428 EKSU Jl 1 Station Connections.. ........................................................... SPD 1428 4x8 Expander Module Connection ........................................................ 4x8 CO/Station Interface Board (CKB) .................................................................... 4x8 CO/SLT Interface Board (CSB). ........................................................................ PFTU Conn A Connecting Block ............................................................................. PFTU Conn A Connecting Block .............................................. . .............................. SMDR Printout ......................................................................................................... CUSTOMER DATA BASE PROGRAMMING Table 600-l Default Values ........................................................................................... lssuel,November1991 21 O-2 220-2 300-l 300-3 300-10 .. ... ... .. ... .. ... . ... ... . .. .. . ... .. ... . ..~~.........310-l Table 310-l Starplus Digital SLT Numbering Plan ........................................................................ SECTION 320 I .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. 220-l Feature Index.. .................................................................. FEATURE 200-2 DESCRlPTlON...........21o- Feature Index.. ............................................................................... ATTENDANT Table 220-l Attendant(s) SECTION 300 FEATURE Feature Index ........................................................................................ Table 21 O-l SLT Alphabetical SECTION 220 . ... .. ... .. .. .... .. ... .. .. ... .... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. ... . ... ...~..100-l 31 O-2 320-l 320-3 330-l 400-l 400-20 400-22 400-22 400-23 400-23 400-23 400-23 400-24 400-24 400-25 400-25 400-26 400-27 400-27 400-27 500-l 500-7 500-l 1 500-l 1 500-25 500-25 500-38 500-38 500-42 ............................ 600-l ..~...............600- 4 xvii Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 SECTION 610 SYSTEM PARAMETERS SECTION 620 CO LINE AlTRIBUTES PROGRAMMING ..m.....m..........*...mmmm.. 610-l PROGRAMMING ................................ 628-l Table 620-l Class of Service (COS) ............................................................................................. SECTION 630 STATION ATTRIBUTES PROGRAMMING .620-7 ............................... Table 630-l Class of Service (COS) ........................................................................................... Table 630-2 Flexible Button Display Designations ...................................................................... , 638-l .630-12 .630-20 SECTION 640 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION SECTION 645 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (VM) ..................................................... 645-l SECTION 650 EXCEPTION 650-l TABLES (UCD) .................................. PROGRAMMING 640-l .................................. Table 650-l Class of Service (COS) .............................................................................................. Table 650-2 Allow/Deny Toll Table ................................................................................................ SECTION 655 LEAST COST ROUTING PROGRAMMING 650-l .650-2 .............................. Table 655-l LCR Class of Service Table ...................................................................................... Table 655-2 Daily Start Time & Weekly Schedule Tables ............................................................. Table 655-3 Ex: Daily & Weekly Start Time Tables ..................................................................... .655-7 .655-g .655-10 SECTION 660 INITIALIZE SECTION 665 PRINTING SYSTEM DATA BASE PARAMETERS SECTION 700 SYSTEM CHECKOUT ....~............~.....................~.............~.....~.... 700-l SECTION 800 MAINTENANCE Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table Table APPENDIX . .. ................................. AND TROUBLESHOOTING A CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING 660-l ..m....s.......... 665-1 ........................... 800-l SPD 1428 Basic KSU ............................................................................................... 800-2 SPD 1428 EPROM Memory Size .............................................................................. 800-3 SPD 1428 Static RAM Memory Size ......................................................................... 800-4 SPD 2856 Central Processing Board (CPB) ............................................................. 800-5 SPD 2856 CPB Static RAM Memory Size ................................................................ 800-6 SPD 2856 CPB EPROM Memory Size ..................................................................... 800-7 4x8 CO/Station Interface Board (CKB). ..................................................................... 800-8 4x8 CO/SLT Interface Board (CSB) .......................................................................... 800-9 DTMF Receiver Module (RM) ................................................................................... 800-10 I/O Module (IOM) ..................................................................................................... 800-l 1 Single Line Telephone Adapter (OPX) .................................................................... Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix XVIII DATA BASE PARAMETERS 655-l .800-l .800-l .800-l .800-2 .800-2 .800-2 .800-3 .800-3 .800-3 .800-3 .800-3 ................................ A-l System Parameters ..................................................................................................... A-2 UCD and Hunt Group Parameters ............................................................................... A-3 Voice Mail Group Parameters ...................................................................................... A-4 CO tine Programming (Flash 40) ................................................................................ A-5 CO Line Ringing Assignment Chart ............................................................................ A-6 Station Programming (Flash 50) .................................................................................. A-7 Button Assignment Chart (Flash 50) ............................................................................ A-8 System Speed Dial Numbers ..................................................................................... A-9 Exception Tables (Flash 70) ...................................................................................... A-l 0 Least Cost Routing (Flash 75) ................................................................................. A-l 1 Route List Table ................................................................................................. 800-l A-l A-l A-3 A-4 A-5 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-12 A-14 .;. ... A-15 Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix APPENDIX A-12 A-13 A-14 A-i 5 B Insert/Delete Tables ................................................................................................ 3-Digit Area/Office Code Route List Table .............................................................. 6-Digit Office Code Table ........................................................................................ LCR Exception Code Table.. ................................................................................... DIGITAL SYSTEMS Appendix B-l Digital System Component APPENDIX C Issue 1, November ICLID GENERAL 1991 PART NUMBERS ........................................ A-l 9 A-21 A-22 A-23 B-l List ................................................................................... B-1 DESCRIPTION .................................................. C-l xix Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ ISSUE CONTROL xx SPD 1428 & 2856 SHEET issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems SECTION 100 INTRODUCTION 100.1 PURPOSE This manual provides the information necessary to program, install, operate and maintain the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System. 100.2 REGULATORY INFORMATION (USA) The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules which allow the direct connection of the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System to the telephone network. Certain actions must be undertaken or understood before the connection of customer provided equipment is completed. A. Telephone Company Notification Before connecting the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System to the telephone network, the local serving telephone company must be given advance notice of intention to use customer provided equipment and provided with the following information: l l The telephone the system. The Ringer Equivalence cated on the KSU: 1.9 Number For systems configured as a key system: (button appearances) DLPHKG-65152-KF-E For systems configured as a Hybrid system: (dial access codes) DLPHKG-65153-MF-E SPD 2856 FCC Reaistration l l Numbers: For systems configured as a key system: (button appearances) DLPHKG-65102-KF-E For systems configured as a Hybrid system: (dial access codes) DLPHKG-65101 -MF-E Issue 1, November C. Changes in Service The local telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities or procedures. If these changes should affect the use of the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System or compatibility with the network, the telephone company must give written notice to the user to allow uninterrupted service. D. Maintenance Limitations Maintenance on the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System is to be performed only by the manufacturer or its authorized agent. The user may not make any changes and/or repairs except as specifically noted in this manual. If unauthorized alterations or repairs are made, any remaining warranty may be voided. E. Notice of Compliance The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System complies with rules regarding radiation and radio frequency emissions by Class A computing devices. In accordance with FCC Standard 15 (Subpart J), the following information must be supplied to the end user: also lo- The Universal System Ordering Code (USOC) jack required for direct interconnection with the telephone network: RJ21X . . . SPD 1428 FCC Realstratlon l Incidence of Harm If the telephone company determines that the customer provided equipment is faulty and possibly causing harm or interruption to the telephone network, it should be disconnected until repairs can be made. If this is not done, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service. numbers to be connected to l l B. 1991 ‘This equipment generates and uses RF energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction Manual, may cause interference to Radio Communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device, pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference, when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case 100-l Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.” F. Hearing Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas. Aid Compatibility All Starplus Digital (SPD) Terminals are Hearing Aid Compatible, as defined in Section 68.316 of Part 68 FCC Rules and Regulations. G. OPX Circuit The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System may be equipped with Single Line Adapters (OPX) modules which provide a 48 volt FCC registered 2500- type single line off-premise extension interface port. l l Each OPX port when used to support an off-premise extension requires an OL13C network circuit. l Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. An FCC registered interface such as a RJ21X is also required to connect to the public network. REGULATORY DIAN) 100.3 Department Certification INFORMATION (CANA- B. Load Number: 100 CA1 1AICA21 A Canadian Standards Association File Number: LR57228-27 A. (CSA) 100-2 C. of Load Number Maintenance Limitations Maintenance on the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System is to be performed only by the manufacturer or its authorized agent. The user may not make any changes and/or repairs except as specifically noted in this manual. If unauthorized alterations or repairs are made, any remaining warranty may be voided. Notice The Canadian Department of Communications’ label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational and safety requirements. This Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above condition may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Explanation The Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the load numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100. of Communications (DOC) Number: 526 2933 A Standard Connector: SPD 1428 & 2856 D. Notice of Compliance The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System complies with Class A or Class B limits of the Canadian Radio Interference Regulations. In accordance with FCC Standard 15 (Subpart J), the following information must be supplied to the end user: (CAUTION/ “This equipment generates and uses RF energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction Manual, may cause interference to Radio Communications. It has been tested and found to Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems comply with the limits for a Class A or Class B computing device, pursuant to Subpart J or Part 15 of the FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference, when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user, at his own expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.” E. OPX Circuit The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System may be equipped with Single Line Adapters (OPX) modules which provide a 48 volt FCC registered 2500- type single line off-premise extension interface port. l A DOC registered interface such as a CA21A is also required to connect to the public network. 100.4 UUCSA SAFETY COMPLIANCE The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System has met all safety requirements and was found be in compliance with the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1459 Second Edition and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) CS-03 Standard. The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System is authorized to bear the UL and CSA marks. Issue 1, November 1991 100-3 SECTION 200 KEY STATION FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS The System and Key Station features of the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System are listed and described below in alphabetical order. An abbreviated feature index is provided in Table 200-l. 200.1 ACCOUNT CODES An account code is the last field within Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), that provides the ability to track specific calls by entering a non-verified, variable length (up to 12 digits) identifier. The use of forced Account Codes is optional, offered on a system wide basis. 200.2 ATTENDANT RECALL When a line has been left on hold for a, programmable period of time, the station placing that line on hold will be recalled. If that station fails to answer the recall, the call will be recalled to the attendant(s) for handling. There can be three attendants per system.Transferred, Parked and Camp-on recalls will also recall the Attendant. 200.3 AUTOMATIC LINE ACCESS Each station, key or SLT, may have their phone programmed to access a particular CO Line such as a private line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications when station users have dedicated or individual lines. Outside line dial tone is received just by going off-hook, without the need to dial an access code. AUTOMATIC NIGHT SERVICE 200.4 The system may optionally be programmed to go into and out-of night service automatically. This method does not require the attendant to activate or deactivate night service on a daily basis. The automatic night service is enabled and disabled on a programmable daily schedule including Saturday and Sunday schedules. A time can be set to enable Night Service and to Disable Night Service on a per day basis. 200.5 AUTOMATIC PAUSE INSERTION WITH SPEED DIAL If a flash command is placed into system speed dial numbers, station speed dial numbers, save number redial or last number redial, a pause will automatically be inserted after the flash. A pause will also be automatically inserted after a PBX dialing code has been used. Issue 1, November 1991 AUTOMATIC PRIVACY 200.6 Privacy is automatically provided on station is conversing, another station on that line. The Automatic Privacy disabled, allowing another station to ing CO line conversations. _ all calls. If one cannot intrude feature can be join in on exist- AUTOMATIC SELECTION 200.7 The user can select an outside line, intercom station, speed dial button, or dial a feature and automatically place the phone in the dialing mode without pressing the ON/OFF button or lifting the handset. 200.8 BACKGROUND MUSIC Each Digital Terminal user may receive music over their speaker when an optional music source is connected to the system. This feature can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis by programming. BATTERY BACK-UP (MEMORY) 200.9 A NICAD battery is located on the Central Processing Board (CPB) to protect system memory in case of commercial power outage or the system power being turned off for a period of time. Battery Back-up Memory retains all system features including both system and station speed dial during a power outage. 200.10 BUSY LAMP FIELD (BLF) When a button on a Digital Terminal is assigned as a DSS, it also serves as a Busy Lamp Field to display the status of that telephone. 200.11 CALL ANNOUNCE - PRIVACY Each telephone user can set their intercom signaling switch to receive intercom call announcements without having the calling party hear any conversations in progress. 200.12 CALL BACK A station can initiate a call back request to another busy station. As soon as that station becomes idle, the station that left the call back request is signaled. 200.13 A. CALL FORWARD: Call Forward STATION - All Calls This feature allows a station the ability to have all their calls (internal or external) forwarded immediately to a designated station, a UCD 200-l Table 200-l Alphabetical FEATURE AVAILABLE Account Code Attendant Recall Automatic Line Access Automatic Night Service Automatic Pause Insertion w/Speed Dial Automatic Privacy Automatic Selection Background Music Battery Backup (Memory) Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Call Announce Privacy Call Back Call Forward: Station Call Forward - All Calls Call Forward - Busy Call Forward - No Answer Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Forward to Pilot (UCD, VM, Hunt) Station Off-Net Forward (via speed dial) Call Forward: Preset Call Forward Preset to Stations Call Forward Preset to Hunt Groups Call Forward Preset to Off-Net (via speed dial) Call Forward Preset to UCD Groups Call Forward Preset to Voice Mail Groups Call Forward: CO Lines Incoming CO Lines Off-Net (via speed dial) Calling Station Tone Mode Option Call Park Call Pick-up: Group Pick-up Directed Call Pick-up Call Transfer Camp-On Camp-On Recall Canned Toll Restriction Centrex Compatability CentrexIPBX Transfer Chaining Speed Bins CO Line Access CO Line Class of Service S = Standard Feature; O=Optional: 200-2 Feature Index Requires additiona S S S S S S S S S S S S INTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED N N N N N N N N N N N N Printer N N N N N N Music Source N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Voice Mail System S S S N N N N N N S S S S S S S S S S S N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N lardware; N: I required Issue 1, November 1991 Table 200-l Alphabetical FEATURE CO tine Control (contact) CO tine Groups CO Line Loop Supervision CO Line Queue CO tine Incoming Ring Assignment: Assigned Per CO Line CO Ring Detect Conference: Add-on Conference Multi-Line Conference Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Conferencing Conference Enable/Disable Data Base Printout (dump) Day/Night Class of Service (COS) Default Button Mapping Dial Pulse Sending Dialing Privileges Direct CO Line Ringing: To Stations To UCD Groups To Hunt Groups To Off-Net (via speed dial) To Voice Mail Groups Direct Station Selection Directed Call Pick-up Direct Inward Station Access (DISA): Programmable Access CO Line Group Access Station Access Do Not Disturb (DND) One-Time Do Not Disturb DTMF Sending Emergency Transfer End to End Signalling Exclusive Hold Executive Override Executive/Secretary Transfer External Night Ringing ‘lash Rash on Intercom Rash with Speed Dial j = Standard Feature; O=Optional: Issue 1, November 1991 Requires additiona Feature Index (Cont’d) AVAILABLE INTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED S S S S N N N N N N N N S S N N N N N N N N Printer N N N N S S S S S S S 0 S S S S S S 0 S S S S S S S S lardware; N N N N N N N N DTMF Rcvr N N N N N N OPx/PFTU N N N N N N N N ’ N N N N Voice Mail System N N N N N N N N N 48V Supply or 12V N N N N Paging Equip N N N . requrrea . 200-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems Table 200-l Alphabetical FEATURE , 200-4 Feature Index (Cont’d) 4VAI LABLE Flexible Attendant(s) Flexible Button Assignment Forced Account Codes Group Call Pick-up Headset Compatability Headset Mode Hearing Aid Compatible Hold Preference Hold Recall Hot Line/Ring Down Hunt Groups: (8 x 8) Pilot Hunting Station Hunting Hunt Group Chaining Intercom Calling Intercom Signaling Select Last Number Redial (LNR) LCD Interactive Display Least Cost Routing (LCR): LCR 3 Digit Tables LCR 6 Digit Tables Route List Tables Insert/Delete Tables Weekly Time Tables Daily Start Time Tables Exception Tables Default LCR Database LCR Routing for Toll Information Loop Button CO Line Access Loud Bell Control (LBC) Meet Me Page Message Waiting Message Waiting Reminder Tone Music On Hold Mute Key Name in LCD Display Night Service: Manual Operation Automatic Operation Weekly Night Mode Schedule Night Class of Service (COS) S = Standard Feature; O=Optional: SPD 1428 & 2856 %ARPLUS@ S S S S S S S S S S Requires additiona INTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED N N N N N N N N N N 34 Button N N Headset Headset N N N 34 Button N N N N N N N N N N N N N 34 Button Display S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N Gen & Bells N N N Music Source N 34 Button Display S S S S N N N N N N N N lardware; N: N I required Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Table 200-l Alphabetical Systems Feature Index (Cont’d) T FEATURE Universal Night Answer (UNA) Night Ringing Assignment External Night Ringing Off-Hook Preference Auto Line Access Auto Feature Access Hot tine/Ring down Intercom Access User Programmable Preference Off-Hook Signalling Off-Premise Extensions (OPX) On Hook Dialing On-Line Programming Page/Relay Control SPD 1428 system SPD 2856 system Paging External Paging Internal Paging Paging Access Restriction Pause Timer PBX Dialing Codes Personalized Messages Personalized Message Code on a Flex Key Pool Button Operation Preferred Line Answer Privacy Release: Per Station Option Per CO Line Option Private tine Pulse-To-Tone Switchover Range Programming Remote Administration (Database) Remote System Monitor and Maintenance Save Number Redial (SNR) Single Line Telephone (SLT) Compatability Station Message Detailed Recording (SMDR) Speakerphone Station Class of Service Station Speed Dial S = Standard Feature; O=Optional: Issue 1, November 1991 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED S S S S S S S S S S 0 S S N N N N N N N N N N SIA (OPX) N N N N Paging Equip N N Keyset Keyset Keyset Keyset N 48V Supply N N 0 S N N AVAILABLE Requires additiona 3elay/Sensor N Module Paging Equip N N N N N N N N S S S S S S S S 0 S S S S N N N N N N N N SLT/OPWRG N N N N I N N N N N PC Term & Modem PC Term & Modem N 2500 Type SLT Printer N N N lardware; N: lo additional hardware required 200-5 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ Table 200-l Alphabetical FEATURE S = Standard Feature; O=Optional: 206-6 Feature Index (Cont’d) INTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED S S S S N N N N Expansion KSU N N N S N N S S S 0 S S S S S N N N N N N N N N OPx148V PS OPIU48V PS N N N S 4VAI LABLE System Capacity: up to 14x28 Configuration up to 28x56 Configuration System Hold System Speed Dial Toll Restriction (Table Driven) Transfer Recall Uniform Call Distribution (UCD): (8 x 8) Alternate UCD Group Assignments Overflow Station Assignment Incoming CO Direct Ringing Recorded Announcements (RAN) Number of Calls in Queue Display UCD Auto Wrap-up with Timer UCD No-Answer Return to Queue Timer UCD Available/Unavailable Mode Universal Night Answer (UNA) Voice Mail Groups: VM (8 x 8) In Band Signaling Integration Voice Mail Message Waiting Indication Voice Mail CO Disconnect Signal Pass thru Voice Mail Tone Mode Calling Option Volume Control Requires additions SPD 1428 & 2856 0 S S S S lardware; N N N N RAN Device N N N N N Voice Mail System N N N N N . requrrea Issue 1, November . 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 group pilot number, Voice Mail group number, or Hunt group. (See Note) B. Call Forward - Busy This feature allows a station the ability to have their calls fonnrarded to a designated station, a UCD group pilot number, Voice Mail group number, or Hunt group when their station is busy. (See Note) C. Call Forward - No Answer This feature allows a station the ability to have their calls forwarded to a designated station, a UCD group pilot number, Voice Mail group number or Hunt group number when there is no answer at the station. No answer calls forward when the system-wide “no answer timer” expires. (See Note) D. Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Allows a stations the ability to forward a combination busy/no answer calls to a designated station, a UCD group pilot number, Voice Mail group number, or Hunt group. No answer calls forward when the system-wide “no answer timer” expires. Initial CO ringing, transferred CO ringing and intercom ringing calls can all be forwarded. Calls that ring to an idle station will be call forwarded after expiration of the No Answer ring timer.(See Note) Call Forward - Off-Net Stations will be allowed to forward intercom and transferred CO line calls to an off-net location. This allows a station to reroute calls that would normally be lost. Calls can be forwarded to home or another off-net site. Initially ringing CO calls cannot be forwarded with this feature (see Incoming CO lines Off-Net Forward feature). NOTE: Initial Ringing Incoming: calls will forward to groups, (ie: UCD, Voice Mail, Hunt) if the station forwarded is the only station assigned to ring on the CO line. Digital Key Telephone Preset Call Forward is chainable only to other predetermined preset forward stations specified in the database up to a chain of 5 stations. Chainable Preset Call Forwarding will force the incoming CO Line to ring at each station preassigned in the database for the Preset Forward Ring Timer specified in the database before forwarding. Each station in the system may, independently, have incoming CO calls preset forwarded to the following destinations: A. Preset Call Forward - Stations Each Digital Terminal user may have preset in the database Initial Ringing Incoming to be directed to another station in the system, if the call goes unanswered for a predetermined amount of time. B. Preset Call Forward - Hunt Groups CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into a Hunt Group from any station. A CO line will not preset forward to a busy Hunt group, however each time the preset forward timer expires (for a total of five attempts) the group will be checked for an idle station. If a member of the group is idle the call will then be presented to that member. C. Preset Call Forward - UCD Groups CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into a UCD Group from any station. A CO line will not preset forward to a busy UCD group, however each time the preset forward timer expires (for a total of five attempts) the group will be checked for an idle station. If a member of the group is idle the call will then be presented to that member. E. 200.14 CALL FORWARD: PRESET This feature allows the system data base to be configured so that incoming CO Lines, which are programmed to ring at a particular station, can be forwarded elsewhere in the system predetermined by programming. This feature is active if the station ringing is not answered in a specified time. This is particularly useful in “overflow” applications where a Voice Mail or Auto Attendant may be in use. A station may have one designated preset forward location defined in the data base. Issue 1, November 1991 Systems D. Preset Call Forward - VM Groups CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring into a Voice Mail Group from any station. A CO line will not preset forward to a busy Voice Mail group, however each time the preset forward timer expires (for a total of five attempts) the group will be checked for an idle Voice Mail port. If a VM port is idle the call will then be presented to Voice Mail. NOTE: Calls will forward only if they ring nowhere else. E. Preset Call Forward - Off-Net CO Lines can be preset forwarded to ring OffNet via speed dial,from any station. After the expiration of the preset forward timer, the system will select an idle CO line and dial the off-net location, then connect the two CO lines. 200-7 Digital Key Telephone Systems 200.15 CALLING STATION TONE MODE OPTION This feature will provide an easy means for a Calling station to override a desired stations H (handsfree) or P (call announce) intercom switch setting. A dial code has been added that is dialed in front of the extension number to force the tone ringing. 200.16 CALL PARK An outside line can be placed into one of eight (8) parking locations and can be retrieved by any station that has a direct line appearance or an available loop button. Parked calls have their own recall timer and will recall the originating station and if still unanswered, the attendant(s). 200.17 CALL PICK-UP: A. Group Pick-up Stations can be placed in one or more of four pick-up groups. Stations within a group can pick up tone ringing intercom calls, transferred, incoming, or recalling outside line calls for another station in that group. B. Directed Call Pick-up A station can pick up an intercom call, transferred, incoming, or recalling outside line call to a specific unattended station. The call must be a tone ringing call. 200.18 CALL TRANSFER An outside CO line can be transferred from one By using the TRANS button, keyset to another. screened (announced) or unscreened transfers can be made. The line being transferred rings on the keyset and provides Exclusive Hold flashing indication to the receiving party’s keyset. Any number of attempts can be made to locate someone by calling different keysets without losing the call. If a line is transferred to a busy station, it will receive muted ringing. 200.19 CAMP-ON A station may alert a busy party that an outside line is on hold and waiting for them by using the CAMPON button. To camp on a call, press the TRANS button to transfer the call to the desired busy station, then press the CAMP ON button. The busy party will receive a muted ring over the keyset speaker, and a visual flashing CAMP ON LED. By pressing the CAMP ON button, the person called places his existing outside call on hold and is connected to the person placing the Camp On. He can then pick up the call on the appropriate line. Calls cannot be camped on when a station is in DND or in Conference. 206-8 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 200.20 CAMP-ON RECALL When a station does not answer a Camp On, that call will recall the person placing the Camp On, and if unanswered by them, will recall the attendant(s). 200.21 CANNED TOLL RESTRICTION The system provides an easy means of applying the most common form of toll restriction where 1-e and 0+ along with 976, 555, and 411 type of calls are restricted with all local calls and l-800, 911, l-91 1, and l-61 1 type of calls are allowed. This canned toll restriction is applied through the use of a single pre-built Class-of-Service and can be assigned to stations using range programming. 200.22 CENTREX COMPATIBILITY The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System provides features that are Centrex compatible so that Centrex users can utilize the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System to enhance their Centrex capabilities. The system actually simplifies and provides easier access to many Centrex features by offering the following features: A. Flex Button Programming Flexible button programming allows Centrex users to program complex Centrex dial codes onto a key set button for easy one touch access to Centrex features. B. Off-hook Preference Both Digital Terminals and Single line telephones may be programmed to have their personal Centrex line accessed automatically just by lifting the handset or pressing the ON/ OFF button. Internal features to the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System are still made available to Digital Terminals by accessing intercom before going off-hook. C. Private Line appearance The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System allows for private line assignment on an unlimited bases. Each station may have sole access to a particular outside line if desired and may also be assigned to receive incoming ringing on that line. D. Programmable Flash Timer CO line flash is a momentary opening on a CO line used for signaling. When using the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System in a Centrex environment the CO line flash is to signal the intention to transfer a caller using Centrex transfer. The CO line flash timer is programmable on a per CO line bases to facili- Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone tate a mixture of Centrex and CO lines within the same system. E. Programming Speed Dial l , #, and Hook-Flashes into Many Centrex codes utilize a hook-flash followed by in many cases the digit [*I and or [#I. The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System allows these codes to be programmed as a part of system or station speed dial sequences. 200.23 CENTREWPBX TRANSFER When Centrex or PBX lines are connected to the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System, users may, by using the Flash button, transfer callers to other Centrex or PBX extensions. Additionally, the Flash command may be included within a Speed Bin and programmed onto a flex button for one button transfer. 200.24 CHAINING SPEED BINS Speed dial bins may be chained together by simply pressing one speed bin, then another and another as required. This is helpful for accessing Long Distant carriers or banking services when Account Codes may be required. 200.25 CO LINE ACCESS Through programming, telephones are allowed or denied access to particular outside lines or line groups. 200.26 CO LINE CLASS OF SERVICE Each CO Line may be programmed with a Class-ofService to provide dialing privileges. The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System uses an array between CO Line Class-of-Service and Station Class-Of-Service to offer a wide variety of dialing privilege possibilities. 200.27 CO LINE CONTROL (CONTACT) There are seven control contacts which may be individually programmed as either CO Line Control (to control ancillary equipment) or Loud Bell Control to control a customer provided ringing device to external areas. When programmed as CO Line Control and assigned to a CO line, the corresponding contact will close whenever that CO line is accessed by a station. (One contact for each 4x8 port card) 200.28 CO LINE GROUPS Outside lines can be placed in one of eight groups if the customer’s business requires such grouping. Stations are then individually assigned access to these lines and given the ability to dial on particular lines. Issue 1, November 1991 200.29 Systems CO LINE LOOP SUPERVISION The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System can be programmed to monitor CO lines while onhold or connected to RAN devices or Voice Mail systems or in Trunk-to-Trunk connections for disconnect signal provided by the Telco. After a disconnect signal is detected, the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System will release the CO lines and automatically place them back in service. 200.30 CO LINE QUEUE When all the outside lines in a group are busy, stations can be placed in queue awaiting a line in the same group to become available. If a station doesn’t answer the queue signal within 15 seconds, that station is dropped from the queue. 200.31 CO LINE INCOMING SIGNMENT RINGING AS- Each CO line may be programmed (in data base admin) so that incoming ringing on the specified CO line(s) may be assigned initial ringing to one of the following destinations: l one or more stations (Keyset or SLT) l To a UCD, Voice Mail or Hunt Group l Off-Net (via Speed Dial) The ring-in will follow Day Ring assignments unless Night Service mode is active, in which case all incoming CO calls will follow Night Ring assignments. When ringing is assigned to a keyset, a direct line appearance or an idle Loop button must be available to receive the call. Station call forwarding of initial ringing CO call is possible and can be directed to other keysets with an available Loop button or direct appearance. If the initially ringing CO call cannot ring at the destination assigned, it will ring at the first Attendant station. NOTE: You cannot Station Call Forward an initially ringing CO call to UCD, Voice Mail, or Hunt groups if the line is assigned to ring at more than one station. 200.32 CO RING DETECT The duration of the ringing signal from the CO or the PBX is matched with ringing detection circuitry in the KSU. The ring detect can range from 200 to 900 msec, programmed in 100 msec increments. This timer helps prevent false ringing. 200.33 CONFERENCE There are three different types of conferencing: 200-g A. B. Add On Conference 200.39 Up to five internal parties can engage in a conference, or four internal parties with a limit of one external party. The system provides a flexible means of providing toll or dialing restriction. Through the assignment of class of service (both station and outside line) many combinations of allow and deny numbers can be set. Both area and office codes can be screened for allow/deny privileges. Multi-Line Conference One internal station can engage ence with two outside parties. C. Unsupervised in a confer- The conference initiator can exit a conference with two outside parties and leave them in an unsupervised conference. The initiator can reenter the conference at any time. The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System can automatically terminate the call when both parties hang up, when Loop Supervision is provided by the telco and enabled in the data base. A programmable conference timer will disconnect the unsupervised conference if the initiator does not re-enter. 200.34 CONFERENCE DATA BASE PRINTOUT 200.36 DAY/NIGHT WS) DEFAULT BUlTON MAPPING The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System allows for 28 flexible buttons on each Enhanced or Executive Digital Terminals to be flexibly assigned to CO/PBX lines, DSS buttons, Speed Dial or Feature buttons. However the system will power up with a default button mapping as shown in Figure 200-l. 200.36 DIAL PULSE SENDING Each CO interface circuit for outside lines can be programmed to send dial pulse or DTMF signals. Dialing speed and break/make ratios are programmable. 200-l 0 DIRECT INWARD (DISA) SYSTEM ACCESS Programmable Access A 3-digit security code can be assigned in the system database to restrict unwanted use of the DISA circuits. Each DISA line can be programmed independently for 24 hour DISA use or night DISA use only. B. CO Line Group Access Incoming DISA callers may access all line groups such as FX or WATS lines or other outgoing services from home or while away from the office. C. Station Access DISA callers may dial any station directly without going thru the attendant. If a DISA caller attempts to call a station that is busy or does not answer the system will return ICM dial tone at the end of a programmable timer (Preset Forward Timer). This will allow the DISA caller to try another station without having to dial into the system again. CLASS OF SERVICE This feature allows stations that are a certain COS during the day, to be assigned a different COS when the system is put in the night mode. The night COS goes into affect when the system is placed into the night mode, manually or automatically. This prevents the misuse of phones after hours. 200.37 A. (DUMP) Through a system programming command, either portions of or a complete data base dump can be printed using the RS232C connector located on the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System Central Processing Board (CPB). PRIVILEGES Allows as many as three simultaneous outside line calls to be programmed to provide direct access to the system and the use of features such as WATS lines, intercom dial tone or the ability to dial out on outgoing trunks without going through the attendant. The duration of a Trunk to Trunk DISA call can be set by the system administrator. ENABLE/DISABLE This feature will allow the system to be administered on a per station basis for the ability of a station to initiate a conference. 200.35 200.40 Conference DIALING D. Trunk-to-Trunk: The DISA Trunk-to-Trunk (or Conference) mark on the CO line governs a DISA callers ability to access other outside lines. CO lines must have DISA Trunk-to-Trunk enabled to allow a DISA caller to establish an outgoing trunk-to-trunk connection. This allows for specific CO line access restriction on DISA calls. 200.41 DIRECT STATION SELECTION The user Terminal pressing station is with DSS buttons assigned at their Digital can call an intercom station by simply the appropriate DSS button. The called automatically signaled. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital HTP -7 Figure 200-l Default issue 1, November 1991 SPKRVOL 7 Button Key Telephone RN3 Systems VOL Mapping 200-l 1 Digital Key Telephone 200.42 A. DIRECTED Systems STARPLUS@ CALL PICKUP Call Pick-up - Station A station can pick up an intercom call, transferred, incoming, or recalling outside line call to a specific unattended station. The call must be a tone ringing call. B. Call Pick-up - UCD Groups Stations outside of a UCD group can pick up an intercom call, transferred, incoming, or recalling outside line call ringing to a specific UCD station. The call must be a tone ringing call. 200.48 DISABLE CESS OUTGOING CO LINE AC- This feature allows the first Attendant station to dial a code and disable a CO line from outgoing CO calls. This applies to all station(s) that have access to that line. Incoming status is not affected. This feature is a part of the “Maintenance” package. 200.44 DO NOT DISTURB (DND) Placing a keyset in DND will eliminate incoming outside line ringing, intercom calls, transfers and paging announcements. A ringing station may go into DND to silence ringing. The attendant can override a station in DND. The station in DND can use the telephone to make normal outgoing calls. A station can be denied this feature through programming. A. One-Time Do Not Disturb Allows a station user to turn off muted ringing that occurs while off hook (handset or ON/OFF) on another call. Useful when having an important conversation and do not wish to be disturbed by ringing. The station, while off hook, (ON/OFF or handset) depresses the DND button which eliminates muted ringing. When the station goes on-hook the DND button is extinguished and DND is canceled. 200.45 DTMF SENDING Each CO interface circuit for outside lines can be individually programmed to send DTMF (tone) or dial pulse signals. 200.46 EMERGENCY TRANSFER Each OPX box will provide power transfer to specified customer provided SLT’s. 200.47 END TO END SIGNALLING This feature indicates the capability of the system to accept DTMF tones from stations, send them through the public network and have them received at the distant end for computer access, or a variety 200-l 2 SPD 1428 & 2866 of control functions or inward call completion distant switching system. 200.48 EXCLUSIVE at a HOLD When a line is placed on Exclusive Hold, no other station in the system can retrieve this call. Hold may be programmed to be activated on the first or second depression of the Hold button. CO Lines while in a transfer hold are always placed in an Exclusive Hold condition. 200.49 EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE This feature allows certain stations to be designated as executive stations with the ability to override and “Barge in” on other keysets engaged in conversation on a CO line. Stations engaged in intercom conversations can be overridden, however, the intercom call will be dropped when the override occurs. In addition to the station programmable option a system programmable option will enable or disable a warning tone when the station marked as an executive is cut into the conversation. This is useful for UCD agent supervisor or training personnel who require a service observing option. NOTE: A decrease in volume may occur on the CO line after the barge-in occurs and each user will receive a conference display message on their keysets. I CAUTION: USE OF THIS FEATURE WHEN THE EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE WARNING TONE IS DISABLED MAY BE INTERPRETED AS A VIOLATION OF FEDERAL OR STATE LAWS, AND AN INVASION OF PRIVACY. CONSULT COUNSEL WITH RESPECT TO APPLICABLE LAW BEFORE INTRUDING ON CALLS USING THIS FEATURE. 200.50 EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY TRANSFER There are four sets of Executive/ Secretary pairings available. When the Executive station is busy or in DND, the Secretary station will receive intercom calls and transfers. The Secretary station can signal the Executive in DND by using the Camp On feature. 200.51 EXTERNAL NIGHT RINGING The system can be programmed so that CO lines marked for UNA will provide ringing out the external page ports when the system is placed into Night mode. 200.52 FLASH Provides telephone users with the ability to terminate an outside call or transfer a call behind a PBX or Centrex and restore dial tone without hanging up the handset. A FLASH button is located on each Digital Terminal. Issue 1, November 1991 200.53 FLASH ON INTERCOM This feature enables key station users to utilize the Flash Key to terminate pages and intercom calls. While connected to a page zone or another internal station pressing the Flash key will terminate the call and return intercom dial tone. 200.54 FLASH WITH SPEED DIAL A flash can be programmed within a speed dial number. When this is done, a pause will automatically be inserted before the remaining speed dial digits are sent. 200.55 FLEXIBLE AlTENDANT Any three Digital Terminals in the system can be assigned as attendant stations. These stations will receive recalls and can place the system into Night Service. The attendant stations must be either Enhanced or Executive stations. 200.56 FLEXIBLE BUlTON ASSIGNMENT Each Digital Terminal has 28 flexible buttons which can be individually programmed. One of the following seven operations can be selected for each button: Also refer to Sec. 200.22. Outside line. Automatically accesses assigned line. (Assigned in database) DSS/BLF. Automatically signal assigned station and provides BLF for off-hook and DND. (User programmable) Feature. Any feature with a dialing code (ie: Personalized Messages, Paging, Account Code, Call Park, Music, etc.) can be assigned to a flexible button. (User programmable) Group Access. (ie: UCD, Hunt, Voice Mail group pilot numbers) (User programmable) Speed dial. Automatically dials a Speed number. (System, Station, Saved Number Redial, Last Number Redial) (User programmable) Pooled group access. Some or all outside lines can be grouped; pressing this button accesses the highest numbered unused CO line in that group. (Assigned in database) Loop. Used to answer a transferred call on a line for which a user does not have a button assigned. (Assigned in database) 200.57 FORCED ACCOUNT CODES The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System allows the system to be arranged so that station users must enter an account code before placing an outside call. Account codes can also be used as a Traveling Class-of-Service to upgrade a restricted stations class-of-service for unrestricted dialing. AcIssue 1, November 1991 count codes must be entered before the call when forced. 200.58 FORCED LEAST COST ROUTING (LCW The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System may be programmed on a per station basis to force the use of LCR for outgoing accessed. This allows the system administrator to maintain greater control over dialing patterns and the lines used for placing outgoing CO calls. 200.59 GROUP CALL PICK-UP Stations can be placed in one or more of four pick-up groups. Stations within a group can pick up tone ringing intercom calls, recalling outside line ringing, or transferred outside line calls for another station in that group. 200.60 HEADSET COMPATIBILITY The electronic Digital Terminals are designed to allow the connection of an industry standard, electret mic compatible, modular headset. The user connects the modular headset to the handset jack on the telephone leaving the handset in place. The ON/OFF button on the Digital Terminal is then used to activate the headset. 200.61 HEADSET MODE Each Electronic Digital Terminal can be individually programmed for headset operation. When programmed, an industry standard Headset with it’s adapter box may be connected to a Digital Terminal for headset use. This allows handset or headset operation by switching the selector switch on the adapter box. Speakerphone operation and call announce on intercom are disabled while a station has enabled headset mode. Once programmed in station programming the user may then select between headset mode or normal handseffspeakerphone mode by simply dialing a code or pressing a user programmable flex button. 200.62 HEARING AID COMPATIBLE All Electronic Digital Terminals and Single Line Telephones are hearing aid compatible in compliance with the FCC Part 15, section 68.316. This allows the telephone to be used in conjunction with users wearing hearing aids. 200.63 HOLD PREFERENCE This allows either Exclusive or System hold as the primary hold on the first depression of the HOLD button, depending on programming. 200-l 3 Digital 200.64 Key Telephone Systems HOLD RECALL When an outside call has been on Hold for a programmable length of time, recall ringing tone is sent to the station placing the call on Hold. If this station does not answer the recall, a recall tone is sent to the attendant(s). 200.65 HOT LINE/RING DOWN Electronic Digital Terminals may be programmed to immediately call or ring down a particular station or outside number upon going off hook. This is performed by programming the stations Off-Hook preference to activate a DSS or Speed dial feature key. 200.66 HUNT GROUPS The system can be arranged for up to eight (8) Hunt groups. Each Hunt group can contain up to eight stations each. Each Hunt group is independently arranged to utilize either a pilot hunting technique or station hunting technique. A. Pilot Hunting Incoming CO, transferred CO, and intercom calls can be directed toa pilot extension number of a Hunt group. The system will search sequentially (in the order the extensions were entered in the data base programming) for an idle station in the group and will ring that station. Calls directed directly to stations (by calling the extension number) within the hunt group will not hunt but receive call progress tones of the extension dialed. B. C. Station Hunting SPD 1428 & 2856 sTARPLUS@ forwarding bin. 200.68 is accomplished INTERCOM via use of a speed dial CALLING The System’s architecture allows non-blocking of intercom calls. A station is reached on intercom by dialing the associated three-digit number. 200.69 INTERCOM SIGNALING SELECT Users can control the method by which they receive intercom calls and signals. A convenient intercom signal switch is located on each Digital Terminal for easy selection. The choices are: Handsfree (H)(left position). The station user, upon hearing a tone burst and voice announcement over the speaker, can reply handsf ree. Tone Ringing (T)(center position). A standard tone ring notifies the party of an incoming intercom call. The called party answers by lifting the handset or moving the switch to the handsfree (H) position or pressing the ON/OFF button. Privacy (P)(right position). The station user receives a burst of tone and a voice announcement over his/her speaker. The microphone is deactivated for privacy. The called party must lift the handset or press the MUTE button to answer the call. 200.70 LAST NUMBER REDIAL (LNR) Permits the automatic redialing of the last telephone number dialed on an outside line. Up to 32 digits can be stored. Outside line selection of the same line used is automatic. Incoming CO, transferred CO, and intercom calls that are presented to a busy, or DND station, that is a member of a Station Hunt group, will search sequentially (in the order the extensions were entered in data base programming) for an idle station in the group and will ring that station. Calls can also be directed to the groups pilot number for hunting. The 34 button Executive Digital Terminal provides the user with visual indication of call status, Calls to and from other extensions, number dialed, line used and camp-on are some of the features displayed. Hunt Group Chaining 200.72 Hunt Groups can be chained or joined together forming larger Hunt Groups. This is accomplished by assigning a pilot hunt group number as the last member of a group. Allows the system to automatically select the least costly route available according to the number dialed, the time of day/day of week, the class of service (COS) assigned to the station/trunk group priority level assigned. 200.67 INCOMING CO LINES OFF-NET FORWARD (VIA SPEED DIAL) Allows the first attendant to forward incoming CO calls to an off-net location. The attendant can forward a group of CO lines or all CO lines to a off-net location. The attendant must have a direct appearance of the CO line(s) to be forwarded. Off-net 200-l 4 200.71 A. LCD INTERACTIVE DISPLAY LEAST COST ROUTING (LCR) LCR SDigit Table This table is divided into 2 sections: “Leading 1’ (“1” is dialed before the number) and “Non Leading 1” (no “1” is dialed before the number). This gives the system the ability to handle call routing in areas that require a “1” before a long Issue 1, November 1991 %ARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 distance number as well as in areas that do not require the “1”. B. LCR 6-Digit Table (Office Codes) The 6-Digit Table can include 20 office code maps. Each map can be programmed to route up to 800 off ice codes to one of the 16 possible route lists. Each map must be associated with a specific area code in the 3-Digit Table. Several different off ice code maps can be used with the same area code to provide additional routing flexibility. C. Route List Tables Up to 16 different routes can be programmed. Each route can contain up to 4 route lists - one for each of the 4 time periods. Up to 7 CO line groups (routing choices) and their corresponding Insert/Delete Tables may be programmed within each route list. D. Insert/Delete Tables There are 20 Insert/Delete Tables. Up to 20 digits, including pauses, can be inserted and up to 16 digits deleted. Digits can be inserted before or after the number dialed, but can be deleted only from the beginning of a number dialed. E. Weekly Time Tables The least costly route for a particular dialed number may be different at different times of the day and on different days of the week. To accommodate this situation, there are 2 Timeof-Day tables - Daily Start Time Table and Weekly Schedule Table. The Weekly Time table determines which one of the 4 Routes LCR should use based on the Time-of-Day and Day-of-the-Week. F. Daily Start Time Tables The Daily Start Time tables allow the user to match the Time Periods discount structure to the carriers rate schedule. G. Exception Tables This table is used to route operator assisted calls and any other calls which would use a lor 2-digit number rather than a 3-digit area code. H. Default LCR Database In an effort to decrease installation and set up time usually associated with LCR a default LCR data base has been incorporated. The default LCR data base will provide basic routing for all local and long distance dialing. Issue 1, November 1991 Digital Key Telephone I. Systems LCR Routing for Toll Information This feature adds provisions to the LCR call processing which will allow common call routing for all toll information calls. l-(XxX)555-1212, (XxX)555-1212, l-5551212 and 555-l 212 calls will all be intercepted and sent to a selected route in the Route List Table. Numbers dialed will be integrated and if it is determined to be a toll information call, either preceded with an area code or without or with a leading digit 1 or not, the call will be sent to the route designated in programming. LOOP BUTTON CO LINE ACCESS 200.73 A station not having a direct appearance for a CO line will receive incoming CO calls and transferred CO calls under the loop button. Only one call at a time can be connected to a keyset on the loop button. If more than one loop button is on a key set, the loop buttons may be conferenced together. If all programmed Loop buttons on a keyset are busy or have a CO call on hold, the party attempting to transfer a CO line to that station will receive busy tone and cannot transfer the call to that station. If a transfer is attempted, the CO line will recall the initiator immediately. CO lines are also presented to a Loop when dialing out using LCR or when using speed dial to dial out and the line chosen does not appear on the key station. MEET ME PAGE 200.74 Users may answer a page call from any phone in the system by dialing a special code. The parly who initiated the page must remain off-hook. 200.75 MESSAGE WAITING Stations that are busy, unattended, or in DND can be left a message indication by other stations in the system. Up to five messages can be left at one keyset. Updn return to the station, the user can press the flashing MSG WAIT button to ring each party in sequential order. 200.76 MESSAGE WAITING REMINDER TONE A key station with a message waiting can be reminded at a timed interval with a tone. 200.77 MUSIC ON HOLD A music source, when connected to the system, provides music to all lines on Hold, parked calls, transferred calls and calls waiting to be answered by Uniform Call Distribution, (UCD). 200.78 MUTE KEY Pressing the MUTE button while in the speakerphone mode or using the handset-will disable the 200-l 5 Digital Key Telephone Systems microphone but not affect the speech coming over the speaker or handset. Pressing the illuminated MUTE button again will reactivate the microphone. 200.79 NAME IN LCD DISPLAY This feature allows every extension (Key or SLT) the capability to program the users name, for that station, so that people using display telephones will see the name instead of the station number on their display. The name is programmed at each station by the user and may be up to seven (7) letters in length. 200.80 4 A. B. Manual Operation The Attendant(s) can control the use of Night Mode manually by pressing the NIGHT (DND) button. An LED will indicate when the system is in Night Mode operation. Automatic Night Mode Operation The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System can be programmed so that the system is automatically placed into night mode. A programmable weekly time schedule allows the system administrator to preset the time the system is placed into night mode and removed from night mode on a daily basis including weekend operation. The Attendant(s) can override the Automatic Night mode schedule simply by pressing the NIGHT (DND) button. Weekly Night Mode Schedule A programmable weekly night mode schedule provides for 24 hour, 7 day a week automatic night mode operation. The system can be put into and out of night mode automatically on a daily basis. D. Night Class of Service (COS) The system allows each station to be assigned a different COS for night operation. The night COS goes into effect when the system is put into night mode manually or via the automatic schedule. Prevents the misuse of phones after hours. Universal Night Answer (UNA) Incoming CO lines can be programmed for Universal Night Answer (UNA). Stations which do not have access to a line during the day can answer that line while the System is in the Night Mode by dialing a UNA code. 200-l 8 SPD 1428 & 2858 F. Night Ringing Assignments Each CO line may be individually programmed for Night ringing to other stations, to Hunt groups, UCD groups, Voice Mail groups, or off-net via speed dial. When the system is placed into night mode, manually or automatically, ringing will follow the night ringing assignments for each CO line. G. External Night Ringing The system can be programmed so that CO lines marked for UNA will ring on the external page speakers. NIGHT SERVICE C. E. STARPLUS@ 200.81 OFF-HOOK PREFERENCE A. Auto Line Access Each station, key or SLT, may have their phone programmed to access a particular CO Line such as a private line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications when station users have dedicated lines. Outside line dial tone is received just by going off-hook, without the need to dial an access code. B. Auto Feature Access In addition to auto line access Digital Terminals have the ability to have their off-hook preference select a DSS or feature button upon going off-hook or pressing the ON/OFF button. C. Hot Line/Ring Down Electronic Digital Terminals may be programmed to immediately call or ring down a particular station or outside number upon going off hook. This is performed by programming the stations Off-Hook preference to activate a DSS or Speed dial feature key. D. Intercom Access When off-hook preference is enabled, at a key station, that station may still obtain intercom dial tone for accessing internal stations or other system features. This is done either by pressing an intercom button or dialing their own intercom station number prior to going off-hook. E. User Programmable Preference Based on a station programmable option Digital Terminals may be given the ability to enable, disable or change their off-hook preference by dialing a code. This option can be denied in station programming on a per key station basis. Issue 1, November 1991 SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ 200.82 OFF-HOOK Digital SIGNALLING B. If a station has been programmed to receive direct outside line ringing and is busy on another call, that station will receive muted ring to indicate another call is ringing in. Additionally CO calls may be “campedon” to a busy station and receive muted ringing. 200.83 OFF-PREMISE EXTENSIONS (OPX) C. ON HOOK DIALING The Digital Terminal user can place calls without lifting the handset. If the speakerphone is disabled, the handset must be lifted to converse. 200.85 ON LINE PROGRAMMING Changes to the system data base can be made without interrupting normal system operation. Programming may be performed using a key station terminal connected to the system (Sta 100) or via a external terminal either on-site or remotely. 200.86 PAGE/RELAY CONTROL The SPD 1428 and SPD 2856 systems offer relays that may be individually programmed for: External Page, Loud Bell Control, CO Line Control, Power Failure Transfer, and Recorded Announcement uses. Up to four Relay/Sensor interface modules may be installed on either system. Each relay/sensor interface module contains three (3) independent relays and three (3) sensing input circuits. In addition, each 4x8 CO/Station Interface card of the SPD 2856 system contains a Relay Contact (for up to seven (7) “on-board” relays) that may also be assigned to any of the functions mentioned above. 200.87 A. PAGING External Paging There are four (4) external paging zones available in the SPD 1428 and seven (7) available in the SPD 2856 systems. External Paging requires a three-digit dialing code. External paging requires an externally provided amplifier and paging system. One (1) make and one (1) break contact are provided with the page zone on the 4x8 CO/Station board. Since no “onboard” relay contacts are available on the SPD 1428 for external paging, the Relay/Sensor Interface module is used for this purpose. Issue’ 1, November 1991 Systems Paging There are four internal paging zones available in the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone Systems. A station can be in any or all zones or in no zone at all. Stations not assigned to a page group can still make page announcements, if allowed in station programming. Stations can be assigned to a page group in order to receive pages but not allowed to make page announcements. Since no “on-board” relay contacts are available on the SPD 1428 for internal paging, the Relay/Sensor Interface module is used for this purpose. The Off-Premises Extension Box (OPX) provides 1 FCC registered 2500~type single line interface ports. This enables the use of 1 off-premise 2500 telephone sets. A precise tone plan is provided to OPX stations. A 48 volt power supply is required when installing an OPX Box. 200.84 Internal Key Telephone Paging Access Restriction Programming on a per-station basis, can deny any station the ability to make any type of page. 200.88 PAUSE TIMER When dialing a speed number, a timed pause between digit sending can be placed in the number. The length of this pause can be programmed in the system database. 200.89 PBX DIALING CODES The System will allow five one or two-digit access codes to be entered into memory. When one of these codes is dialed, this signals the KSU that toll restriction is to be applied at the next dialed digits after the code. If one of these codes is not dialed, toll restriction does not apply. This allows the dialing of PBX extensions 100,110,111, etc. This functions on lines marked as PBX type lines in programming. 200.90 PERSONALIZED MESSAGES Each station (Key and SLT) can select a pre-assigned message to be displayed on the LCD of the Digital Terminal calling that station. There are ten possible messages which can be displayed: - VACATION RETURN MORNING RETURN AFTERNOON RETURN TOMORROW - RETURN NEXT WEEK BUSINESS TRIP MEETING HOME - ON BREAK LUNCH A. Personalized Message Code on a Flex Key This feature allows’s key station user to program the pre-selected message code [633] under a Flex key. This speeds access of the preselected messages. 200-l 7 Digital 200.91 Key Telephone Systems POOL BUTTON OPERATION The Pool Group Key is used primarily to access CO lines that do not appear on a station so that outgoing calls may be made. Pooled group keys are associated to CO line groups and may be programmed for use on any of the flexible line buttons. CO lines are accessed in descending order of priority starting with the highest numbered available (not busy) CO line in a CO line group. Stations may have as many POOL buttons as their are CO line groups (7). Multiple POOL buttons for the same group are also allowed. 200.92 PREFERRED LINE ANSWER A station with Preferred Line Answer can answer any assigned outside, transferred, or recalling line, or queue callbacks by lifting the handset or pressing the ON/OFF button. 200.93 PRIVACY RELEASE Privacy is insured on all communications in the system. If desired, the customer may elect to disable the Automatic Privacy feature. Thus allowing another station to join in on existing CO Line conversations. A. Per Station Option Each station may be programmed to give the station the capability to join an existing conversation simply by pressing the CO line button that is in use. A warning tone is presented to all parties when the station enters the conversation. The CO line must also have privacy disabled to allow the cut-thru. B. Per CO Line Option This feature allows each CO line to be individually programmed for privacy. This feature is useful for maintaining security on such lines as Data lines, Private lines, or special circuits requiring privacy. If privacy is disabled on a CO line then, while in use, another station may enter the conversation simply by pressing the CO line button. A warning tone is presented to all parties prior to actual cut-thru. The station attempting to enter the conversation must also have privacy disabled. 200.94 PRIVATE LINE Private line programming allows certain lines to ring at a specific station only. When placed on Hold, these lines are active at the programmed station only. A private line can be transferred to other stations. 200-l 8 SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ 200.95 PULSE-TO-TONE SWITCHOVER When commanded, the system will change thesignaling on an outside line from dial pulse to DTMF (tone), allowing the use of common carriers behind a dial pulse outside line. This can be done manually when dialing, or can be stored within a speed dial number. 200.96 RANGE PROGRAMMING The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System allows for range programming when programming Co lines and Stations. Range programming allows you to program all parameters alike for the entire range or you can change or modify a few items that will be copied to all members in the range. 200.97 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION The Remote Administration feature allows authorized personnel to access the administration programming via a terminal device (portable terminal device or personal computer with communications software package). The feature permits the review and entry of the customer database in the same manner as via the telephone at “admin” extension 100. The terminal device can be connected directly to the RS232 connector on the CPB board, or can be accessed by a telephone modem linking the CPB’s RS232 connector (via a CO line) to a remote location. 200.98 A. REMOTE SYSTEM MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE Remote System Monitor The Remote Monitor feature provides remote access to the installed system for diagnostic purposes. These capabilities benefit Service personnel enabling them to support the end user remotely. Different levels of access, via password, allows authorized personnel to trace, monitor and “up-load” critical information directly from the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System. This provides a more accurate means of acquiring system information that leads to a quick resolution of problems that may occur. This is all done without interfering with ongoing call processing or normal system operation, and in many cases may be performed without a site visit. Capabilities allowed and reserved for this “High level troubleshooting” in addition are: l Monitor Mode l Enable & Disable Event “Trace” l Dump “Trace Buffer” (up-load) Issue 1, November 1991 B. Remote System Maintenance The Remote Maintenance feature allows the interconnects’ technical staff to review the systems configuration data and individual card slot configuration data. This can be done “on site” using a data terminal or remotely using modem to modem access to a remote data terminal. 200.99 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL (SNR) Any number dialed on an outside line can be saved permanently to be used at any time. This number is saved until a new number is stored. and night assignment. Station Class of Service works in conjunction with CO line Classof Service to provide the most flexible means for offering custom toll restriction. As a part of the Dialing privilege assignment through Class of Service the system offers two programmable Allow and Deny tables for additional customization of a toll restriction plan for a particular customer. In addition, each station can reference up to 4 special area code tables. 200.104 STATION SPEED DIAL The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System supports industry standard 2500 Type (DTMF) single line instruments. A maximum of 55 single line telephones may be installed and operate on the SPD 2856 Digital Terminal System. OPX Boxes are required. Each station user can program up to 20 frequently dialed numbers of up to 24 digits in length. Pauses, flash commands, pulse-to-tone switchover, and NODISPLAY characters take up digit spaces. There are a total of 1120 speed locations to be divided among all telephones. Numbers are dialed by use of the SPEED button and a two-digit code. This feature can additionally be assigned to any of the 28 buttons in the flexible button field on each keyset for one-button activation. 200.101 200.105 200.100 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE COMPATIBILITY (SLT) STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System provides one industry standard RS-232C port for dual purpose use and a second port is optional for SMDR output, each allowing connection to an external printer or call accounting device. The system provides details on both incoming and outgoing calls. This feature is programmable to allow all calls or just outgoing long distance calls to be recorded. The system tracks calls by outside line, number dialed, time of day, date, station that placed the call and duration of call. Account codes may also be entered and recorded. 200.102 SPEAKERPHONE Both Enhanced and Executive Digital Terminals are equipped with a speakerphone. However, the speakerphone can be programmed to work in one of three ways: . Normal speakerphone operation. . Disabled for outgoing and incoming CO calls but handsfree on intercom allowed. . Headset operation allowed. 200.103 STATION CLASS OF SERVICE Each station is assigned a Class of Service which governs that stations dialing privileges. Day Class of Service and Night Class of Service assignments to stations provide the system administrator additional control over station dialing, preventing misuse of phones after hours. Six uniquely defined Classes of Service are available for assignment to stations on a per station basis and all six are available for day Issue 1, November 1991 A. SYSTEM CAPACITY Up to 14x28 Configuration: The SPD 1428 system will support a maximum of 14 outside CO circuits and 28 station circuits. B. Up to 28x56 Configuration The SPD 2856 system will support a maximum of 28 outside CO circuits and 56 station circuits. 200.106 SYSTEM HOLD When a line is placed on System Hold, any station in the system with access to that line can retrieve the call. 200.107 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL Up to 80 commonly dialed numbers can be programmed into System Speed Dial for use by stations allowed this feature. These numbers can be up to 24 digits including pauses, flash commands, pulseto-tone switchover, and no-display characters. The last 40 numbers will not be monitored by toll restriction. 200.108 TOLL RESTRICTION (TABLE DRIVEN) The system provides a flexible means of providing toll restriction to internal stations of the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System. Each station is assigned a Class of Service for day mode operation and one for night mode operation these station COS’s work in conjunction with a CO line Class of service to allow for customized toll restriction. Two (2) Allow and Deny tables along with four (4) special tables afford the system administrator to devise a 200-l 9 Digital Key Telephone variety of complex toll restriction or dialing privilege schemes. 200.109 TRANSFER RECALL Screened and unscreened transfers will recall the initiating party if unanswered for a programmable length of time, and then if unanswered, will recall the attendant. 200.110 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION (UCD) Eight Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) groups can be programmed, each containing up to eight 3-Digit station numbers. Each group is assigned a pilot number. When this number is dialed, the first available agent in that group is rung. Calls are routed to the station that has been on-hook for the longest period of time. A. Alternate UCD Group Assignments An alternate UCD group can be programmed so that if stations in one group are busy, the alternate group will be checked for an available station. B. Overflow Station Assignments An overflow station may be assigned to route callers in queue to a designated station after a specified time. The overflow station may not be one of the UCD group stations. C. Incoming CO Direct Ringing CO Lines can be programmed to ring directly into a UCD group. When all agents are busy and RAN is enabled, the system will answer the caller and present the 1st RAN announcement automatically. D. Recorded Announcements (RAN) Recorded announcement devices can be assigned to provide up to two different messages, if all stations in a UCD group are busy. The two messages are available to all eight (8) UCD groups in different configurations. A RAN device can provide an announcement to one caller at a time. Subsequent callers will be queued onto the message on a first-in basis. E. Number of Calls in Queue Display There are two methods of viewing UCD Group call queue status. 1. In-service UCD agents and the assigned overflow station will see the quantity of calls in queue on the LCD of their station for the UCD group of which they are a member. If every member of a UCD group is busy and calls are in queue, the “XX CALLS IN QUEUE” display will be seen at all UCD members of that group. 200-20 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Systems NOTE: If a UCD member is taken out of the group (ie. DND, Call Forward,Unavailable etc.) they wilLnot receive calls in queue information. 2. Any station not assigned in a UCD group can view the number of calls in queue for any given UCD Group. To view the number of calls in queue the station user dials the Calls In Queue code (or presses a programmed FLEX button with this code) then enters the UCD group desired. The LCD will display, on a real time basis, the number of calls in queue for that group. F. UCD Auto Wrap-Up w/Timer After completion of a UCD call (on-hook) the agent will not be subjected to another UCD call for the duration of the Auto Wrap-Up timer (regardless of the number of calls in queue), allowing the agent to finish call related work or access other facilities. This will allow agents to remove themselves from the group (ie. DND, Unavailable, Call Forward or originate another call). The auto wrap-up timer is programmed as part of the UCD data base. (System-wide) G. UCD No-Answer Timer If a call routed to a station via UCD is not answered by the UCD Agent/Station before the No-Answer timer expires, the call will be returned to UCD Queue with the highest priority. In addition, the station that failed to answer the ringing UCD call will be placed into an unavailable state. H. UCD Available / Unavailable Mode Stations programmed into a UCD group may log off and on to their assigned UCD group by dialing an Available/Unavailable code. When an agent is in the Available mode that agent will receive UCD calls in the normal manner. When an agent is in the Unavailable mode that agent will no longer receive UCD type calls, however may receive non-UCD calls. Agents that have logged off by going Unavailable will receive a visual reminder that they are logged off with a flashing LED and or a LCD display message. 200.111 UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (UNA) Incoming CO lines can be programmed for Universal Night Answer (UNA). Stations which do not have access to a line during the day can answer that line while the System in the Night Mode by dialing a UNA code. In order to utilize this feature, a loop button must be present on the station. I Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 200.112 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (VM) The Voice Mail feature automatically handles unanswered calls. Stations may forward calls to a voice mail group (for leaving mail) or may call the voice mail group directly (to retrieve mail) with no assistance from the attendant. Up to eight (8) voice mail groups can be configured in the system. Each group can contain up to eight voice mail stations, each of which interfaces with a port on an OPX box. Each voice mail “station” can be shared by a number of actual users. An OPX Box and a 48 vdc power supply are required when utilizing the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System Voice Mail “In-Band” integration. A. VM In-Band Signaling Integration The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System integrates with a wide range of Voice Mail systems through the use of “In-Band” signaling. B. VM Message Waiting Indication When Voice Mail has received a voice message for a user who has a station on the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System, the VM connected to the system will leave a message waiting indication at the VM users station. When the station user retrieves their mail, the VM system will cancel the message waiting indication left at a station via a VM port. The message waiting indication will appear on the programmed Voice Mail (group) button. If such a button has not been programmed, a voice mail message waiting indication will appear on the MSG WAIT button as a normal message waiting signal. C. VM CO Disconnect Signal - Pass Thru To avoid Voice Mail ports from being tied up, as a result of CO line callers abandoning the call or not exiting the VM system properly, a disconnect signal has been provided to notify the VM system that a CO caller has abandon. “Silence” is provided to the VM port followed by “busy tone” to aid the VM system to recognize that an intercom caller has abandoned the call. Disconnect digits may also be programmed. D. VM Tone Mode Calling Option Voice mail systems and/or Automated Attendants can utilize the Calling Station Tone Mode option. This is useful when using supervised transfer or call screening options on voice mail or auto attendant(s) requiring ringback tone for proper call handling. Issue 1, November 1991 Digital Key Telephone Systems 200.113 VOLUME CONTROLS Both speaker and tone ringing volume can be separately adjusted by utilizing the two slide switches on the right side of the keyset. 200-21 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems SECTION 210 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE FEATURE DESCRlPTiON Single Line telephones have access to most of the system and station features listed in the previous section, however, the additional features listed below are unique to Single Line Telephones. (An OPX Box and 48 vdc power supply must be installed in the system for proper SLT operation) An abbreviated feature index is provided in Table 21 O-l. 210.1 ACCOUNT CODE SLT stations may enter an account code, up to 12 digits in length, to identify calls for billing/tracking purposes. The account code may be entered either before the call or during the call (the outside caller is placed on hold while the account code is entered if during the call.). The account code is recorded on the SMDR printout. Account codes are non-verified and can vary in length from 1 to 12 digits. 210.2 AUTOMATIC LINE ACCESS SLT’s may have their station programmed to access a particular CO Line such as a private line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications when station users have dedicated or individual lines. Outside line dial tone is received just by going off-hook, without the need to dial access codes. 210.3 CALL FORWARD Single line telephones may direct intercom calls and transferred CO lines to be forwarded to another station. SLTs have access to all forwarding options that Key station users have: Call Forward - All Calls Call Forward - No Answer j7] Call Forward - Busy [8] Call Forward - Busy/No Answer [9] Call Forward - Off-Net [‘I Preset Call Forward CAMP ON A busy station can be notified that an outside line is on hold and waiting for them. The busy station is notified of this by a beep tone. Single line telephones can receive a camp on indication or initiate one by using an access code. 210.5 CONFERENCE An SLT user can initiate a conference with an outside line and one other internal station. Issue 1, November 1991 210.6 CONFERENCE PARK /WITH PERSONAL Single Line Telephones (SLT) can initiate a conference between two outside (CO) calls. The Personal Park feature is used in conjunction with the SLT conference code to make this possible. A combination of features are derived from these dial codes (Personal Park, Flip/Flop, and Multi-line Conference). 210.7 DIRECT OUTSIDE LINE ACCESS Single line telephones can access outside lines by dialing CO line group access codes 9 or 81-87. 210.8 DIRECT OUTSIDE LINE RINGING Single line telephones can be set up to receive direct outside line ringing. SLTs may be programmed to receive incoming CO Ringing on more than one CO line. However, an SLT can answer only ONE call at a time. If a SLT is busy when a CO call rings in, camp-on tone will be given to that SLT station. 210.9 DIRECTED CALL PICK UP Tone ringing intercom calls, Initial Ringing CO calls and transferred outside line calls to specific stations can be picked up by single line telephones. For this type of pickup, the stations do not have to be in the same pickup group. 210.10 DO NOT DISTURB Each telephone user can be allowed to place their phone in Do No Disturb. The user will receive error tone if they are not allowed this feature. They will also receive a confidence tone when lifting the handset to remind them they are in Do Not Disturb. The attendant can override a station in DND. 210.11 GROUP CALL PICK UP Tone ringing intercom calls, transferred outside line calls, and initially ringing calls can be picked up by single line telephones by dialing a special pickup code. The telephones must be in the same pickup group. 210.12 INTERCOM Single line telephones com calls. 210.13 CALLING can make and receive inter- MESSAGE WAITING/CALL BACK Single Line Telephones calling a station that is busy, idle, or in Do Not Disturb can leave a message waiting indication to signal the station to call back. 21 o-l Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ Table 21 O-l SLT Alphabetical FEATURE Account Code Automatic Line Access Call Forward Camp-On Conference Conference with Personal Park Direct Outside Line Access Direct Outside Line Ringing Directed Call Pick-up Do Not Disturb (DND) Intercom Calling Message Waiting/Call Back Night Service Off-Hook Preference Personal Park Queuing Station Speed Dial Transfer S = Standard Feature; O=Optional: 210.14 PREFERENCE SLT’s may have their station programmed to access a particular CO Line such as a private line or a line from a Group of CO lines upon going off-hook. This is useful in Centrex or PBX applications when station users have dedicated lines. Outside line dial tone is received just by going off-hook, without the need to dial access codes. 210.18 PERSONAL PARK Single line telephones can be connected to two calls (Intercom or CO lines) at the same time and “flip/flop” between the two calls. This can be perfom-red with originated or received calls. This feature is also used with SLT multi-line conference feature. 210-2 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED S N Printer S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N S N N Requires additional hardware; N=No additional hardware required NIGHT SERVICE OFF-HOOK Feature Index AVAILABLE When outside lines are marked UNA and the system is placed into night service, a single line telephone can answer incoming calls on lines it does not normally have access to by dialing [#3]. When External Night Ringing is enabled in database programming, ringing is outputted on the external page ports. 210.15 SPD 1428 & 2858 210.17 QUEUING Single line telephones can be placed in a queue awaiting the first available outside line in a group to become available. 210.18 STATION SPEED DIAL Each SLT user may program up to 20 individual speed dial numbers. Each speed dial number can be up to 24 digits in length. 210.19 SYSTEM, SPEED DIAL Each SLT user can be allowed access to system speed dial numbers on a programmable basis. The last forty system speed numbers override toll restriction. 210.20 TRANSFER Outside lines may be transferred by or to single line telephones. These transfers can be either announced or unannounced. Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ Digital SPD 1428 & 2856 AITENDANT SECTION 220 FEATURE DESCRIPTION The Attendant and Attendant(s) with DSS/DLS features of the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System are listed and described below in alphabetical order. An abbreviated feature index is provided in Table 220-l. 220.1 AlTENDANT ACCESS DISABLE OUTGOING The first attendant can disable CO lines, preventing outgoing access to those lines. This is useful for removing a faulty line from service, or for reserving CO lines for important use. All stations that can normally make calls on the lines are affected, but incoming calls are not affected. A CO line may be disabled while it is being used; when the trunk becomes idle, further outgoing access will be prevented. 220.2 AlTENDANT OVERFLOW System programming allows the attendant station to be programmed so that if the attendant is busy or not there, the call will be automatically forwarded to another predetermined station, VM Group, Hunt Group or UCD group after a programmed period of time. (Refer to Call Forward, Station and Preset) 220.3 AlTENDANT OVERRIDE Attendant stations may override a busy station or ring a station in DND. While busy, pressing the override key provides override tone and a five second delay before voice cut-through to the called party occurs, automatically placing any outside line call on Hold. The Attendant Override function may be programmed on to a flex button and can be enabled or disabled in programming. 220.4 AlTENDANT POSITION The system identifies a maximum of three programmable stations as attendants for line recalls and Issue 1, November 1991 Key Telephone Systems . attendant features. The first programmed attendant can enter system date and time information as well as System Speed numbers from this position without entering the programming mode. The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System is placed in Night Service by any programmed attendant pressing the NIGHT (DND) button or dialing the NIGHT code. 220.5 AlTENDANT RECALL A held CO call left unattended by a station will recall the attendant(s) after a programmable period of time has elapsed. A recalling CO line flashes at a distinctive rate that identifies the originating station of the unanswered call. 220.6 AUTOMATIC NIGHT MODE In addition to the attendants capability to place the system into and out of night mode manually, by pressing the Night key, an automatic night mode schedule has been added to the system. The automatic schedule is set in data base programming on a week day basis, including Saturday and Sunday. The Attendant can override the automatic schedule by pressing the NIGHT (DND) button. 220.7 INCOMING WARD CO LINE OFF-NET FOR- Allows the first attendant to forward incoming CO calls to an Off-Net location. The attendant must have a direct appearance of the CO line to be forwarded. Forwarding can be established on a per CO line group basis, or all CO lines may be simultaneously forwarded to an off-net location. 220.8 TIME AND DATE PROGRAMMING This feature allows the first programmed attendant to set the time and date without entering the programming mode. 220-l Digital Key Telephone Systems =ARPLUS@ Table 220-l Attendant(s) Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant Automatic Incoming Time and Feature Index FEATURE AVAILABLE INTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED Disable Outgoing Access Overflow Override Position Recall, Night Mode CO Lines Off-Net (via speed dial) Date Programming s S S S S S S S N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N AlTENDANT W/DSS.‘DLS FEATURES: Attendant Search Busy Lamp Field Indicators Direct Station Calling Mapping Options Release S S S S S S = Standard Feature; O=Optional: ATTENDANT 220.9 Alphabetical SPD 1428 & 2866 WIDSSIDLS AlTENDANT N N N N N N N N N N Requires additional hardware; N=No additional hardware required FEATURES SEARCH buttons programmed as the following features: Call Park Zones, Page Zones, Attendant Override, and Release. Allows a user to make a series of intercom calls without hanging up the handset. An intercom connection is switched to another station whenever a DSS key is pressed. Pressing the next DSS key terminates the previous intercom call. 220.10 BUSY LAMP FIELD INDICATORS Each station key on the DSS console has a corresponding indicator which shows whether the station is idle or busy. The indicator is lit when the station is busy and unlit if the station is idle. A station in DND mode is shown by a flashing indicator. 220.11 DIRECT STATION CALLING Enables the user to make an intercom voice call to any Digital Terminal in the system. Permits you to automatically put an outside caller on hold and simultaneously make an intercom call to an internal station. Also allows you to transfer an intercom call or outside call that is on hold to another station. 220.12 MAPPING OPTIONS Each Attendant may have up to three (3) DSWDLS terminals programmed to work with one attendant station. Each DSS terminal can be programmed in one of three ways: . MAP 1. CO lines 1-14 and Stations loo-127 appear in sequential order with the bottom 6 220-2 DSS/DLS Console Map 1 Issue 1, November 1991 . b MAP 2. CO lines 1-28 and station 100-l 13 appear in sequential order with 6 button programmed as features on the button. MAP 3. Stations 114-l 57 appear in sequential order with the bottom 6 buttons programmed as features.Provides the receiving station with DSS buttons when used in conjunction with DSS Map 2 for a full 28x56 CO/Station mapping. DSWDLS Console Maps 2 & 3 CO Line ringing on Map 1,2 is determined by CO Line Ringing Assignments. 220.13 RELEASE KEY Allows the user to disconnect calls while off-hook, speeding up call handling time (MAP I,3 only). issue 1, November 1991 220-3 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone SECTION 300 STATION FEATURE OPERATION 300.1 INTRODUCTION The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System has a wide variety of features and flexible programming, allowing each telephone user to program his/her telephone to meet his/her own individual needs. This section of the manual contains the operating instructions for key telephone and Single Line users and includes an illustration of the key telephone used in the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System and description of the keys on the telephones and their functions. It is designed to provide step-by-step instructions for operating the Digital Terminals and Single Line telephones in the system. Visual and audible cues which accompany the various steps in the operation of the features are also include Literature similar to these operating instructions has been prepared for use by the customer in the form of Station, SLT, and Attendant Users Guides. 300.2 KEY TELEPHONE TURES STATION FEA- Each Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System provides the following keys, indicators and features: HANDSET AND SPEAKER are located at the left side of the front panel. A handset is provided to allow confidential conversation when desired. Lifting the handset from its cradle (going off-hook) disengages the station’s built-in speaker. The speaker is located directly below the center portion of the handset. The station may be operated with the handset on-hook. When this occurs, audio is transmitted to the station user through the station’s speaker. HOLD button enables you to place an outside caller on hold. TRANSFER (TRANS) button is used to transfer an outside call from one station to another. FLASH button is used to terminate an outside call and restore dial tone without having to hang up the handset. It is also used to transfer calls behind a PBX or Centrex within those systems. SPEED button provides you with access to speed dialing, save number redial and last number redial. This button is also used to access speed dial and flex button programming. MUTE button allows you to switch the built-in microphone on or off when using the speakerphone, or the handset microphone when using the handset. A flex button must be assigned to use this feature. Issue 1, November 1991 Systems - ON/OFF button enables you to make a telephone call without lifting the handset. It turns the telephone on and off when using the speakerphone. FLEXIBLE BUTTONS are used to access idle outside lines, provide DSS/BLF for internal stations, access speed dial number and activate features. These buttons are programmed by the individual station user. The default flex feature buttons are described below: CAMP-ON (flex) button enables you to alert a busy party that an outside line is on hold and waiting for them. A flex button must be assigned to use this feature. LINE QUEUE (flex) button allows you to queue onto an outside line when all lines in a group are busy. Your station is placed in queue awaiting a line in the same group to become available. A flex button must be assigned to use this feature. CALL BACK (flex) button allows you to initiate an automatic call back request to another busy station. As soon as that station becomes idle, the station that left the call back request is signalled. A flex button must be assigned to use this feature. PICK UP (flex) button allows you to pickup a tone ringing intercom call, transferred, incoming, or recalling outside line call to a specific unattended station either by group or directed call pick-up. MESSAGE WAIT (MSG WAIT) (flex) button allows you to initiate a message waiting indication at stations that are busy, unattended, or in Do Not Disturb. Message Waiting Callback request left at your station will indicated by a flashing Msg Wait LED. CALL FWD (flex) button allows you to forward your calls to another station. DO NOT DISTURB (DND) (flex) button allows the user to place his/her telephone into a Do Not Disturb mode to eliminate incoming outside line ringing, intercom calls, transfers and paging announcements. The station in DND can use the telephone to make normal outgoing calls. On Attendant stations, this button becomes the system Night Mode button. A flex button must be assigned to use fhis feature. CONFERENCE (CONF) (flex) button is used to establish and build conference calls. 300-l Digital Key Telephone Systems OUTSIDE CALLS are announced by a tone signal repeated every 3.2 seconds. The corresponding outside line indicator will flash slowly. sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 INTERCOM CALLS can be tone ringing or voice announce If it is voice announced, the receiving station will receive 2 bursts of tone prior to the announcement. If it is a tone ringing call, the receiving station will hear a tone ring every 2.4 seconds. Figure 300-l 34 Button Digital Display Terminal 300-2 Issue 1, November i991 Table 366-l Starplus loo-127 108-155 Station Intercom Station Intercom 199 Modem via DISA access 22 tc1 33 WI MM Call Park Location 6-7 (system) Personal Park Hunt Group Pilot Numbers O-7 Voice Mail Group Pilot Numbers 420 goo> CTS (Clear to Send) > > DSR (Data Sat Ready) > > 3 R’? 6 Pin Mod W 2 1 (blue) 6 2 (black) 6 3 WI GND Signal Ground Transmit 4 (emen) > < DTR (Data Terminal Ready) Pin X DS-25 t 5 (yellow) \ Data (-) t Receive Data (-) t Receive Data (+) * Transmit t Data (+) PinL DE!3 t DTR must be held hi h or data from the KSU wi P stop 6 (white) RS-232C Data Communication NOTE: PINOUT Requirements .____.__ - .__...._.__________.......~~ ?!.-!!?!?!tio! < are: W-422 ..__- ______._ - .__....________... * > PINOUT A Serial Port Compatible B 1 ASCII Code Compatible . g ;;;EnB$ and 1 Stop Brt 1 E) Flow Control Method: Xon/Xoff Data Communication Arrows $ t%%%rol Method: XorVXoff NOTE: Arrows show flow control direction. If required by the printer or terminal show flow control Requirements are: A) Serial Port Compatible B ASCII Code Compatible C 1 8 Data .Bits and 1 Stop Bit direction l l There is no set standard for pins to be used with RS-422 connectors. Refer to your particular terminal installation guide for proper hook-up. Figure 500-13 SPD 1428 Expansion 500-28 l/O Module Pin-outs Issue 1, November 1991 Digital Key Telephone STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 SPD 26.56 Expansion UO 8 Pin Modular Jack Pinout SPD 2656 Expansion VO Module. 6 Pin Modular Jack Pinout (K? 6 Pin Mod .I*& Transmit Data 6 wiow) Receive Data > c DSR (Data Set Ready) 7 (tiite) > 2 2 (black) 7 3 @a 8 4 mm 6 5 (yellow) GND 4 (red) 6 (white) > DTR must be held high of data from lhe Ksu win stop RS-232C Data Communication A BI C) D) E) show flow control direction. by the printer or terminal 1991 Transmit Data (-) t Receive Data (-) l Receive Data (+) l Transmit Data (+) * ._.-_._- .._- __.......___..__.__ ZZ!!!!!??!!~? A) B) C) D) E) l ___.-._-_._- _.__ -_..-_-. > * PINOUT Requirements are: Serial Port Compatible ASCII Code Compatible 8 Data Bits and 1 Stop Bit No Parity Flow Control Method: XotVXoff NOTE: Arrows * If required show ffow control direction. by the printer or terminal There is no set standard for pins to be used with RS-422 connectors. Refer to your particular terminal installation guide for proper hook-up. Figure 500-l 4 SPD 2856 Expansion Issue 1, November l Data Communication are: Serial Port Compatible ASCII Code Compatible 8 Data Bits and 1 Stop Bit No Panty Flow Control Method: XonKoff NOTE: Arrows l If required < PINOUT Requirements < Signal Ground M-422 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) 3 (black) Pin I W-25 1 (blue) < 5 (emen) Systems i/O Module Pin-outs 500-29 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ a station user and transferred to the modem port. Connection to the modem port is under software control. The 1200 baud modem module maintains the compatibility with the Hayes command protocol and uses the Bell System (Western Electric) standards 103 and 212A for modem design. The modem operates on-line in both Full and Half duplex modes. 4 Q 6 I and or DISA traffic is heavy, additional OPX boxes should be added. It is also recommended to- add additional OPX boxes when a Voice Mail or Auto Pl P 1 I Installing the 1200 Baud Modem Module into the SPD 1428 Basic Key Service Unit (BKSU): a. Remove power from the KSU. b. Locate the J14 connector on the KSU motherboard and the Pl connector on the Modem Module. Refer to Figure 500-12. c. Gently push the Pl connector on the Modem Module onto the J14 connector on the KSU motherboard. d. Secure with the screws provided on the module. Installing the 1200 Baud Modem Module into the SPD 2856 Basic Cabinet: a. Power down the KSU. Then remove the Central Processor Board (CPB) from the KSU. b. Locate the J5 connector on the CPB board and the Pl connector on the Modem Module. Refer to Figure 500-7. c. Gently push the Pl connector on the Modem Module onto the J5 connector on the CPB board. d. Secure with the screws provided on the module. e. Re-insert the CPB board in the KSU. Connections: Connection is under system software control. Attendant is connected to the system. Installing the DTMF Receiver Module into the SPD 1428 Basic Key Service Unit (BKSU): a. Locate the Jl connector on the 2x4 Module and the Pl connector on the DTMF Receiver Module. Refer to Figure 500-l 2. b. Take the RM and push the Pl pin connector gently onto the Jl pins on the 2x4 Module. c. Secure the DTMF Receiver Module with the screw provided on the RM Module. Installing the DTMF Receiver Module into the SPD 2856 Basic Cabinet: a. Locate the Jl connector on the CO/SLT Interface Board and the Pl connector on the DTMF Receiver Module. Refer to Figure 500-7. b. Take the RM and push the Pl pin connector gently onto the Jl pins on the CO/SLT Interface board. c. Secure the DTMF Receiver Module with the screws provided with the RM Module. d. Replace the CO/SLT Interface board back in the KSU. Connections: The DTMF Receiver module plugs onto a 20 pin connector on the following PCB’s (one module may be installed on each PCB); l D. Installing the DTMF Receiver Module (RM) This module is used to provide DTMF receivers in the system to support single line telephone and DISA * applications. Currently this module can be added to the SPD 1428 Expansion KSU, SPD 1428 2x4 and 4x8 Expander modules. Each module contains 1 DTMF receiver for a maximum of three (3) in the SPD 1428 system. Generally, one receiver will support DISA and/or 8 SLT stations under light to moderate traffic. If SLT 500-30 SPD 1428 & 2856 SPD 1428 Expansion service unit) KSU, (expansion l SPD 1428 2x4 Expander Module l SPD 1428 4x8 Expander Module l l l key SPD 2856 4x8 CO/Station Interface board WB) SPD 2856 4x8 CO/SLT Interface board WY Additional PCB’s as designed. Issue 1, November 1991 500.7 SPD 1428 & SPD 2856 TERMINALS A. Digital Terminal Installation: The Digital Terminals are interfaced with the SPD 1428 KSU motherboard and have eight (8) circuits. Each of the eight (8) circuits are interfaced from the Ji 1 connector on the KSU motherboard to the MDF. The Digital Terminals are interfaced with the SPD 2856 CKB boards which each have eight (8) circuits per board. Each CKB board interface is extended from the KSU to the MDF through the front edge connector on the CKB board. At the MDF are the terminated distribution cables that are run from each Key Telephone location. Each Key Telephone requires two-pair twisted cable wiring to connect the Digital Terminals to the System on a “home run” basis. The telephone end of the cable is terminated on a modular jack and the MDF end of the cable should terminate on a punchdown block making up the MDF. Refer to Figures 500-l and 500-5. Telephones are connected to the station interfaces via industry-standard twisted, 2-pair, 22 or 24 gauge wire. The station cable run from the main distribution frame to the station wall jack should not exceed 1000 feet. It is recommended that the station cable contain 4 pairs of wires. Refer to Figure 500-15. Station cable is connected to the MDF at one end, and a modular connecting blockat the other end. The modular line cord of the telephone is then plugged into the connecting block. Only one station may be connected to a port. It is not possible to bridge station ports. The system communicates with each phone using 4 wires. Two of the wires are used to send digital information (voice and control signals) from the system to the telephone, and two wires are used by the telephone to send digital information to the system. All 4 wires are necessary for the telephone to function. Each telephone connected to a station port has two digital channels. The primary channel is used for voice communications only. The secondary channel is used to provide a secondary path for data switching applications (future). The installer should exercise caution when connecting a Key Telephone while System power is on. Each key station circuit is overload protected by internal circuitry on the CKB card, however the proper polarity of the wired connections must be maintained for proper operation. The Single Line Telephone Adapter (OPXI), and Digital DSS/DLS Console are all considered to be telephones by the system. These interfaces are all wired to digital key station ports the same as a digital telephone. Issue 1, November 1991 B. Digital DSS/DLS Installation: The Digital DSS/DLS is assigned to operate with a Digital Terminal. Up to 3 units can be assigned to a station. There is no limit to the number of units that can be installed in a system, but each unit uses a Digital Terminal interface circuit and this reduces station capacity on a one-per-one basis. A two-pair twisted cable is required for connecting the DSS/DLS unit to the MDF. The cable should be placed from the DSS/DLS to the MDF in a “home run” manner. The DSS/DLS end of the cable is terminated on a three-pair modular jack and the MDF is “punched down” on a terminal block for cross connection to the appropriate station cable. Refer to Figure 500-l 5. Since the system supplies power to the DSSIDLS, no transformer or external power device is required. an wded DSS/DLS Mod&,&,~- - C. Wall Mounting the Telephone All connections to the Digital Terminal are fully modular. To wall mount the Digital Terminal, it is necessary to use the Wall Mount bracket that comes with each Digital Terminal and one standard-type jack assembly designed for normal wall hanging applications. a. Unplug the line cord from the phone. This line cord will be re-used and should be retained. b. Using a screw driver, remove the plastic number retainer by inserting the screw driver underneath the middle of the retainer and prying upwards. Remove the screw and the handset tab. Be careful to position the tab so that the protrusion faces the hookswitch. This will allow the handset to remain secure when the telephone is on the wall. Replace the screw and snap the number retainer back into place. c. Reverse the back plate on the telephone for wall mounting. d. Line up the hooks at the bottom of the bracket so that they engage with the slots cut in the bottom of the telephone base. Tilt the telephone back and lock the telephone into the hooks at the top of the bracket. The bracket will snap in place. e. Route the line cord from the wall jack and plug into the connector on the back of the telephone. Now match the two key hole slots on the baseplate with the lugs on the 630-A type jack. Align the modular connector and slide telephone into place. Refer to Figure 500-l 6. 500-31 GREEN RED BLACK XMT XMT RCVE GREEN TIP RED RING BLACK YELLOW ~ TIP YELLOW II : Wiring DSS/DLS GREEN RED Line Telephone Figure 500-l 5 Station 500-32 XMT RING RCVE TIP RCVERING I i Single TIP L RCVER’NG Key Telephone XMT Console XMT TIP XMT RING Wiring Wiring Modular Block Wiring Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Figure 500-l 6 Wall Mounting Issue 1, November 1991 Digital Key Telephone the Starplus Systems Digital Terminal 500-33 Digital Key Telephone Systems D. Single Line Telephone Installation: (future) Single Line Telephones (SLT’s) can be exchanged for Digital Terminals on an one-for-one basis. The following items are required for a system installing SLTs: l 4x8 CO/SLT Interface Board (CSB) DTMF Receiver Module (RM) The CSB plugged into any designated CKB card slot. Each CSB board supports eight telephones (standard DTMF Single Line Telephones and message waiting DTMF SLT’s). A 48V Power Supply Unit must be installed in the system to provide power for ringing and message waiting for SLT’s. Refer to Figure 500-17. The DTMF Receiver Module should be installed for each CSB installed. The DTMF Receiver Module (RM) installs onto either a 4x8 CO/Station Interface cards or 4x8 CO/SLT Interface cards and provides 1 DTMF receiver. DTMF receivers can be added to the system to support Single Line Telephones. If SLT traffic is heavy or a Voice Mail system is being installed, it is recommended that additional DTMF Receiver Modules be installed in the system. Each SLT requires one-pair cable. The cable should be placed from the telephone location to the MDF in a “home run” manner. The telephone end of the cable run should be terminated in a modular jack. Refer to Figures 500-l and/or 500-5. The MDF end should be “punched down” on a terminal block for cross connection to the appropriate station cable. Refer to Table 500-5 for SLT wiring connections. l wARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 E. SLT Adapter / Off-Premise Extension Module This external module provides the interface for one long loop (OPX) single line telephone (2500 type) extension. This module requires a separately provided -48 VDC power supply to provide the necessary current for long loop applications and to support ring generation. This module is wired to and uses a key station port from any digital key terminal station port on any card plugged into the system. The OPX card meets the requirements of the FCC for connection to the telephone (Telco) network. Telephones must be DTMF only (2500 type). This module also provides for one Power Fail circuit in the event of an AC power failure. Buttons and LED’s: An LED located on the back of the unit indicates correct connection and will light when the SLT station is taken off-hook. Connections: All connections to the SLA (OPX) adapter are made on the back of the unit. Two modular jacks and a two wire cable are located on the back of the unit for connection to the KSU and power supply. The two wire cable connects to a 48V dc power supply / ring generator. The Modular jack marked KSU is connected to a KSU Digital terminal station port. This connection requires all fourwires and wires the same as a key station. The modular jack marked OPX is wired to the SLT station (2500 type), OPX circuit or SLT device. Additionally a CO line may be wired to the second pair of the SLT modular connecter for Power fail operation. Cable Loop Limits: The maximum loop limit from the KSU to the SLA (OPX) adapter is 1000 feet. The maximum loop limit from the SLA (OPX) adapter to the connected SLT or device is 1400 ohms not including the telephone or device. 500-34 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems MDF STATION CONNECTING MODULAR CABLE Red wire to 48 volts ‘.::::::::.::.... ...:.::::::g:;:giii;i)I ... 3;:: $;$ $$ $2; R 9;; Figure 500-17 Off-Premise Issue 1, November 1991 Extension - (OPX) Module 500-35 Digital Key Telephone 500.8 Systems POWER FAILURE TRANSFER A. Relay / Sensor Interface Module The Relay Sensor Interface Module connects to the system using one digital station port and provides three relay activated contacts and three sensing circuits. The relays provide for applications such as Loud Bell Control contacts, CO Line control contacts, RAN Start contacts, Page Relays, Power Fail contact and additional applications as software will permit. The sensing circuits will provide for such applications as Alarm signaling input, RAN Stop (end of message) and other applications as developed and allowed by software. 4 %ARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 power fail transfer. Refer to Tables 500-6 and 500-7 for pin-outs of each of the connectors. _ The PFTU is connected to the KSU via the modular connector on the side of the unit. This is connected in series to a customer provided 12 dc supply. and to a multi use relay programmed as a power failure relay. Connections: All connections to the Relay Sensor Module are made on the back of the unit. Two terminal strips with screw terminals each provide connection to the ancillary devices for relay control or sensing monitoring. The Modular jack marked KSU is connected to a KSU Digital terminal station port. This connection requires all four wires and wires the same as a key station. Refer to Figure 500-18 for wiring information. An external power source may be required to drive equipment connected to the relay contacts. The contacts are rated at 24Vdc max at 1 amp. Cable Loop Limits: The maximum loop limit from the KSU to the relay Sensor Module is 1000 feet. 6. Starplus Power Failure Transfer Unit (Pm0 This unit provides the relay transfer circuits for up to 12 CO lines in the event of a power or processor failure. The unit is housed in its own enclosure and mounts external to the KSU. Activation of the PFT relays is controlled by a multi-use relay on any one of the CO / Station Interface boards that is programmed for PFT. A customer provided 12 volt DC power supply is required to operate the unit. There is a manual switch that activates the PFTM for testing purposes. With loss of power to the system or a failure of system processing, the PFRJ will automatically connect up to twelve CO lines to prewired 500/2500 type telephones. When power is restored, the PFTU will automatically restore the CO trunks and stations to normal operation. These SLT stations do not have to be used for intercom. but can be if so desired. Wirina I Pinouts I Connections The PFTU has two 50-pin male amphenol connectors labeled CONNl and CONN2 located on the front of the unit. Each connector wires 8 CO lines for 500-36 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Systems GREEN --.-.-. XMIT TIP XMIT RING RCVE TIP RCVE RING CONNECTING MODULAR CABLE Device Output Relay (dry contacts) (ie: RAN Device) +pjiiiJJ Customer Provided Power Supply (if needed) NOTE: RAN device does not require external power supply Figure 500-18 Relay / Sensor Issue 1, November 1991 Interface I Module 500-37 Digital Key Telephone Systems SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ Table 500-6 PFTU Conn A Connecting Block Table 500-7 PFTU Conn A Connecting Block PAIR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 500-38 PIN 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 COLOR WWBL BLIWH WWOR OR/WH WWGN GN/WH WH/BN BN/WH WWSL SL/WH RD/BL BURD RD/OR OWRD RD/GN GN/RD RD/BN BN/RD RD/SL SURD BWBL BUBK BWOR OWBK BWGN GN/BK BWBN BN/BK BWSL SUBK YUBL BL/YL YUOR ORNL YUGN GNNL YUBN BNNL YUSL SUYL VIIBL BWI VI/OR OR/VI VI/GN GNNI VI/BN BNNI VIISL SWI DESIG 1TIT 1TIR 1 STA IN TIP 1 STA IN RING 1 TRUNK OUT 1 TRUNK OUT 1 STOT 1 STOR 2TIT 2TIR 2 STA IN TIP 2 STA IN RING 2 TRUNK OUT 2 TRUNK OUT 2 STOT 2 STOR 3TIT 3TIR 3 STA IN TIP 3 STA IN RING 3 TRUNK OUT 3 TRUNK OUT 3 STOT 3 STOR 4TIT 4TIR 4 STA IN TIP 4 STA IN RING 4 TRUNK OUT 4 TRUNK OUT 4STOT 4STOR 5TIT 5TIR 5 STA IN TIP 5 STA IN RING 5 TRUNK OUT 5 TRUNK OUT 5 STOT 5 STOR 6TIT 6TlR 6 STA IN TIP 6 STA IN RING 6 TRUNK OUT 6 TRUNK OUT 6 STOT 6 STOR PAIR 1 2 TIP RING 3 4 5 6 TIP RING 7 8 9 10 TIP RING 11 12 13 14 TIP RING 15 16 17 18 TIP RING 19 20 21 22 TIP RING 23 24 25 -PlJ 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 a 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 COLOR WHIBL BLhVH Wl-UOR OR/WH WWGN GN/WH WWBN BNh’iH WHISL SLM’H RD/BL BURD RD/OR OR/RD RD/GN GN/RD RD/BN BN/RD RD/SL SURD BWBL BUBK BWOR OWBK BWGN GN/BK BWBN BN/BK BWSL SUBK YUBL BLNL YUOR OR/YL YUGN GNNL YUBN BNNL YUSL SUYL VI/BL BWI VI/OR ORNI VI/GN GNNI VI/BN BNNI VIISL SWI DESIG 7TlT 7TlR 7 STA IN TIP 7 STA IN RING 7 TRUNK OUT TIP 7 TRUNK OUT RING 7 STOT 7 STOR 8TIT 8TIR 8 STA IN TIP 8 STA IN RING 8 TRUNK OUT TIP 8 TRUNK OUT RING 8 STOT 8 STOR 9TIT 9TIR 9 STA IN TIP 9 STA IN RING STRUNK OUT TIP 9 TRUNK OUT RING 9 STOT 9 STOR 1OTIT 1OTlR 10 STA IN TIP 10 STA IN RING 10 TRUNK OUT TIP 1OTRUNK OUTRIN G 10 STOT 10 STOR 11TIT 1lTlR 11 STA IN TIP 11 STA IN RING 11 TRUNK OUT TIP 11TRUNK OUT RING 11 STOT 11 STOR 12TIT 12TIR 12 STA IN TIP 12 STA IN RING 12 TRUNK OUT TIP 12TRUNK OUT RING 12 STOT 12 STOR I - Issue 1, November 1991 .: . ____.. .____._ ;PD OPX 1428 BKSU SPD 2% KSU PFT TIP IN PFT RING IN Method #l SPD 2856 KSU Starplus Power Failure Transfer Unit PflU) Customer Provided + Battery :................................: Multi-Purpose Relay Method #2 Figure 500-19 Power Failure Transfer Issue 1, November 1991 Wiring Options 500-39 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 INSTALLING RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT DEVICE (RAN) The Recorded Announcement feature (RAN) is used with the Uniform Call Distribution feature (UCD) to provide unanswered incoming CO calls or calls in queue with a Recorded Announcement while waiting for an available UCD station. The system may be programmed to provide this announcement on specified RAN output ports on the system (unused SLT and CO ports). The system can be programmed to connect the waiting caller to a different RAN port for the second, and subsequent RAN messages. When a CO line port is used for a ground start application, a 24V dc power source must be connected to the CO line port for talk battery. A Page/Relay contact assigned to an announcement table in programming would provide contact closure to start the Recorded Announcement device. When an SLT port is used, the RAN device must be configured for ring trip operation (loop start). The 9OV ac voltage sent to the SLT port will be recognized by the RAN device which will then answer the call. Refer to Figure 500-20. 500.9 , 509-40 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems Customer Provided Talk Battety CO RAN CONNECTIONS 24V DC 4x8 CO/Station interface Board (CKB) Multi-Purpose T VOICE Relay I ,------..--.---------------------I I RtNG RAN DEVICE RAN START RAN START I ‘................................i Any relay on any 4x8 CO/Station Interface Card (MS) or 4x8 CO/SLT Interface Card (CSB) GROUND START APPLICATIONS SLT RAN CONNECTIONS 4x8 Interface COISLT Card (CSB) LOOP I START APPLICATIONS VOICE IN SLT?;RT I \- I 4 2 I RAN VR INPUT FROM RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENT DEVICE I RAN CTL f RELAY OUTPUT SGR;&yCTROL E&O, TO 1 RELAY SENSOR MODULE SENSOR INPLlT SENSE “E&M” -I YPE RAN SGPOC$FOL FROM SIGNALING Figure 500-20 CO and SLT RAN Connections Issue 1, November 1991 500-41 Digital Key Telephone Systems SPD 1428 & 2858 sTARPLUS@ Table 500-8 SMDR Printout The SMDR feature provides detailed records of all outgoing and/or incoming, long distance only or all calls exceeding 30 seconds. This feature is enabled or disabled in system programming. By default, SMDR is not enabled and is set to record long distance calls only. A printout format of 80 characters maximum or 30 character maximum may be selected in system programming. The standard format is 69 characters on a single line. A 30 character format will generate 3 lines per message. If the SMDR feature is enabled, the system starts collecting information about the call as soon as it starts and terminates when the call ends. If the call was longer then 30 seconds, the following information is printed: 30 character , format selected 123456789~123456789ik23456789~ 116 08 00:02:00 0123456789012345678901234 123456789012 14:13 05/U/90 123456789~123456789~123456789; AAA BB HH:MM:SS HH:MM MM/DD/W HCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC (CR) (CR) (LF) 80 character (CR) (CR) (LF) (CR) (CR) (LF) format selected 123456789~123456789~123456789~123456789~1234~6789~1234~6789~1234~6789~1234~6789~ STA CO TOTAL START DATE DIALED 116 08 00:02:00 14:13 05/n/90 0123456789012345678901234 ACCOUNT CODE 123456789012 AAA - BB HH:MM:SS HH:MM MM/DD/W HCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC (CR) (CR) (LF) AAA = Station originator or Trunk on DISA and Off-Net (CO Line) calls. BB = Outside line number HH:MM:SS = Duration of call in Hours, Minutes and Seconds HH:MM = Time of day (start time) in Hours and Minutes MM/DD/YY = Date of Call H = Indicates call type “I, = Incoming “0” = Outgoing ‘T’ = Transferred CC....CC = Number dialed GG....GG = Last Account code entered (optional) (CR) = Carriage return (LF) = Line Feed 508-42 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 CUSTOMER Digital Key Telephone SECTION 600 DATA BASE PROGRAMMING 600.1 INTRODUCTION The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System can be programmed to meet each customer’s individual needs. All programming is done either at Station 100 using the 34-buttondisplay digital terminal as the programming instrument or an ASCII terminal or PC. The digital display model is suggested since the display is designed to assist in programming. When the program mode is entered, the Digital Terminal being used no longer operates as a terminal but as a programming instrument with all of the buttons redefined. The keys of the dial pad are used to enter data fields (Program Codes) associated with system, station, and CO line features as well as enter specific data that requires a numeric entry. Flexible buttons are used to toggle on or off features or allow entry into specific data fields. LED’s and the LCD display provide visual indication of entered data and their value. Programming can also be performed by using an ASCII terminal, or a computer capable of emulating an ASCII terminal. This form of programming can be done either locally (on-site) by connecting the terminal directly to the RS232C connector on the CPB or can be performed remotely (off-site) through the use of the on-board modem located on the CPB. The method and steps to program the system via a terminal are identical to that used when programming from a digital keyset. A button to keyboard mapping has been incorporated (see Figure 600-l ‘) to help minimize familiarization and training time. At the time the system is installed it must be initialized to load default data into memory. If this pre-programming suits the customer, initialization is all that is needed. Refer to Table 600-l for a listing of all the default values. Any time data is to be changed, the program mode must be entered and then the individual data field (program code). A data field can be entered to determine current programming or to change a specific feature within that field. During programming, the other Digital Terminals in the System operate normally. If a data field is entered but nothing is changed, or changed but not entered, the previous data will remain intact upon leaving that data field. Data fields can be entered at random. Issue 1, November 1991 Systems In many of the data fields, programming is performed by toggling LED’s on or off, or entering digits on the keypad. If no changes are to be made to the line or station, exit the data field by either leaving the program mode (pressing the ON/OFF button to OFF) or entering another data field (pressing the FLASH button and entering that program code). When features are being programmed, tones are provided to help the programmer determine if a correct or incorrect entry has been made. A solid one second tone indicates the data was accepted. An interrupted tone means an error was made. When this occurs, re-enter the data field and reenter the information. Until new data is entered and accepted, the system will continue to operate under default or previously entered values. The system database is updated on a real-time basis as new data is entered, by pressing the Hold button. The system continues to operate with the current data base and is updated with any newly entered or changed data without interruption to telephone operation or call processing in progress. However, if for example a station’s attributes are changed while that station is off-hook on an active call, the newly entered data will not take effect until the station goes on-hook or becomes idle. NOTE: Some features must have more than one data field programmed for that feature to work. Where this is the case, it will be stated in the instructions. 600.2 PROGRAM MODE ENTRY (Key Station) Programming a digital terminal is performed at Port 01 (Station 100) using a 34 Button Digital Display Terminal. Programming is always done at this port regardless of the class of service or which station has been assigned the attendant(s). Before entering the program mode, the programmer must first verify that the Digital Terminal is properly connected to Port 01 (Station 100). To enter the program mode: a. Press ON/OFF button. (optional) LED lights and intercom dial tone is heard. b. On the dial pad, press the asterisk (‘) twice. c. On the dial pad, enter the digits [3][2][2][6] (DBAM)‘. Confirmation tone is heard. s is a default setting, however may be changed entering programming. Digital Key Telephone Systems wARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 When using a data terminal (I/O device) to program the system, the following chart presents the data terminal characters that are equivalent to the keyset buttons. adm> ? REIAOTE RDflIN KEY DEFINITIONS Keyset Term Keyset ----------------------------------------0 0 FLEX 1 1 1 FLEX 2 2 2 FLEX 3 3 3 FLEX 4 4 4 FLEX 5 5 5 FLEX 6 6 6 FLEX 7 7 7 FLEX 8 8 FLEX 2 : 2 FLEX 10 * * FLASH # # HOLD TRANS X DND Term Keyset Term Q W E R T ‘f U I 0 P FLEX 11 FLEX 12 FLEX 13 FLEX 14 FLEX 15 FLEX 16 FLEX 17 FLEX 18 FLEX 19 FLEX 20 ON-OFF SPEED MUTE A S D F G H J K L iR C v adm> In place of keyset button toggling to enable/disable a feature, the associated data terminal key can be toggled (pressed again) to enable/disable a feature, or the plus (+) character can be used to turn on or enable a feature and the minus (-) character can be used to turn off or disable a feature. Figure 600-l Data Terminal 600-2 Program Codes Cross Reference Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone SPKR VOL Figure 600-2 Starplus Issue 1, November 1991 SPD Programming Button Systems RING VOL Mapping 600-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems SPD 1428 & 2856 BARPLUS@ Table 600-l Default Values FEATURE SYSTEM TIMERS: System Hold Recall Timer Exclusive Hold Recall Timer Attendant Recall Timer Transfer Recall Timer Preset Forward Timer Call Forward No/Answer Timer Pause Timer Call Park Timer Conference/DISA Timer Paging Timeout Timer CO Ring Detect Timer SLT DTMF Receiver Timer MSG Waiting Reminder Tone Hookflash Timer Hookflash Debounce Timer SYSTEM FEATURES: Attendant Override Hold Preference External Night Ring Executive Override Warning Tone Page Warning Tone Background Music LCR Enable Forced Account Codes (Y/N) Attendant Station Assignment (3 Stations) Set Date and Time PBX Dialing Codes Executive/Secretary Assignments Relay/Sensor Programming Baud Rate Assignments Port #l (“On-Board” RS232C) Port #2 (“On-Board” Modem) Port #3 (I/O Expander Module RS232C) Port #4 (I/O Expander Module RS-422) Access Codes DISA Access Code Admin Password for Digital Key Terminal SMDR Programming SMDR (Y/N) Call Type (LD or ALL) 666-4 PROGRAM CODE FLEX BUT-TON DEFAULT VALUE Flash 01 Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 060 sec. 180 sec. 01 min. 045 sec. 10 sec. 01 min. 2 sec. 180 sec. 10 min. 15 sec. 3 (100 msec.) 020 000 min. 10 (1 sec.) 010 msec. Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 No System No Yes Yes Yes Disabled Disabled 100 Flash 05 Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash Flash 10 11 12 13 14 15 Button Buttons Buttons Buttons Button Button Button Button l-4 1-5 1-4 l-7 None None None 1 2 3 4 4800 Baud 300 Baud Flash 20 Button 1 Button 2 100 3226 I Flash 21 Button 1 Button 2 No LD Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Systems Table 800-l Default Values (Cont’d) FEATURE PROGRAM CODE Print Format (30 or 80) Baud Rate (300/l 200/2400/4800/9660) Port (l/2/3/4) NIGHT MODE PROGRAMMING: 80 4800 Button 1 Buttons 2-8 Manual O-4 08:00-l TOO 5-6 ####-#### 1 Buttons 1-8 Button 9 CO LINE GROUP PROGRAMMING: DTMF/Dial Pulse Signaling (Y/N) CO/PBX Flag (Y/N) UNA Flag (Y/N) Conference Flag Privacy Flag Loop Supervision (O=none,l-9=timer) DISA (O=none, 1=24hr, 2=night) Flash Timer (01-l 0) CO tine Group (O-8) Line COS (l-6) Ring Assignment Display Ring Assignment(s) Next (forward) CO Next (backward) CO New Range Dial Pulse, Speed/Ratio Programming Break/Make Dial Speed PROGRAMMING: Page Access (Y/N) DND Access (Y/N) Conference (Y/N) Executive Override (Y/N) Privacy (Y/N) System Speed (Y/N) Queuing (Y/N) Preferred Line Answer (Y/N) OHVO (Y/N) (Future) Call Forward (Y/N) Forced LCR (Y/N) Issue 1, November Button 3 Button 4 Button 5 Flash 30 Groups l-8 Pilot/Circular STATION DEFAULT VALUE Flash 22 Auto/Manual (Y/N) Days of the Week Schedule HUNT GROUP PROGRAMMING: FLEX BUT-I-ON 1991 Flash 40 Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17 18 19 20 DTMF co Yes Disabled Enabled No No 10 1 1 None Ring at Sta 100 Flash 41 Button 1 Button 2 Flash 50 Page A Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9’ 10 11 60140 10 PPS Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 600-5 Table 600-l Default Values (Cont’d) PROGRAM CODE FEATURE Select Page A Select Page B New Station Range (#Is) Button 18 Button 19 Button 20 (Cont’d) STATION PROGRAMMING; Station ID (O-6) Flash 50 Page B COS (day & night) Speakerphone (O-3) Group Pickup (1,2,3,4) Paging Zones (1,2,3,4) Preset Forward (Sta #) CO tine Group Access (O-7) LCR Class of Service Off-Hook Preference Flexible Button Assignments Display Button Assignments Select Page A Select Page B New Station Range (#I’s) UCD GROUP PROGRAMMING: Ring Timer BGM Timer Over Flow Timer Wrap-Up Timer UCD RAN Announcement Tables VM GROUP PROGRAMMING: VM Groups (l-8) Alternate VM Group Leave Mail Table entry Retrieve Mail Table entry Station Assignments VM Leave/Retrieve Disconnect Tables VM ID on Incoming CO Calls 606-6 0 (Keyset) 5(SLT w/o MWt) 1 0 1 1 None 1 Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 17 18 19 20 Buttons Button Button Button Button 1-8 9 10 11 12 None None None None None Button Button Button Button 1 2 3 4 60 sec. 60 sec. 60 sec. 04 sec. None Flash 61 UCD TIMERS: Allow Table A Button 1 Flash 60 UCD Groups (l-8) Alternate UCD Group Overflow Assignment Station Assignments Announcement Table(s) Entries ALLOW/DENY DEFAULT VALUE FLEX BUTTON & SPECIAL TABLES: Flash 62 Flash 65 Flash 66 Flash 67 Flash 70 Buttons l-8 Buttons 9 Button 10 Button 11 Button 12 Buttons l-8 Button 1 Button 1 None None None None None ’ No None Issue 1, November 1991 Table 600-l Default FEATURE Values (Cont’d) PROGRAM CODE Deny Table A Allow Table B Deny Table B Special Table 1 Special Table 2 Special Table 3 Special Table 4 Area Code for Special Table 1 Area Code for Special Table 2 Area Code for Special Table 3 Display Tables LCR PROGRAMMING: lnit lnit lnit lnit lnit lnit lnit lnit DATA BASE PARAMETERS: Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Print Abort System Parameters CO Line Attributes Station Attributes Group Parameters (Hunt, UCD, VM) Exception Tables System Speed LCR Tables Entire Data Base Printing Issue 1, November 1991 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 All All All All None None None Codes Allowed Codes Allowed Codes Allowed Codes Allowed Default None Flash 80 System Parameters CO tine Attributes Station Attributes Group Parameters (Hunt, UCD, VM) Exception Tables System Speed LCR Tables Entire System and Reset PRINT DATA BASE PARAMETERS: Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button Button DEFAULT VALUE Flash 75 3-Digit Routing Table 6-Digit Routing Table Exception Code Table Route List Table Insert/Delete Table Daily Start Time Table Weekly Schedule Table Route for 555-l 212 INITIALIZE FLEX BUT-l-ON Flash 85 600-7 d. The ON/OFF button LED is lit. The system is ready to program. Other telephones connected to the system continue to function normally. . 600.3 PROGRAM nal or PC) MODE ENTRY (Data Termi- A data terminal connected to the RS-232C port on the CPB or remotely through the on-board modem can be used for data base programming. When using a data terminal (ASCII or PC capable of emulating an ASCII terminal) on-site or locally, to program the System: a. Press return (enter) on the terminal. b. Enter the password [VODAVI], and press return again. Proper entry of the password will result in the ADM> prompt. Proceed with programming referring to Figure 600-l for terminal characters that represent the keyset buttons. By entering a [?] from the terminal, a HELP screen will appear. When entering the system remotely via a data terminal, access to the on-board modem is accomplished by accessing Port [199] either through a direct ringing assignment or through DISA or by being transferred to port [I 991 by any internal station. Proper entry of the password will result in the ADM> prompt. Proceed with programming referring to Figure 600-l for terminal characters that represent the keyset buttons.By entering a [?] from the terminal, a HELP screen will appear, similar to that shown in Figure 600-l. Using the Remote Admin Key Definitions follow the same steps and procedures to program the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System when using a terminal (as outlined in the following sections). 600.4 BEGINNING TO PROGRAM Once the program mode has been entered via a digital terminal or via an ASCII terminal, you may proceed with programming by: NOTE: initialize here if necessary. Refer to the following section for initialization instructions a. Press the FLASH button. b. Dial the two-digit program code for the desired data field. c. Enter customer data. d. To permanently store the entered data, press the HOLD button. ,bbllrC) p If an interrupted (error) tone is heard, re-enter the data starting with step A. e. Repeat from step A. until all data has been entered into memory. 600-8 The system has been pre600-l). These features are loaded into memory when the system is initialized. NOTE: The system should be initialized when installed or at any time the data base has been corrupted. Use the procedures below to return the system data base to default values: a. Enter the programming mode. b. Press FLASH button and dial [80]. c. Press the System Reset flexible button (Button #8). d. Press HOLD button to initialize the system data base to default values. Confirmation tone will be heard upon completion of the initialization process. e. Repeat from Step C. to return only parts of the data base to default values using-the following flexible buttons: 2;;: ....::::..:..y.$ ,<, [>igggg tiiii~~~ :p+.:.:. ..::..: ....:,,, ~~:~$~~ NOTE: Buttons I-7 DO NOT initialize the database, but returns allprogrammable data to its default value. 600.6 CUSTOMER DATA WORKSHEETS Before any attempt at programming is made, it is strongly recommended that customer data worksheets be prepared (Refer to Appendix A). These worksheets should become part of the permanent record of customer programming. Refer to the following sections when preparing the worksheets. 600.7 DATA BASE FIELDS The data fields are used to set system timers, determine central office line features and Key Telephone features. When entering CO line data and station data, be sure to enter the exact number of digits specified. The data fields and features are further described in the following sections. Issue 1, November 1991 SPD 1428 812856 sTARPLUS@ Digital Key Telephone Systems SECTION 610 SYSTEM PARAMETERS PROGRAMMING 610.1 SYSTEM TIMERS Programming Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. (Refer to Sec. 600.2). If any System Timers are to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [Ol]. The following message is shown on the display phone: PROGRAM Description This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to program system timers. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the System Timers pro- CODE Issue 1, November 1991 610-l Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2656 SYSTEM TIMERS (Cont’d) A. System Hold Recall Timer Programming Steps If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the SYSTEM HOLD RECALL TIMER flexible button (Button #l). The following message is shown on the display phone: , 2. Enter three digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. B. Exclusive Display will now update. Determines the amount of time before a call placed on System Hold will recall the station placing the hold. If unanswered by that station, the call will recall the attendant. Default: Default value is 060 seconds and is variable from 001 to 300 seconds. An entry of 000 will disable the timer and there will be no recall. Related Programming: Hold Preference programming for selecting System Hold Preference; Attendant Programming for assigning the Attendant(s) to receive recalls. Hold Recall Timer Programming Steps If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the EXCLUSIVE HOLD RECALL TIMER flexible button (Button #2). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter three digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. 610-2 Description Display will now update. Description Determines amount of time before a call placed on Exclusive Hold recalls the station placing the Hold. If unanswered by that station, the call recalls the attendant. Default: The default value is 180 seconds and is variable from 001 to 300 seconds. An entry of 000 will disable the timer and there will be no recall. Related Programming: Hold Preference programming for selecting Exclusive Hold Preference; Attendant Programming for assigning the Attendant(s) to receive recalls. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Systems SYSTEM TIMERS (Cont’d) C. Attendant Recall Timer Programming Steps If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the ATTENDANT RECALL TIMER flexible button (Button #3). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter two digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. D. Transfer Determines the amount of time a recalling call will ring at the attendant station(s) before the system will release the line. When a CO Line recalls to the Attendant station and is still unanswered, the system will release the line at the expiration of this timer and automatically place the line back to an idle condition. Default: This timer is variable from 00 to 60 minutes and default is 01 minutes. An entry of 00 will cause the Attendant(s) to ring until answered. Related Programming: Attendant programming; System Hold Recall Timer; Exclusive Hold Recall Timer; Call Park Recall Timer, Transfer Recall Timer. Also refer to Loop Supervision in CO Line programming (Sec. 620.1). Recall Timer Programming If this timer 1. Press button shown Description Steps is to be changed: the TRANSFER RECALL TIMER flexible (Button #4). The following message is on the display phone: Description Determines amount of time a transferred call rings at the station receiving the transfer before it recalls the station making the transfer. If unanswered by that station, the call recalls the attendant. Default: Default value is 045 seconds and is variable from 001 to 300 seconds. A 000 entry disables the timer and there will be no recall. Related Programming: Attendant Programming for assigning the Attendant(s) to receive recalls. 2. Enter three digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. Issue 1, November 1991 Display will now update. 610-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems %ARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 SYSTEM TIMERS (Cont’d) E. Preset Forward Timer Programming Steps If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the PRESET FORWARD TIMER flexible button (Button #5). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter two digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. F. Call Forward Display will now update. No/Answer Programming Determines the amount of time an outside line will ring before being forwarded to a predetermined station. This entry works with Preset Forward station assignments in Station Programming. More than one station can be forwarded to the same party. This timer also governs the time the DISA call will ring at a station before being returned to intercom dial tone, if not answered. Default: Default time is set at IO seconds and is variable from 01 to 99 seconds. A 00 entry disables the timer and there will be no forward. Related Programming: Preset Forward assignments in Station Programming (Sec. 630.1) for instruction on assigning a stations preset forward destination. Timer Steps If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the CALL FORWARD NO/ANSWER TIMER flexible button (Button #6). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter three-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-600 seconds. 3. Press HOLD button. 610-4 Description Description The Call Forward No answer timer is used when a station in the system specifies that “no answer” calls be forwarded to another station. The timer determines how long an intercom or transferred call will ring before it is considered a “no-answer” call. The call will then forward to the designated station for handling. NOTE: Initial incoming CO lines will follow the Preset Call Forward Timer when encountering a station in the Forward/No answer mode. (Refer to Section 670.7 for instructions on setting the Preset/Forward Timer) The timer is variable from 000-600 seconds. Default: Default is 015 seconds. Related Programming: Preset Forward Timer, Sec. 610.1; Station Attributes, Call Forward option. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Systems SYSTEM TIMERS (Cont’d) G. Pause Timer Programming Steps If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the PAUSE TIMER flexible button (Button #7). The following message is shown on the display phone: Description Determines the length of the pause when programmed for use with speed dialing and LCR Insert Tables. Default: Default is 2 seconds and is variable from 1 to 9 seconds. There is no 0 entry. 2. Enter one digit on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. H. Display will now update. Call Park Recall Timer Programming If this timer 1. Press button shown Steps is to be changed: the CALL PARK RECALLTIMER flexible (Button #8). The following message is on the display phone: 2. Enter three digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. Issue 1, November 1991 Description Determines the amount of time before a call placed in the call park location will recall the station placing the call park. If unanswered by that station, the call will recall the attendant. Default: Default is 180 seconds and is variable from 001 to 600 seconds. A 000 entry disables the timer and there will be no recall. Related Programming: Attendant Programming for assigning the Attendant(s) to receive recall ringing. Display will now update. 61 O-5 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 SYSTEM TIMERS (Cont’d) I. ConferenceIDISA Timer Programming Steps If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the CONFERENCEIDISATIMER flexible button (Button #9). The following message is shown on the display phone: . 2. Enter two digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. J. Paging Timeout Display will now update. Steps is to be changed: the PAGING TIMEOUT TIMER flexible (Button #lo). The following message is on the display phone: 2. Enter two digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. 610-6 Determines the amount of time an unsupervised conterence can continue after the initiator of the conference has exited the conference. Default: Default is 10 minutes and is variable from 01 to 99 minutes. A 00 entry disables the timer and means no automatic disconnect occurs. NOTE: The Conference Timer also allOWS the Sptern administrator to control the length of time a DISA caller is allowedafter establishing a “Trunk-to-Trunk” call. At the expiration of the Conference Timer, a tone will be presented to both DISA parties, then one minufe later the system will automatically release both trunks. The Conference Timer does not affect or control a DISA-to-Station call. Related Programming: Refer to Loop Supervision, DISA and Conference Attributes in CO Line programming. Also refer to the Conference option in Station programming. Timer Programming If this timer 1. Press button shown Description Display will now update. Description Determines the maximum length of a page announcement (internal, external or All Call). The system will automatically disconnect the page at the end of this time unless the person making the page has already hung up. Default: Default is 15 seconds and is variable from 01 to 60 seconds. A 00 entry disables the timer and pages will not be limited in length. Related Programming: Station Attributes for allowing stations access to the system paging resources. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems SYSTEM TIMERS (Cont’d) K. CO Ring Detect Timer Programming If this timer 1. Press button shown Steps is to be changed: the CO RING DETECT TIMER flexible (Button #ii). The following message is on the display phone: Description This timer controls the time necessary to detect an outside line as ringing into the system. Default: Default is 3 (hundred milliseconds) and is variable from 2 to 9. There is no 0 or 1 entry. 2. Enter one digit on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. L. SLT DTMF Receiver Display will now update. Timer Programming Steps If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the SLT DTMF RECEIVER TIMER flexible button (Button #12). The following message will then be shown on the display. 2. Enter the three digits on the dial pad. 3. Press the HOLD button. update. Issue 1, November 1991 The display will now Description Single line telephones require the use of a DTMF receiver when going off-hook and dialing. When SMDR or toll restriction, (via COS assignments) is enabled in the system a DTMF receiver will monitor and screen an SLT’s digits for the duration of this timer. By adjusting this timer the system administrator may either free up system DTMF receivers sooner if system SLT traffic is heavy or provide for a longer monitoring period if toll restriction becomes a problem. It should be understood that when LCR is enabled the DTMF receivers are released when the expected number of digits are dialed as entered in the LCR data base. Default: By default, the timer is set at 020 seconds. Related Programming: SMDR programming,Sec. 610.10; Toll Restriction in both CO line and Station Attributes programming. Also refer to LCR programming. 616-7 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 SYSTEM TIMERS (Cont’d) M. Message Wait Reminder Programming Tone Steps If this feature is to be changed: 1. Press the MESSAGE WAIT REMINDERTONE flexible button (Button #13). The following message is shown on the display phone: Description The Message Wait Tone Timer determines the amount of time between repeated reminder tones to a key telephone with a message waiting. Key station users may be reminded of a message waiting on their telephone with an audible signal presented at a timed interval. Default: Default is 000 (disabled) and is variable from 000 to 104 minutes. 2. Enter three digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. N. Display will now update. SLT Hook Flash Timer Programming If this timer 1. Press button shown Steps is to be changed: the SLT HOOK FLASH TIMER flexible (Button #14). The following message is on the display phone: 2. Enter a two digit number on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. 610-6 Description This timer determines how long an SLT user should press the hookswitch in order for it to be considered a valid on hook (disconnect) request. An on-hook shorter in duration (but longer than the Hook Switch Bounce Timer) will be considered a Hook Flash (transfer) request. (Refer to Figure 710-l) The timer is variable from 0.5 seconds to 2.0 seconds. The entry should be a two digit number between 05 and 20. Default: Default is 10 (one second). NOTE: Some Single Line telephones have a fixed or programmable Flash Timer (Flash or Tap button). This Hook Switch Timer (SPD 1428 & SPD 2856 Timer) must be set longer than the SLT Flash timer to allow Hook Flash transfer. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems SYSTEM TIMERS (Cont’d) 0. SLT Hook Flash Debounce Programming Timer Steps Description If this timer is to be changed: 1. Press the SLT HOOK FLASH DEBOUNCE TIMER flexible button (Button #15). The following message is shown on the display phone: This timer determines the length of time that is needed to determine a valid on hook or off hook condition for single line telephones. On-Hook or Off-Hook signals that are shorter in duration than this timer will be ignored by the system. [Refer to Table 610.1) The timer is variable from 0 to 1 second in 10 ms increments This entry is a three-digit entry where 010 equals .l seconds. Default: By default, the timer is set to 0.10 sec. 2. Enter a three digit number on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. System Response Hook Switch Timer Ho;:&Stch Timer 0 w= .1 programmable .2 .3 range A .s .6 .7 .a .9 1.0 1.5 2.0 TIME (In seconds) Figure 610-l Hook Switch Activity Issue 1, November 1991 610-9 Digital 610.2 Key Telephone STARPLUS@ Systems SYSTEM FEATURES Programming PROGRAMMING Descriotion Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. (Refer to Sec.600.2). If any System Features are to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [05]. The following message is shown on the display phone: System This section necessary to The buttons shown below describes the procedures and steps program System Features. on the key telephone are defined as when entering the System Features Parameters Figure 61 O-2 Example of System 610-10 SPD 1428 & 2866 Parameters Pgmng Form Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 SYSTEM FEATURES A. Attendant Systems (Cont’d) Override Programming Steps If this feature is to be changed: 1. Press the AlTN OVERRIDE flexible button (Button #l). It will toggle on and off with each depression. l LED off = Attendant Override is disabled LED on = Attendant Override is enabled 2. Press HOLD button. The display will update. l B. Digital Key Telephone Description When this feature is set for yes, it allows the attendant to override a busy station or a station in DND. Default: By default, Attendant Override is disabled. Related Programming: Attendant Assignments for designating a station as an Attendant. NOTE: Attendant override will function ONLY when the Attendant station is assigned a flex button assigned as Attendant Override. Hold Preference Programming Steps If this feature is to be changed: 1. Press the HOLD PREF flexible button (Button #2). It will toggle on and off with each depression. l LED off = Exclusive Hold is preferred LED on = System Hold is preferred 2. Press HOLD button. The display will update. l Issue 1, November 1991 Description The system may be programmed to have either Exclusive or System Hold preferred. If Exclusive Hold is preferred, the user will press the HOLD button once for Exclusive Hold and twice for System Hold. If System Hold is preferred, the user will press the HOLD button once for System Hold and twice for Exclusive Hold. Refer to System Timer programming for recall times for both System and Exclusive Hold. Default: By default, Hold Preference is System. Related Programming: System Hold Recall Timer and Exclusive Hold Recall Timer for setting the appropriate recall timers. 610-11 Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 SYSTEM FEATURES (Cont’d) C. External Night Ring Programming Steps If this feature is to be changed: 1. Press the EXT NIGHT RING flexible button (Button #3). It will toggle on and off with each depression. l LED off = Ext. Night Ring is disabled l LED on = Ext. Night Ring is enabled 2. Press HOLD button. The display will update. D. Exec Override Warning Tone Programming Steps If this feature is to be changed: 1. Press the EXEC OVER WARN TONE flexible button (Button #4). It will toggle on and off with each depression. l LED off = Executive Override Tone disabled LED on = Executive Override Tone enabled 2. Press HOLD button. Display will now update l 610-12 Description When this feature is set to yes, it activates external night ring which produces a tone that is sent over all external page groups. When outside lines are marked UNA, ringing will activate a tone over external paging when an incoming call occurs on those lines during night service. Default: By default, External Night Ring is disabled. Related Programming: Page/Relay Assignments; CO Line Attributes for assigning UNA status to a CO Line(s). Description A Station programmable option allows stations to be designated as “Executive” stations with the ability to override and “barge-in” on other keysets engaged in conversation on a CO line. Prior to actual cut through of the third party, a warning tone is presented to all parties notifying them of the “barge-in”. This warning tone however is a programmable option, on a system wide basis, that either enables or disables the tone. When the tone is disabled no audible signal is presented to the parties to signal the “barge-in”. Default: By default, Executive Override Warning Tone is enabled. Related Programming: Station Attributes for assigning stations as Executive stations. CAUTION: USE OF THIS FEATURE WHEN THE EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE WARNING TONE IS DISABLED MAY BE INTERPRETED AS A VIOLATION OF FEDERAL OR STATE LAWS, AND AN INVASION OF PRIVACY. CONSULT COUNSEL WITH RESPECT TO APPLICABLE LAW BEFORE INTRUDING ON CALLS USING THIS FEATURE. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems SYSTEM FEATURES (Cont’d) E. Page Warning Tone Programming Steps If this feature is to be changed: 1. Press the PAGE WARN TONE flexible button (Button #5). It will toggle on and off with each depression. l LED on = Page Warning Tone is enabled l LED off = Page Warning Tone is disabled 2. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. F. Description Determines whether a page warning tone will be sounded over the Key Telephone speakers or external paging speakers, prior to a page announcement. Default: By default, Page Warning Tone is enabled. Related Programming: Station Attributes, Sec. 630.1; Page Access and Page Group Assignments. Music Channel Programming Steps If Background Music is to be enabled/disabled: 1. Press the BACKGROUND MUSIC flexible button (Button #6). It will toggle on and off with each depression. l LED on = Background Music is enabled LED off = Background Music is disabled 2. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. l Issue 1, November 1991 Description The system can be programmed to allow stations to activate Background Music at their stations, in addition to Music-On-Hold. A music source must be connected to the BGM/MOH connector on the CPU. Default: By default, the Background Music channel is enabled. Related Programming: 610-13 Digital Key Telephone SYSTEM FEATURES G. Systems SPD 1428 & 2666 (Cont’d) LCR Enable Programming Steps If this feature is to be assigned: 1. Press the LCR ENABLE flexible button (Button #7). It will toggle on and off with each depression. * LED on = LCR is enabled LED off = LCR is disabled 2. Press HOLD button, Display will now update. l H. sTARPLUS@ Account Steps 1. Press ACCOUNT CODES flexible button (Button #8) to detem7ine whetherthe use of Account Codes will be forced or optional. 0 LED ON = Account Codes are forced LED OFF = Account Codes are optional 2. Press HOLD button to accept the data. 610-14 If Least Cost Routing is to be used, it must be enabled . . - here. _ _.Before ,.enabling. LCR, refer to the Least Cost t-routing sectron ana programming tables (Appendix A). When the tables have all been programmed, you may then enable LCR for the system. After system initialization, a default LCR data base is loaded into the LCR section of memory. Refer to Figure 665-7 for a listing of the LCR default database. Default: By default, LCR is disabled. Related Programming: LCR Programming. Codes - Forced Programming l Description Description The system can force the use of account codes on all restricted calls. If forced account code option is enabled, then a stations Class of Service is upgraded to day COSI , night COSl, when the account code is entered. If forced account code option is disabled, then a stations Class of Service is not upgraded but the account code continues to be part of the SMDR record. Default: By default, the use of account codes is not forced but optional. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1426 & 2656 Digital Key Telephone Systems MISC. SYSTEM PARAMETERS 610.3 AlTENDANT STATION ASSIGNMENT Programming Steps Description If Attendant Stations are to be changed: a. Press FLASH and dial [lo]. The following message is shown on the display phone: b. Enter up to three (3) three-digit ber(s) on the dial pad. c. Press HOLD button. 610.4 SElTING station num- The system will identify an attendant station for the purpose of receiving recalls and activating night service. The system can have up to three attendant(s) programmed. Entering three pounds [###I will remove that attendant assignment or different station numbers can be programmed. Default: By default, Station 100 is assigned as attendant. Related Programming: System Hold Recall Timer; Exclusive Hold Recall Timer; Call Park Recall Timer; Attendant Recall Timer; Attendant Override; Night Mode Operation. SYSTEM TIME AND DATE Programming Steps To set the time and date which appears on display Digital Terminals: a. Press FLASH and dial [i 11. The following message is shown on the display phone. b. Choose display format by pressing the appropriate button in the flexible button field. c. Press the HOLD button or dial in the time and date as follows (twelve digits): YYMMDDHHMMSS d. Then press HOLD button. NOTE: The Time and Date can be changed or set by the First Attendant station using dial code [692] Description The date can be displayed in either the US (month/day) format or the European (day/month) format on Executive Display stations. In addition, the time can be displayed in either the standard 12 hour format or the 24 hour format. The buttons on the key telephone are defined as shown below when entering the System Time and Date programming area: ~T@&$8.j..:i:ji:MONTH!DAt 12HR 1 $1 DAYMOW 24HR ( 1 @g?@qq ... . .:.:.:.: :. When entering the time and date, use the following data: l W (year) = 00 to 99 l MM (month) = 01 to 12 l DD (day) = 01 to 31 l HH (hour) = 00 to 23 l MM (minute) = 00 to 59 SS (second) = 00 to 59 (optional) Default: By default, the date is set for month/day format and the time is in the 12 hour format. Related Programming: Attendant Operation, Sec. 300.102, for setting System Date and Time from the First Programmed Attendant; Attendant programming for the First Assigned Attendant, Sec. 610.3. l Issue 1, November 1991 610-15 Digital Key Telephone Systems MISC. SYSTEM PARAMETERS 610.5 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 (Cont’d) PBX DIALING CODES Programming Steps Description If PBX Dialing Codes are to be assigned: a. Press FLASH and dial [12]. The following message is shown on the display phone: b. Enter 54.~0 digit code numbers, one right after the other, on the dial pad up to a maximum of ten digits. c. Press HOLD button. 610.6 EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY Programming PAIRS Steps If Executive/Secretary pairs are to be assigned: a. Press FLASH and dial [13]. The following message is shown on the display phone: b. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit indicating the first pair may be programmed. c. Enter the three digit Executive station number. d. Enter the three digit Secretary station number. e. Press HOLD button. f. To program a second pair, press the second flexible button in the flexible button field and enter station numbers as in steps c., d., and e. g. To program a third pair, press the third button in the flexible button field and enter station numbers as in steps c., d., and e. h. To program a fourth pair, press the fourth button in the flexible button field and enter station numbers as in steps c., d., and e. 610-16 Five one or two-digit PBX access codes can be programmed into memory. When dialed, these codes signal the system so that toll restriction is applied at the next dialed digit. When a single digit code [9] is entered, it must be followed by the pound [#I as the second digit. To delete an entry, enter two pounds [#I#] and press the HOLD button. Lines must be programmed as PBX lines before these codes will apply. Default: By default, no PBX dialing codes are assigned. Related Programming: CO Line Attributes for assigning a CO Line(s) as PBX Line(s). Description There are four Executive/Secretary pairs available. When an Executive station is busy or in DND, intercom calls and transfers will be automatically routed to the designated Secretary. The buttons on the key telephone are defined as shown below when entering the Executive/Secretary programming area: ~rciii.~~~j w-c’y pmR, ~~~~~~~I U[EC/SECY PAIR* ~~~~~ .:.:::...:...: ...:.:,:,. <,< ~$$$gy.5 .:3i&g.jExEC(SECY PNR3 ~;jug&g&~ U(EeSECyPNR4 ~~~~~~~~ The assigned secretary may, however, Camp-On to the Executive Station when the station is busy or in Do-Not-Disturb. There can be only one pairing of stations, with no duplicates. You cannot pair Executive 100 to Secretary 101 and then pair Secretary 101 to Executive 100. You can have the same Secretary station for more than one Executive station (101 to 105 and 102 to 105). An entry of six pounds [######I] will remove the assignments. Individual pairs may be changed by pressing the associated flexible button. Default: By default, no Exec/Sec’y pairs are assigned. I Issue 1, November 1891 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 MISC. SYSTEM PARAMETERS 610.7 RELAY/SENSOR Programming Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) PROGRAMMING Steps If Relays are to be assigned: a. Press FLASH and dial [14]. Relay #l (Flex Button #l) and On-Board Relays (Flex Button #1 1) LED’s will be lit indicating the system is in the programming mode for “On-Board” relay programming. The following message is shown on the display phone: To program “On-Board” relays: a. Press the “On-Board” Relays (Flex Button #1 1) to indicate the system is in the “On-Board” relay programming mode. b. Press the desired flex button that corresponds to the relay to be programmed and follow the steps outlined in the following section. To program relays on the Relay/Sensor Module: a. Press the appropriate flex button 12 thru 15 to indicate which Relay/Sensor Interface Module is to be programmed. b. Press flex buttons (l-3) to indicate the relay to be programmed. To program Sensing circuits on a Relay/Sensor Module: a. Press the appropriate flex button 12 thru 15 to indicate which Relay/Sensor Interface Module is to be programmed. b. Press flex buttons (4-6) to select the sensing circuit to be programmed. NOTE: /t is necessary to assign a station number to the Relay/Sensor Interface Module. Refer to “% in this section. In Station Programming, It is also necessary to assign a Station ID to the station port used for a Relay/Sensor Interface Module. To disable a relay or sensor circuit: a. Press the desired flex button that corresponds to the relay or sensor circuit to be disabled. b. Dial [0] on the dial pad. c. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. Description The SPD 1428 and SPD 2856 systems offer relays that may be individually programmed for: External Page, Loud Bell Control, CO Line Control, Power Failure Transfer, and Recorded Announcement uses. Up to four (4) Relay/Sensor interface modules may be installed on either system. Each Relay/Sensor Interface module contains three (3) independent relays and three (3) sensing input circuits. In addition, the SPD 2856 4x8 CO/Station Interface boards each contain a Relay Contact (for up to seven (7) “on-board” relays) that may also be assigned to any of the functions mentioned above. The buttons on the key telephone are defined as shown below when entering the Relay/Sensor pro- Where: - Button 11 = On-Board Relay programming (Relays on the 4x8 CO/Sta boards l/board) Button 12 = Relay/Sensor Interface Module #l programming Button 13 = Relay/Sensor Interface Module #2 programming Button 14 = Relay/Sensor Interface Module #3 programming Button 15 = Relay/Sensor Interface Module #4 programming On-Board relays are numbered from l-7 correlating to the CO/Station boards plugged into the system (i.e. the right most CO/STA board in slot J7 corresponds to relay number 1, a CO/STA board in slot J6 corresponds to relay 2 etc...). Default: By default, there is no relay programming. Related Programming: RAN Table programming . Issue 1, November 1991 610-17 Digital Key Telephone RELAY/SENSOR A. Systems PROGRAMMING Programming sTARPLUS@ (Cont’d) relay for External Programming Paging: Steps a. Press the flex button that corresponds to the desired relay to be programmed. b. Dial [i] on the dial pad. c. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. The following message is shown on the display phone: B. Programming SPD 1428 & 2866 Description EXTERNAL PAGE RELAY: When assigning a relay as an External Page relay, the relay will activate when the external page zone the relay is assigned to is accessed. The relay will remain activated during the page announcement until the station hangs up or the page timer expires and releases the page zone. relay for RAN Starting: Programming Steps a. Press the flex button that corresponds to the desired relay to be programmed. b. Dial [2] on the dial pad. C. Enter a one-digit RAN Table number (1 or 2) the relay should be associated to. d. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. The following message is shown on the display phone: Description RAN START RELAY: When a CO line port is used for a ground start application, a24V dc power source must be connected to the CO line port for talk battery. A Loud Bell Control contact assigned to that CO line port in programming would provide contact closure to start the Recorded Announcement device. When an SLT port is used, the RAN device must be configured for ring trip operation (loop start). The 9OV ac voltage sent to the SLT port will be recognized by the RAN device which will then answer the call. Related Programming: RAN Announcement Tables Where: X= RAN Table number C. Programming Transfer: relay for Power Failure Programming Steps a. Press the flex button that corresponds to the desired relay to be programmed. b. Dial [3] on the dial pad. c. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. The following message is shown on the display phone: 610-18 Description POWER FAILURE TRANSFER: When the Starplus Power Failure Transfer Unit is used for Power Failure, it provides the relay transfer circuits for up to 12 CO lines in the event of a power or processor failure. Activation of the PFf relays is controlled by a multiuse relay on any 4x8 CO/Station Interface Board or Relay/Sensor Module. A customer provided 12 volt DC power supply is required to operate the unit. With loss of power to the system or a failure of system processing, the PFTU will automatically connect up to twelve (12) CO’lines to pre-wired 500/2500 type telephones. When power is restored, the PFRJ will automatically restore the CO trunks Issue 1, November 1991 RELAY/SENSOR PROGRAMMING (Cont’d) Description and stations to normal operation. These SLT stations do not have to be used for intercom, but can be if so desired. Related programming: D. Programming relay for Loud Bell Control: Programming Steps a. Press the flex button that corresponds to the desired relay to be programmed. b. Dial [4] on the dial pad. C. Enter the three-digit station number (100-l 55) d. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. The following message is shown on the display phone: Where: XXX= Station number E. Programming Description LOUD BELL CONTROL: There are three (3) control contacts on the Relay/Sensor Module, which can be individually programmed as Loud Bell Control to control a customer provided ringing device to external areas. There are seven (7) control contacts on the SPD 2856, which can be individually programmed as Loud Bell Control to control a customer provided ringing device to external areas. One contact for each 4x8 CO/Station Expander module. Loud Bell Control contacts can be assigned to any station and will follow the ringing assignments of that station including tone ringing intercom, and transferred CO lines. Remember to assign ringing to any station programmed for Loud Bell Control. relay for CO Line Control: Programming Steps a. Press the flex button that corresponds to the desired relay to be programmed. b. Dial [5] on the dial pad. c. Enter a two-digit CO Line number (01-28) d. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. The following message is shown on the display phone: Where: Description CO LINE CONTROL: There are three (3) control contacts on the Relay/Sensor Module, which can be individually programmed as CO Line Control to control customer provided ancillary equipment. There are seven (7) control contacts on the SPD 2856, which can be individually programmed as Loud Bell Control to control customer provided ancillary equipment. One contact on each 4x8 CO/Station Expander module. When programmed as CO Line Control and assigned to a CO line, the corresponding contact will close whenever that CO line is accessed. XX= CO tine number Issue 1, November 1991 610-19 Digital Key Telephone RELAY/SENSOR F. Systems PROGRAMMING Assign Relay/Sensor station: Interface Programming sTARPLUS@ SPD 1426 & 2666 (Cont’d) Module to a Steps a. Press the STA flex button (Button #8). b. Enter the three-digit station assignment of the relay sensor. c. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. The following display is shown on the display phone: Description STATION ASSIGNMENTS: The programming of this station represents the station port that the Relay/Sensor Module is associated to. Related Programming: It is necessary to assign a station ID to the station port used for a Relay/Sensor Interface module in Station Programming. Where: YYY= Station Assignment To delete a station assignment: a. Press the STA flex button (Button #8). b. Press the TRANSfer button. c. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. G. Program sensing circuit as a RAN Sensing (RAN END) circuit: Programming Steps a. Dial [6] on the dial pad. b. Entee; a one-digit RAN Table number (1 or 2) the sensing circuit should be associated to. c. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. The following display is shown on the display phone: Where: X= RAN Table number 61 O-20 Description RAN SENSING (RAN END): The Recorded Announcement feature (RAN) is used with the Uniform Call Distribution feature (UCD) to provide unanswered incoming CO calls or calls in queue with a Recorded Announcement while waiting for an available UCD station. The system may be programmed to provide this announcement on specified RAN output ports on the system (unused SLT and CO ports). The system can be programmed to connect the waiting caller to a different RAN port for the second, and subsequent RAN messages. When a CO line port is used for a ground start application, a 24V dc power source must be connected to the CO line port for talk battery. A Page/Relay contact assigned to an announcement table in programming would provide contact closure to start the Recorded Announcement device. Related Programming: RAN Tables Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 MISC. SYSTEM PARAMETERS 610.8 Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) BAUD RATE ASSIGNMENTS Programming Steps If Baud Rate(s) are to be assigned: 1. Press FLASH and dial [15]. The first button will be lit and ready for programming Port #1. The following message is shown on the display phone: Description The Statplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone Systems can provide outputs such as SMDR or ICLID to either the standard RS-232C “On-Board” connector on the SPD 1428 BKSU or CPB board or to the optional RS232C/422 I/O Expander Module connector(s). When features such as SMDR or ICLID are desired, the Baud Rate(s) need to be programmed to determine how the information will be distributed. When programming port Baud Rate(s), the flexible buttons are mapped as follows: To program the Baud Rate(s) for Ports #l , #3 or #4: Programming Steps 1. Press the desired PORT # flexible button (Buttons #l, #3 or #4) to determine the port to be programmed. 2. Enter a one-digit number for the Baud Rate: l= 300 Baud 2= 1200 Baud 3= 2400 Baud 4= 4800 Baud 5= 9600 Baud 3. Press the HOLD button to accept the data. The display will now update. To verify Port #2 Baud Rate: Programming Steps 1. Press the PORT #2 flexible button (Button #2). to verify the baud rate of the “On-Board” modem. The following message is shown on the display phone: Description PORT #l: Port #l is the “On-Board” RS-232C port on either the SPD 1428 and SPD 2856 systems. PORT #3: Port #3 is the RS-232C connector on the I/O Expander Module used in the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone systems. PORT #4: Port #4 is the RS-422 connector on the I/O Expander Module used in the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone systems. Default: By default, Port #l (CPB RS232C), Port #3 (RS232C) and Port #4 (RS-422) Baud Rate(s) are 4800 Baud. Related Programming: Station Message Detailed Recording features, ICLID Features Description PORT #2: Port #2 is the “On-Board” modem which is included in either SPD 1428 or SPD 2856 Digital systems. The baud rate will be 300 Baud for the “On-Board” modem or 1200 Baud for the optionally installed 1200 Baud modem. Default: By default, the ‘On-Board” modem Baud Rate is 300 Baud. Issue 1, November 1991 61 O-21 Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2666 ACCESS CODE PROGRAMMING 610.9 ACCESS CODES Programming Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. Refer to Sec. 600.2. If any Access Codes are to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [20]. The following message is shown on the display phone: A. This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to program Access codes. The buttons on the key telephone are defined as shown below when entering the Access Codes programming area: :z::.‘: ...:;:...:.:.A\ ~~~rln~~~ MS*AcpBcoDE j 1 [i:&i&J@ DISA Access Code Programming Steps If this feature is to be assigned: 1. Press the DISA ACCESS CODE flexible button (Button #l). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter three digits on the dial pad. 3. Press HOLD button. B. Description Set Data Base Admin. Programming Password Steps If this feature is to be assigned: 1. Press the ADMIN PASSWORD flexible button (Button #2). The following message is shown on the display phone: Description This allows a three digit access code to be assigned to the system. Anyone calling in on a DISA line must use the access code in order to gain access to system features. Refer to CO line programming for assignment of DISA lines. To disable the DISA access code, enter three (3) pounds (##I#). Default: By default, 100 is assigned as the access code. Related Programming: Preset Forward Timer, Sec. 610.1; Conference Time-out Timer, Sec. 610.1; CO Line Attributes, Sec.620.1; DISA programming. A CO Line(s) must be assigned for DISA operation. Also see CO Line Privacy and Conference options. Description The password used to enter customer database programming can be individualized by each customer. This allows the system administrator to block unauthorized personnel from entering database admin. /I 2. Enter four digits between 0000 and 9999. 3. Press HOLD button. Care should be taken when changing the programming password so not to “lockout” authorized personnel that may prevent or delay them from making necessary programming changes. Default: By default the numbers 3226 (DBAM) are assigned. 61 O-22 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 MISC. SYSTEM PARAMETERS 610.10 Digital Key Telephone (Cont’d) STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (SMDR) Programming Steps If Station Message Detail Recording is to be used: 1. Press FLASH and dial [21]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. To program SMDR features, use the flexible button(s) as defined in the following procedures. 3. The SMDR, TYPE, PRINT buttons toggle on and off. 4. After all entries are made, press the HOLD button to accept the data. A. Systems Description The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone Systems can provide SMDR output to either the standard RS-232C “On-Board” connector on the SPD 1428 BKSU or CPB board or to the optional RS232C/422 I/O Expander Module connector(s). When SMDR is desired, the following system-wide parameters will determine how the SMDR information will be reported. When programming SMDR features, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows: ~<#$$@g$ ,..... ..: SMDR ‘$.. .......:.:::.....2;; M+] :::::::..:.:.....::>;::$$; [:&gig&J PORT Related Programming: PBX Dialing Codes that may affect SMDR, Sec. 610.5. SLT Receiver Timer, Sec. 610.1; Station Class of Service, Sec. 630.1 and Toll Tables, Sec. 650.1. SMDR Enable/Disable Programming Steps 1. Press the SMDR flexible button (Button #l) to enable/disable this feature. l LED ON = SMDR is enabled l LED OFF = SMDR is disabled 2. Press HOLD button to accept the data. B. Long Distance/Local Programming Steps LED OFF = All Calls is enabled 2. Press HOLD button to accept the data. Issue 1, November 1991 A call accounting device can be installed allowing the system to track calls by outside line number, number dialed, time of day, date, station that placed or received the call, and duration of the call. Refer to Sec. 610.1 for further instruction regarding the relationship between SLT Receivers and SMDR. Default: By default, SMDR is disabled. Assignment 1. Press the CALL TYPE flexible button (Button #2) to determine the type of calls to be recorded. l LED ON = Long Distance is enabled l Description Description The system can be set to record either all outgoing calls or only outgoing long distance calls. Long Distance calls are defined as either beginning with a ‘1’ or ‘0’ or containing 8 or more digits. Incoming calls are only recorded if TYPE is set for all calls. Default: By default, the system is set to record long distance (LD) calls only. 61 O-23 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING (Cont’d) C. Character Print Assignment Programming Steps 1. Press PRINT FORMAT flexible button (Button #3) to determine the print format of SMDR records. l LED ON = 80 Character is enabled LED OFF = 30 Character is enabled 2. Press HOLD button to accept the data. Description The system can be programmed to print individual SMDR records in either a l-line 80 character format or a 3-line 30 character format. Default: By default, the 1 -line 80 character format is selected. l D. Baud Rate Display Programming Steps The SMDR Baud Rate is programmed using Flash 15 Baud Rate Assignments. Button #4 will return error tone when pressed. The LCD displays the current baud rate based on which Port number is assigned to the SMDR Port number. E. Description The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone Systems can provide SMDR output to either the standard RS-232C “On-Board” connector on the SPD 1428 BKSU or SPD 2856 CPB board or to the optional RS232C/422 I/O Expander Module connector(s). The Baud Rate will be displayed as either 300 baud, 1200 baud, 2400 baud, 4800 baud, 9600 baud. Related Programming: Baud Rate Assignments SMDR Port Assignment Programming Steps 1. Press the PORT flexible button (Button #5) to determine which port is to be used for SMDR information. 2. Enter a one-digit number for the SMDR Port number: 1= Port #1 (“On-Board” RS232C) 2= Port #2 (“On-Board” Modem) 3= Port #3 (I/O Expander Module RS232C) 4= Port #4 (I/O Expander Module RS-422) 3. Press HOLD button to accept the data. 61 O-24 Description Port #l refers to the standard RS-232C “On-Board connector on the SPD 1428 Basic KSU or the CPB board on the SPD 2856. Port #2 refers to the “On-Board 300 Baud modem provided with the system. Port #3 refers to the RS-232C connector on the I/O Expander Module. Port #4 refers to the RS-422 connector on the same I/O Expander Module installed in either Starplus Digital system. Default: By default, Port #1 is used for SMDR. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 MISC. SYSTEM PARAMETERS 610.11 Digital Key Telephone (Cont’d) WEEKLY NIGHT MODE SCHEDULE Programming Steps If entries or changes need to be made to this schedule: a. Press FLASH and dial [22]. The following message will then be shown on the display: A. Automatic/Manual LED off= Manual operation. Day of Week programming Programming Steps 1. The MONDAY flexible button (Button #2) LED is lit. 2. To change days of the week, press the appropriate flexible button (buttons 3-8) and perform the following procedures. 3. Enter the four digits to indicate the hour and minutes to end night mode. 4. Enter the four digits to indicate the hour and minutes for the system to go into the night mode for that particular day. Issue 1, November The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System can be programmed so that the system is automatically placed into and out of night mode. A programmable weekly time schedule allows the system administrator to preset the time the system is put into night mode and the time to remove night mode on a daily basis including weekend operation. When programming Night Mode Schedule, the flex- Steps 1. The AUTO/MANUAL flexible button (Button #l) LED is lit. l LED on= Automatic Night Mode B. Description Operation Programming l Systems 1991 Description If the system is operated in the automatic night mode the attendant(s) can override the automatic mode by pressing the night key on the attendant(s) phone. The schedule will not go back into effect until the attendant(s) press the night key again. When the system is placed into night mode CO line ringing will follow the Night ringing assignments and stations will be governed by their respective night cos. Default: The default times for automatic night mode is as follows: Monday thru Friday 08:OO 17:OO (day time operation 8:OOam to 5:OOpm) Saturday and Sunday ##:## ##:## (24 hour night mode operation) An entry of “0O:OO2359” would indicate 24 hours of day mode Related Programming: Ringing Assignments; Night Class of Service (COS) assignments; Attendant station assignments. 61 O-25 Digital Key Telephone 810.12 A. Systems SPD 1428 & 2868 HUNT GROUPS Hunt Group Programming Programming 2. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming Hunt Group 1 (330). To change Hunt Groups or enter a different Hunt Group, press the appropriate flexible button 1-8 (330-337) and perform the following procedures. 3. Enter the 3-digit station numbers up to a maximum of 24 digits (8 stations). Hunt groups are joined together by entering another Hunt Group ‘Pilot Number as the last entry of the group. 4. Press HOLD button. Confirmation tone is heard. Station/Pilot Hunting Assignment Programming Steps 1. Press the STATION/PILOT flexible button (Button #9) to indicate Station Hunting or Pilot Hunting. l LED on= Station Hunting enabled l Description Steps If Hunt Groups are to be assigned: 1. Press FLASH and dial [30]. The following message will be shown on the display: B. sTARPLUS@ The system can be arranged for up to eight hunt groups. Each hunt group can contain up to eight stations each. Each hunt groups can be independently arranged to utilize either a pilot hunting technique or station hunting technique. Hunt groups may also be chained together when larger Hunt groups are desired. Hunt groups can be joined together by programming another hunt group number as the last member of a hunt group. If a station is in DND or is forwarded to another station, it is considered busy. To remove stations from a hunt group, enter three ### (pounds) on the keypad and press HOLD button. This will remove all stations previously programmed in that group. When programming Hunt Groups, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows: &$j ‘li$$::.: :i:.:q HUHTGP330 tiii%~~i~~~~~~ ..:&ji: 1 $1 1 Description . LED off= Pilot Hunting enabled . 61 O-26 HuMGP33, Pilot Hunting. Incoming CO, transferred CO, and intercom calls can be directed to a pilot number of a hunt group. The system will search sequentially (in the order the extensions were entered in the data base programming) for an idle station in the group and will ring that station. Calls directed directly to stations (by calling the extension number) within the hunt group will not hunt but receive call progress tones from the extension. Station Hunting. Incoming CO, transferred CO, and intercom calls that are presented to a busy, or DND station, that is a member of a Station Hunt group, will search sequentially (in the order the extensions were entered in data base programming) for an idle station in the group and will ring that station. Calls will still be allowed to be directed to the groups pilot number for hunting. Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems 620.1 INTRODUCTION Programming Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. (Refer to Sec. 600.2). If any CO line features are to be changed: a. Press FLASH and dial [40]. The following message is shown on the display phone: b. Enter a four digit number for the range of lines being programmed. If only one line is being programmed, enter that number twice (0101). c. Press HOLD button. Program button #20 (New Range) will be lit. The following message is shown on the display phone to indicate current programming of that line or group of lines. Where: XX-XX= The CO tine Range being programmed. (01-28) Description This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to program CO Line attributes. When entering the CO Line attributes portion of the data base the programmer may decide to enter information for either a range of CO lines or one specific CO Line. Range programming allows the programmer to change a specific parameter or a few parameters for an entire range of CO Lines leaving intact the remaining data fields that do not require change. Those data fields will continue to operate with the previously programmed data. For example if CO lines are programmed into several CO line groups with different Class of service etc... but it is desired to enable Loop Supervision (SUPV) on all CO Lines the programmer may enter as the range 9Lh CO lines (01-28) and enable loop supervision, then exit programming. This will enable loop supervision for all CO lines leaving intact the various CO line group programming and COS data for the range. The buttons on the key telephone are defined as shown below when entering the CO Line Attribute programming. ‘y& ....::.. ;:;:I:: .y* DTMF,D,AL PULSE :..............._... <.;, R,K ASSIGNMENTS ~<$j$$&$$$j ‘i@&&~&~$~ ~~~~1 co/Psx UNA ,:.::::..:...:.:.: _.... ::::;y $&$‘& -..: ~~Pi~~$iil LOOP SUPV :::::.:.:...::::: _....... >+.\. ~iiii*rig@@$g tliilri~iiii~~f DISA ~1~~~1 ~~~~il :.: &$&gp&X]::. ::i:i: $3 :$g$jiijiii’r - Issue 1, November 1991 FLASH TIMER 1DBPLAY NW R1NG AwGN (FORWARD) CO LINE GROUP NOCT (BACKWARD) UNE COS NEWRANGE ~s~~~: ~;$p$g$$j .::/:::.. ............ : .::::: l.,.,:,,, ::::~::~:i:~::::::i:::::a:~,:~i( Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted i.:~~:~:::::-i:~:.~;i~:::.::::.: ::~~~:~:‘::~:~:::: :(.:,_) ,.,. x?!:!:.:::::.::::::::~:~ .:.:.: ~:~lf~~~~i:I:.::,~~:::.::~~:: A- - - -I bannea Restriction’ c Canned Table A Table A Unrestricted Restriction I ...,,,, .. ~.Lw.:.:.::.: :.:.::,:, “‘A ...... .,,,, ~i2~~~:~~~~~~~~~li~~ Canned Table B Unrestricted Table B ~~~ Restriction ::::::::::::u:i~~:~ii:~~~.~~ ::::ww.<<:::~.:;:: ::::: Canned Table A Table B Restriction ;-...................>....i: “s::::~:i:~:~i’~8ipii~~~~~~~ ““-.:....:.i ...._..~. ~~~~ii~~:a::: ] Canned Canned Canned Canned ~~~~ Restriction Restriction Restriction Restriction ., ~~~~~ Intercom Intercom Intercom Intercom .‘:‘::::::,i;i~~iii:lilili :~:~:~:i:~:i:~:i::::I:.:~::il only only only only .......... .... :::::: *Canned Restriction= No ‘0’, 1, #, ‘*’ as a first dialed digit, and 7 digits maximum 1911, 1611 are allowed and 411, 976, and 555 numbers are denied. Issue 1, November 1991 ..... . ,.,. ..... .. Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted plus l-800, 626-7 Digital Key Telephone Systems CO LINE ATTRIBUTES (Cont’d) K. CO Line Ringing SPD 1428 & 2866 sTARPLUS@ Assignment Programming Steps Each CO line in the system may be assigned initial incoming ringing to one of the following destinations: l one or more stations (keyset or SLT) l to a UCD, Voice Mail or Hunt Group e Off-Net (via speed dial) 1. Press the RING ASSIGNMENT flexible button (Button #ll) to toggle to the Ringing Assignment display. The display will show the following information: Enter the 3-digit destination (DDD) and the single digit ring type (R) followed by the HOLD button. Press Button #17 to display ring assignments. Assignments will be displayed in sets of 8 up to the number programmed. Press Button #17 additional times to cycle to the next group of 8 ring assignments. The following LCD format will be used to display the assignments: Description RING ASSIGNMENT. When ringing is assigned as a part of the CO line parameters, ringing of a station is independent of that stations button configuration. However, Stations that are assigned for initial ring-in MUST HAVE a LOOP button(s) to answer the call(s) if a direct CO appearance is not available. Multiple station assignments are allowed for a particular CO line in a mixture of Day, Night, or Day & Night ring types. An incoming CO line may be programmed to any number of stations but it cannot be programmed to ring a mixture of stations and groups (ie. a Hunt Group and 4 stations, or more than one Hunt Group). Incoming calls directed Off-Net will be connected to an outgoing system speed bin. CO lines assigned to ring multiple stations will not follow any stations’ forward to a UCD, Voice Mail, Hunt Group or Off-Net. Forwarding to another station will be allowed. 020-099 = System Speed Bins 20-99, for 100-l 55 = Station extension Numbers ~~~~ps l-8 ) ad Where: DDD= Destination R= D for Day N= Night B= Both Day & Night. Ring assignments will be continuous and will be displayed in order of the destination number from 001 to 557. atypesae. 0 = unassigned (to delete a station) 1 = Day Ringing 2 = Night Ringing 3 = Day & Night Ringing Multiple station assignments are accomplished by assigning another destination with ring status, DDDR, and pressing the HOLD button. This can be done for up to the maximum number of stations on the system. Deleting a station (entering a 0 for ring type) only removes that station from the ring assignment. Default: By default, all CO lines are assigned to ring at the attendant, Station 100. I 626-8 Issue 1, November 1981 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 CO LINE ATTRIBUTES 620.2 Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) DIAL PULSE PARAMETERS Programming Steps If this feature is to be assigned: a. Press FLASH and dial [41]. The following message is shown on the display phone: b. Choose dial pulse features by pressing the appropriate flexible button(s) in the flexible field. c. The buttons toggle on and off: 0 LED on = 60/40 (RATIO), 1Opps (SPEED) LED off = 66133 (RATIO), 2Opps (SPEED) d. Press HOLD button. l Description By default all lines are DTMF (tone) signaling. If outpulsing is required, the individual outside line must be programmed for pulse. Refer to CO line programming section. The break/make ratio and the dial speed can be programmed at this time. The buttons on the key telephone are defined as shown below when entering the Dial Pulse Parameter programming area: .~~.&:~ .......:*:...:.:.:: ,x y:f’;. :8” ~~~~~~iil ALTERN*EwD GP I&*;i&$,+Jj ~:~l D”ERpLDW ASS,GN rli~~~ ~~i:;iiii~l -7 .:.::g@ Default: By default, UCD Group Tables are empty. Related Programming: UCD Timers for setting ringing, Message Interval Timer, Overflow, and Wrap-up Timers, Sec. 640.2; RAN Table programming for assigning RAN device ports and message times, Sec. 640.3. A. Alternate UCD Group Assignment Programming Steps To program an alternate group: 1. Press the ALTERNATE UCD GP flexible button (Button #9). 2. Enter the three-digit pilot number (550 to 557) of the desired alternate UCD group. 3. Press the HOLD button to enter data. Issue 1, November 1991 Description ALTERNATE UCD GP. An alternate UCD group can be programmed so that if no station in one group is available, the alternate group will be checked for an available station. This provides a means to chain or link UCD groups together. To delete an Alternate UCD Group, press the pound key three times [###I and press the HOLD button. 640-l Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION 6. Overflow (Cont’d) Station Assignment Programming Steps To program UCD Overflow station: 1. Press the OVERFLOW ASSIGN flexible button (Button #lo). 2. Enter the three-digit station number (100 to 155) to designate the UCD Groups overflow station. 3. Press the HOLD button to enter the data. , C. OVERFLOW ASSIGN. When an overflow station is assigned, callers that have remained in queue for a specified amount of time will be routed to the assigned overflow station. The overflow station may not be one of the UCD group stations. Only CO calls transferred to a UCD group will overflow to the overflow station when RAN tables have not been assigned. To delete an Overflow Station, press the pound key three times [###I and press the HOLD button. Steps To program stations into a UCD group: 1. Press the STATION ASSIGN flexible button (Button #il). 2. Enter the three digit station numbers of the stations in the UCD group in the order in which they will be checked. A maximum of eight stations may be entered. 3. Press HOLD button. Recorded Announcement Programming Description STATION ASSIGN. Any type of station (excluding DSS/DLS Consoles) may be entered as valid UCD stations. Calls will be routed to station in the order they are entered for the first round of calls only. After that the calls are routed to stations based on OnHook time. The station with the longest On-Hook time will receive the next call. If a specific station number is dialed, only that station is rung; no distribution will be done if that station is busy. To erase all stations, press the pound key three times [###I and press HOLD. Assignment(s) Steps To program a Recorded Announcement: 1. Press the ANNOUNCEMENT TBLS flexible button (Button #12). 2. Enter one of the following digit sequences: l# = RAN port specified in Table 1 will be used. 2# = RAN port specified in Table 2 will be used. 1,2 = Port 1 will answer the call; port 2 will provide a subsequent message. 2,l = Port 2 will answer the call; port 1 will provide a subsequent message. 640-2 Description UCD Station Assignment(s) Programming D. SPD 1428 & 2888 Description ANNOUNCEMENT TBLS. An optional Recorded Announcement device may be connected to the system to provide an announcement if all stations in a UCD group are busy. Two ports in the system may be assigned to provide a path to a Recorded Announcement device. Incoming CO Callers will only be answered and routed to the Overflow assignment if a RAN Table is assigned. To erase Recorded Announcement(s), press the pound key two times [##I and press HOLD. Refer to RAN Announcement Table programming (Sec. 640.3) for further information regarding each RAN Table. Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ 840.2 SPD 1428 & 2858 Systems UCD TIMERS Programming Steps If UCD timers are to be changed: a. Press FLASH and dial [Sl]. The following message is shown on the display phone: A. Digital Key Telephone Description _ Four timers for UCD operation are programmable on a system-wide basis. The UCD timers include: A Ring Timer, Message Interval Timer, an Overflow Timer, a Auto Wrap-Up Timer, and No/Answer Timer. Each timer is described below: Related Programming: UCD Group Assignments; Announcement Table programming; Installation Section for connection of Music-On-Hold and Recorded Announcements, Sec. 500. When programming UCD Timers, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows: :i::: ..::.::i:::c .:: ‘CqX ~~~~~~1 [&&&&$$ RINKmm4 UCD Ring Timer Programming Steps To make a change to the UCD Ring Timer: 1. Press the RING TIMER flexible button (Button #l). 2. Enter the three-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-300 seconds. 3. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. Description RING TIMER. The UCD Ring Timer determines how long a call will ring into a busy UCD group before being presented to the first recorded announcement. The timer is variable from 000 to 300 seconds. Default: By default, the UCD Ring Timer is set for 60 seconds. NOTE: A RAN Table must be specified in UCD programming (Sec. 670.1) for the ring timer to be in effect. If a RAN Table is NOTspecified, incoming CO callers will not be answered but will continue to receive ringback. Issue 1, November 1991 840-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2666 UCD TIMERS (Cont’d) B. UCD Message Interval Timer Programming 4 Steps To make a change to the UCD Message Interval Timer: 1. Press the MIT TIMER flexible button (Button w. 2. Enter the three-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds to.OOO-600 seconds. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. NOTE: The UCD Ring and Message Interval Timers only apply when RAN ports have been specified. If RAN ports are not specified, incoming callers will continue to receive ringback tone. C. UCD Overflow Steps To make a change to the UCD Overflow Timer: 1. Press the OVERFLOW TIMER flexible button (Button #3). 2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-600 seconds. 3. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. Description OVERFLOW TIMER. The UCD Overflow Timer determines the total length of time a caller will remain in queue for a particular UCD group. When the timer expires, the caller will be routed to the designated overflow station. The timer starts when an incoming call is answered and presented to the first recorded announcement. Transferred CO callers will overflow at the expiration of the Overflow Timer. The timer is variable from 000 to 600 seconds. Default: By default, the UCD Overflow Timer is set for 60 seconds. UCD Auto Wrap-Up Timer Programming Steps To make a change to the UCD Auto Wrap-up Timer: 1. Press the AUTO-WRAP TIMER flexible button (Button #4). 2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-600 seconds. 3. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. 640-4 MIT TIMER. The UCD Message Interval Timer (MIT) determines the length of time a caller remains in queue (listening to MOH, if provided) between recorded announcements. The timer is variable from 000 to 600 seconds. Default: By default, the UCD Message Interval Timer is set for 60 seconds. Timer Programming D. Description Description AUTO-WRAP TIMER. After completion of a UCD call (on-hook) the agent will not be subjected to another UCD call for the duration of the Auto WrapUp timer allowing the agent to finish call related work or access other facilities. This will allow agents to remove themselves from the group (ie. DND, Call Forward) or originate another call. This timer is variable from 000-600 seconds. Default: By default, the UCD Auto Wrap-up Timer . is set for 04 seconds. Issue 1, November 1991 UCD TIMERS (Cont’d) E. UCD No-Answer Timer Programming Steps To make a change to the UCD No-Answer Timer: 1. Press the NO-ANSWER TIMER flexible button (Button #5). 2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds to 000-300 seconds. 3. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. Issue 1, November 1991 Description NO-ANSWER TIMER. After a UCD call rings to an agent, this timer takes effect. If the agent does not answer the call before this timer expires, then that agent is set to “UCD Unavailable” and the call is routed back to the UCD group for another available agent or queue. The timer is variable from 000-300 seconds. Default: By default, the UCD No-Answer Timer is disabled with an entry of 000. 646-S Digital Key Telephone 640.3 Systems UCD RAN ANNOUNCEMENT Programming , sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 TABLES Steps Description If Recorded Announcement devices are installed to operate with UCD, these tables must be programmed: a. Press FLASH and dial [62]. The following message is shown on the display phone: Determines the type, index (port) number and message length for the two available Recorded Announcements (RAN). There are two RAN tables that can be programmed. Table 1 can be the answer port for unanswered incoming calls to a UCD group. Table 2 can provide the secondary message or vice versa. While programming UCD RAN Announcement Tables, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows: ~g$%.-:::.j ~~~ .:$&g;:i: TABLE 1 b. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming UCD RAN Announcement Table 1. To change to UCD RAN Announcement Table 2, press flexible button #2. c. Enter a string of six, or seven digits on the dial pad. The order of data entry will be: Type Number: 1= CO Port interface 2= SLT Port interface Index (port) Number: Ol-28= CO Line Port 100-l 55= SLT Station Port Message Time: 000-300 seconds d. Press HOLD button. ~~~~~~~ NOTE: When a COportis designatedas a RANport, a relay antior sensor should be programmed as a RAN start for Announcement Table 1 or 2. 640-6 TABLE 2 The type can be either a CO line port, or a SLT port. The index number specifies which circuit for the type of interface. The message length is used to match the maximum length of the message to the device that is used. Example: To program Table 1 for CO line port: a. Press the TABLE 1 flexible button (Button #l). b. Dial [l] for CO port interface. c. Dial [Ol to 281 for CO line used. d. Enter message duration (000-300 sec.) Example: To program Table 2 for SLT port: a. Press the TABLE 2 flexible button (Button #2). b. Dial [2] for SLT port interface. c. Dial [lo0 to 1551 for SLT station used. d. Enter Message duration (000-300 sec.) Related Programming: UCD Group programming; UCD Timer programming; Installation Section for instructions on how to install Recorded Announcement devices, Sec. 500. Issue 1, November 1881 mARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems SECTION 645 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (VM) 645.1 VOICE MAIL PROGRAMMING Programming Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. (Refer to Sec. 600.2). If Voice Mail Groups are to be programmed: 1. Press FLASH and dial t65]. The following message is shown on the display phone. Where: G= Voice Mail group number (O-7) AAA= Alternate group (440447) L= “Leave” mail index from outpulsing table for leaving messages (O-7) R= “Retrieve” mail index from outpulsing table for retrieving messages (O-7) xxx= voice mail station numbers (ports). (up to 8 max.) 2. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming voice mail group 440. To change Voice Mail groups or enter further Voice Mail groups, press the appropriate flexible button l-8 (440447) and perform the following procedures. NOTE: Certain programming will be required in the Voice Mail system connected to the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System for proper operation. 1. Mail Box numbers must match Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System station extension numbers. (IOO- 155) 2. Tone Mode Calling option (649 must be programmed as leading digits in transfer sequence(s) to force tone ringing to key telephone. Issue 1, November 1991 Description Up to eight (8) Voice Mail groups can be configured in the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System. Each group can contain up to eight (8) Voice Mail designated ports, each of which interfaces with a port on an SLT or OPX card. An externally provided Voice Mail system or Auto Attendant must be connected to the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System for Voice Mail or Auto Attendant operation. Voice Mail automatically handles unanswered calls. Station user can then retrieve messages left at their stations. Auto Attendants can handle incoming calls and route callers to station users without intervention from the systems attendant. Direct incoming ring to Voice Mail/Auto Attendant groups can be done directly through CO Line Ringing Assignments. When programming Voice Mail Groups, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows: Related Programming: Voice Mail Outpulsing Table, Sec. 645.2; Voice Mail ID digits for incoming CO calls, Sec. 645.3; CO Line Attributes, CO Line Ringing Assignments, Sec. 620.1. 645-l Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (Cont’d) A. Alternate Voice Mail Group Programming Steps To program an alternate group: 1. Press the ALTERNATE VM GP flexible button (Button #9). 2. Enter the three-digit pilot number (440 to 447) of the desired group. 3. Press the HOLD button to enter data. B. “Leave” Mail Index Entry Programming Steps To specify the “Leave” mail index (outpulsing table) to be accessed by a Voice Mail group: 1. Press the LEAVE flexible button (Button #lo). 2. Enter the one-digit outpulsing table number (O7) on the dial pad. 3. Press the HOLD button to enter the data. C. “Retrieve” Description ALTERNATE VM GP. An Alternate Voice Mail Group may be programmed so that if all Voice Mail ports are in use, the call can be routed to an alternate group. This is useful when more than eight ports are required for Voice Mail traffic. To delete an Alternate Voice Mail Group assignment, enter three pounds [#I##] on the keypad and press the HOLD button. Description LEAVE. The “Leave” mail index specifies the outpulsing Table where the “in-band” digits required to connect a caller, forwarded into Voice Mail, to the called stations mail box are stored. Refer to Sec. 645.2 for programming entries into an outpulsing table. To delete a “Leave” mail index entry, enter one pound [#] on the keypad and press the HOLD button. Mail Index Entry Programming Steps To program the “Retrieve” mail index (outpulsing table) to be accessed by the Voice Mail group: 1. Press the RETRIEVE flexible button (Button #ll). 2. Enter the one-digit outpulsing table number (O7) on the dial pad. 3. Press the HOLD button to enter the data. Description RETRIEVE. The “Retrieve” mail Index specifies the outpulsing table where the “In-band” digits required to connect a station user to their own mail box are stored. Refer to Sec. 645.2 for programming entries into an outpulsing table. NOTE: In order for the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System to send the Station Identification digits (station three-digit extension number), a Seave” and a “Retrieve” table must be referenced when assigning Voice Mail groups. However, the “Leave” and “Retrieve” outpulsing Tables (Sec. 645.2) can be empty (no entries in the referenced table). To delete a “Retrieve” mail index entry, enter one pound [#J on the keypad and press the HOLD button. 645-2 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Systems VOICE MAIL GROUPS (Cont’d) D. Station Assignment(s) Programming Steps To program the stations in the Voice Mail group: 1. Press the STATION ASSIGN flexible button (Button #12). 2. Enter the three digit station numbers. A maximum of eight SLT stations may be entered. 3. Press the HOLD button to enter the data. Issue 1, November 1991 Description Up to eight (8) SLT or OPX port extension numbers may be programmed into a Voice Mail group. The ports will be designated as two-way ports by directing calls to any one of the ports and allowing any one of the ports (or all ports) to be used as VM out dial and/or VM notify ports. A flexible button may be programmed with a Voice Mail group pilot number. This button will then act as a DSS for that Voice Mail group when pressed and also serves as the message waiting indication for that VM group. 845-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems VOICE MAIL OUTPULSING 848.2 mARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2666 TABLE Voice Mail In-Band Signaling: A. Programming If Voice Mail In-Band signalling is to be used: 1. Press FLASH and dial [88]. The following message is shown on the display phone. 2. 3. 4. 5. Where: y = the table index (O-7) x = entered digits (O-9, #, l , Pauses) The TABLE 1 flexible button (Button #l) led is lit. To change tables, press the appropriate flexible button (Buttons 2-8) and perform the following procedures. Dial one of the following, if required: 0 = if a prefix is required 1 = if a suffix is required # = if entry is to be deleted Enter up to 12 digits required including ‘*’ and ‘#‘. TRAN button = pause. Press the HOLD button. Display will now update. 645-4 Description Steps Entries into one of the eight (8) Voice Mail Outpulsing Tables determine the In-Band signaling required for “Retrieving” messages (allows for stations to pick up mail) and “Leaving” messages (allows stations to leave messages in voice mail). When programming Voice Mail In-Band Signaling tables and Disconnect table, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows: y; ,?.::........... ~$&@$$#~] as@.,,,Em TABLE 6 [ ~~~~~~ Build a table (“0” for example) for any additional digits other than the Station Extension Number (Voice Mail Box Number)needed for a caller to leave a message in a station’s mailbox. (“Leave”) Build another table (“1” for example) for any additional digits needed for a mailbox holder to retrieve a message (“Retrieve”). NOTE: Entries are not required in the Outpulsing Tab/e, however a table must be referenced when setting up the Voice Mailgroups (FLASH 65) forboth Leave and Retrieve data fields, if /n-Band signaling is desired, Related Programming: Voice Mail Group programming, In-band digits sent on incoming CO Calls. Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 VOICE MAIL OUTPULSING TABLE (Cont’d) B. Table: Voice Mail Disconnect Programming Steps 1. Press the DISCONNECT TABLE 8 flexible button (Button #$I) . This is the table number used for the Voice Mail disconnect signal. 2. Enter up to 12 digits which will be used for the disconnect signal, including ‘*’ and ‘Y. TRAN button = pause. 3. Press the HOLD button. Display will now update. Digital Key Telephone Systems Description To avoid Voice Mail ports from being tied up as a result of CO line callers abandoning the call or not exiting the VM system properly, a disconnect signal can be programmed into the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System to notify the VM system that a call has been abandoned. This is accomplished through “in-band” signaling. If a CO disconnect signal is detected, the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System will send a series of DTMF digits programmed in the Voice Mail disconnect table (outpulsing table eight (8)) to the Voice Mail port. This can be any digit stream up to 12 digits including =*’ and “#“. This table will serve all eight voice mail groups. These digits are not used as a result of an internal station disconnecting from Voice Mail. In this case silence is provided for a short period followed by busy tone. This method is also used for CO lines when the VM disconnect table is empty. The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System will provide Loop Supervision monitoring while a CO call is connected to a port designated as Voice Mail. Default: By default programming there are no entries in the disconnect table (table eight (8)). NOTE: Loop supervision must be enabled on the CO lines (in CO line programming) in order for VM disconnect feature to operate. issue 1, November 1991 545-5 Digital Key Telephone 645.3 Systems VOICE MAIL IN-BAND DIGITS Programming Steps If Voice Mail ID digits are to be enabled or disabled for Incoming CO callers: 1. Press FLASH and dial [671. The following message will be shown on the display: 2. Press Flex button 1 to enable or disable ID digits. l LED on = ID digits are enabled LED off = ID digits are disabled 3. Press HOLD button. The display will now update. l 645-6 Description The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System allows the system to be programmed so that if a station programmed to receive incoming CO line ringing is forwarded to Voice Mail they may have direct incoming callers routed directly into their stations voice mail box through the use of “In-Band signalling. Alternately, when disabled, callers will be answered by the Voice Mail or Auto Attendant Main greeting. Incoming CO callers can be Station Call Forwarded into voice mail only when the ringing CO line is programmed to ring at one station. Additionally CO lines programmed to ring at an attendant station will station call forward into the Voice Mail system (if programmed to ring only at one attendant station) and be presented to the main greeting (not the attendant stations mail box) even when ID digits are enabled. Default: By default, ID digits for incoming CO calls is disabled. Related Programming: Voice Mail group programming, Sec. 645.1; Voice Mail Outpulsing table, Sec. 645.2) Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone SECTION 650 EXCEPTION TABLES PROGRAMMING 650.1 INTRODUCTION Programming Steps The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System offers a flexible means of applying toll restriction to stations or individuals. Dialing privileges (or toll restriction) is determined through assignment of station and CO line Class Of Service (COS). Several types of restriction can be derived simply by programming COS assignments and CO line access to stations. This may, in some cases, be all that is necessary. However, when a more complex or specific type of restriction is desired the system offers two allow and two deny tables along with four special tables. These tables can be programmed in a variety of ways to handle applications that are straight forward or applications that require a more complex arrangement. The allow and deny tables are assigned to stations based on their station Class of Service (COS) assignment. The Station (COS) interacts with CO Line COS assignments to provide several different types of dialing privileges (Refer to CO/Station COS matrix below). The Allow and Deny tables allow entries of either general or specific allow and deny codes such as allowing all [I -8001 type calls, and/or denying all [I]+ or [0]+ calls. The allow and deny tables allow a maximum of eight digits to be entered as allow or deny digits. This allows for entry of certain area codes or office codes or a combination of area code Systems - plus office code that can specifically be allowed or denied. For example the code [I 555-l 2121 may be entered in the deny table to deny local toll information calls. Each allow table contains twenty (20) bins for entry of allow codes. Each deny table contains ten (10) bins for entry of deny codes The following rules should be remembered when setting up the Allow/Deny tables (Refer to Table 650-2). 1. If both tables (allow and deny) have no entries, no restriction is applied. 2. If entries are made in the allow table and only there, then only those numbers are allowed. All other dialing is denied. 3. If entries are made in the deny table and only there, then only those numbers are denied. All other dialing is allowed. 4. If there are entries in both allow and deny tables, the allow table is searched first and if a match is found, it is allowed. If a match is not found, the deny table is searched and if a match is found there, the call is denied. If the number does not match an entry in either table, it is allowed. A special “Don’t Care” (‘II”) character may be entered as a digit to either allow or deny any digit dialed in that digit sequence. For example a code [I “D” 0] and [I ‘ID” I] may be entered in the deny table which would allow local long distance calls (numbers dialed Table 650-l Class of Service (CCXl CO LINE CLASS OF SERVICE ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ i:i:$i::ii.iiFy:i:i::::::.:.:.; .. ,. .........,. S T A T I 0 N C 0 S Canned Restriction* Canned Table A Unrestricted Restriction Canned Unrestricted Table B Restriction Canned Table A Table B Restriction Canned Canned Canned Restriction Restriction Restriction Intercom Intercom Intercom only only only *Canned Restriction= No ‘O’, 1, #, I*’ as a first dialed digit, and 7 digits maximum 1911, 1611 are allowed and 41 I, 976, and 555 numbers are denied. Issue 1, November Unrestricted 1991 Unrestricted .......... Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Unrestricted Intercom only plus I-800, 650-l Digital Key Telephone Systems Table 650-2 Allow/Deny NO ENTRIES sTARPLUS@ B. Toll Table , ( A FOUND D- El with a 1 followed by a seven digit local number), but would deny long distance calls (numbers dialed with a 1 followed by an area code). The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System also offers four (4) special tables that can be referenced from within the two allow tables. Three of the special tables can be assigned to specific area codes that require further toll restriction definition. The fourth special table is reserved for use as a home area code table (numbers within the same area code as the site where the system is installed). This provides expanded ability to apply toll restriction on numbers that are dialed within an area code. Each special table will allow up to (800) entries (200-999). This offers the ability to allow every office code on an individual basis 650.2 A. RELATED ITEMS TO TOLL RESTRICTION CO/PBX Lines When CO lines are marked as PBX lines (refer to CO line programming Sec. 620) the system will first check the PBX code table (refer to Sec. 610.5) for a valid match. If the first digits dialed do not match the entries in the PBX code table the call is considered an attempt to call another PBX extension and no toll restriction is applied. If the first digits dialed are found in the PBX code table then toll restriction will start with the next dialed digit. 650-2 Codes The system can optionally force the use of account codes on all restricted calls. When forced account codes are enabled (see Sec. 610.9), an account code must be entered to place a call that is otherwise restricted through toll restriction. By entering an account code the stations effective class of service becomes that equal to class of service 1 (unrestricted). When account codes are forced on a system wide basis selected users may be instructed on how to enter account codes from any station and be allowed to dial unrestricted from a station that may otherwise be restricted. Use of account codes in this manner, as a traveling class-of-service, is however not controlled by the system. Any station user with knowledge of how to enter account codes to override a stations toll restriction will be allowed to do so. ALLOW FOUND Forced Account SPD 1428 & 2856 C. SLT DTMF Receivers When single line telephones are connected to the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System and toll restriction is enabled the system DTMF receivers located on the CO/Station board will monitor the call for a programmed period of time (refer to Sec. 610.1, SLT Receiver Timer). While the DTMF receiver is monitoring the digits being dialed, by a single line telephone, it is considered busy and not available for monitoring another SLT attempting to dial. When all DTMF receivers are busy, an SLT attempting to go off-hook will not receive dial tone until a receiver is available. The system allows up to seven (7) DTMF receivers to be installed in the system for monitoring SLT dialing. If a system has heavy SLT usage toll restriction may inhibit dialing by SLT stations. Two options are available to help alleviate this problem; 1) shorten the SLT receiver timer (refer to Sec. 610.1). This will free up DTMF receivers faster, however, may not provide the desired toll restriction for SLT stations; 2) Enable LCR and force LCR on SLT stations. When the LCR data base is set up the three digit table allows for entry of the number of digits to be expected. When a SLT dials the appropriate number of digits LCR will release the DTMF receiver and then be available for another SLT call. D. LCR VS. Toll Restriction LCR is not intended to be an alternative to toll restriction nor is toll restriction intended to be a alternate to LCR. In fact they both work best when programmed together. Toll restriction provides the dialing privileges that stations are allowed and LCR provides the routing of calls onto the proper type of lines. LCR can enhance toll restriction in that LCR provides a “Store and Forward” operation that allows the system to analyze the digits being dialed before a trunk is seized. This prevents users from by-passIssue 1, November 1991 *AFtPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Systems ing toll restriction by taking advantage of the time it takes for a central office line to provide dial tone. Because of this it is recommended that LCR be considered when toll restriction is desired. Issue 1, November 1991 650-3 Digital Key Telephone 850.3 A. Systems TOLL RESTRICTION Entering SPD 1428 & 2868 PROGRAMMING Toll Table Programming Programming 4 sTARPLUS@ Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. (Refer to Sec. 600.2). NOTE: It is recommended that the Exception Tables be initializedprior to entering data into the tables. Do this by following the instructions in Sec. 600.5 for initializing the Exception Tables (Flash 80). This procedure may also be repeated if it is determined that data in the exception tables has become corrupt. However, after initializing the exception tab/es, for this purpose, all data must be re-entered into the tables. 1. Press FLASH and dial [70]. The following message will be shown on the display phone: Description All toll tables have been conveniently placed under one program code to allow entry of all toll restriction data. When entering toll information the buttons on the phone will be mapped as follows: ::::/:: ........::.:.:::,,, , , ~ii:i$g$&@ Bi:ll”‘:i:::::;:,:iii .p /i:i:i:*i$$:p:::&f 2. To program allow/deny tables, press the appropriate Table button and enter information as outlined in the following procedures. 3. To program Special Tables 1-3, it is necessary to associate an area code to the table. This is done by pressing the appropriate “AREACODE TBL” button and assign the area code. NOTE: Special Table 4 is reserved for the home area code and does not require a area code entry. 4. To display entries in any of the tables, press the DISPLAY TABLES button (button #12). Entries in the allow/deny tables will display two at a time. Entries in the special tables will be displayed six (6) at a time in ascending order. When the system searches the allow and deny tables, the entries are checked starting with Bin 01 and proceeding sequentially through the table to the last bin. In addition The allow table is always searched before looking at the deny table. Therefore the order of entry is important. Entries that are specific (i.e. [l 7161) should be placed ahead of entries that are more general (usually include “Don’t Care” digits i.e. [l “D” 11). Once a match is found, in the allow table, that references a special table the number dialed will be checked for an allowed code in the special table. If a match is not found in the special table the system will continue to check for a match in the next allow or deny table that is to be checked. The system will not return to the table that sent the call to the special table. :. 650-4 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ Exception B. SPD 1428 & 2858 Tables Programming Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) Allow Table Programming Programming Steps 1. Press the ALLOW TABLE A or ALLOW TABLE B flexible button (Button #l or #3). The following display will be shown on the display telephone: The first two bins locations are displayed. 2. Enter the two-digit bin number (01-20) of the bin to be programmed. NOTE: It is recommended that: Bin 17 be reserved for an entry that will reference special table number 1; Bin 18 be reserved for an entry that will reference special tab/e number 2; Bin 19 be reserved for referencing special table number 3; Bin 20 be reserved for referencing the Home area code table, special table number 4. 3. Enter the allow code: where: 0 to 9, *, # = corresponding allow digits (numbers) MUTE = Don’t Care digit (“D”) TRANS = search special table (“S”) 4. Press HOLD button after each entry. 5. When all entries for one table are complete, press the flexible button for the next table. The following rules should be applied when making entries that will reference the special tables: 1. For entries referencing the first three special tables a specific area code must be identified (one for each table needed). Then make note as to how the numbers will be dialed when dialing numbers to this area code (i.e. with a leading digit [l] or no leading digit [l]). The entry into the allow table would be entered as follows: Leading digit [l] - BB 1 XXX DDD {S} or Non Leading [l] - BB XXX DDD {S} Where: BB = Bin number (recommended 17-l 9) Issue 1, November 1991 Description Allow Table - Each Allow table contains twenty (20) bin numbers. Each bin number may be up to eight (8) digits in length including {Don’t Care} digits and {Search Special Table} commands. Entries into the allow table represent exceptions to numbers or codes that are to be allowed only if they would otherwise be restricted by an entry in the deny table. For example if [ 1 555 12121 is to be allowed but [ l+] numbers are denied, by an entry into the deny table, then [l 555 12121 should be entered into the allow table as an allowed number. . Allow table A is referenced and searched first (before the deny table A) when Station COS is 2 and CO line COS is either 1 or 2. l Allow table B is referenced and looked at first (before the deny table B) when Station COS is 3 and CO line COS is either 1 or 3. . When station COS is 4 and CO line COS is 1 both allow tables are looked at first (allow table A first then allow table B) then both deny tables (deny table A first then deny table B). Don’t Care digits specify that the system should consider any digit dialed in that position as a match. Don’t Care digits should not be entered as the last digit in an entry, as this would be an unnecessary or meaningless command. Search Special Table commands must be entered in a specific manner and should always be placed as the last entries in the Allow table. It is recommended that the last four bins (17-20) in the allow table be reserved for referencing the four (4) special tables with the reference to the home area code (special table 4) always being located in bin number 20. Search Special table commands can only be entered into the allow tables. To erase a bin, enter the two-digit bin number following by pressing the HOLD button. 650-S Digital Key Telephone Exception Systems Tables Programming Allow Table Programming Programming sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 (Cont’d) (Cont’d) Steps Description XXX = Area code (must match AREA-X entry) DDD = “Don’t Care” digit (three entries, DND button) {S}= Search Special Table Command (TRANS button) 2. For an entry that is to reference the Home Area Code table (special table 4) the entry may also be entered to expect or not expect a leading digit [il. In fact in some cases it may be desirable to enter both of the following entries; Leading digit [I] - BB 1 DDD {S} and/or Non Leading [l] - BB DDD {S} Where: BB = Bin number (recommended bin 20) DDD = “Don’t Care” digit (three entries, MUTE button) {S}= Search Special Table Command (TRANS button) NOTE: If both leading digit [1] and non-leading digit [I] entries are made to reference the same table it is necessaty to place the leading digit [1] entry ahead of the non-leading digit [I] entry in the allow table. 650-6 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Exception C. Tables Programming Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) Deny Table Programming Programming Steps 1. Press the DENY TABLE A or DENY TABLE B flexible button (Button #2 or #4). The following display will be shown on the display phone: The first two bin locations are displayed. 2. Enter the two-digit bin number (01-10) of the bin to be programmed. 3. Enter the deny code: where: 0 to 9, l , # = corresponding deny digits (numbers) MUTE = Don’t Care digit 4. Press HOLD button after each entry. 5. When all entries for one table are complete, press the flexible button for the next table. Issue 1, November 1991 Description Deny Table - Each Deny table contains ten (10) bin numbers. Each bin number may be up to eight (8) digits in length including {Don’t Care} digits. Entries in the deny table represent numbers or codes that are to be denied or restricted. Common entries would be [i] for restricting all [l+] type of calls. Exceptions to this restriction would be entered into the allow table. . Deny table A is referenced and searched only after the allow table A is checked when Station COS is 2 and CO line COS is either 1 or 2. . Deny table B is referenced and searched only after the allow table B is checked when Station COS is 3 and CO line COS is either 1 or 3. . When station COS is 4 and CO line COS is 1 both allow tables are looked at first (allow table A first then allow table B) then both deny tables (deny table A first then deny table B). Don’t Care digits specify that the system should consider any digit dialed in that position as a match. Don’t Care digits should not be entered as the last digit in an entry. Search Special table commands can not be entered into the Deny tables. To erase a bin, enter the two-digit bin number followed by pressing the HOLD button. 650-7 Digital Key Telephone Exception D. Systems Tables Programming sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 (Cont’d) Special Table Programming Programming Steps To program a special table, it is first necessary to assign an area code to the table (except for the home area code). To assign an area code to a special table: 1. Press the appropriate AREA CODE TABLE (i-4) flexible button (button #9-l 1). The following display will be shown on the display phone: 2. Enter the three (3) digit area code. 3. Press the HOLD button. The display will now update. To enter office codes into the special table: 4. Press the SPECIAL TABLE (l-4) flexible button (button #5 - #8) that corresponds to the area code programmed above. The following display will be shown on the display phone: Desctiotion The special tables provide greater flexibility in designing a toll plan for a particular site. Each special table allows entry of up to 800 three digit office codes (200 - 999). Three of these tables must be assigned an area code by which they are referenced. the fourth table is reserved for the home area code and requires no area code entry. The special tables are referenced through entries in the allow tables. Four area codes, including the home area code, can be referenced to these special tables for further definition. When a special table is referenced, entries must be made in the special table specifying what office codes will be allowed. By default no codes are on the allow list. Codes can be added to the allow list or removed from the list. When a special table is checked for a match, to a three digit code, but not found the system will then continue to search the next allow deny table that is to be checked. The system does not return to the allow table which routed the call to the special table. Where: XXX= Area Code 5. Enter the three (3) digit office codes that are to be allowed followed by a [l] which means to allow this code. To remove a code from the allow list enter the three (3) digit office code followed by a [0] which will remove the code from the allow list. XXX [I] = Allow code XXX [0] = Remove code from the list Where XXX = an office code from 200 to 999. 6. Press HOLD after every code entered. Multiple codes may be entered in a row. The display will update showing the first six codes in ascending order. 650-8 Issue 1, November 1991 Exception E. Tables Programming Displaying (Cont’d) Toll Table Entries Programming Steps To display entries in either the Allow/Deny tables or the soecial tables: 1. Press the DISPLAY TABLES flexible button (button #12) while entering information into a table. 2. While viewing entries made into an allow or deny table, two (2) entries at a time will be displayed on the bottom line of the display. By pressing the DISPLAY TABLES button again, the next higher bins will be displayed. When the last entries are displayed pressing the DISPLAY TABLES button again will show the first two entries. Description It is possible to view entries in the toll tables using the disDlav on the Executive teleDhone. To view all entries: the DISPLAY TABLES flexible button (Button #12) is pressed multiple times to scroll through the entries. NOTE: It is recommended to view all entries in the Allow and Deny table before leaving programming. Entries can be entered near the bottom of the list either for searching the special tab/es or entries Bat may have been made in error. Viewing the entire allow table will ensure proper entry and operation. Where: X= Allow or Deny Code E= End of Entry While viewing entries in a special table, six (6) three digit codes, that have been allowed, will be displayed in ascending order starting with the lowest entry. By pressing the DISPLAY TABLES button again, the next six (6) entries will be displayed. This will continue until all codes have been displayed. Where: XXX= Area Code YYY= Allowed Office Code Issue 1, November 1991 650-9 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2888 Digital Key Telephone SECTION 655 LEAST COST ROUTING PROGRAMMING A. Introduction B. Least Cost Routing (LCR) selects the most economical programmed route for an outgoing call. When a station user dials an outside number, the LCR feature analyzes the number and then automatically chooses an outside line from the group that has been programmed as most economical. The LCR feature puts the responsibility of choosing the least expensive route for each area code and exchange code on the system administrator, not on the station user. In order to make a routing decision, the LCR feature is programmed in the system database. The successful operation of this feature is completely dependent on the accuracy of the programming. There are eight (8) different tables which are set up to monitor the dialing of digits and to select the best route for the call depending on time of day and day of week. tables are: Three (3) Digit Area/Office Table Code Routing Six (6) Digit Office Code Routing Table Exception Table Route List Table Insert/Delete Table Daily Start Time Table Weekday (Weekly) Schedule Toll Information Issue 1, November Table 1991 Systems . LCR Operation The system first checks to see if the number dialed is more than two digits. If it is two digits or less, the call is processed according to instructions in the Exception Table. If the number is not found in the Exception Table, the call is denied. If the number is more than two digits, it goes to the 3 Digit Table. If the first digit dialed is a “1” the leading 1 table will be checked with the following three digits. if the first digit dialed is not a “1” then the first three digits are checked against the NonLeading 1 three digit table. The first three digits (either office code or area code) are then checked to see if they are in the 3 Digit Table. If they are not found there, the call is denied. If the digits are found in the 3 Digit Table, the system then checks for an entry to see if the 6 Digit Table must be referenced. If the 6 Digit column is marked [yes] in the three digit table entry, the number is then checked in the 6 Digit Table. There are twenty (20) six digit tables. Each six digit table is programmed and becomes associated to a specific area code with a selected route. Office codes are entered into the six (6) digit table that will be routed to a specific route list table. This allows the system administrator to split area codes for routing to different lines connected to the system. This helps when Foreign Exchange lines (FX Lines), Banded WATS lines, or “Dedicated” Lines (OPX’s from another system) are in use. If the office code is not found in the 6 Digit Table, the call is referred back to the 3 Digit Table for selecting a route list table. And then goes through the same procedures as described below. Before actually selecting a route list table, the number is checked against the toll restriction tables (station COS). When LCR is enabled, only station Class of Service is referenced. CO line Class of Service is no longer applicable. All CO lines are considered Class of Service 1. If the call is not allowed through the toll restriction tables, the call is denied. If it is allowed, the call then goes to the Route List Table as specified by either the three (3) digit or six (6) digit table. The Time of day and Day of week is determined and the call is presented to the corresponding time period route within the specified route table. Each of the sixteen (16) Route Tables contain four time sensitive 655-l Digital 4 Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 routes. Routes are determined by the time of day and day of week as specified in the Daily Start Time table and the Weekly Schedule table. After the appropriate route is selected, LCR Class of Service becomes applicable. A station can use only those line groups programmed with a priority number equal to or higher than the station’s LCR Class of Service. If a line is not available in the first choice line group, the system advances to the next choice line group and searches for a free line. This process continues until an available line is found, or the last available line group is searched ,or until a line group is reached with a priority assignment lower than the station’s LCR Class of Service assignment. When a line is available the system will seize that line and wait for dial tone. Then before dialing, the system checks the Insert/Delete table for digits that should be deleted from the front of the number or digits that should be inserted either before or after the number dialed. Finally the system begins to dial the number out over the selected line. All of this analyzing and manipulation of the number takes only a fraction of a second from the time the station user begins to dial until the number is dialed out over the public network lines. If no lines are available in any of the CO line groups programmed for that route and allowed to that station, the call can be automatically queued on to the first choice (least costly) line group. If the user waits three seconds after dialing the number, they will hear confirmation tone which indicates that an automatic LCR Queue Callback has been activated on the first choice line group. When a CO line becomes available in the first choice line group the system will ring the calling station. When answered by the station the system will automatically seize the line and redial the number. 655-2 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ LCR PROGRAMMING C. Digital Key Telephone SPD 1428 & 2858 Systems (Cont’d) LCR Programming Programming Description Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. (Refer to Sec. 600.2). To program the system for Least Cost Routing: 1. Press FLASH and dial [75]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. There are eight tables which can be programmed here for LCR (you must also program LCR Class of Service in Station Programming). Use the procedures listed below to program these LCR tables: NOTE: It is extremely important that the worksheets be completed before programming the LCR tables. The Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature allows for the automatic selection of the most economical trunk according to the number dialed and the time of day and day of the week. There are eight different tables which are set up to monitor the dialing of digits of a station and to select the best route programmed for the call. These tables are: l Three (3) Digit Area/Office Table Code Routing l Six (6) Digit Office Code Routing Table l Exception Table l Route List Table l Insert/Delete l Daily Start Time Table l Weekday (Weekly) Schedule Table Toll Information Table When programming LCR the flexible buttons are -.. mapped as follows: ~~~~j 3-DIGIT TABLE l~~~~ai~~ ,~~~~~~~~~i~] 6-DIGm T*BE :::+..%:.. ,...).,y ~~~1 MCEPnON T*BLEs $$gjg@q ..>$. j:j:: ‘)<< :2:.....‘:.:::~,:~~ $qg$#$$ fg.&g&:i::g+jWlJ-rEDSTTABLE1 :.:.:..:.:.... <.. ~j;~~ ~~~~Laidii:f ,NSERTIMLm T*BE ] .:>.:......, .:.: p@##@gj ~1 DA,lYTIMETABLE 1 :pi:?Y...::$$x”:~ * ~~~ffiaij -KLYTIMETABE 1 /:!&r:&&g ~~~~ TOLL,pJFORMAJJON 1 l Default: The three digit tables contain a default where all Long distance (numbers requiring an area code) with a leading digit “1 It are routed to Route List Table 00. Route List Table 00 will route calls on lines in group 1 for all time periods. All Local calls (numbers that are dialed without an area code) with or without a leading digit “1” are routed to route list table 01. Route table 01 also routes calls using lines in line group 1 for all time periods. Refer to the LCR Data Base printout Table 665.7 for a complete listing of the LCR default data. Related Programming: LCR Enable/Disable, Sec. 610.23; Station Class of service and station LCR Class of service in Sec. 630. Issue 1, November 1991 655-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems LCR PROGRAMMING (Cont’d) D. 3-Digit Area/Office Code Table Programming Steps Description 1. Press 3-DIGIT TABLE flexible button (Button # 1). The following message will be shown on the display phone: , 3 Digit Area/Office Code Table. This table is divided into two sections - Leading 1 (a [l] is dialed before the number) and Non Leading 1 (no [l] is dialed before the number). This gives the system the ability to handle call routing in areas that require a [l] before a long distance number, as well as in areas that do not require the [l]. Both of these tables include all area codes (NPA’s), and office codes (NXX’s), from 000 to 999, including such numbers as 911, 411, etc. A complete entry into these tables include a route list table to be used, if the 6 Digit Table is to be checked and the number of digits likely to be dialed (example 7 digits or 10 digits). All local office codes must be entered in this table even if they do not require long distance calling. The number of digits to expect entry will aid the system in identifying when the last digit is dialed and to begin routing the call. This also helps to free SLT DTMF receivers if SLT traffic in the system is heavy. For international calls, use “00” as number of digits to expect. This causes the system to wait 5 seconds after user dials last digit before the system accesses a CO line and dials out. Where: L = [0] for non leading 1 (“1” not dialed) [l] for leading l(y1’ is dialed) NNN = area/office code RR = route list number 00-15 Y = [0] do not go to 6 digit table [l] go to 6 digit table PP = number of digits expected to be dialed. 2. Press the HOLD button to enter the data. Display will now update. Appendix NON-LEADING (0) CODE LEADING (1) (NNN) 0 i II 0 I1 0 A-l 3 3-Digit RTE (RR) 6 DIG(6) (Y/N) 1 Area/Office Code Route List Table NON-LEADING (0) CODE LEADING (1) (NNN) 0 I # DIG I 0 ! 0 0 1 0 i w SPD 1428 & 2656 sTARPLUS@ RTE (RR) 0 1 0 i I I I I 0 3 6 DIG(6) (Y/N) # DIG _ I I 1 I I I Figure 655-l Ex: 3-Digit Area/Off ice Code Table Pgm Form 655-4 Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 LCR PROGRAMMING E. Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) 6-Digit Office Code Table Programming Steps Description 1. Press the 6-DIGIT TABLE flexible button (Button # 2). The following message is then shown on the display phone: Where: S = [0] to remove codes [l] to add codes AAA = area code RR = route number 00-15 NNN = office code 2. Press HOLD after each office code entry. 3. Enter additional office codes to be programmed into the same Area Code/ Route Table, pressing hold after each office code entry. 4. Press a flexible button to program a different table. Appendix 6 Digit Office Code Table. This table is used to determine a route for one or a group of individual off ice codes within an area code. Certain office codes within an area code can be given unique or special routing. If the office code dialed is not found in the 6 Digit Office Code Table, the call is then routed according to the route list table as was entered in the 3 Digit Table. The system allows for twenty (20) six (6) digit Area/Office code tables that may be used to route specific office codes within an area code. Each iable will route calls for a common area code to a specified route. All entries made into a table will route those office codes to the specified route list table. An area code may be entered into more than one six (6) digit table with different routes specified. To delete all entries in an Area Code/Route table, enter 0 IMA RR ###. A-14 6-Digit Office Code Table Figure 655-2 Ex: 6-Digit Office Code Table Pgm Form Issue 1, November 1991 655-5 Diqital Key Telephone Systems LCR PROGRAMMING (Cont’d) sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 8c 2656 - ., F. Exception Code Table Programming Steps Description 1. Press EXCEPTION TABLES flexible button (Button #3). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 4 Exception Table. This table is used for operator calls and any other calls which would use a one- or two-digit entry rather than a three-digit area code. Where: S = [0] to remove code from table [l] to add code to table XX= exception codes (for single digit codes, press MUTE button (flexible button 27) as 2nd digit). The digits [‘I and [#] may be entered as valid digits. RR= route table number, 00-15 2. HOLD must be pressed after each entry. Display will now update. 3. Press Button #3 again for further entries. Up to 20 Exception codes may be programmed in this table. Appendix CODE # EXCEPTION CODES Wo A-15 LCR Exception ROUTE CODE # 9 19 IO 20 Figure 655-3 Ex: Exception 655-6 Code Table EXCEPTION CODES oo<) ROUTE Code Table Pgm Form Issue 1, November 1991 SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ LCR PROGRAMMING G. Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) Route List Table Programming Steps 1. Press the ROUTE LIST TABLE flexible button (Button #4). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Where: RR T G DD = = = = Route List Table number 00-l 5 Time Period Route list 1-4 CO tine Group 1-7 Insert/Delete Table reference 00-l 9 (## for none) L= LCR Class of Service (LCOS) 2. Press HOLD. Display will now update. 3. To enter additional CO line groups in the same time period route list number: Dial G DD L HOLD To enter data for a different time period route list: 4. Press program button 4 and enter all data (RR T G DD L). 5. Repeat above to program a new Route Number 00 to 15 or press a flexible button to program other LCR data. Table 666-l LCR Class of Service Table Description Route List Table. Up to sixteen different Route list tables can be programmed. Each route list table contains four time period routing lists, one for each of the available (four) daily start time periods. Within each time period route list up to seven CO (outside) line groups and their corresponding Insert/Delete Table if any and LCR class of service priority are programmed on a per line group basis. When routing a CO call through LCR, CO Line groups are accessed in sequence so that the first line group entered represents the least costly (and first selected) and the last line group entered represents the most costly (and last selected). The Route List Table references many other tables when processing a call for routing. First of all, the Daily start time table is referenced to determined what start time entry should be checked in the weekly schedule table. The corresponding entry in the weekly schedule table depending on the day of the week then determines which Time Period Route list should be used within the Route List Table. The system then begins to check for idle lines in the first entered CO line group and will proceed until an idle line is found. While it is searching for an idle CO line the Station LCR COS is checked against the entries for LCR COS Priority of the specific CO line groups (see LCR COS Priority explanation below). Once an idle CO line is found with a LCR priority equal to or higher than the stations LCR COS then a final check is made to determine if an Insert/Delete table should be referenced. Once all of the tables and entries are checked the system then processes the call on the outside CO line. NOTE: Make sure you have made entries into all Time Period Route List that are referenced in the week/y schedule table. LCR COS Priority. A station should be assigned a class of service for LCR (refer to station programming Sec. 630.1). The LCR COS can be between 0 and 6, with 0 being unrestricted and 6 being the most restrictive. Within the time period route List Table, line groups are given an LCR COS Priority assignment between 0 and 6. A station using LCR will be able to use only those CO (outside) line groups with a priority assignment of equal or higher value than the station’s LCR Class of Service (i.e. a station with LCOS 3 can use line groups with a priority of 3-6). Y= Has access to Line Group Issue 1, November 1991 655-7 Digital Key Telephone Systems LCR PROGRAMMING (Cont’d) H. Insert/Delete sTARPLUS@ Table Programming Steps 1. Press INSERT/DELETE TABLE flexible button (button #5). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Enter the table information as follows; Where: lT = Insert/Delete Table Number 00-I 9 X = [0] Pre-Delete numbers (first digits dialed in the number) [l] Pre-Insert numbers (insert digits in front of number dialed) [2] Post-Insert numbers (insert digits behind number dialed) DDD = digits (up to 16 digits may be deleted from the beginning of the number dialed and up to 40 digits can be inserted (20 pre and 20 post)). 2. Press HOLD after programming each table. Display will now update. To add and delete numbers in the same table, enter the different insertion / deletion tables in step 2 and enter as separate entries using the same table number. In the Insert Tables for LCR programming, press the TRANS button for a pause. Also both the [*I and [#] digits are allowed as valid digits for inserting digits dialed over the network. The r] and [#] are valid entries for adding digits in both the pre (in front of) or post (behind the number) tables. The r] and [#] can not be used as delete characters in the Delete Tables. Description Insert/Delete Table. Digits can be either added or deleted when dialing a number. For instance, if a user dials a long distance call that should be placed on a foreign exchange (FX) line, the digit [l] and the three digit area code (NPA) dialed by the user must be deleted before the call can be placed on that FX line. An Insert/Delete Table can be programmed to do this. Digits can also be added to a number that has been dialed by the user. For instance, Other Common Carrier (OCC) access codes and authorization (ID) codes can be automatically inserted by the system either in front of and/or behind the number dialed. There are twenty Insert/Delete Tables and each table allows for entries into a delete table and a pre and post insert table. Up to forty (40) digits (including pauses) can be inserted (twenty (20) pre and twenty (20) post) and up to sixteen digits can be deleted. Digits can be inserted before or after the number dialed but can be deleted only from the start of the number dialed. Figure 655-4 Ex: Insert/Delete 655-6 SPD 1428 & 2856 Pgm Form issue 1, November 1991 %ARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 LCR PROGRAMMING I. Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) Daily Start Time Table Programming Description Steps 1. Press the DAILY START flexible button (button #6). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 2. Enter times in military form (2400 Hours) in succession. Pressing the HOLD button after each time entered. Default times are 0800, 1700,230O (8 AM, 5 PM, and 11 PM), and the fourth time is disabled (####). To change a start time all times must be re-entered. 3. Display will now update. ###I# will display if nothing is entered for a specific time. Daily Start Time Table. The daily start time table is used to correlate the LCR routing table to the time sensitive discount structure offered by the customers carrier. For example in the most common situation the most expensive rate period is between 8:00 am and 500 pm, often called the day rate. The first discount period usually starts at 500 pm and runs until 11:OO pm, often called Evening Rates. The remaining time (from 11:OO pm until 890 am) in this example is referred to as night time rates which usually has the biggest discount. With the wide selection of Common Carriers the least costly route for a particular area code may be different at different times of the day. To accommodate this situation, this table and the Weekly Schedule Table work together, dividing the day into four possible time periods. By default these tables are set at the standard divisions of 8AM, SPM, and 11 PM. However, these times can be changed. The entries in the Daily Start Time table are used to select the time period to reference in the weekly schedule. Based on the time a call is placed the daily start time table selects the time period to choose in the weekly schedule. The weekly schedule is then used to determine the time period route list in the Route List Table to use for routing the call for a particular day of the week. The times are entered in the 24 hour fom-rat. Table 655-2 Daily Start Time & Weekly Schedule $$#:: Daily Start j&f& Time Table :i$e’$$ :... jL++$ (d@IadI -1 Issue 1, November 1991 R”EicList (800 am) e 1700 (5roo pm) e 2300 (ilroo #I## (not used) I Time Period 0800 pm) Tables kW$p e 655-9 Digital Key Telephone Systems LCR PROGRAMMING (Cont’d) J. Weekly Schedule SPD 1428 & 2656 Table Programming Steps 1. Press the WEEKLY SCHED flexible button (button #7). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 4 %ARPLUS@ Where: D= Day of the Week 0= Monday 1= Tuesday 2= Wednesday 3= Thursday 4= Friday 5= Saturday 6= Sunday T = Time Period Route List (l-4) to use for the time of day (based on the daily start time table). Enter values for all time periods specified in the daily start time table for that day. 1st T = Time Period Route list for the FIRST Daily Start Time. (applies to all Route List Tables) 2nd T = Time Period Route List for the SECOND Daily Start Time. (applies to all Route List Tables) 3rd T = Time Period Route List for the THIRD Daily Start Time. (applies to all Route List Tables) 4th T = Time Period Route List for the FOURTH Daily Start Time. (applies to all Route List Tables) 2. Press HOLD button after each complete daily entry. Display will now update. Description Weekly Schedule Table. The weekly schedule table determines what Time Period Route list to use within the Route List Table. When a call is placed and ultimately sent to a route list (call is not denied) based on the time of day the call is placed the Daily Start Time Table (see description above) selects the time period to reference in the weekly schedule table, The time period route entered for the specified time period, as determined in the daily start time table and based on the day of week, is then selected and the call will be routed according to the specified time period route list. For example: if a call is placed at 5:45 pm on a Monday then according to the daily start time table (using default values) the entry for time period two of the weekly schedule is checked. Because it is Monday the entry for time period two on Monday is used and the result is that the Time Period Route List number two (again using default values) will be used for all routes. Thus the call is routed according to the entries in Time Period Two (2) route list no mater what route (00-l 5) is selected. Refer to Table 655.3 below. Table 655-3 Ex: Daily & Weekly Start Time Tables 655-l 0 Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ LCR PROGRAMMING K. Digital Key Telephone SPD 1428 & 2856 LCR Routing Systems (Cont’d) for Toll Information Programming Description Steps 1. Press TOLL INFO flexible button (button #8) The following message will be shown on the display phone: 2. Enter P-digit Route List number (00-15) for the Route to be referenced in the Route List Table. 3. Press HOLD after programming the Route number. Display will now update. Enable LCR at this point. Refer to System programming. Toll Information routing adds provisions to the LCR call processing which will allow common call routing for all toll information calls. Both l-(XXX)555-1212 and 0(xX)-555-1212 calls will be intercepted and sent to a selected “Route List” in the “Route List Table”. The number dialed will be “looked at” before reaching the “Three Digit Table” and if it is determined to be a toll information call, preceded with an area code with or without a leading digit 1, the call will be sent to the “Route List” assigned in the toll information table. Default programming for Toll Information Calls will be to Route List Table zero (0) which will allow toll information calls to be placed on the system at default. A Toll Information route will be chosen over a 3-digit or 6-digit route assignment if both are assigned. Entering ## will deny all Toll Information calls. NOTE: Local information calls (555- 7212 or l-5557272) must be programmed separately within the 3-Digit Area/Office Code Table. . . : ..: . .. .. .. . . . .. .:.... . . . .:. . .. .. .. ..(...~....:,,,,,,: . . . ..+.~g~..$# ‘-+:B ::::::::::::::: ::.::::::,:.:.:.::::::::~~~ .:.:,,.,.,:,, TOLL INFORMATION ROUTE LIST TABLE Figure 655-5 Ex: LCR Toll Information Issue 1, November 1991 ~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~ ::~:::::~::::::~:i::i: ““~‘.:.~:A :.‘.>. ...,.:.::::::aril:i:i:,: ~‘iiiili!iiir:i~~~riiii:i:i:::: .:.:,,.,.,.,. Routing Pgm Form 655-l 1 LCR PROGRAMMING L. (Cont’d) Default LCR Data Base Programming Steps Description In an effort to decrease installation and set up time, usually associated with LCR, a default LCR data base has been incorporated. The default LCR data base will provide basic routing for local and long distance dialing. Default entries have been made in the Three Digit Table for local office codes (NNX’s) and all area codes (NPA’s). Two routes have been established with the default data base for routing of all calls under default. The entire default data base is shown in Table 665.7. The three digit tables contain a default where all Long distance (numbers requiring an area code) with a leading digit “1” are routed to Route table 00. Route Table 00 will route calls on lines in group 1 for all time periods. All Local calls (numbers that are dialed without an area code) with or without a leading digit “1’ are routed to route list table 01. Route list table 01 also routes calls using lines in line group 1 for all time periods. 655-l 2 Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 INITIALIZE A. Digital Key Telephone SECTION 660 DATA BASE PARAMETERS Systems - Introduction Programming Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. (Refer to Sec. 600.2). If Data Base Parameters need to be initialized: 1. Press FLASH and dial [80]. The following message will be shown on the display of a display phone: Issue 1, November 1991 Description This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to initialize the system data base retuming any programmed data to its original or default value. The entire system data base may be initialized or various portions of the data base may be individually initialized. In addition to initialization of the entire data base, a system reset (Button 8) command is also included in this section for clearing meantime errors. The buttons on the programming terminal are defined as shown below when initializing or resetting the system data base. 660-l Digital Key Telephone Initialize B. Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 Data Base Parameters Initialize System Parameters Programming Steps If System Parameters need to be initialized: 1. Press the System Parameters flexible button (Button #l). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Description The system parameters may be initialized setting all data fields to their original, default values. The following data fields are returned to their default values upon initializing the System parameters; 2. To initialize the system parameters, press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone is heard. 666-2 Issue 1, November 1991 Initialize Data Base Parameters Initialize System Parameters Programming (Cont’d) (Cont’d) Steps Description , Issue 1, November 1991 660-3 Digital Key Telephone Initialize C. Systems Data Base Parameters initialize sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2656 (Cont’d) CO Line Attributes Programming Steps If CO tine Attributes need to be initialized: 1. Press the CO Line Attributes flexible button (Button #2). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Description The CO Line parameters may be initialized setting all data fields to their original, default values. The following data fields are returned to their default value upon initializing the CO Line parameters; 2. To initialize the CO Line Attributes, press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone will be heard. DEFAULT VALUE 660-4 Issue 1, November 1991 SPD 1428 & 2858 sTARPLUS@ Initialize D. Data Base Parameters Initialize Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) Station Attributes Programming Steps Description If Station Attributes need to be initialized: 1. Press the Station Attributes flexible button (Button #3). The following message will be shown on the display phone: The Station parameters may be initialized setting all data fields to their original, default values. The following data fields are returned to their default value upon initializing the Station parameters; 2. To initialize the Station Attributes, press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone will be heard. Off-Hook Preference Issue 1, November 1991 660-5 Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2868 1 ZAMP ON DND HTP 7, r SPKRVOL CONF FUNGVOL Figure 660-l Default Button Mapping 660-6 Issue 1, November 1991 Initialize E. Data Base Parameters Initialize (Cont’d) Group Parameters Programming Steps Description If Group Parameters need to be initialized: 1. Press the Group Parameters flexible button (Button #4). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Hunt, UCD and Voice Mail Group parameters may be initialized setting all data fields to their original, default values. The following data fields are returned to their default value upon initializing Group parameters: 2. To initialize the Group parameters, press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone will be heard. FLEX BUT-TON l-8 PROGRAMCODE FLASH 30 9 FLASH 60 1-8 FEATURE Hunt Groups 330337 Station or Pilot Hunting UCD Groups 550-557 9 Alternate UCD Group Assign FLASH 62 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 1-2 I Overflow Assignment 1 UCD Station Assignments Announcement Table Assign UCD Ring Timer UCD Message Interval Timer UCD Overflow Timer UCD Wrap-Up Timer UCD No Answer Timer RAN Tables 1 and 2 FLASH 65 1-8 Voice Mail Groups 440447 9 Alternate VM Group Assign 10 Leave Table 11 Retrieve Table 12 VM Station Assignments Voice Mail Out-Pulsing Tables for in-band signaling Voice Mail Disconnect Table In-Band Digits for Incoming CO Calls FLASH 61 FLASH 66 l-7 8 FLASH 67 Issue 1, November 1 1991 DEFAULT VALUE (after initializing) No Hunt Groups established All Hunt Groups default using Pilot Hunting No UCD groups established No UCD Alternates group assignments is made 1 No Overflow assignment is made No stations are assigned No RAN tables are specified 060seconds 060 seconds 060seconds 004seconds 000 seconds (disabled) No RAN parameters set No Voice Mail groups are established No Alternate VM group assignmeni is made No outpulsing table is referenced No outpulsing table is referenced NO stations are assigned Out-pulse tables are empty by default Disconnect table is empty Disabled by default I 660-7 Initialize F. Data Base Parameters (Cont’d) Initialize Toll Tables Programming Steps If Exception Tables need to be initialized: 1. Press the Toll Tables flexible button (Button #5). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Description The Toll Table parameters including the Allow/Deny Tables and the Special Tables may be initialized setting all tables to their original, default values. The following Tables are cleared returning to their default value upon initializing the Exception Tables parame- , 2. To initialize the Toll Tables, press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone will be heard. TABLE ALLOW TABLE - A DENY TABLE - A ALLOW TABLE - B DENY TABLE - B SPECIAL TABLE 1 SPECIAL TABLE 2 SPECIAL TABLE 3 SPECIAL TABLE 4 666-6 DEFAULT VALUE (after initializing) Table Cleared (no entries Table Cleared (no entries) Table Cleared (no entries) Table Cleared (no entries) Table Cleared (no entries allowed, no area code specified) Table Cleared (no entries allowed, no area code specified) Table Cleared (no entries allowed, no area code specified) Table Cleared (no entries allowed) Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ Initialize G. Data Base Parameters Initialize Digital Key Telephone 1428 & 2856 SPD Systems (Cont’d) System Speed Programming Steps If System Speed bins need to be initialized: 1. Press the System Speed flexible button (Button #6). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Description Numbers entered into the System Speed dial Table may be initialized clearing all bins to their original, default value (empty). All bins 20 through 99 are cleared returning to their default value (empty) upon initializing the Speed Dial Table. 2. To initialize the System Speed bins, press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone will be heard. Issue 1, November 1991 660-9 Digital Key Telephone Systems Initialize Data Base Parameters H. Initialize sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 (Cont’d) LCR Tables Programming Steps If LCR Tables need to be initialized: 1. Press the LCR Tables flexible button (Button #7). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Description The LCR Tables may be initialized setting all tables to their original, default values. The following tables will be reset to their original default value after initialization of the LCR tables; 0 Exception Table 2. To initialize the LCR Tables, press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone will be heard. 660-l 0 l 3-Digit table l 6-Digit Table 0 Route List Table * Daily Start Time Table l Weekly Schedule l Insert/Delete l Toll Information Table Route Issue 1, November 1891 STARPLUS@ Initialize I. SPD 1428 & 2858 Data Base Parameters Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) Initialize Entire System and Reset (all parameters) Programming Steps If System needs to be initialized: 1. Press the System and Reset flexible button (Button #8). The following message will be shown on the display phone: Description To completely initialize the data base area including all non-programmable parameters held in Dynamic RAM (DRAM) and reset the system also clearing any meantime errors that may exist this command may be used. The system will require reprogramming of any customer specific data after using this command. This provides an easy way to re-initialize the system and clearing any meantime errors that may have accumulated inhibiting system operation or performance. 2. To initialize the entire system data base, press the HOLD button. The system will perform a hard reset. Issue 1, November 1991 660-l 1 Digital Key Telephone Initialize J. Systems Data Base Parameters Initialize sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 (Cont’d) ICLID Table Programming Steps Description If the ICLID Table(s) need to be initialized: 1. Press the ICLID TABLE flexible button (Button #9). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 2. To initialize the ICLID Table(s), press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone will be heard. 660-12 Issue 1, November 1891 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems SECTION 665 PRINTING SYSTEM DATA BASE PARAMETERS A. Introduction Programming Steps If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. (Refer to Sec. 600.2). If Data Base Parameters need to be printed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [85]. The following will be shown on the display phone: Description This section describes the procedures and steps necessary to print Data Base Parameters and various portions of the system. The buttons on the key telephone are defined as shown below when entering the Print Data Base Parameters programming area. ;, :::~:~:..:..:~:+:~:* ~~~~~~~~~ ~$q~:~:$&g$:~j SYSI-EM PARAMETEfqS 1 1 2. Choose the portion of the data base to be printed by pressing the appropriate button in the flexible button field. With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows the entire data base to be “dumped” as a permanent record which can serve as a hard copy of the data base. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. Refer to the following Figures for examples of the data base printouts. Also refer to the following paragraphs for instructions on printing only portions of the data base. Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming for setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. Issue 1, November 1991 665-l Digital Key Telephone Systems System Data Base Printouts B. Printing sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 (Cont’d) System Parameters Programming Steps If a printout of all System Parameters is desired: 1. Press the SYSTEM PARAMETERS flexible button (Button #I). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 2. To print the system parameter data base, press the HOLD button. The display will update. Description With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows the System Parameters data base to be “dumped” as a permanent record which can serve as a hard copy. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. When printing the System Parameters the following data is printed; l l l When the system has finished sending the information to the printer, confirmation tone will be heard. l All System Timers All System wide options (i.e. external night ringing, Hold preference etc...) Attendant programming Other system assignments (i.e. Page/Relay Assignments, Executive/Secretary, SMDR etc...) Weekly Night Mode schedule Refer to the following Figure for an example of the system parameters data base print out. Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming for setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. l 665-2 Issue 1, November 1991 SPb 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ Digital 2856 Digital Key-System Eng. Ver. O.lH DATE: MM/DD/YY TIME: HH:MM:SS ZF pAsswom: kNTER PROGRAMNO a-85 PRINT DATA-BASE EWI'ERBU'MONNUMBERB adm>q PRINTING SYS PARAM adm%YSTEMPARAM.ErERS Eng. Ver. O.lH SHREHRARTXFRPFTCFN F'I' 60 180 1 45 10 15 2 CPTCFT P'KICOT SRTMWI'H??T 10 15 3 20 0 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE RELAY/SENSOR ### 1 NONE 2 NONE 3 NONE 4 NONE 2 3 4 5 6 10 I/O BAUD RATES PORT l/ON BOARD= FORT 2/MODEM= FORT 3/RS232= PORT 4/RS422= ACCESS CODE 1 DISA ACCESS 2 ADMIN PASSWORD 100 3226 HFD 10 SDR TPE PNT BDR PORT N LD 80 4800 1 SYSTEMFEATURES AUTO NIGHT MODE A'INO SYHPENR MlwT PWT N YN YY WEEKLYNIGHT MODE SCHEDULE BGM LCR ACC GL Y N N Y DAY M 0 Tl ATTENDANT STATIONS 100 ### ### PBX DIALING CODES +I# ## ## ## ## 2= 3= 4= ift: ### PAIRINGS RELAY ASSIGNMENTS ON BOARD RELAY 1 NONE 2 NONE 3 NONE 4 NONE 5 NONE 6 NON-E 7 NONE RELAY/SENSOR ### 1 NONE 2 NONE ii EE 5 NONE 6 NONE RELAY/SENSOR ### 1 NONE z :z-i!I NONE N&E NONE RELAY/SENSOR ### 1 NONE 4 5 6 1991 3 F E 4 2 ZIK: #### N START TIME 1700 1700 1700 1700 1700 #### #### DIAL PULSE SPEED %% 1OPPS admin... Description System Timers: System SHR= System Hold Recall Timer EHR= Exclusive Hold Recall Timer ART= Attendant Recall Timer XFR= Transfer Recall Timer PFT= Preset Forward Timer CFN= Call Forward No-Answer Timer PT= Pause Timer CPT= Call Park Timer CFf= Conference Timer PTO= Page Timeout Timer COT= CO Ring Detect Timer SRT= Single Line Receiver Timer MWT= Message Wait Reminder Tone HFT= Hook Flash Timer HFD= Hookswitch Bounce Timer ATNO=Attendant Override SYHP= Hold Preference ENR= External Night Ringing EOWT=Exec Override Warn Tone PWT= Page Warning Tone BGM= Background Music LCR= LCR Enable/Disable ACC=Forced Account Codes GL=Group Listening Figure 665-l DB Printout Issue 1, November T ahm exiting Et ### ?i% 0800 0800 0800 0800 w2 DATE&TIME FORMAT MM/DD/YY, 12 HOURS EXECUT~~SEC$ARY 1= Systems 2 E-i-E SYSTEM TIMERS 180 Key Telephone of System Features: Parameters 665-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems System Data Base Printouts C. Printing sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 (Cont’d) CO Line Attributes Programming Steps If a printout of the CO tine Attributes is desired: 1. Press the CO LINE ATTRIBUTES flexible button (Button #2). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 2. To print the data for ALL CO Lines, press the HOLD button. To print CO Line data for a specified CO Line Range enter four digits to specify the CO Line range (two digits for the first line within the range and two digits for the last line in the range i.e. [0115]). If a print out of only one line is desired enter that line twice (i.e. [OlOi]). Then press the HOLD button. 3. The following display will be shown on the display phone and the CO Line data will be printed: Description With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows either a range of CO Lines or the entire CO Line data base to be “dumped” as a permanent record which can serve as a hard copy of the CO Line attribute data base. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. When printing the CO Line attributes the following data is printed; 0 All CO Line parameters range. l CO Line ringing specified range. within the specified assignments within the Dial Pulse Ratio and Speed settings Refer to the following Figure for an example of the CO Line attribute data base print out. Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming for setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. l When the system has finished sending the requested information to the printer, confirmation tone will be heard. 665-4 Issue 1, November 1981 SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ Digital Key Telephone Systems 2856 Digital Key-System Eng. Ver. O.lH DATE: MM/DD/YY TIME: HH:MM:SS ENrERPAbwORD: ati, ENTER PROGRAMNO :zt5 PRINT CO LINES PRESS HOLD adrrv PRINTINGCO LINES CO LINE ATTRIBUTES co Description 1 SI@?ATJTYPE UNA CONF PRI m co Y Y Y SUPV DISA FLY N N GRP COS 1 1 RING ASSIGNMENTS 100B co 2 SIG&L TYPE UNA CONF PRI co Y Y Y SIGNAL= DTMF/Dial Pulse TYPE= CO/PBX UNA= Universal Night Answer PRI= CO Line Privacy SUPV= Loop Supervision DISA= Direct Inward System Access FLTM= Flash Timer GFlP= CO Line Group COS= CO Line Class of Service SUPV DISA FLTM GRP COS N N 10 1 1 RING ASSIGNMENTS 100B co 3 SIGNAL TYPEUNACONF PRI m co Y Y Y SUPV DISA FL%f Gy N N CYS SXNAL TYPE UNA CONF PRI JnPE? co Y Y Y SUPV DISA FLTM GRP CYS N N 10 1 RING ASSIGNMENTS 1OOB adrwm exiting admin... Figure 665-2 DB Printout Issue 1, November 1991 of CO Line Attributes 665-5 Digital Key Telephone Systems System Data Base Printouts D. Printing SPD 1428 & 2858 STARPLUS@ (Cont’d) Station Attributes Programming Steps If a printout of the Station Attributes is desired: 1. Press the STATION ATTRIBUTES flexible button (Button #3). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 2. To print data for all stations, press the HOLD button. To print Station data for a specified Station Range enter six digits to specify the Station range (three digits for the first station within the range and three digits for the last station in the range i.e. [100109]). If a print out of only one station is desired enter that station twice (i.e. [101101]). Then press the HOLD button. 3. The following display will be shown on the display phone and the requested information will be printed: When the system quested information will be heard. Description With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows either a range of station data or all stations data information to be “dumped” as a permanent record which can serve as a hard copy of the station attribute data base. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. When printing the Station attributes the following data is printed; @ All current station parameters l Current Flex Button assignments Refer to the following Figure for an example of a Station attribute data base print out. Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming for setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. has finished sending the reto the printer, confirmation tone . 6666 Issue 1, November 1991 2856 Digital Key-System Em. Ver. O.lH DA+E: MM/DD/YY TIME: HH:MM:SS ENTER PASSvxxxD: a*, ENTER PROGRAMNO ad85 afhnx PRINTING STATIONS STATION ATTRIBUTES STA 100 PAGE DND COW-EOR PRI SPD QUE N Y Y PL3:O~OFzDLc:: S:D AI: IX& N:OS SPK 1 0 0 PICKUP PAGE PREhD LCOS 1 1 N CO ACCESS 1 BUTIONS OlDlOO 02DlOl 04D103 05D104 07D106 08D107 11c001 14coo4 z% 16COO6 17coo7 19PLl 2OLP 22LQu 23CBK 26FWD %E 03D102 06D105 09D108 12coo2 15coo5 18COO8 21cJ?o 24PKU 27DND PRIME KEY 0 Y STA 103 PAGE DND CONF EOR PRI SPD QUE YYY YNYY PLAOHVO EWD LCR S:D AI: IX& N:OS SPK 1 1 10 PICKUP PAGE PREFWD LCOS . __ N CA ACCEbS 1 Description PAGE= Paging Access DND= Do Not Disturb CONF= Conference EOR=Executive Override PRI= Privacy SPD= System Speed Dial Access QUE= Line Queue Access PLA= Preferred Line Answer OHVO=Off-Hook Voice Over MID= Station Call Forward Access LCR= LCR Class of Service SID= Station ID AID= Associated ID (DSS/DLS Console) DCOS= Day Class of Service NCOS= Night Class of Service SPK= Speakerphone Option PICKUP= Pickup Groups PAGE= Paging Groups PREFWD= Preset Forward Assignment LCOS=LCR Class of Service BUTTONS= Refer to Table 630-2) BUTTONS 01c001 02coo2 03coo3 04coo4 05coo5 06COO6 07coo7 08COO8 09coo9 40D121 41D122 42D123 43D124 44D125 45D126 46D127 47P222 481AC PRIMEKEY atim exiting OY admin... Figure 665-3 DB Printout Issue 1, November 1991 of Station Attributes 665-7 System Data Base Printouts E. Printing (Cont’d) Group Parameters Programming Description Steps If a printout of the Group Parameters is desired: 1. Press the GROUP PARAMETERS flexible button (Button #4). The following message will be shown on the display phone: , 2. To print data for all Group Parameters, press the HOLD button. The following display will be shown on the display phone: When the system has finished sending the requested information to the printer, confirmation tone will be heard. With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows either a range of station data or all stations data information to be “dumped” as a permanent record which can serve as a hard copy of the station attribute data base. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. When printing the Group Parameters, the following data is printed; l Hunt Group Parameters l UCD Group Parameters l UCD Timers l RAN Announcement l Voice Mail Group Parameters Tables e Voice Mail Outpulsing disconnect table) Table (including the Voice Mail Options Refer to the following Figure for an example of a Group Parameter data base print out. Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming for setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. l 6658 Issue 1, November 1991 Digital Key Telephone SPD 1428 & 2856 *AFtPLUS@ 2856 Digital Key-System mg. Ver. O.lH SAT Mk&D&g TIME: HH:MM:SS : PRINTING GROUPNO E GROUPS VM ALTLEVRET 440 # # 441 # # 442 # # 443 # # 444 # # 445 # # 446 # # 447 # # STN# HGO..330 PILOT HUNT HG1..331 PILOT HUNT HG2..332 PILMT HUNT HG3..333 PILOT HUNT HG4..334 PILOT HUNT VOICE MAIL OUT TABLE HG5..335 PILOT HUNT HG6..336 PILOT HUNT TABLE IDX PREFIX HG7..337 PILOT HUNT UCDALTOVRANO Systems SUFFIX : z 4 STN# 2 7 VOICE MAIL CO DISCONNECT SIGNAL 550 551 552 APPLY IN-BAND DIGITS TO CO CALLS N 553 a&m exiting achin... 554 555 556 557 UCD TIMERS ANNOUNCEMENTTABLE TABLE ### t YE# %F ### TE Figure 666-4 DB Printout Issue 1, November 1991 of Group Parameters 665-9 Digital Key Telephone Systems System Data Base Printouts F. Printing sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 (Cont’d) Toll Tables Programming Steps If a printout of the Toll tables are desired: 1. Press the TOLL TABLES flexible button (Button #5). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 2. To print the Toll Tables, press the HOLD button. When the system has finished sending the requested information to the printer, confirmation tone will be heard. Description With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows each exception table to be printed individually to serve as a permanent record which can be saved as a hard copy of the exception table data base. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. When printing information from the Toll tables, the following data is printed: l Allow Table A l Deny Table A 0 Allow Table B l Deny Table B l Special Table 1 l Special Table 2 l Special Table 3 l Special Table 4 Refer to the following Figure for an example of the Toll Tables data base print out. Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming for setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. 665-l 0 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone 2856 Digital Key-System Eng. Ver. O.lH D$&yEksg TIME: HH:MM:SS ati, ENTER PROGRAMNO :E:5 PRINTEXTABLES PRESS HOLD PRINTING EX TABLES a&w Allow Systems SPECIAL TABLE 1 AREA CODE ALLOWED OFFICE CODES SPECIAL TABLE 2 AREA CODE ALLCWED OFFICE CODES SPECIAL TABLE 3 AREA CODE ALLOWEDOFFICE CODES Table A SPECIAL TABLE 4 HOME AREA CODE ALLOWEDOFFICE CODES a&m exiting admin... Deny TableA Allow Table Deny Table B B Figure 865-5 DB Printout of Exception Issue 1, November 1991 Tables 665-l 1 Digital Key Telephone Systems System Data Base Printouts G. Printing System SPD 1428 812856 (Cont’d) Speed Bins Programming If a printout desired: 1. Press (Button shown STARPLUS@ Steps Description of the System speed dial entries are With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows either a range of system speed dial bins or all bins can be “dumped” as a permanent record which can serve as a hard copy of the system speed dial data base. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. Refer to the following Figure for an example of a System Speed Dial data base print out. Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming for setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. the SYSTEM SPEED flexible button #6). The following message will be on the display phone: 2. To print the System Speed bins, press the HOLD button. The following will be shown on the display phone: When the system has finished sending the requested information to the printer, confirmation tone will be heard. 665-l 2 Issue 1, November 1891 SPD 1428 & 2856 sTARPLUS@ 2856 Digital Key-System mg. Ver. O.lH Ds MMdMDzg TIME: HK:MM:SS ati, a-85 ENTER PROGRAMNO Digital Key Telephone Systems 49 50 51 a-y PRINT 52 SYS SPEEDNO PRESS HOLD 53 54 PRINTING SYS SPEED NO 55 SYSTEM SPEED NUMBERS 56 20 57 21 58 22 59 23 60 24 61 25 62 26 63 27 64 28 65 29 66 30 67 31 68 32 69 33 70 34 71 35 72 36 73 37 74 38 75 39 76 40 77 41 78 42 79 43 80 44 a&m exiting 45 admin... 46 47 48 Figure 665-6 DB Printout Issue 1, November 1991 of System Speed Numbers 665-l 3 Digital Key Telephone Systems System Data Base Printouts H. Printing STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 (Cont’d) LCR Tables Programming Description Steps If a printout of the LCR tables are desired: 1. Press the LCR TABLES flexible button (Button #7). The following message will be shown on the display phone: 2. To print the LCR Tables, press the HOLD button. The following will be shown on the display phone. 3-Digit Table 6-Digit Table Exception Table ~g&, < ..::..;:.:.:.: ...... ‘...:.:.::::w:b. .....~..~~rJl~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ ~ “:::::i::::: ):.:.,.,... With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows each exception table to be printed individually to serve as a permanent record which can be saved as a hard copy of the exception table data base. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. When printing information from the LCR Tables, the following data is printed: Route List Table , When the system has finished sending the requested information to the printer, confirmation tone will be heard. Insert/Delete Table Daily Time Table Weekly Time Table Toll Tables Refer to the following Figures for examples of the LCR Tables data base print out. Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming for setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. 665-l 4 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone 2856 Digital Key-System Eng. Ver. 0.1H DATE: MM/DD/YY TIME: HH:MM:SS ENTER PASSWORD: ah=-, Systems 255 ENTER PROGRAMNO :Et" PRINT LCR TABLES PRESS HOLD a&m 264 $662 267 % % 272 PRINTINGLCRTABLES 3 DIGIT TABLE CODE LEADING 1 RR PP 6 NON-LEADING 1 RR PP 6 273 274 275 276 277 278 ~~; 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 %!f 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 7 N 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 312 313 314 E 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 %Z 327 328 329 Figure 665-7 DB Printout Issue 1, November 1991 1 8 N 1 .7 il of LCF? Default 665-l 5 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 340 z2' 343 E 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 EZ 356 357 $2: 360 361 362 363 364 ~~~ E z76: 371 z;: z;t 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 E 386 387 388 389 390 391 z;: 394 ZE ~~~ ii% 401 402 403 Figure 665-7 DB Printout 665-l 6 of LCR Default (Cont’d) Issue 1, November 1991 SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ 478 1 8 N 1 Digital Key Telephone 7 N %Z 481 :E 484 Systems 553 554 z55: 557 558 559 485 486 487 488 z! 562 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 566 zi 569 1 8N : 7 N 7N I -. ## I+;: ii 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 2:; 583 584 514 51.5 516 517 599 600 601 i i 1 0 : 8 11 1; N N ii 0 11 N ti N N N : ## ## ## ## ; / 7N ## ## ## ## N N N N ti N N N N 609 616 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Zfi 1 625 t 627 626 : 620 621 622 549 550 551 552 Figure 665-7 DB Printout Issue 1, November i 0 1991 : N N N N N N N N ## ## ## ## i ii iii ii E NN : :, i i : : 11 11 11 11 11 11 ## ## ## ## :: :: :: :: N N N N ii 1 : : of LCR Default (Cont’d) 665-17 Digital Key Telephone a N 1 1 i 8 ii 1 a N Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 1 E 670 702 703 0 11 N %i 706 707 708 709 710 712 713 Cl 11 N i 0 0 ti 11 11 Ei N N i 0 1: 11 i N 714 715 716 717 i 0 0 11 11 11 ?J N N 718 2: 721 722 723 i 1: ii : : ii t i ii 725 724 726 727 728 729 i : ii 739 738 740 1 1 i ii 8 N t 1 :: 7 ii N 671 672 673 674 1 7 N 692 693 694 695 696 :;i Figure 665-7 DB Printout 665-l 8 of LCR Default (Cont’d) Issue 1, November 1991 777 778 779 1 1 i 8 : N + 1 :: 7 ii N 852 1 8 N 1 7 N 879 880 881 N EZ 8: 886 898 899 900 901 1991 8 N 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 N N N N N N N N N N N A 0 0 0 0 1: 11 11 11 11 iti N N N N : 0 t: 11 921 920 t 923 922 924 925 t E5 914 915 916 917 918 919 &sue 1, November 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 911 Figure 665-7 DB Printout i 7N t ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## +I;: ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## i.i N N N N N N N N iii iii ii ## ## N ## ## N ii N ## ## ## ## ## ## ## ## N N N N : ii 1 :: i : z : :: ii 1 :: ii 11 of LCR Default (Cont’d) 665-l 9 SPD 1428 & 2858 STARPLUS@ Digital Key Telephone Systems :: 7 7 : N N 7 N :: 7 ii 7 N :: 7 ii 7 N I N ; 7 iti N , N N Figure 665-7 DB Printout I of LCR Default (Cont’d) Issue 1, November 665-20 1991 SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ Digital Key Telephone Systems 2856 Digital Key-System Eng. Ver. O.lH DATE: MM/DD/Y!t TIME: HH:MM:SS EzF a-85 ah1 pAssw0RD: i3J'l?ER PROGRAMNO 6 DIGIT TABLE AREA ROUTE OFFICE CODES CODE NO EXCEPTION CODE TABLE CODE ROUTE NO ROUTE!LIST TABLE RT TIME CO GRP INS/DEL GRP PR 0 1 1 ## 1 2 1 ## 1 3 1 ## 1 4 1 ## 1 1 ## 1 2 1 ## 1 3 1 ## 1 11 4 1 ## DIGIT INS/DEL TABLE TABLE 1 DIGITS DAILY STARTTIME TABLE TABLE TIME 21 1700 800 i 2#3#:: WEEKLYSCHEDULETABLE START TIME MTWTFSS 800 1111133 1700 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2300 3 3 3 3 3 #### 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 LCR ROUT FOR 555-1212 00 ICLID NAME BDR PORT N Y 4800 2 Figure 665-8 DB Printout Issue 1, November 1991 of LCR Tables (Cont’d) 665-21 Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 69 z! 2 74 2 ;78 79 :: E E i76 E ;: ;z ;: ;76 ;: 22222222222222 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB ICLID UNANSWEREDCALL TABLE ooooo%zooo TIME 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 Et 12i34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 32 33 34 35 36 37 11111111111111 22222222222222 33333333333333 44444444444444 55555555555555 66666666666666 77777777777777 88888888888888 99999999999999 00000000000000 11111111111111 22222222222222 33333333333333 44444444444444 55555555555555 66666666666666 77777777777777 88888888888888 99999999999999 00000000000000 11111111111111 22222222222222 33333333333333 44444444444444 55555555555555 66666666666666 77777777777777 88888888888888 99999999999999 00000000000000 11111111111111 22222222222222 33333333333333 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB cccccccccccccccccccccccc DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD EEXEEEEEEEEBEEEEEEEEEEEE FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 111111111111111111111111 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP ssssssssssssssssssssssss zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz [[[[[[[[[[[[[E[[[[[[[[[[ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\ 111111111111111111111111 hhhhhhhh*hhhhhhhh~*~~~~~ aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa 44444444444444 55555555555555 bbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbbb cccccccccccccccccccccccc dddddddddddddddddddddddd 66666666666666 77777777777777 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee ffffffffffffffffffffffff Figure 665-9 DB Printout 66522 of LCR Tables (Cont’d) Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 11/22 admz-m exiting Digital SPD 1428 & 2856 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 12:34 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 88888888888888 99999999999999 00000000000000 11111111111111 22222222222222 33333333333333 44444444444444 55555555555555 66666666666666 77777777777777 88888888888888 99999999999999 Key Telephone Systems gggggggggggggggggggggggg iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii jjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjjj kWddckkkkkkkkWdddddd 111111111111111111111111 mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm oooooooooooooooooooooooo PPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPPP 9 rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr admin..-. Figure 665-10 DB Printout Issue 1, November 1991 of LCR Tables (Cont’d) 665-23 Digital Key Telephone System Data Base Printouts 1. Printing STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Systems Entire System Programming (Cont’d) Data Base Steps If a complete printout of the entire data base in desired: 1. Press the ENTIRE SYSTEM flexible button (Button #8). The following will be shown on the display phone: 2. To print the entire data base, press the HOLD button. The display will update to indicate what portion of the data base in being printed. Description With a printer connected to the RS-232C port, of the CPB, the currently stored customer data base can be printed or “uploaded” into a file. This command allows the entire data base to be “dumped” as a permanent record which can serve as a hard copy of the data base. The system Baud rate must match that of the printer or receiving device. Printing the entire data base takes a while to print. The data base is printed in the following order: l All System Parameters 0 All CO Line programming (CO Lines 01-28) 0 All Station attributes (Stations 100-l 55) l All Group No (UCD, Hunt, VM) * Toll Tables (allow, deny and special tables) l System Speed Dial Numbers (bins 20-99) l LCR Tables Default: None Related Programming: SMDR Programming setting the baud rate or the RS232C port. for When the system has finished sending the entire data base to the printer, confirmation tone will be heard. 665-24 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Systems SECTION 700 SYSTEM CHECKOUT 700.1 INTRODUCTION 700.3 Prior to actual power up and initialization, the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System should be checked over to avoid start up delays or improper loading. A step-by-step checklist is provided for this purpose. 700.2 PREUMINARY The power up sequence involves the proper application of AC power to the System, and CPB LED’s. A successful power up is assured if the installation checklist has been followed. 1. Plug the AC power cord of the Key Service Unit into the dedicated 117V ac outlet. 2. Turn the power switch of the KSU to ON. PROCEDURES 1. Make sure that the Basic Key Service Unit (KSU) is properly grounded. 2. Verify that all PCB’s are firmly plugged into the correct card slot positions or expander modules are firmly seated onto their connectors. 3. Inspect the MDF for shorted wiring and improper polarity that would affect the Digital Terminal or DSS console. 4. Make certain that the nicad battery is set to “ON”. (SPD 2856 only) 5. Make sure that plug-ended MDF cables connected to the KSU are secure and are plugged into the correct position. Table 700-l VOLTAGE DESIGNATIONS VOLTAGE READING 117VAC +117 VAC fl 0% 3. The CPB has one (1) red LED located on the front of the CPB card. If the power up is successful, the red LED will flash. 4. Press the reset button on the CPB. The above CPB LED indication will repeat. 5. The system is ready for programming. If any problems have occurred, Refer to Section 800, Maintenance and Troubleshooting. Power Supply Tests 7he power supply is preset at the time of manufacturing, digital volt meter having an accuracy of +l%. TEST POINT REMARKS LOCATION Commercial Power Source but should be checked at system initialization with a ONICS,, Issue 1, November 1991 POWER UP SEQUENCE lnc:. 700-l SECTION 800 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING 800.1 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (PCB) TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS Table 800-l SPD 1428 Basic KSU FUNCTION 1 .Central Processor board (CPB) to control system operation. 2.Read Only Memory (ROM) with factory set instructions. 3.Random Access Memory (RAM) protected by a nicad battery. 4.Halt switch for manual system restart. 5. Provides RS-232C port for SMDR and Terminal/Remote Programming. 6. Contains on-board 300 baud modem for remote system access. 7. Provides all system tones such as ICM dial tone and busy tone, etc. CONTROL OPTIONS I/O Module 1200 Baud Modem Switch settings for EPROM Memory Size (See Table below) J26 Jumper for setting RAM Memory Size (See Table below) Table 800-2 SPD 1428 EPROM Memory Size SIZE OF CHIPS EPROM MEMORY SIZE Table 800-3 SPD 1428 Static RAM Memory SIZE OF CHIPS (in Bits) 256 Kbit chips (256K chips) 1 Megabit chip (2048 chips) 4 Megabit chips (4096 chips) Issue 1, November 1991 FAULT OPTIONS 1 .Complete system failure. 2.Erroneous call processing. 3.lnoperative features in system operation. 4.Paftial failures in system operation. 5Continual system restarts. 6,Failure of SMDR. 7.Loss of unique customer data- base programming. J26 JUMPER POSITION 2-3 2-3 l-2 EPROM Size MEMORY SIZE (in bytes) 2 - 256K chips = 4 - 256K chips = 2 - 1 Meg chips= 4 - 1 Meg chips= 2 - 4 Meg chips= 4 - 4 Meg chips= 64K bytes 128K bytes 256K bytes 512K bytes 1024 bytes 2048K bytes 800-l Digital Key Telephone Systems %ARPLUS@ Table 800-4 SPD 2856 Central Processing FUNCTION 1 .Central Processor board (CPB) to control system operation. 2Read Only Memory (ROM) with factory set instructions. 3Random Access Memory (RAM) protected by a nicad battery. 4.Halt switch for manual system restart. S.Provides RS-232C port for SMDR and Tem-rinaVRemote Programming. 6. Contains on-board 300 baud modem for remote system access. 7. Provides all system tones such as ICM dial tone and busy tone, etc. CONTROL Board (CPB) OPTIONS Table 800-5 SPD 2856 CPB Static RAM Memory SIZE OF CHIPS (in Bits) 1 Megabit chip (2048 chips) 4 Megabit chips (4096 chips) Size Size SW1 SWITCH POSITIONS 1 (SA) ( 2 (SB) 1 3 (SC) 14 (not used) OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 (open) (open) (open) (open) 4 ON OFF OFF OFF 2 (closed) (open) (open) (open) 4 OFF ON ON OFF 2 (open) (closed) (closed) (open) 4 ON ON ON OFF 2 (open) 4 (closed) (closed) (closed) OFF= OPEN 800-2 FAULT OPTIONS 1.Complete system failure. 2.Erroneous call processing. 3.lnoperative features in system operation. 4.Partial failures in system operation. 5Continual system restarts. 6,Failure of SMDR. 7.Loss of unique customer data- base programming. EPROM MEMORY SIZE (in bytes) 2 - 1 Meg chips= 256K bytes 4 - 1 Meg chips= 512K bytes 2 - 4 Meg chips= 1024 bytes 4 - 4 Meg chips= 2048K bytes Table 800-6 SPD 2656 CPB EPROM Memory SIZE OF CHIPS (in Megabits) 1 Megabit chips (1024 chips) 2 Megabit chips (2048 chips) 4 Megabit chips (4096 chips) 8 Megabit chips (8192 chips) SPD 1428 & 2856 - EPROM MEMORY SIZE (in bytes) 1 Meg chips = 256K bytes Meg chips = 512K bytes 2 Meg chips = 512K bytes 2 Meg chips = 1024K bytes 4 Meg chips = 1024K bytes 4 Meg chips = 2048K bvtes 8 Meg chips = 2048K bytes 8 Meg chips = 4096K bytes ON=CLOSED Issue 1, November 1981 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Table 800-7 4x8 CO/Station FUNCTION Provides interface for 8 Digital Terminals, DSWDLS Consoles or SIA (OPX) modules. Interface CONTROL Busy state LED that monitors circuits for busy condition. Board (CKB) OPTIONS None Table 800-8 4x8 CO/SLT Interface FUNCTION Provides interface for 8 SLTs. Also provides for SLTs with MAW lights. CONTROL Busy state LED that monitors circuits for busy condition. FUNCTION Used to add DTMF receivers to the system to support DBA and SLT operation. CONTROL Adds 1 DTMF receiver. FAULT OPTIONS 1 Unable to receive intercom dial tone. 2.Poor transmission characteristics. 3.Key telephone set inoperative. 4.Key telephone unable to invoke features 5.No LED indications. Board (CSB) OPTIONS None Table 800-9 DTMF Receiver Systems FAULT OPTIONS 1 .SLT can’t receive dial tone. 2.Poor transmission characteristics. Module (RM) OPTIONS None FAULT OPTIONS 1. SLT cannot receive or break dial tone. 2. DISA call can’t receive or break dial Table 800-10 l/O Module (IOM) FUNCTION Provides 2nd RS232C port and a RS422 port to the system. CONTROL OPTIONS None None Table 800-l 1 Single Line Telephone FUNCTION Provides one (1) 48 volt loop to interface an OPX circuit. Issue 1, November 1991 CONTROL Busy state LED that monitors circuits for busy condition. FAULT OPTIONS 1 .Loss of SMDR data. Adapter (OPX) OPTIONS None FAULT OPTIONS , 1 .SLT can’t receive dial tone. 2.Poor transmission characteristics. 808-3 Digital Key Telephone 800.2 Systems REMOTE MAINTENANCE C. Maintenance Password The Remote Maintenance feature, like Remote Programming, is entered via a six-character alphanumeric string. The password prompt is given by entering a carriage return at the device connected to the l/O Module RS232CY422 port. After the prompt is printed out, the password should be entered followed by a carriage return. Proper entry of the password will result in the maintenance prompt. The Remote Maintenance password is: {CONFIG} A. General Overview The Remote Maintenance feature allows authorized personnel to survey system and slot configuration information. This can be done through a modem or data terminal connected to the I/O Expansion Module via the RS-232C/RS-422 port. The commands are entered from a keyboard and are limited to those listed. , SPD 1428 & 2686 wARPLUS@ B. Overview of Maintenance Commands There are four (4) basic commands available in the Remote Maintenance feature. All commands begin with a single character, followed by a space, another character and an optional digit or digits. All commands are terminated with a carriage return. Basic format of the commands are shown in Figure 100-l : D. Exit Maintenance The Exit command will terminate the current Remote Maintenance feature session. The Exit command format is: MAINT>X maint>? command d s[nn] list: - dump system Cnnl specifies no parameter examples : or maint>d maint>d ? X - help - exit slot an indicates configuration optional that s s2 (dumps (dumps slot the entire slot data number entire 2 parameter system system configuration, will be du configuration etc.) menu maint maint> L Figure 800-l Remote 800-4 Maintenance Help Menu Issue 1, November 1981 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Systems E. System Configuration Figure 800-2 is a configuration of the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System with LCR and shows what is printed out when: at the maint> a. The installer enters D S prompt. maint>d SLOT ------ s TYPE --i--CPB Qx8 UNK UNK UNK UNK UNK UNK FW UER. 0.01 N/A N&l N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A BRD TYPE -----e-s-CPU COI/KSI UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED UNPOPULATED BRD OPTS ---------- - 2856,LCR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SERU STAT INS INS 00s 00s 00s 00s 00s 00s maint> Figure 800-2 System Configuration where: Column 1: lists the card slot. Column 2: lists card type of that card slot. Column 3: lists the firmware version of the card. Column 4: lists card type and if that card is installed. w/LCR Column 5: lists card options: Column 6: lists card status: 00s status can indicate the entire card is out of service or a specific station is not installed or installed but not operational INS status can indicate a specific station is installed and operating correctly. Issue 1, November 1991 800-5 Digital Key Telephone Systems wARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 F. CO/Station Configuration Figure 800-3 is the CO/Station Configuration and shows what is printed out when: at the mainb= a. The installer enters D S4 prompt. raint>d s2 SLOT : 2 Board Tupe co ---- : 3 II : ‘+xB - COVKSI STATUS _----_-____------------INS, INS. INS, INS, Outgoing Outgoing Outgoing Outgoing PULSEfDTHF --_-----____ STFI TYPE -------- STATUS ---__ _ --- .- 100 101 Keyset Kcyset Keuset Keuset DXX 1 Keys& Kegset Keyset 00s INS INS INS 00s 00s 005 102 103 104 105 106 107 DTtlF DTtlF PULSE DTtlF Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled CWPBX ________ co co co co LCD ----- INS , Figure 800-3 CO/Station where: CO Lines Column 1: lists the CO Line number. Column 2: indicates status: 00s status can indicate the entire card is out of servfce. INS status can indicate a board station is installed and operating correctly. Outgoing enabled indicates the CO line is active in the system. Outgoing disabled indicates that the Attendant has disabled the CO line for outgoing access Column 3: indicates whether the CO Line is Pulse or DTMF. (programmable option) Column 4: indicates whether the CO Line is a CO Line or a PBX Line. programmable option) 800-6 Configuration where: Stations Column 1: lists the station number. Column 2: indicates station type (keyset, DSS, SLT. Keyset - ID 0 = Key station DLS-ID1 =DSSMapl DSS-ID2=DSSMap2 DSS/DLS - ID 3 = DSS Map 3 Relay/Sensor - ID 4 = Relay/Sensor Module SLT - ID 5 = SLT/OPX SLT w/lamp - ID 6 = SLT w/Message Waiting 2605,2666 - ID 7 = SLT w/Message Waiting & In-Use Indicator Column 3: indicates status: COS status can indicate the entire card is out of service or a specific station is not installed or installed but not operational. INS status can indicate a specific station is installed and operating correctly. Column 4: indicates whether the station has an LCD Display or doesn’t have an LCD Display. Issue 1, November 1991 %ARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 G. Event Trace Buffer The Event Trace Buffer is used to store and dump event traces (up to 30) that occur just prior to a Stat-plus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System soft or hard restart. These can then be reviewed by authorized personnel to aid in system troubleshooting.. The basic format for the commands are: . T-cspacexretumz- display the current status of the Event trace buffer . Tespace>Ocretum> - turns the Trace buffer OFF. issue 1, November 1991 Digital Key Telephone Systems . T l - turns the Trace buffer ON to record events prior to a soft system reset. . T 2 -turns the Trace buffer ON to record events prior to a hard system restart. 0 T 3creturn> - turns the Trace Buffer ON to record events prior to either a soft reset or a hard system restart. dcspace>Eeretum> - dumps Trace Events stored from last system reset. (soft or hard) NOTE: Ctri C will abort the Data Dump and return to the maint> prompt. 800-7 Digital Key Telephone 800.3 4 Systems REMOTE SYSTEM MONITOR A. General Overview The Remote Monitor feature provides remote access to the installed system for diagnostic purposes. These capabilities benefit Service personnel enabling them to support the end user remotely. Different levels of access, via password, allows authorized personnel to trace, monitor and “up-load” critical information directly from the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System. This provides a more accurate means of acquiring system information that leads to a quick resolution of problems that may occur. This is all done without interfering with ongoing call processing or normal system operation, and in many cases may be performed without a site visit. The built-in 300 baud modem is used for remote access. Capabilities allowed and reserved for this “High level troubleshooting” in addition are: . Monitor Mode 0 Enable & Disable Event “Trace” . Dump ‘Trace Buffer” (up-load) B. Monitor Password The Remote Monitor feature, like Remote Maintenance, is entered via a six-character alphanumeric string. The password prompt is given by entering a carriage return at the device connected to the I/O Module RS232-C/R&422 port. After the prompt is printed out, the password should be entered followed by a carriage return. Proper entry of the password will result in the MON> prompt. The Remote Maintenance password is: {ETRACE} NOTE: The remote monitor feature is intended for use only under the guidance and instruction by authorized personnel from a Technical Assistance Center (TAC). Care and caution must be observed when using this feature as permanent damage to the software structure can occur. 800-8 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 C. Help Menu (?) A convenient on screen Help Menu is provided by typing a “?” then pressing Enter. The following will appear on the screen: Y 2856 \ Digital Key-System Eng. Uer. 0.01 DQTE: 05/24/91 TIME: 10:51:07 ENTER PFISSWORD: man>? command list: - dump co data c EC1 - dump sta data s Csl - set trace key t Cdl d CalLal - dump memory - modify memory ma b rate - set baud rate ? - help menu X - exit monitor mot-0 I D. Dump Memory Data Three options allow the memory structure to be “dumped” for viewing. The three options are entered as follows: c [c] - Dump CO Line memory structure s [s] - Dump Station memory Structure d [a][a] - Dump a memory address Structure The data obtained from these commands is in hexadecimal format and is used primarily for manufacture level support. NOTE: Ctti C will abort the Data Dump and return to the man> prompt. Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 Digital Key Telephone E. Event Trace Mode The ‘T’ command enables and disables the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System Trace mode. While the trace mode is enabled events for the trace desired will be displayed on the monitor, printer or PC connected to the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System in an event record. To view the current status of the trace mode type “T” at the MON> prompt then the following screen will be displayed: Messages -------BOARD E’JT MSC States Deu PCH COL States Stn States Error kg Que Eut -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> Y/N --N N N N N N N N \ b tlessages -------BOFlRD E’JT HSC States Dev PCrl COL States Stn States Error kg Que Eut Y/N --Y N N N N N N N -> -> -> -> -> -> -> -> mon> mon> a. To enable an event trace type ‘Y’ (space bar) b. Then type of trace desired [d], where d is determined as follows: B= Board event trace (traces events associated with PCB’s) M= Miscellaneous State event trace P= Pulse Coded Modulation (PCM) traces events associated with voice communications. C= CO tine (CKB) States (traces events associated with CO Line activity) S= Station (STA) States (traces events associated with Station activity) E= Error Messages (traces error messages) Q= Queue (QUE) Events (traces queuing events, i.e. DTMF receiver, UCD, LCR, etc...) D= Device Command (traces commands to peripheral devices). Issue 1, November c. Then enter the specific board, CO line or Station number of the trace desired or type “all” if all board’s, CO line’s or Station’s events are desired. l-7 = Board KSU card slot position (CPB= 1) 01-28 = CO Line port 100-l 55 = Station location All= All Boards, CO lines or Stations d. Then press Enter to enable the trace. A screen similar to the following will appear: mon>t mon> t Systems 1991 e. To disable or turn off a particular trace mode do not enter a specific board, CO line or Station number (i.e. “t screturn>” to disable station event trace). To have event trace’s displayed on the screen you must first exit the MONitor mode by typing “X” at the MON> prompt. After you exit the event(s), the trace will begin as shown in Table 800-6. 1 CAUTION / Unless instructed by personnel at a Technical Assistance Center (TAC) do not leave the trace mode enabled for extended periods of time. The system will “dump” the requested event(s) trace which may use up paper or fill memory buffers on the collecting device. It is recommended that the trace events be disabled (turned off) for all event(s) traces before leaving the system site. 800-9 Digital Key Telephone Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Sta Systems 100: 100: 100: 100: 100: 100: 100: 100: 100: 100: 100: 104: 104: 104: 104: 104: 104: 104: 104: 104: 104: sTARPLUS@ State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= State= SPD 1428 & 2866 IDLE, Evt= Key Data (27), Data=34 IDLE, Evt= Mon Key (146), Data=-1 DIAL-TONE, Evt= Dial DIALING, Evt= Dial DIALING, Evt= Dial MISC-TONE, Evt= MISC-TONE, Evt= DIALING, Evt= Dial Pad (26), Data=8 MISC-TONE, Evt= Key Data MISC-TONE, Evt= Mon Key MISC-TONE, Evt= On Hook IDLE, Evt= Key Data (27), Data=34 IDLE, Evt= Mon Key (146), Data=-1 DIAL-TONE, Evt= Dial Pad (26). Data=7 DIALING, Evt= Dial Pad (26), Data=8 MISC-TONE, Evt= MISC-TONE, Evt= DIALING, Evt= Dial DIALING, Evt= Dial MISC-TONE, Evt= Dial Pad MLSC-TONE. Evt= Figure 800-4 Event Trace as it appears on Display F. Modify Memory command The Modify Memory Command Use only. is for Engineering Use of this command can alter or damage the Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone Systems operating data base which can result in system malfunction. If this occurs it will be necessary to power the system down and re-initialize the data base, then completely re-program the customer programming data. G. Baud Rate Command This command provides a convenient means for changing the baud rate, for the RS232-C port located on the CPB, while in the Monitor mode. To change the baud rate type “B” plus the desired baud rate, then the enter key. NOTE: After changing the Baud Rate via Baud Rate command, you must change your Baud Rate on your ReceiverfTemMal. 808-l 0 H. Exit the Monitor mode The Exit command will terminate the current Remote Monitor enable/disable session. If Event(s) Trace have been or are still enabled the event records will be displayed only after exiting the MONitor mode. The Exit command format is: MON X Unless instructed by personnel at a Technical Assistance Center (TAC) do not leave the trace mode enabled for extended periods of time. The system will “dump” the requested event(s) trace which may use up paper or fill memory buffers on the collecting device. It is recommended that the event traces be disabled (turned off) for all event(s) before leaving the system site. Issue 1, November 1991 Digital Key Telephone STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 CUSTOMER APPENDIX A DATABASE PROGRAMMING Appendix Issue 1, November 1991 Systems A-l System Parameters Appendix A-l Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ Appendix / PROG CODE / ;;f FLASH22 / (I Night Mode Operation ANM Schedule - ‘*--_I-.Monaay I I MIYIVI ALI.‘ 3~i1euu1e a?.-L-A..,- - -#-..--A-.. I uesaay -3 A hlh 1 cI..L-A. A-2 Auto/Manual Time off Time On CUSTOMER 1 ;;:: * & ~~ ~~~ ‘-:p:‘:::::::.:.: ...:<.:.:::: :.:.: . ,,,,,,, ~:;~~ig+y%..w. ANM Schedule - Wednesday PWYIYI 6 (Cont’d) FORMA,- FUNC TION )I --.-1 2 4 Appendix A-l System Parameters SPD 1428 & 2866 3u ItNuIe .I- - 7-b.. .--A-. I I lulauay . H ANM Schedule - Friday Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Appendix PROG CODE FLASH 60 A-2 UCD and Hunt Group Parameters 7 Hunt Group 6 (336) 8 Hunt Group 7 (337) FLEX BTN 1 Systems FUNCTION ALT OVR RAN STATIONS (up to 8 Stations) UCD Group 0 (550) I 2 IUCD Group 1 (551) 3 UCD Group 2 (552) 4 UCD Group 3 (553) 5 UCD Group 4 (554) 6 UCD Group 5 (555) 7 UCD Group 6 (556) I 8 IUCD Group 7 (557) I I I FUNCTION CUSTOMER DATA UCD Ring Timer UCD Message Timer l----t+ Issue 1, November 1991 000-300 ::::;.::::i:;:; ‘i:i:$i::$.: ,iiilll,,,,,,,~~:,: UCD Overflow Timer UCD Wrap-up Timer UCD No-Answer Timer Announcement Table 1 Announcement Table 2 Appendix A-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ Appendix FUNCTION 1 Voice Mail Group 0 (440) 2 Voice Mail Group 1 (442) 3 Voice Mail Group 2 (443) 4 Voice Mail Group 3 (444) 1 5 ) Voice Mail Group 4 (445)/ 1 6 I Voice Mail Group 5 (446)/ I 7 1Voice Mail Group 6 (4.47)) / 8 I Voice Mail Group 7 (448)/ 5 VM Outpulsing Table 4 6 VM Outpulsing Table 5 Prefix Suffix Prefix Suffix 7 VM Outpulsing Table 6 Prefix Suffix 8 VM Outpulsing Table 7 Prefix Suffix 9 VM Disconnect Table 8 Disconnect Voice Mail ID digits for Incoming CO Calls Yes or No FLASH 65 FLASH 67 Appendix A-4 A-3 Voice Mail Group Parameters FLEX BTN PROG CODE SPD 1428 & 2866 ALT L STATIONS (Up to 8 Stations) R I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix FLEX BTN LINE NO 1 TONE/ PULSE 2 3 4 co/ PBX UNA DISA Trk-Trk A-4 CO Line Programming 5 AUTO PRIVACY 6 LOOP SUPV 7 D,SA (Flash 40) 8 FLASH TIME 9 10 11 LINE GRP LINE COS RING’ REMARKS Refer to CO Line Ringing Assignments Isgwe 1, November 1991 Appendix A-5 Digital Key Telephone Systems Appendix =LEXBTN 1 LINE TONE/ NO PULSE 2 3 co/ PBX UNA sTARPLUS@ A-4 CO Line Programming 4 5 DISA AUTO Trk-Trk PRIVACY SPD 1428 & 2866 (Flash 40) (Cont’d) 6 7 8 9 10 11 LOOP SUPV D,SA FLASH TIME LINE GRP LINE COS RING’ REMARKS : # C 0 # : # C 0 # C 0 # C 0 # fj@ - qefer to c;U une Hinging Assignments Appendix A-6 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Appendix Ili~~~~ay Ringing ight Digital Key Telephone A-5 CO Line Ringing Assignments: Ringing Assignments: Assignment Systems Chart ay Ringing Assignments: Uight Ringing Assignments: Ringing Assignments: ight Ringing Assignments: Ringing Assignments: ight Ringing Assignments: $!$JNight Ringing Assignments: Button 11 = Enter Ringing Assignments Button 17 = Display Ringing Assignments Ringing Assignments: 0 = No Ring (Deletes Station from Ringing Assignment) 1 = D (Day Ringing) 2 = N (Night Ringing) 3 = B (Both Day and Night Ringing) issue 1, November 1991 Appendix A-7 Digital Key Telephone Systems SPD 1428 & 2866 sTARPLUS@ Appendix A-6 Station Programming STATION NUMBER Page/ RTN DO NOT DISTURB (Flash 50) t Al2 1CONFERENCE Page A is selected by pressing Button 18 of the flexible buttons. 1STA ID (O-6) 1 COS (l-6) B/l t 1 1 1 B/2 SPEAKERPHONE PICKUP GROUP (O-1) (O-4) B/3 PAGING ZONE (O-4) B/5 PRESET FORWARD B/6 CO LINE GROUP (O-8) B/7 LCR CLASS OF SERVICE 818 OFF-HOOK B/9 PREFERENCE BUTTON ASSIGN ~ B/4 B/l 0 ““5::a::::::.:::...:: ........i,,,,,:::;;.: iiii:~:::.::ji::;.:.:.::::::.: .. .:.::::::>g:::i;;: E:;,;;F :;:;qgg$, ::::: :.,,:.,.,., j .,.:x.x ...‘..:.:...::::ri:i:iirii)i: “~“‘:‘y~ ....:i.: .:... ,:,::,,,: ““:‘.‘.:....:.~.:.: .. :.:.::::::i,i .,., ,,::,:,::,:,),:, ,:,::^‘:::, ::::::::y.-: ....:...:I.:.::.:.:~ :::::::.::t::::i:::::.? .,:..,,,,,:,:,,,,, q$::::::::::$..:.:.:..:.: ..^.......... See Button Assignment Chart Page B is selected by pressing Button 19 of the flexible buttons, STA # Appendix to A-8 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Appendix Digital Key Telephone A-7 Button Assignment Systems Chart (Flash 60) This chart is to be used to assign each flexible button a function. By default, Buttons 1 through 10 are assigned as Stations 100 through 109, Buttons 11 through 20 are assigned as CO Lines 01 through 10. WHERE: BB = Button Number (01 through 28) LL = CO Line Number (01 through 28) G = Line Group (1 through 7) KEY STATION BUITON PROGRAMMING: 1. To assign a button as a multi-function button (user programmable) enter: BB [0] HOLD 2. To assign a button as a CO Line button, enter: BB [l] LL HOLD 3. To assign a button as a loop button, enter: BB [2] HOLD 4. To enter a button as a pooled group button (refer to Section 630.1 for CO Line Group numbers) enter: BB [3] G HOLD 5. To unassign a button, enter: BB [#] HOLD SLT HlTRY. - (Off-Hook PrW 6. When an SLT is being assigned for Off-Hook Preference, enter: 00 [l] LL HOLD for a specific CO Line or 00[3] G HOLD for CO Group Access. Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix A-9 Digital Key Telephone Systems %ARPLUS@ Appendix SPD 1428 & 2866 A-8 System Speed Dial Numbers Programmed from the first Attendant station. . . Monitored by Toll Restnctlo nl .COS) 54 55 56 57 56 59 Appendix A-l 0 Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix Programmed Overrides A-8 System Speed Dial (Cont’d) from the first Attendant station. Toll Restriction tCOS) 74 75 76 77 76 79 Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix A-l 1 Digital Key Telephone Systems %ARPLUS@ Appendix Allow Table A 1 BIN 1 1 1 BIN2 1 1 BIN3 1 1 BIN4 ( 1 BIN5 I A-9 Exception SPD 1428 & 2866 Tables (Flash 70) Allow Table B BIN 13 BIN 14 1 BIN 15 1 1 BIN 19 I [ BIN 20 [ Deny Table A Deny Table B BIN 1 BIN 2 BIN 3 BIN 4 BIN 5 BIN 6 BIN 7 1 BIN8 I BIN 9 BIN 10 Appendix A-12 Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix Special Table 1 Tables (Flash 70) (Cont’d) Special Table 2 MEA CODE: IFFICE CODES: ,REA CODE: IFFICE CODES: Special Table 4 Special Table 3 PLREA CODE: CIFFICE CODES: Issue 1, November A-9 Exception GIEA CODE: IFFICE CODES: 1991 Appendix A-l 3 Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ Appendix A-10 Least Cost Routing SPD 1428 & 2858 (Flash 75) CO LINE GROUPS 2 7 Enter what type lines are programmed in each group. DAILY START TIME TABLE I I DEFAULT TIME I 1 0800 2 1700 3 2300 4 CHANGED TIME I I ~~~~~~~~ TOLL INFORMATION Appendix A-l 4 ROUTE LIST TABLE .... fll~~~ ::...:,:, ,_,,,.......“‘ii~~(i..... Issue 1, November 1991 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone Appendix Issue 1, November 1991 Systems A-l 1 Route List Table Appendix A-l 5 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ Appendix Appendix A-l 6 SPD 1428 & 2866 A-l 1 Route List Table (Cont’d) Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix Issue 1, November 1991 A-l 1 Route List Table (Cont’d) Appendix A-l 7 Digital Key Telephone Systems sTARPLUS@ Appendix Appendix A-18 SPD 1428 812856 A-l 1 Route List Table (Cont’d) Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 812858 Digital Key Telephone Appendix TABLE 00 01 02 , 03 05 08 11 PRE POST IDELETE\ (PRE) ) PRE INSERT POST 1DELETE 1 (PRE) 1 INSERT INSERT ;:!jT DELETE (PRE) INSERT. PRE POST (PRE) INSERT PRE POST nlZl IDPI=\ C-I-C INSERT ;:iT DELETE (PRE) PRE INSERT INSERT DELETE 12 1 Tables DIGITS DIALED DELETE 04 A-12 Insert/Delete Systems INSERT ) DELETE] Issue 1, November 1991 POST PRE POST (PRE) PRE POST (PRE) 1 I Appendix A-l 9 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ Appendix 1 TABLE ) DELETE INSERT 14 15 POST (PRE) INSERT p;;T DELETE (PRE) DELETE 18 L Appendix DELETE INSERT ;;iT (DELETEI A-20 PRE POST (PRE) PRE POST (PRE) INSERT 17 PRE POST (PRE) PRE DELETE INSERT 16 Tables (Cont’d) DIGITS DIALED INSERT 13 A-l 2 Insert/Delete SPD 1428 & 2866 (PRE) 1 I Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Appendix Issue 1, November 1991 Digital Key Telephone A-13 3-Digit Area/Office Systems Code Route List Table Appendix A-21 Appendix Appendix A-22 A-14 6-Digit Office Code Table Issue1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2858 Digital Key Telephone Appendix Issue 1, November 1991 A-l 5 LCR Exception Systems Code Table Appendix A-23 sTARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 Digital Key Telephone System APPENDIX B DIGITAL SYSTEMS PART NUMBERS Appendix B-l Digital System Component . . Pescnptw List Part No, SPD 1428 Components: 4x8 Basic System (BKSU) 2x4 CO/Sta Expander Module 4x8 Expansion KSU 4x8 CO/Sta Expander Module RS232/422 I/O Module SPD 2856 Components: Key Service Unit w/Power Supply (KSU) Central Processor Board (CPB) 4x8 CO/Station Interface Board (CKB) 4x8 CO/SLT Interface Board (CSB) RS232/422 I/O Module SPD 1428 & SPD 2856 Digital Terminals: Enhanced Key Telephone Executive Key Telephone Data Key Telephone (Data Module Unit) DSS Console Unit DSS Expansion Module Single Line Adapter Starplus Power Failure Transfer Unit (PFTU) Key Telephone Overlay (Pkg 25) Key Telephone Underlay (Pkg 100) Manuals: Description, Installation & Maintenance Manual Station Users Guide SLT Users Guide Attendant Users Guide Optional Components: DTMF Receiver Module 1200 Baud Modem Module Relay/Sensor Interface Module 1400-00 1431-00 1402-00 1432-00 1437-00 2800-00 2830-00 2831-00 2833-00 2837-00 1412-00 1414-08 1416-08 1410-08 1410-10 1484-00 SP536-00 1460-xX* 1462-99 1450-00 1452-00 1453-00 1454-00 2834-00 2837- 10 1436-00 *xX= 00 11 54 60 - Black - Dark Green - Grey - Burgundy Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix B-l SPD 1428 & 2856 STARPLUS@ Digital Key Telephone Systems APPENDIX C ICLID GENERAL DESCRIPTION C.l Introduction This specification provides the functional and implementation definition for the addition of the ICLID feature to the Vodavi Key Systems. C.2 System Configuration The preceding illustration depicts the configuration presumed for the implementation of the ICLID feature for the system. The phones are presumed to be in a UCD group in order to allow proper operation with the system. C.3 Functional Performance The ICLID (Incoming Calling Line IDentification) feature has beenadded to the Vodavi Key Systems as a first step in providing it generally. The keysystem operation of this feature is dependent on the feature first being activated from the central off ice so that the numbers of the calling party will be delivered over the individual tip and ring of the CO lines during the first silent interval between ringing. The features implemented are: 1. Display of calling number/name on initial ring-in of a line on the display keysets. 2. Recording of incoming call number/name on the SMDR printout. 3. Management of an “unanswered call” table from a display phone with appropriate privilege level to allow tracking of unanswered calls for statistical information and return call management. 4. Local translation of incoming numbers to names according to a table of number/name equivalences which can be administered by the system. I- RS232 LAN Figure C-l ICLID System Configuration Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix C-l Digital Key Telephone 4 Systems sTARPLUS@ C-3.1 Calling Number/Name Display This feature is intended as the basic offering of the ICLID service when associated with a VCS keysystern. Essentially, whenever an incoming call is received at the system, the number received along with the ringing signal will be stored in the line control tables and used at various points in the processing of the call. The primary function will be that the calling number will be displayed (if available) at any point at which the “LINE RINGING” is displayed in the system. In addition, with the availability of the calling name feature, if the calling name is provided, the system will deliver that to the display instead of the calling number. The specification for this feature is that the system will display its “LINE RINGING” message as normally implemented and alter that display to the calling number/name if the information is made present on the line. This will allow the normal operation of the system when ICLID information is not presented or the device which intercepts it and provides the information to the KSU is missing or failed. 000000000111111111122222 123456789012345678901234 1 bbbbb-bbbb 1 If the calling name is available, the display will be shown as above where the X’s represent the internal table storage of the calling name. Note that although the Central Office delivery of the calling name is 15 characters, the internal table used to store the name for translation of a received number is 24 characters in width. If the Central Office delivers a name , it will be positioned left justified in the 24 character field on the display. Note that if a number is received which matches a number/name translation, the translated name will be used and the name delivered from the Central Office will be effectively discarded. If no name is available, either supplied from the Central Office or internally from the translation table, the delivered number will be positioned centered in the display as shown above for the 14 N’s. Appendix C-2 SPD 1428 & 2866 C.3.2 Incoming Number/Name SMDR As with the above feature implementation, the intent is that the system operate normally in the absence of ICLID information or the failure of the ICLID equipment. If the information is present at the time that an SMDR record is generated for a call, it will alter the content and format of the SMDR output record. If the calling number is available, the number will be output in the SMDR record in the same location as the dialed number is located in the outgoing calls. If the calling name is present, an additional line will be output in the SMDR identifying the name. This record will immediately follow the normal SMDR record. The normal SMDR record will include an indicator which identifies that a following record with name identification is present. Unanswered calls will be recorded on the SMDR for incoming as a system option to allow the identification of callers for statistical and call-back purposes. These calls will be identified with an indicator in the SMDR record. C.3.3 Unanswered Call Management A 50 entry table will be maintained in the system. The calling number/name information pertaining to any unanswered call will be placed in this table at the time the system has determined that the call has been abandoned. This table may be administered from appropriately privileged phones so that the unanswered calls may be reviewed and handled by the customer. Upon entry into the review process, the functions available to a phone are: Function 1. Go to beginning of list 2. Review next item in this list entry 3. Step to next list entry. 4. Delete this list entry. 5. Delete entire list. 6. Exit list review function. 7. Step to previous list entry. 8. Call Back. Function Button Dial Code 635’ MUTE I , HOLD FLASH Note* ON/OFF TRANS SPEED ’ The access code is used to enter the list orocessina function. The remaining functions are exercixed by’use of a redefinition [;zVxey.Y function buttons. . . . 1 ’ This feature will be implemented initially as an Admin ProgrammIng function only due to an ongoing mvestrgabon as to whether it is practical to allow complete list deletion at the phones when it is relatively easy to clear the list one entry at a Issue 1, November 1991 :. STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 C.3.4 Local Name Translation An administrable table in the KSU will be provided. This will provide a local translation from a received calling number to a name. This will be administrable by the customer from the attendant console position’.ln cases of conflict between the name delivered from the CO and that in the local translation table, the local translation table shall rule. One hundred (100) entries will be provided in this table. C.3.5 ICLID Display Phone Operation The phone, modified as described in paragraph, will be used to deliver specific data messages identifying call states to a device attached to the phone via a serial channel following the data transmission requirements of RS232. The interface parameters to be used are 24OObps, no parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. The implementation of this will be to deliver ICLID data to a Personal Computer attached to the phone for look-up of customer records and subsequent processing by the individual answering the telephone call. C.3.5a Information from the Phone to the PC The messages are provided from the keyset to the connected PC are: The formats of these messages are shown in the below table as follows: Digital Key Telephone Systems These messages are transmitted from the KSU to the phone and subsequently from the phone to the data line as the appropriate events occur within the system. Each event is separate and does not require any history to be maintained. A PC connected to the phone must be prepared to accept and process any of these messages at any time. The data is sent from the KSU to the keyset using command FO. The keyset then takes the data byte and sends it out to the PC at 2400 baud, no parity, eight data bits, and one stop bit. There is no handshaking in the keyset so the PC must always be ready to receive the data sent to it. The data is in the form specified in the ICLID specification. C.3.5b information from the PC to the Phone The ICLID phone allows information from a connected PC to be used to simulate button depressions internally within the phone. The characters sent from the PC to the phone must be paced to provide at least 1OOms between characters (500ms for DTMF pad depressions). The data received from the PC is converted to keystroke data. The data is received at 2400 baud, no parity, eight data bits, and one stop bit. There is no handshaking in the keyset receive. To allow the keyset time to send the data to the KSU character pacing of 100ms is required. To allow DTMF outgoing digits to complete, 500ms pacing is required. The character received has bits seven and eight striped off and is converted to the Note: ii = Two bytes used to identify a call for subsequent messages so that a PC will be able to identify current call status for processing purposes. N...N = This is the number received from the Central Office. X...X = This is the name to be used for look-up purposes as delivered either from the Central Office or via the 1 This function will be implemented for the initial implementation as an Admin Programming feature (FLASH 55 program) for efficiency purposes. Further investigation will be necessary to determine the feasibility of implementing this in attendant console processing. Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix C-3 Digital Key Telephone Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 key strokes as per the following chart. Time must be allowed from the access of a CO line before digits are sent out to the line. The following table lists The ASCII characters and the button depression they cause. ASCII Value oxoo ASCII Btn Pacing # Char(s) .:::.:.~::i~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~ “‘r’:‘.‘....:.:..:.:~~::~~:~:~:.: ...:...... . . :r::::.:i ~,:::::: ~,,:,:,: ::: : ::::::: NUL ~,~~~.~,~.~.~.~.~.~~:~.~.~.~:~,~.:~:.~ . :)‘:::. , C.4 implementation Plan The reference for this data delivery is the BellCoRe specification TR-TSY-000030 Issue 1 dated November 1988. Other specifications will be consulted as they become available. In particular, the implementation of the multiple message format provided by Northern Telecom must be examined for deviations from the multiple message format definition in the TR-TSY-000030 document. The steps necessary to implement this are detailed in the following sections. C.4.1 ICLID KTU Display Phone The ICLID KTU provides transmit, receive, and ground data lines from the phone u-processor which are used on command from the KSU to output information. The use of this capability would be to output the ICLID information to a PC attached to the phone. Future use could be made of this capability for low speed data provided to equipment attached to the phone. 0x27 ox28 0x29 Ox2A Appendix FLASH 1 100ms 1 ’ ,‘?I’.‘...“. ‘.“(‘:-::::.:.:....?.: ........... :.... ~~~li’:‘jal ............*).._.,,,,,,,,,,,,:,,,,,,,,,,, ( Digit 3 500ms ) Digit 6 500ms * C-4 :. issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 C.4.2 Table Structures C.4.2a Incoming co Line 1 2 3 Digital Key Telephone Systems Number Table (per CO line) Received # (14) Received Name (24) Date (2) . . . . l . . . . . Time (2) CO tine (2) . . . . . . . . n-l n C.4.2b Unanswered Call Table . l . . . . . . . . . 0 . . . . . . 48 49 Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix C-5 Digital Key Telephone C.4.2~ Systems STARPLUS@ Number to Name Translation SPD 1428 & 2866 Table >:j:/ y&: ~g@@?&j ~~~~~ ~$g$g@g ~~ ~~~,3~~4 Basil NDCTINOEX g$p- ....... . XL .::+::$&q 1 PREV ,NoM. ,1;g$$$m:: 1‘8 .::&&g -j!$j$ EDIT AN INW[ .:.:.“‘.‘:::::$qgw NOTE: If a match is found between a number in the translation table and an incoming call record, the translated name is displayed ancl/or stored in the unanswered call table. NOTE: Entry of phone numbers and names from a terminal require keystrokes corresponding to a keyset keystroke. Example: to enter a “I” from the terminal, an entry of “W is required or to enter an “A”, the terminal programmer must enter “21”. 3. Press the HOLD button to update the database. To program a name into the ICLID translation table: 1. Press the NAME flexible button (Button #2) to enter the desired name into the translation table. Maximum number of characters is 24. The BACK SPACE flexible button can be used to erase the current letter to correct for errors. 2. Press the HOLD button to update the database. To erase a current phone number and name entry: 1. Press the CLEAR ENTRY flexible button (Button #3) to clear an entire phone number and name from the current index. Appendix C-8 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2856 ICLID Programming Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) Local Name Translation Table (Cont’d) Programming Steps 2. Press the NEXT INDEX flexible button (Button #18) to advance to the next index and continue entering information into the ICLID translation table, or 3. Press the PREV INDEX flexible button (Button #19) to go back to a previous index that is already programmed. To locate an existing index for editing: 1. Press the EDIT INDEX flexible button (Button #20). The following message is shown on the display phone: Description An administrable table in the KSU is provided. This table provides a local translation from a received calling number to a name. This is administrable by the customer from the attendant console position. In cases of conflict between the name delivered from the CO and that in the local translation table, the local translation table shall rule. One hundred (100) entries are provided in this table. When programming the ICLID Translation Table, the flexible buttons are as follows: p:j ..::;:;:::*:;PHONE /$yfi~ NUMBER :::.:..:.:.I:.:..A snivel ... ~~~~ NAME ~~~~~1 CLEAR EmY ~~~~ai~~ \ 2. Enter a two-digit number which corresponds to the index numbers 00-99. 3. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. NOTE: If a match is found between a number in the translation table and an incoming call record, the translated name is displayed and/or stored in the unanswered call table. Issue 1, November 1991 Appendix C-9 Digital Key Telephone ICLID Programming C.8.2 Systems STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2866 (Cont’d) ICLID Features Programming Steps If ICLID is to be used: 1. Press FLASH and dial [56]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. To program ICLID features, use the flexible button(s) as defined in the following procedures. The ICLID, NAME buttons toggle on and Off. Description The Starplus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone System can provide ICLID output to either the standard RS-232C connector on the SPD 1428 Basic KSU motherboard or CPB board or to the optional RS232C/422 l/O Module connector(s). When ICLID is desired, the following system-wide parameters will determine how the ICLID information will be distributed. When programming ICLID features, the flexible buttons are mapped as follows: ~~~ ICUD ~~~~~~l 1 FORMAT pJ@$$@# 3. After all entries are made, press the HOLD button to accept the data. Related Programming: C.8.2a ICLID Translation Table. ICLID Enable/Disable Programming Steps 1. Press the ICLID flexible button (Button #l) to enable/disable this feature. l Description Default: By default, ICLID is disabled. LED ON = ICLID is enabled l LED OFF = ICLID is disabled 2. Press the HOLD button to accept the data.The display will now update. C.8.2b NAME in Display Programming Steps 1. Press the NAME flexible button (Button #2) to determine whether the name will appear in the LCD display instead of the incoming telephone number. l LED ON = Name will appear in display Description The system can be set to display either the incoming telephone number or the person’s name on the LCD display. Default: By default, the system will show the telephone number on the LCD display. LED OFF = Telephone number will appear in display 2. Press the HOLD button to accept the data. The display will now update. l Appendix C-10 Issue 1, November 1991 STARPLUS@ SPD 1428 & 2888 ICLID Programming Digital Key Telephone Systems (Cont’d) ICLID Features (Cont’d) Programming Steps C.8.2~ Baud Rate Display The ICLID Baud Rate is programmed using Flash 15 Baud Rate Assignments. Button #3 will return error tone when pressed. The LCD displays the current baud rate based on which Port number is asigned to the ICLID Port number. C.8.2d ICLID Port Assignment Programming Steps 1. Press the PORT flexible button (Button #4) to determine which port is to be used for ICLID information. 2. Enter a one-digit number for the ICLID Port number: 1 = Port #1 (“On-Board” RS232C) 2= Port #2 (“On-Board” 300 Baud Modem) 3= Port #3 (I/O Expander Module RS232C) 4= Port #4 (I/O Expander Module RS-422) 3. Press the HOLD button to accept the data. The display will now update. Issue 1, November 1991 Description The Stat-plus Digital (SPD) Key Telephone Systems can provide ICLID input to either the standard RS232C “On-Board” connector on the SPD 1428 BKSU or SPD 2856 CPB board or to the optional RS232C/422 I/O Expander Module connector(s). The Baud Rate will be displayed as either 300 baud, 1200 baud, 2400 baud, 4800 baud, or 8600 baud. Related Programming: Baud Rate Assignments Description Port #1 refers to the standard RS-232C “On-Board” connector on the SPD 1428 Basic KSU or the CPB board on the SPD 2856. Port #2 refers to the “On-Board” 300 Baud modem provided with the system. Port #3 refers to the RS-232C connector on the I/O Expander Module. Port #4 refers to the RS-422 connector on the same I/O Expander Module installed in either Starplus Digital system. Default: By default, Port #l is used for ICLID operation. Appendix C-l 1 TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE Stsrplus Digital Telephone fF NO: 27a 1 o/23/92 ADDITIONAL FEATURES - STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS ISSUE 1, NOVEMBER 1991 The following list of features are available with software version 2.OD, or higher and IRS Level C, m firmware version 1 .OF or higher. (The IRS Level is located in the lower left comer of the label on the bottom of the phone.) SYSTEM FEATURES SECTION Dial by Name Directory Dialing Internal/External Local Number/Name Translation Table Off Hook Voice Over Messages Canned Messages Date and Time Message Custom Text Messaging (Silent Response) Distinctive Ringing Group Listening Flex Button Programming Idle Speaker Mode Music On Hold Automatic Call Back Timer Executive Override UCD FEATURES Enhanced Calls in Queue Display No-Answer Retry Timer Expansion of Recorded Announcements to 8 VOICE MAIL FEATURES Voice Mail Transfer with ID LCD ENHANCEMENT SECTION CO Line Identification Display PROGRAMMING FEATURES SECTION Station Relocation Flexible Station and CO Port Assignments HARDWARE FEATURES SECTION Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) Keyset Self Test Page 1 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a SYSTEM FEATURES 4 Dial By Name Directory Dialing Internal/External Local Number/Name Translation Table Off Hook Voice Over Messages Canned Messages Date &Time Message Custom Text Messaging (Silent Response) Distinctive Ringing Group Listening Flex Button Programming Idle Speaker Mode Music On Hold Automatic Call Back Timer Executive Override Page 2 of 72 Vodavi Communications SYSttJmS 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 i602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a DIAL BY NAME Description: The system will allow station users to dial extension numbers or speed bin by entering a name of a person that has been programmed for that station. The system data base will allow entry of a name (alphanumeric) up to 24 characters in length for each station. This programmed name can be used for dialing-by-name station users. Operation: To dial a station user by name: a. The user dials the Dial-By-Name b. Dial the desired person’s name using the keys on the key pad. For example: if you wanted to call Linda Murphy, and last names were entering into the directory dialing list, you would press the digit 6 (M), then the digit 6 (U), then the digit 7 (R), the digit 7 again (P), the digit 4 (H) and finally the digit 9 (Y). ALPHA NUMERIC CHAR DIGIT A,B,C QW G,H,I 2 3 4 5 J&L l C. code [6,] on the dial pad. ALPHA NUMERIC CHAR DIGIT 6 7 8 9 W’J,O P,Q*,R,S T,U,V w,x,y,z* = does not appear on the keypad When the system finds a unique numeric match (MURPHY=687749) to the name being dialed, the call will be placed to the station matching the name. The intercom call will signal the station according to the H-T-P switch setting. If fewer than eight digits are dialed, the numeric match will be dialed after a 10 sec. inter-digit time-out occurs, or if a “#I” (pound), is pressed. Conditions: 1. The Dial-by-Name code [S,] may be programmed onto a flex button. 2. The system will dial the station that matches the dialed name when a unique match is found. 3. Numbers may be entered as part of a name. 4. If multiple names are located (found) after 8 digits, the first one is dialed. Programming The names will be entered as a part of the system attributes data base. To avoid conflicts, all names must have a unique numerical sequence. Page 3 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a DIAL BY NAME (cont’d) Hardware: None LCD Display When a station user dials the dial-by-name code, the LCD will prompt for the name as follows: 123456789012345678901234 , Page 4 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL DIRECTORY DIALING FACT NOTlCE STARPLUS DlGlTAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a - Station Description: Station users with Executive Display telephones may view a list, of up to 200 names, from the system directory on the station’s LCD display, then automatically dial the station or speed dial bin or entry in the Local Number/Name Translation Table by pressing a single key. Names placed in the directory list may be associated to intercom numbers, system speed dial bins, or entries in the Local Number/Name Translation Table. Users may view the directory list beginning with any letter of the alphabet, then scroll through the list either forward or backwards. When the desired name is displayed on the LCD display, pressing the SPEED button will automatically place a call to that destination. Directory dialing may also be used to transfer a call from one station to another. Operation: a. Dial the Directory List dial code [680], or press the pre-programmed a directory dialing button. b. Press a button on the key pad, once, twice or three times, to represent the letter of the alphabet, to begin viewing the list of names. (i.e. the first depression of the digit 2 produces the names beginning with an “A”. The second depression of the digit 2 produces the names beginning with a ‘B’, while the third depression of the digit 2 produces the names beginning with a “C”.) The letters of the alphabet are represented on the key pad as follows: ALPHA NUMERIC ARC Wf GA-U J&L CHAR DIGIT ALPHA NUMERIC 2 3 4 5 flex button programmed CHAR as DIGIT MN0 P,Q’,R,S T,U,V W,X,Y,Z’ 6 7 8 9 * = does not appear on the keypad C. Names beginning with the letter chosen will appear on the LCD display. If there are no names in the Directory List beginning be shown on the LCD display. d. with the desired letter, a name with the next higher letter will Dial [J to scroll up (next entry) through the list, or Dial [#] to scroll down (previous entry) through the list, or Press another key to view the list for a different letter of the alphabet. Page 5 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL DIRECTORY DIALING e. FACT NOTlCE - Station STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a (cont’d) When the desired name is shown in the LCD display, pressing the SPEED button will automatically dial the destination station or outside phone number (via speed dial). . If the desired party is an intercom station, that station will be signaled according to that station’s intercom selector switch (SLT stations will tone ring). . If the desired party is associated to a speed dial bin, the system will select a CO line and dial the number programmed into the speed dial bin. Call progress tones will then be heard. . If the desired party is associated to an entry in the Local Number/Name Translation Table, the system will and dial the number programmed into the translation table. Call progress tones will then be heard. To Transfer a Call using Directory Dialing: While on a call: a. Press the TFlANSfer button. b. Dial the Directory Dial Code [680] on the dial pad, or Press a pre-programmed flex button programmed C. Press the SPEED button to automatically d. Hang up to complete the transfer. for directory dialing. dial the destination station. Note: Calls may only be transferred to internal stations only. An attempt to transfer a call off-net (via a Speed dial bin) will result in the call recalling upon going on-hook. Programming None Page 6 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintrea Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 65260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS DIRECTORY TECHNICAL FACT NOTlCE STARPLUS DlGlTAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a DIALING - Attendant Description Attendants with Executive Display telephones may view a list, of up to 200 names, from the system directory on the station’s LCD display, then automatically dial the station, speed dial bin, or entry in the Local Number/Name Translation Table by pressing a single key. Names placed in the directory list may be associated to intercom numbers, system speed dial bins, or entries in the Local Number/Name Translation Table. Users may view the directory list beginning with any letter of the alphabet, then scroll through the list either forward or backwards. When the desired name is displayed on the LCD display, pressing the SPEED button will automatically place a call to that destination. Directory dialing may also be used to transfer a call from one station to another. Operation: a. Dial the Directory List dial code [680], or press the pre-programmed a directory dialing button. b. Press a button on the key pad, once, twice or three times, to represent the letter of the alphabet, to begin viewing the list of names. (i.e. the first depression of the digit 2 produces the names beginning with an “A”. The second depression of the digit 2 produces the names beginning wit a ‘B”, while the third depression of the digit 2 produces the names beginning with a “C”.) The letters of the alphabet are represented on the key pad as follows: ALPHA NUMERIC A&C D,E,F W-L1 J,KS CHAR DIGIT ALPHA NUMERIC 2 3 4 5 flex button programmed as DIGIT CHAR 6 7 MNO P,Q*,R,S T,U,V w,x,y,z* a 9 * = does not appear on the keypad C. Names beginning with the letter chosen will appear on the LCD display. If there are no names in the Directory List beginning be shown on the LCD display. d. with the desired letter, a name with the next higher letter will Dial [J to scroll up (next entry) through the list, or Dial [#] to scroll down (previous entry) through the list, or Press another key to view the list for a different letter of the alphabet. TF NO. 27a Page 7 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 44-S-6000 STARPLUS DIRECTORY TECHNICAL FACT NOTlCE DIALING - AlTENDANT e. STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a (cont’d) When the desired name is shown in the LCD display, pressing the SPEED button will automatically dial the destination station or outside phone number (via speed dial). 0 4 d If the desired party is an intercom station, that station will be signaled according station’s intercom selector switch (SLT stations will tone ring). to that If the desired party is associated to a speed dial bin, the system will select a CO line and diai the number programmed into the speed dial bin. Call progress tones will then be heard. If the desired party is associated to an entry in the local number/name translation table, the system will dial the number programmed into the translation table. Call progress tones will then be heard. To Transfer a Call using Directory Dialing: While on a call; a. Press the TRANSfer button. b. Dial the Directory Dial Code [680] on the dial pad, or Press a pre-programmed flex button programmed C. Press the SPEED button to automatically d. Hang up to complete for directory dialing. dial the destination station. the transfer. Note: Cal/s may only be transferred to internal stations only. An attempt to transfer a call off-net (via a Speed dial bin) will result in the call recalling upon going on-hook. Page 8 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (802) 443-8000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL DIRECTORY DIALING Programming FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a (cont’d) - Attendant Names may be programmed into the directory dialing list from the first assigned attendant station. The system allows up to 200 names to be programmed into the directory. Each name can be associated to either a station intercom number, a System speed dial bin or an entry in the Local Number/Name Translation Table and can be up to 24 characters in length. Entries in the Local Number/Name Translation Table can be up to 14 characters in length. Names are programmed in one of two ways, either by themselves or while programming system speed dial numbers. A. Method One To enter, edit or erase names that appear in the Directory List for stations or speed dial numbers: 1. Dial the Directory List program code 16931. The first entry (entry 000) in the Directory List will be shown on the LCD display as follows: 123456789012345678901234 AAA = Directory List entry number (000-199) XXX = Either a Station Number, System Speed dial bin Number, or Local Number/Name Translation Table number nnn = Programmed Name (blank if none) To Select a different entry in the Directory List; 1. Press the HOLD button. 2. Enter the three-digit entry number (000-199) on the dial pad and press the SPEED button, OR Dial [J to scroll up (next entry) through the list OR Dial [#] to scroll down (previous entry) through the list. TF NO. 27a Page 9 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL DIRECTORY DIALING STARPLUS FACT NOTlCE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a - (cont’d) To Enter or Change the current name shown on the display: 1. Press the MUTE button. 2. Then enter the name (up to 24-characters follows: 3. A = 21 B=22 C = 23 D=31 N 0 P Q = = = = EF == 32 33 G = 41 H = 42 I = 43 J = 51 K = 52 L = 53 M = 61 R 73 s == 72 T=61 U = 82 V = 83 w = 91 x = 92 Y = 93 z = 94 may be entered) 62 63 71 74 5# 6# 7# 8# 9# O# = 11 12 13 14 Press the SPEED button when finished. Confirmation To enter the intercom number to be associated = = 01 , = 02 ? = 03 /=04 1 =l# 2 = 2# 3 = 3# 4=# 56 == 7 = 8 = 9 = 0 = Space := -= ‘= by using keys on the dial pad as ;yl; .= ‘3 & = l4 ;I; )= += == # = #2 #3 #4 ## tone will be heard and the display will update. to the name: 1. Press the TFWNS button. 2. Enter a three-digit 3. Press the SPEED button to save the entry. Confirmation update. station intercom number (100-155) tone will be heard and the display will To clear an entry: 1. Press the TRANS button. Then press the FLASH button. Press the SPEED button to save the entry. Confirmation tone will be heard and the entry will be erased. Page 10 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS DIRECTORY C. TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a DIALING (cont’d) Method Two: This method may be used to enter names that will be associated to the Local Number/Name To enter a name along with a local number/name translation I. Press the TRANS button. 2. Dial the three-digit local number/name desired telephone number. Translation Table only. table number: translation table number (300-499) that represents the To Enter or Change the current name shown on the display: I. Press the MUTE button. 2. Then enter the name (up to 24characters may be entered) follows: The display will update as the name is entered. A = 21 B=22 C = 23 D = 31 3. N 0 P Q = = = = 62 63 71 74 E = 32 R = 72 F = 33 G = 41 H = 42 I = 43 J = 51 K = 52 L = 53 M = 61 s = 73 T = 81 U = 82 V = 83 w = 91 x = 92 Y = 93 z = 94 1 =I# 2 = 2# 3 = 3# 4=4#/ 5 = 5# 6 = 6# 7 = 7# 8 = 8# 9 = 9# 0 = O# Space = 11 : = 12 -= 13 ‘= 14 Press the SPEED button when finished. Confirmation by using keys on the dial pad as * = 01 , = 02 ? = 03 / = 04 ! = ‘I $ = ‘2 .= “3 & = l4 ;I: )= + = = = # = #2 #3 #4 ## tone will be heard. NOTE: The Local Number/Name Translation Table can which can be used for directory dial or dial by name. translation table is not relevant when used with directory noted that the numbers entered into this table are limited rules. be used to enter additional speed dial numbers The name entered into the local number/name dialing and dial by name. In addition, it should be to 14-digits and will be covered by toll restriction Page 11 of 72 TF NO. 27a Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL DIRECTORY DIALING B. Method FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a (Cont’d) Three This method may be used to enter names that will be associated to a system speed dial bin only. To enter a name along with a system speed dial number: 1. Press the SPEED button once. 2. Then either press a desired outside line key; OR Press the SPEED button a second time to have an outside line selected automatically. 3. Dial the system speed dial bin location (20 to 99). 4. Dial the telephone 5. Press the SPEED button to store the telephone number (including special characters TRANS, HOLD and FLASH). number. To enter a name: 1. Press the MUTE button. Enter the name (up to 24characters may be entered) by using keys on the dial pad as follows: Press the SPEED button when finished. Confirmation Either hang up to end programming bin/Name combination. tone will be heard and the display will update. or begin at step 2 to program another System Speed Dial Page 12 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL DIRECTORY DIALING DATABASE FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a (Cont’d) ADMIN PROGRAMMING Enter, Change, a. Erase or to just View entries in the Directory Dialing list: Press FLASH and dial [23]. The following message will be shown on the display: 123456789012345678901234 Where: AAA = Directory List Entry Number (000-199) (300-499) XXX = Either a Station Number, System Speed dial bin Number, Translation Table Number nnn = Programmed Name (blank if none) or Local Number/Name Flexible button 20 will be lit for selecting a directory list entry. To select a particular entry: a. Press flexible button 20. b. Dial the three-digit C. Press the HOLD button. entry number (000-199). To scroll through the list: a. Press the NEXT flexible button (Button #18) to scroll up (next entry) or Press the PREV flexible button (Button #19) to scroll backwards (previous entry). To enter the intercom number or system speed dial bin to be associated to the name: a. Press the BIN/ICM flexible button (Button #l). b. Enter a three-digit or Enter a three-digit or Enter a three-digit C. station intercom number (100-155). System speed dial number (020-099). Local Number/name Translation Table number (300-499). Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation update. tone will be heard and the display will Page 13 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 4434000 STARPLUS DIRECTORY TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a DIALING (Cont’d) To Enter or Change the current name shown on the display: a. Press the NAME flexible button (Button #2). b. Enter the name (up to 24characters A=21 B=22 C = 23 D = 31 N 0 P Q = = = = 62 63 71 74 E F == 32 33 G = 41 H = 42 I = 43 J = 51 K = 52 L = 53 M = 61 72 sR == 73 T= 81 U = 82 V = 83 w= 91 x = 92 Y=93 .z = 94 may be entered) by using keys on the dial pad as follows: 1 =l# 2 = 2# 3 = 3# 4=# 56 == 5# 6# 7 = 7# 8 = 8# 9 = 9# 0 = O# Space= 11 : = 12 -= 13 ‘= 14 * = 01 , = 02 3 = 03 /=04 ;I;; .= l 3 & = *4 = l# ( = #l ) = #2 + = #3 = = #4 # = ## l C. If an error is made while entering the name, press the BACK SPACE flexible button #4).This button may be pressed to backspace one character at a time. d. Press the HOLD button when finished. Confirmation (Button tone will be heard and the display will update. To clear an entry: a. Press CLEAR flexible button (Button #3). b. Press the HOLD button. Confirmation tone will be heard and the entry will be erased (both the BIN/ICM assignment and the programmed name). Page 14 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 * STARPLUS TECHNICAL LOCAL NUMBER/NAME FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a TRANSLATION Description An administrable table in the KSU to provide a local translation from a received calling number to a name. This is administrable by the customer from the attendant console position. In cases of conflict between the name delivered from the CO and that in the local translation table, the local translation table shall rule. 100 entries are provided in this table for the Starplus SPD1428 system, 200 entries are provided for the Starplus SPD2856 system.. NOTE: If a match is fotind between a number in the translation name is displayed andor stored in the unanswered call table. table and an incoming call record,, the translated NOTE: Entries of phone numbers and names from a terminal require keystrokes corresponding to a keyset keystroke. Example: to enter a ‘1’ from the terminal,, an entry of “I#’ is required or to enter an “A”,, the terminal programmer must enter 21’. Programming: If entries or changes need to be made to the Local Number/Name 1. Press FLASH and dial [55]. The following message Translation Table: is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 Where: XXX= ##= 2. Table Number 300-499 (SPD 1428 = 300-399; Route Number 00-l 9 SPD 2856 = 300-499) The ROUTE NUMBER Flexible Button (Button #l) LED is lit. Enter the two-digit Route Number from what was entered in program code, FLASH 43. 00-09= SPD 1428 System 00-19= SPD 2856 System Page 15 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL LOCAL NUMBER/NAME FACT NOTICE TRANSLATION STARPLUS TABLE (Cont’d) To program a phone number into the Number/Name 1. Translation table: Press the PHONE NUMBER flexible button (Button #2) to enter the desired phone number into the translation table. Maximum number of numbers is ICdigits, including hyphens. The BACK SPACE flexible button (Button #5) can be used to erase the current number to correct for errors. Use the following table for table entries. A = 21 B=22 C = 23 D =31 E = 32 F = 33 G = 41 H = 42 I = 43 J = 51 K=52 L = 53 M = 61 2. DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a N = 62 0 = 63 P = 71 0 = 74 R = 72 s = 73 T = 81 U = 82 V = 83 W=91 x = 92 Y = 93 z = 94 1 =l# 2 = 2# 3 = 3# 4=4#/ 5 = 5# 6 = 6# 7 = 7# 8 = 8# 9 = 9# 0 = O# Space = 11 := 12 -= 13 ‘= 14 = 01 , = 02 ? = 03 I=04 l 11:; .= l 3 & = l4 ;I; )= += == # = #2 #3 #4 ## Press the HOLD button to update the database. Page 16 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 . STARPLUS TECHNICAL LOCAL NUMBER/NAME FACT NOTICE TRANSLATION DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a TABLE (Cont’d) To program a name into the Number/Name 1. STARPLUS Translation table: Press the NAME flexible button (Button #3) to enter the desired name into the translation table. Maximum length of name is 24characters. A = 21 B=22 C = 23 D = 31 N 0 P cl = = = = 62 63 71 74 E F == 32 33 G = 41 H = 42 I=43 J = 51 K = 52 L = 53 M = 61 R 72 s == 73 T=81 U = 82 V = 83 w = 91 x = 92 Y = 93 z = 94 l=i# 2 = 2# 3=3# 4 = 4# 56 == 5# 6# 7 = 7# 8 = 8# 9 = 9# 0 = O# Space = 11 : = 12 -= 13 ‘= 14 = 01 , = 02 3 = 03 /=04 l ;z:; .= 3 & = *4 ;I; )= += == # = #2 #3 #4 ## The BACK SPACE flexible button (Button #5) can be used to erase the current letter to correct for errors. 3. Press the HOLD button to update the database. To erase a current phone number and name entry: 1. Press the CLEAR ENTRY flexible button (Button #4) to clear an entire phone number and name from the current index. 2. Press the NEXT INDEX flexible button (Button #18) to advance to the next index and continue entering information into the Local Number/Name Translation table, or press the PREV INDEX flexible button (Button #19) to go back to a previous index that is already programmed. Page 17 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL LOCAL NUMBEWNAME STARPLUS FACT NOTICE TRANSLATION DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a TABLE (Cont’d) To locate an existing index for editing: 1. Press the TABLE NUMBER flexible button (Button #20). The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 4 2. Enter a three-digit number which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to complete the entry. to the table numbers 300-499. TF NO. 27a Page 18 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, hz 05260 <602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a OFF HOOK VOICE OVER (OHVO) Description This feature allows users, off-hook on a call (CO or Intercom), to receive a voice announcement through the handset receiver without interrupting the existing call. The Voice Over is muted so as not to “override” or “drown” out the existing conversation. The overridden party may then respond to the calling party using CAMP-ON procedures to talk to the calling party or may use Silent Text Messaging to respond to the calling party via LCD Displays. Operation . Placing an Off-Hook Voice Over (OHVO): When a station (Sta A) calls a busy keyset (Sta B), and busy tone is received, the calling station (Sta A) may dial the OHVO dial code 16281, or press a pre-programmed flex button to initiate an OHVO announcement. The HOLD button LED will flash at the called OHVO station. Both stations (Sta A AND Sta B) will receive a one beep warning tone, the calling party may then begin the voice announcement to the called party (Sta B). The called station’s (Sta B) existing conversation will not be interrupted and the voice-over announcement will not “drowned” out the existing conversation. The calling station (Sta A) will not be able to hear the called station’s (Sta B) conversation (the connection will only allow Sta A to transmit to Sta B). e Responding to an Off-Hook Voice Over: After receiving an OHVO announcement, calling party: two options are available to the called party to respond to the 1. The called station (Sta B) may respond to the calling station (Sta A) by using the Camp-On feature. The called station (Sta B) presses the flashing HOLD button to consult with the calling station (Sta A). The called station’s (Sta B) existing CO call goes on Exclusive Hold automatically. This method then follows CAMP-ON procedures and operation. 2. The called station (Sta B) may respond to the calling station (Sta A) by using the Silent Text Messaging. This feature is only available to digital key terminals, and the calling station (Sta A) must be a Digital Display Terminal.) The calling station (Sta B) may press pre-programmed Message buttons to respond to the voice-over announcement without being released from the current call, (i.e. by pressing a flex button pre-programmed for the message “IN MEETING”), the calling station (Sta A) will then receive this message on the calling station’s LCD display. Conditions 1. The station receiving the OHVO call MUST be off-hook and in the “H” mode. 2. The calling (originating) 3. When the dialed station responds via the CAMP-ON feature, all conditions and options available to CAMPON apply. station and receiving station (Sta B) must be a Digital terminal. I Page 19 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintrtw Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO:27a OFF HOOK VOICE OVER (cont’d) , 3. OHVO may be used to notify the called party of a transferred call (CO Line or Intercom) by announcing the call then releasing to complete the transfer. When this occurs the receiving station does not need to respond to the OHVO. 4. When a call is transferred is complete. 5. Any messages including “CANNED’, “CUSTOM’, or ‘SILENT RESPONSE” text messaging may be used to respond to an OHVO call. The message will appear on the originating (Sta A) and receiving station (Sta B) LCD displays. 6. One Time DND may also be used as a response to an OHVO call (i.e. the DND display will appear on the calling station). 7. The called station may press a flex button programmed as Message code button ([633#]) then enter on the dial pad the specific message code desired. DTMF digits will not be heard by either party. 8. The receiving station must be programmed 9. When silent messaging is used to respond to an OHVO call the existing call (Sta B) will not be disconnected while the messages are being sent to the originating station (Sta A). IO. The originator (Sta A) of an OHVO call must remain off-hook to receive silent messages. The originating station’s (Sta A) voice transmit will remain connected to the called station (Sta B) and may respond verbally to the text messages. The OHVO call ends when the originating station goes on-hook. 11. If the receiving station is on-hook in speakerphone mode and a calling party initiates OHVO, the receiving station will receive a CAMP-ON warning tone and normal camp-on procedures are followed. 12. The receiving station (Sta B) may send (multiple messages) and even after sending a message may press CAMP-ON to talk to the originating party (Sta A). Each time a message is sent the splash tone will be heard and both displays will be updated. 13. LED’s will follow CAMP-ON via OHVO the receiving station will not receive muted ringing after the transfer to allow OHVO calls. LED lamping sequences. Programming Each station can be programmed one of two ways, as follows: 1. 2. to allow receiving OHVO calls. Each station may be programmed for OHVO in OHVO disallowed (may not receive OHVO calls). May receive OHVO calls. OHVO is programmed as a part of station programming (program code 50, Page A). Page 20 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, At 85280 (602) 443-6000 * STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a OFF HOOK VOICE OVER (cont’d) LCD Display The following display will be seen on the displays of stations involved in an OHVO call. After OHVO has been originated: Originating Station 123456769012345678901234 Receiving Station 123456789012345678901234 Displays will then follow either CAMP-ON or Message displays depending on the action of the receiving station. When the OHVO call is complete, the display on the receiving station will return to the existing call data. TF NO. 27a Page 21 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (802) 443-8000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL MESSAGES - CANNED FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a Description A station user may select a pre-assigned message from a list of ‘canned’ on the LCD of a telephone that calls that station. messages in the system to be displayed Operation A station wishing to select a message, dials the Message Access Code [633], or presses the flexible button programmed for Message Access, then dials the two digit message code and hangs up. Example: m+ [Ol] means that a telephone calling the station will receive the message ‘VACATION”. The individual canned message codes are as follows: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Clear Messages ON VACATION RETURN AM RETURN PM RETURN TOMORROW RETURN NEXT WEEK ON TRIP IN MEETING AT HOME ON BREAK AT LUNCH To cancel the message, the station dials the Code [633] + fOO] and hangs up. Conditions: 1. The telephone receiving the message must be a display telephone. 2. Both key telephones and SLT can leave the message. SLTs are notified that they have left a message with a warning tone when going off-hook. 3. Incoming and outgoing 4. When a message is displayed by a key telephone, 5. When DND is invoked on the telephone 6. Message 7. Messages may be entered while off-hook on a call and an intercom call has camped-on will cause the station calling to see the message. 8. Messages calls are not inhibited in any way with a message displayed. the DND button LED flashes at 15 ipm. the message is canceled. Access (with a desired message) may be assigned to a flex button. are retained in battery protected area of memory in the event of power failure or system reset. Page 22 of 72 Vodavi Communications to the station. This Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE MESSAGES - CANNED (cont’d) 9. STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a The called station may press a flex button programmed as a Message Access button [633#], then enters the desired message number on the dial pad. DTfvlF digits will not be heard by either party. Programming A station user may store any of the available messages under a flexible button assigned as a Message Access button. In addition the user may program a button with the message access code only ([633]). LCD Display JDLE STATION DlSf’LAY a NG STATION DISPI AY A Station with the message 1011. ON VACATION displayed; 123456789012345678901234 . 123456789012345678901234 A Station with the message &QJ, RETURN AM displayed; 123456789012345678901234 e 123456789012345678901234 A Station with the message &j3J, RETURN PM displayed; 123456789012345678901234 . 123456789012345678901234 A Station with the message 1041, RETURN TOMORROW, 123456789012345678901234 displayed; 123456789012345678901234 Page 23 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4434000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE MESSAGES - CANNED (cont’d) . A Station with the message w, STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a RETURN NEXT WEEK, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 * A Station with the message m, ON TRIP, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 . A Station with the message m, 123456789012345678901234 .......................................................................................................... .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. ................................................................................................. .................................................................................................. IN MEETING, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 b A Station with the message m, 123456789012345678901234 AT HOME, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 . 123456789012345678901234 A Station with the message [es3, ON BREAK, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 e 123456789012345678901234 A Station with the message (.l.Ql, AT LUNCH, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 Page 24 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 -(602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a MESSAGE - DATE & TIME ENTRY Description As an enhancement to the original canned messages, station users can activate certain messages that will allow the user to enter a specific time or a date of return. These messages will appear on calling station’s display to alert them of the desired party’s return time or date. Operation Users may activate the following messages 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 a. and be prompted to enter a time or date of return: VACATION UNTIL: MMZDD RETURN: HHMMxm or MMVDD ON TRIP UNTIL: MWDD MEETING UNTIL: HHMM xm AT HOME UNTIL: HH:MM xm ON BREAK UNTIL: H/-L-MM xm AT LUNCH UNTIL: HH:MM x/n To activate a message with a custom return time or date, the station user dials the Message Access code m followed by the desired message number [l 1 - 171. Enter the date/time by using keys on the dial pad as follows: A = 21 B=22 C = 23 D = 31 N 0 P Q = = = = 62 63 71 74 EF == 33 32 G = 41 H = 42 I = 43 J = 51 K = 52 L=53 M = 61 R 72 s == 73 T= 81 U = 82 V = 83 W=91 x = 92 Y=93 z = 94 1 =l# 2 = 2# 3 = 3# 4 = 4# = 01 , = 02 ? = 03 /=04 65 == 5# 6# 7 = 7# 8 = 8# 9 = 9# 0 = O# Space = 11 : = 12 -= 13 ‘= 14 ;z:; - l3 &4 Confirmation l ;I; )= += == # = #2 #3 #4 ## b. Press HOLD to enter message. tone is received. C. To cancel the message the station dials the Code I6331 + fOOl and hangs up. Page 25 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a ,’ MESSAGE - DATE & TIME ENTRY (cont’d) Conditions , 1. The telephone receiving the message 2. Both key telephones and SLT’s may activate the message. message with a warning tone when going off-hook. 3. Incoming and outgoing calls are not inhibited in any way with a message displayed. 4. When a message 5. When DND is invoked on the telephone, 6. Message Access (with a desired message) 7. Messages may be entered while off-hook on a call and an intercom call has camped-on will cause the station calling to see the message. 8. Messages 9. The called station may press a flex button programmed as a Message Access button [633#], then enters the desired message number on the dial pad. DTMF digits will not be heard by either party. is displayed must be a display telephone. by a key telephone, SLTs are notified that they have an active the DND button LED flashes at 15 ipm. the message is canceled. are retained in battery protected may be assigned to a flex button. to the station. This area of memory in the event of power failure or system reset. Programming A station user may store any of the available messages under a flexible button assigned as a Message button. In addition the user may program a button with the Message Access code only [633]. Access LCD Display IDLE STATION . DISPLAY CALLING A Station with the message 1111, ON VACATION A Station with the message m, 123456789012345678901234 RETURN: (hour or day), displayed; 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 Page 26 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems DISPLAY UNTIL: displayed; 123456789012345678901234 . STATION 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 -1602) 443-8000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a MESSAGE - DATE 81 TIME ENTRY (cont’d) 123456789012345678901234 l A Station with -the message m, 123456789012345678901234 ON TRIP UNTIL:, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 . A Station with the message 11, 123456789012345678901234 MEETING UNTIL:, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 e A Station with the message u, 123456789012345678901234 AT HOME UNTIL:, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 . A Station with the message m, 123456789012345678901234 ON BREAK UNTIL:, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 . 123456789012345678901234 A Station with the message 1171, AT LUNCH UNTIL:, displayed; 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 Page 27 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a ,,’ MESSAGES - CUSTOM Description This feature allows the system administrator to enter up to ten custom messages for use by station users of the system. These messages may be specified and customized by the customer on a system wide basis. Operation . fvlessaoe Use - A station wishing to select a message, dials the Code 16331, or presses the flexible button programmed for message access, then dials the two digit message code and hangs up. Example: m + f21-301 means that a telephone calling the station will receive the custom message programmed at the attendant station by the system administrator. . Messaae f’rOQramminQ - The system administrator programs the ten (10) custom messages at the first attendant station as follows: From the first attendant, station dial the Custom Message program code [694] then enter the bin number [21 - 301. Then the message is entered using the dial pad keys to enter the letters as follows: , Up to twenty-four (24) characters may be entered as the custom message (this will represent 48 digits entered). The user then presses the HOLD button to enter the message and confirmation tone will be heard. To cancel the message the station dials the Code 16331 + [OO] and hangs up. Page 28 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems ’ 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, At 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE MESSAGES - CUSTOM (cont’d) STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a Conditions 1. The actual Alpha-Numeric the messages. characters 2. The attendant must go idle after programming 3. The telephone .receiving the message must be a display telephone. 4. Both key telephones and SLT can leave the message. SLT’s are notified that they have left a message with a warning tone when going off-hook. 5. Incoming and outgoing calls are not inhibited in any way with a message displayed. 6. When a message 7. When DND is invoked on the telephone, 8. Message Access (with a desired message) 9. Messages may be entered while off-hook on a call and an intercom call has camped-on will cause the station calling to see the message. 10. Message status is stored in battery protected area of memory for retention across a power failure or system reset (soft or hard). 11. The called station may press a flex button programmed as a message Access button [633#], then enter the desired message number on the dial pad. DTMF digits will not be heard by either party. is displayed will be displayed as the digits are being entered while programming a message before another message may be programmed. by a key telephone, the DND button LED flashes at the 15 ipm rate. the message is canceled. may be assigned to a flex button. to the station. This Programming 1. The first programmed 2. The function of Message Access is assigned to a station flexible button in database 3. A station user may store any of the available messages Access button. under a flexible button assigned as a Message Page 29 of 72 TF NO. 27a Vodavi Communications Systems attendant is the only station that may program these custom messages. 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, Ar 85260 admin. (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE MESSAGES - CUSTOM (cont’d) STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a LCD Display . The attendant will receive the following display after entering the Custom Message Program code [694]. 123456789012345678901234 . Then the following display will be shown after the bin # has been entered: 123456789012345678901234 e The ten (10) Custom Messages will be displayed in a similar fashion as the “Canned” messages. The idle station display will show the message that has been activated at the station and a calling station will receive the STA XXX or name-in-display followed by the programmed custom messages as follows: 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 Page 30 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TFNO. Scottsdale, AZ 85260 27a -(602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL TEXT MESSAGING FACT NOTICE (Silent STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a Response) Description This allows a station user to use text messages to respond to a caller that has either Camped-On or has used the Off-Hook Voice Over feature to alert a busy station user of a waiting call or message. The “camped-on” station may respond to the caller via the canned, custom, and silent response text (LCD) messages. The text messages appear on the calling party LCD Display. Operation A station receiving a Camp-On , . or OHVO call may respond to the caller via a text message. While receiving Camp-On, or OHVO, the called party may press a flexible button programmed for message access [633], then dial the desired two-digit message response code (or press a pre-programmed flex button for a particular message). Example : 1633]+ [38] means that the message “WHO IS IT?” will be sent to the calling station. The additional messages 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 (with their codes) listed below can also be sent as a text response: I WILL TAKE CALL TAKE MESSAGE TRANSFERTOSECRETARY PUT CALL ON HOLD CALL BACK ONE MOMENT PLEASE I WILL CALL BACK WHO IS IT? IS IT LONG DISTANCE? IS IT PERSONAL? IS IT AN EMERGENCY? IS IT IMPORTANT? IS IT URGENT? SEND CALL TO VOICE MAIL PARK CALL OUT OF OFFICE PUT CALL THROUGH I AM BUSY OK NO YES Page 31 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (802) 443-8000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL TEXT MESSAGING FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO:27a (cont’d) e If the station receiving the text message response was doing a Camp-on, he will first receive a short burst of tone on the speaker, then the display will show the message that has been activated by the called station. . If the station receiving the text message response is on an OHVO call, no tone will be received. Conditions 4 1. All canned and custom messages may be used to respond to a calling party. 2. Text response messages will automatically goes on-hook. 3. A station can receive only one message at a time. 4. Text messages 5. Text message responses may only be activated by key stations and the receiving station must be a Digital Display telephone. 6. The text message responses will appear on both the calling station and the called station (station activating) text responses) LCD displays. 7. One Time DND may also be used as a response to a call (i.e. the DND display will appear on the calling station). 8. The called station may press a flex button programmed as Message Access button ([633#]), then enter the desired message on the dial pad. DTMF digits will not be heard by either party. 9. When silent messaging is used to respond to a call, the existing call of the called station will not be disconnected while the messages are being sent to the calling station. 10. If the called station responds with a text message, the text message 11. LED’s will follow that of the CAMP-ON or OHVO. 12. Each individual message may be programmed console. clear when the calling station (station receiving the messages) may be chained (i.e. multiple messages sent to one caller). will appear on the LCD. onto a flexible button including a flex button on a DSS/BLF Programming None Hardware The calling station must be a digital display telephone and the called station must be a keyset. Page 32 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (802) 4436000 ’ STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a TEXT MESSAGJNG (cont’d) LCD Display The LCD displays will be consistent with the Canned messages and Custom messages specification. defined in their respective The additional displays described in this section will appear as follows: 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 1311 i321 4 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 [331 WI 123456789012345678901234 I351 1361 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 ....... .,............,,,,.,,,,...........,....,.........,,,......,,,,. ..,....... ~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 123456789012345678901234 [381 1371 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 [391 1401 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 [421 [411 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 WI [431 123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234 i451 [461 Page 33 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 44343000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL TEXT MESSAGING FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a (cont’d) 123456769012345676901234 123456789012345678901234 123456769012345676901234 123456789012345678901234 1471 WI 123456789012345678901234 1511 Page 34 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS DISTINCTIVE TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a RINGING Description The tone ring signal used to notify stations of an incoming call can be changed by each station user to provide distinctive ringing among a group of stations. Each station user may select a distinctive ringing tone that will be used to ring their station. The system provides 81 different ring patterns that each station user may select from. Condition To select a distinctive ring tone for a station: 1. Dial the Tone Ring program code [695] followed by two-digit entry. The telephone sound a steady tone that correlates to the two-digit entry. speaker will 2. When the desired tone is selected, press the SPEED button to save this as the tone to be presented when the station is tone rung. Confirmation tone will be heard. This tone will be presented as a result of an incoming CO or intercom call, recalling CO line or Transferred CO line or at any other time the station is tone rung (refer to condition 5). Conditions 1. The 81 ringing choices are as follows: TF NO. 27a Page 35 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE TONE # TONE FREQUENCY TONE DURATION 16 770/i 477 50ms/50ms 17 77011633 50msI50ms 16 77OiOFF burst II II 20 II II II I 852f697 I 50ms/50ms 21 8521770 50ms/50ms 22 852l852 50md50ms 23 852/941 50ms/50ms 24 852/l 209 25 852/l 336 50ms/50ms 26 852/l 477 50ms/50ms 27 8520 633 50md50ms 28 852fOFF burst 30 9411697 50ms/50ms 31 941l770 50md50ms 32 9411852 50msi50ms 33 9411941 50ms/50ms 34 941/l 209 50ms/50ms 35 941/l 336 50ms/50ms 36 941 I1 477 50md50ms 37 94111633 50ms/50ms 38 941/OFF burst 40 12091697 50ms/50ms 41 1209/770 50ms/50ms 12091852 50ms/50ms 43 1209/941 50ms/50ms 44 1209/l 209 50ms/50ms 45 1209/l 336 50ms/50ms 46 120911477 50ms/50ms 47 120911633 50ms/50ms 42 II I I 50ms/50ms Page 36 of 72 Vodavi Communications DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TFNO. Scottsdale, AZ 85260 27a -(602) 443-6000 ’ STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a TF NO. 27a Page 37 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 65260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DlGlTAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a 2. Station users may listen to all tones by dialing the two-digit codes one after another. The tone that is sounding when the SPEED button is pressed will be saved as that station’s tone ringing selection. 3. A station’s tone ringing selection will be maintained in a battery protected area of memory. Therefore if a system experiences a power failure, or a soft or hard restart, a station’s tone ringing selection will be restored. 4. The tone selected will be used to provide ‘TONE’ ringing normal or muted to the station whenever the station is commanded to tone ring. (i.e. this does not apply to camp-on tone programming confirmation tone or other specific tones that are not considered “TONE” ringing.) 5. The selected tone will be used to notify the station in the following cases: . * . 0 * . Incoming CO Call Transferred CO Line Call Back Notification All types of forwarded calls Message Wait Reminder Tone Line Queue Call Back 0 B e e 0 0 incoming Intercom Call Recalling CO Line Message Wait Call Back Executive/Secretary calls Alarm/Reminder Signalling LCR Queue Call Back Programming See operation paragraph above for user programming procedures. LCD Display When programming the tone ringing option on a digital display set the following display will be shown: 123456789012345678901234 Page 38 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 65260 -(602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a GROUP LISTENING Description All digital key stations have built in speakerphones. Station users may use the speaker to monitor a call while using the handset to converse with the outside party. This enables other people in the room to listen to both parties in the conversation. Operation While conversing, on the handset, press the ON/OFF button. Both parties of the conversation can then be heard on the digital station’s speaker. The speakerphone microphone will be muted while the handset is off-hook. To deactivate Group Listening while off-hook, the ON/OFF button must be depressed. Conditions 1. While talking using the speaker phone, then lifting the handset will turn off of the speakerphone. group listening, the ON/OFF button must be pressed (to ON) while the handset is off-hook. 2. While in group listening mode, pressing the MUTE button will cause the transmit from the handset to be muted (the speakerphone microphone is already muted). However the distant end can still be heard over both the handset receiver and the station speaker. 3. If full speakerphone 4. Group listening is not available when the station is in headset mode. 5. When placing the handset on-hook to go to full speakerphone by audio feedback to be heard. operation To activate is desired while in group listening mode, simply set the handset on-hook. operation, it is normal for a “squeal” caused Programming By default, Group listening is disabled. To enable, System Attributes, Flash 05, Button 9. Page 39 of 72 Vodavi Communication5 Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a .. FLEX BUTTON PROGRAMMING Description If you have buttons on your telephone which have NOT been assigned as CO lines, Pooled Group, or Loop buttons, you may program them to suit your own individual needs. There are five functions you may assign to these buttons: DSS/BLF, FEATURES, SPEED DIAL, POOLED GROUP ACCESS, and LOOP. As an added feature, LCR may now be added to a flex button. 4 In earlier versions of software, the Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forward (MID), Camp-On, Available/Unavailable, Personal Park, Voice Mail, Headset Mode features were able to be programmed onto DSS Console Flexible buttons. however, the LED associated with those features did not light or flash. Therefore, in this version of software, the above mentioned features are not allowed to be programmed onto DSS Console flexible buttons. These features can however, still be programmed onto keyset flexible buttons. Page 40 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Rainbw Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL IDLE SPEAKER FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a MODE Description This feature allows the system to determine whether the first digit dialed is heard over the digital key terminal speaker. This feature can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis in programming. Programming Idle Speaker Mode is programmed Mode is disabled. as part of System Features, Flash 05, Button #lo. By default, Idle Speaker Page 41 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a ’ MUSIC ON HOLD Description A music source, when connected to the system, provides music to all lines on hold, parked calls, transferred calls and calls waiting to be answered by Uniform Call Distribution (UCD). This feature can be allowed or denied on a system-wide basis in programming. Programming Music On Hold is programmed enabled for all CO lines. as part of System Features, Flash 05, Button #12. By default, Music On Hold is Page 42 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 .’ STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE SMDR CALL QUALIFICATION STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a TIMER Description This timer determines purposes. the length of time that is needed to determine a valid SMDR call for SMDR reporting Programming 1. Press FLASH and dial [Oil. The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 To make a change to the SMDR Call Qualification 2. Timer: Press the SMDR CALL QUAL TIMER flexible button (Button #16). The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 3. Enter the three-digit set to 30 seconds. value on the dial pad which corresponds 4. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. Confirmation to 00-60 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. TF NO. 27a Page 43 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive By default, this timer is Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS AUTOMATIC TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a CALL BACK TIMER Description This feature invokes a call back request anytime a user listens to busy tone for a preset period of time. Programming 1. Press FLASH and dial [Ol]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 To make a change to the Automatic 2. Call Back Timer: Press the AUTO CALL BACK TIMER flexible button (Button #17). The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 3. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds disabled with a 00 entry. 4. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. to 00-99 seconds. Page 44 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive By default, the timer is TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85280 -1802) 4434000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a Description: Allows stations designated conversation as ‘Executive’ the ability to override and “barge-in” on other keysets engaged in Operation: If you call a busy station: a. Press the pre-programmed EXECUTIVE OVERRIDE button. Executive station will be bridged onto the CO line conversation in progress at the called station. Optional warning tone is heard and presented to all parties prior to cut-thru. b. Replace handset at Executive station to terminate the override. NOTE: A change in volume may occur on the CO line or intercom call after the barge-in occurs. Conditions: 1. An error tone will occur: - if the called party is in a conference - if the called party is already on an OHVO call. - if the called party already has a Camp-On at his station. 2. If the Executive joins a call and one of the members does a hook-flash the Executive will be dropped. or depresses his transfer button, 3. If the Executive does a hook-flash 4. When the Executive jumps in on an intercom call or CO call and the Executive is not in a mute condition, and any member of the party hangs up, the call will be converted to a two-party conversation. 5. When the Executive jumps in on an intercom call or CO call and the Executive is in the mute condition and either of the two parties in the intercom call hang up, the call will be dropped. If the Executive hangs up, the call will remain as a two-party conversation. or depresses his transfer button, it will be ignored. Programming: A separate condition has been added to Station programmi disallow an Executive to override an extension. Station displ from blank or EO to A or D, or EA or ED; where A= allow override, override capability. D= disallow Page 45 of 72 Vociavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive hi& will allow or s been changed override, E= Enable TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a UCD FEATURE SECTION Eight Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) groups can be programmed, each containing up to eight three-digit station numbers. Each group is assigned a pilot number. When this number is dialed, the first available agent in that group is rung. Calls are routed to the station that has been on-hook for the longest period of time. Enhanced Calls in Queue Display No-Answer Retry Timer Expansion of Recorded Announcements to 8 Page 46 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (602) 443-6000 , STARPLUS TECHNICAL ENHANCED CALLS FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a IN QUEUE DISPLAY The Agent Queue Status feature provides a means for an agent and a UCD supervisor to view the status of their UCD group. This display is an idle state display and will prompt a supervisor that a group is having problems answering all their calls. The display will tell the agent and his supervisor how many calls are in queue, how many agents are available or logged into the group, and the length of time in minutes that the oldest call has been in queue. The agent will receive the calls in queue display whenever there is a call in queue. Operation There are two methods 1. of viewing UCD Group call queue status. In-service UCD agents and the assigned overflow station will see the quantity of calls in queue on the LCD of their station for the UCD group of which they are a member. If every member of a UCD group is busy and calls are in queue, the following message will be seen at all UCD members of that group. 123456789012345678901234 55X CIQ:XX AL:XX 0C:MMM UCD Group Calls in Queue Available Agents Oldest call in minutes NOTE: If a UCD member is taken out of the group (i.e. DND, Call Forward, Unavailable, calls in queue information. 2. etc.) they will not receive Any station not assigned in a UCD group can view the number of calls in queue for any given UCD Group. To view the number of calls in queue, the station user dials the Calls In Queue code [567], or press a programmed FLEX button, then enter the desired UCD group. The LCD will display, on a real time basis, the number of calls in queue for that group. TF NO. 27a Page 47 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS NO-ANSWER TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a RETRY TIMER Description After a UCD call rings to an agent, this timer takes effect. If the agent does not answer the call before this timer expires, then that agent is set to “Out-Of-Service (00s)” and the call is routed back to the UCD group for another available agent or queue. The timer is variable from 000-300 seconds. Programming 1. Press FLASH and dial [60]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 2. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming the ACD Ring Timer To change to a different UCD Timer, press the appropriate flexible button and perform the following procedures. To make a change to the UCD No-Answer 3. Press the NO-ANSWER the display phone: Retry Timer: RETRY TIMER flexible button (Button #6). The following message is shown on 123456789012345678901234 4. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds 5. Press HOLD button. Display will now update. to 000-300 seconds. Page 48 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 4434000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL EXPANSION FACT NOTICE OF RECORDED STARPLUS ANNOUNCEMENTS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a TO 8 Description Determines the type, index (port) number and message length for the eight available Recorded Announcements (PAN). There are eight HAN tables that can be programmed. A table can be the answer port for unanswered incoming calls to a UCD group, while another table can provide the secondary message. The type can be either a CO line port, or a SLT port. The index number specifies which circuit for the type of interface. Operation The message length is used to match the maximum length of the message to the device that is used. Example: To program a. b. c. d. a table for a CO line port: Press the TABLE “x’ flexible button (Buttons i-8). Dial [l] for CO port interface. Dial [Oi to 281 for CO line used. Enter message duration (000-300 sec.) Example To program a. b. c. d. a table for an SLT port: Press the TABLE ‘x’ flexible button (Buttons l-8). Dial [2] for SLT port interface. Dial [lo0 to 1551 for SLT station used. Enter Message duration (000-300 sec.) Programming If Recorded Announcement a. devices are installed to operate with UCD, these tables must be programmed: Press FLASH and dial [62]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 Page 49 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS EXPANSION TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE OF RECORDED ANNOUNCEMENTS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a ,: TO 8 (cont’d) b. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming UCD RAN Announcement Table 1. To change to UCD RAN Announcement Table 2, press flexible button #2. Repeat above for Tables 3 through Tables 8. C. Enter a string of six, or seven digits on the dial pad. The order of data entry will be: Type number: 1 = CO Port interface 2 = SLT Port interface Index (port) Number: 01 - 28 = CO Line Port loo-155 = SLT Station Port Message Time: 000-300 seconds d. Press HOLD button. NOTE When a CO port is designated as a RAN port, a relay andor sensor should be programmed for Announcement Table 1 through 8. Page 50 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintme Drive . as a RAN start TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a VOICE MAIL Voice Mail Transfer with ID Page 51 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintres Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (802) 443-5000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE VOICE MAIL TRANSFER STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a WITH ID Description This feature provides an Attendant or station user a way to transfer a caller directly into a voice mail box. This allows the station identification digits to be entered by the transferring party. Using this feature, a caller can be transferred to a voice mail box when 1) a station user on the system is not forwarded to VM or 2) the destination Voice Mail Box owner is not a station user. Operation: I When a caller wishes to be transferred into a user’s Voice Mail box and the desired user’s station is not forwarded into voice mail, then the attendant or a station user may initiate a Voice Mail Transfer by performing the following: While on a call and the distant end wishes to leave a Voice Message for a VM user: 1. The initiating station presses the TRANfer button. 2. Dial a Voice Mail Group number, or press a Voice Mail group button. Dial tone is returned. 3. Dial the VMID (Mail Box location) of the desired party and go on-hook. The system will then make the connection to an available Voice Mail port and send the Leave Mail Prefix (if any) + the digits dialed as the VM ID number + then the Leave Mail Suffix digits (if any). The system will then cut through the transferred caller. Conditions 1. CO Trunks and Internal Calls may be transferred into Voice Mail using this feature. 2. If no VM ID digits are dialed by the transferring station will be sent to the VM. station, then the identification digits of the transferring LCD Display: When a station transfers a call to a Voice Mail Group the following display will prompt the user to enter the Voice Mail Box #: 123456789012345678901234 When the user enters the VM ID the digits will be displayed as shown: 123456789012345678901234 . Page 52 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a LCD ENHANCEMENT SECTION CO Line Identification Display Page 53 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL CO LINE IDENTIFICATION FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a DISPLAY Description This feature allows a name to be entered into the database programming for each individual line (trunk) connected to the system. Once entered into the database, LCD phones including the attendant stations will receive the programmed line “name” in place of the default ‘LINE XX” message. This applies to all line call processing conditions where the current ‘LINE XX” message appears. SMDR will continue to print out the line number in place of the programmed name. If the line name has not been programmed, then the current “LINE XX” display will be used as the default. A programmable data field is available for each line in the system. Line names may be programmed using the range programming. Programming 1. Press FLASH and dial [40]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 2. Enter a four-digit number for the range of lines being programmed. enter that number twice (0101). If only one line is being programmed, 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Flexible button #20 (New Range) will be lit. The following message is shown on the display phone to indicate current programming of that line or group of lines. 123456789012345678901234 Where: XX-XX = The CO Line Range being programmed. (01-28) Page 54 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE CO LINE IDENTIFICATION DISPLAY STARPLUS (cont’d) Each CO line in the system can be programmed 4. DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a Press the CO LINE IDENTIFICATION information: to have a name associated to it in database programming. flexible button (Button #12). The display will show the following 123456789012345678901234 5. Enter the name by using keys on the dial pad as follows. Valid alpha-numeric characters are: A-Z, O-9, *,#, - [spaces] and other ASCII characters as listed below. The name may be entered in any combination up to 12 characters in length (this will represent 24 digits entered). A=21 M = 61 1=1# B=22 N = 62 2 = 2# , = 02 C = 23 0 = 63 3 = 3# ? = 04 D = 31 P = 71 4=4## I = 04 E = 32 Q = 74 5 = 5# ! = ‘1 F = 33 R = 72 6 = 6# $ = ‘2 G = 41 s = 73 7 = 7# % = l3 H = 42 T = 81 8 = 8# & = ‘4 I = 43 U = 82 9 = 9# l J = 51 V = 83 0 = O# ( = #I K=52 w = 91 SPACE=1 1 ) = #2 L = 53 x = 92 : = 12 + = #3 Y = 93 -= 13 = = #4 z = 94 ‘= 14 # = ## NOTE: When programming keyboard. 3. from a terminal using a keyboard, Press the HOLD button. Confirmation n = 01 = l# the CO line name may be entered direct/y from the tone will be heard and the display will update. Page 55 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL CO LINE IDENTIFICATION FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a DISPLAY (cont’d) LCD Display A message a CO line. similar to the following will be used for all CO line displays when a name has been programmed for 423456789012345678901234 Page 56 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 65260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS PROGRAMMING DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a FEATURES Station Relocation Flexible Station and CO Port Assignments Page 57 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 65260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a ‘\./ STATION RELOCATION FEATURE Description The Station Relocation Feature will provide a means to allow a user to unplug their station and plug it in at another location. Then by dialing a simple code followed by his old station number, bring all the station attributes including extension number, button mapping, speed dial, and class of service to the new location. Operation 4 A station can be relocated by unplugging it and then plugging it in at a new location. Then dial [636] followed by the extension number of the station being relocated. Once this is done, all station attributes are copied to the current station. NOTE: If a station is assigned to a specific port and that user unplugs their station and plugs it in at another location, the database administration programming will be updated to reflect the new port change. Conditions I. The station number that is dialed as the relocated station must be currently out of service. 2. The relocated station will be given the station attributes of the station doing the relocating. The two stations have traded station numbers and station attributes. 3. If a keyset is plugged into the relocated position it will have all the station attributes of the relocating station. 4. This feature only is applicable to keysets. 5. If a call is on hold at the relocating station or the relocated station is in service, error tone will be received. Page 58 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 /602) 443-6000 STARPLUS FLEXIBLE TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE PORT ASSIGNMENT DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a FEATURE Description The Flexible Port Assignment Feature will provide a means to assign stations and CO line numbers to any station or CO line port in the system. This provides complete flexibility in determining station and CO line numbers within the system as long as they stay within the system numbering plan. Therefore, a station can be assigned any number between 100 and 155 on a 2856 system and any station number between 100 and 127 on a 1428 system. A CO line can be assigned any number between 01 and 28 on a 2856 system and any CO Line number between 01 and 14 on a 1428 system. This restriction is required to minimize memory requirements on the smaller system. Conditions 1. All the station and CO Line numbers entered are stored in a temporary to main database when the system is reset. 2. System reset can be accomplished 3. Station and CO Line numbers are restricted to the system numbering 4. To return the stations and CO line back to their default condition, enter ‘FLASH” 80, Button #4 and press “HOLD”. 5. To print the station and CO line port assignments, Programming area which is uploaded in ADMIN by entering “FLASH” 80, Button #20, and ‘HOLD”. plan. enter ‘FLASH” 85, Button #4 and press “HOLD”. - CO If the CO Line numbers a. database need to be relocated to different ports: Press FLASH and dial [42]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 123456789012345678901234 b. The buttons 1 through 7 indicate cards 1 through 7. When the relocation program is initially entered, Button #l will be lit indicating the user is programming the CO Line numbers on the first card (CO Ports 1 through 4). The LCD will display the CO Line numbers presently assigned to the first 4 ports. To change the CO Line number assigned to any port: a. Dial the position number on the display (01 through 04), followed by the CO Line numbered desired. For example: if 0103 were dialed, the CO line number of the first entry on the display would be changed to 03. In addition, since 03 was shown as the third entry on the display, that entry would be blank (##). Page 59 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS FLEXIBLE TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE PORT ASSIGNMENT STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a (cont’d) To select another card in the system: a. Press the button 12) the CO Line card are changed CO Line number associated with that card. For example, if button #3 were pressed (CO Ports 9 through numbers assigned to the third card would be displayed. CO Line numbers on the third in the same manner by entering the position number (01 through 04), followed by the desired. When all the CO line numbers desired have been programmed, the system will have to reset to update the data. This is done so that the programming of CO Lines can be done while the system is in use. 4 LCD Display After dialing the CO Line flexible port programming display: code (FLASH 42), the ADMIN station will receive the following 123456789012345678901234 Programming - Station If the Station numbers a. need to be relocated to different ports: Press FLASH and dial [52]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 423456789012345678901234 b. The buttons 1 through 7 indicate cards 1 through 7. When the relocation program is initially entered, Button #l will be lit indicating the user is programming the station numbers on the first card (Station Ports 1 through 8). The LCD will display the station numbers presently assigned to the first 8 ports. To change the Station number assigned to any port: a. Dial the position number on the display (01 through 08), followed by the Station number desired. For example: if 01105 were dialed, the station number of the first entry on the display would be changed to 105. In addition, since 105 was shown as the sixth entry on the display, that entry would be blank (###). Page 60 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 ” STARPLUS FLEXIBLE TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE PORT ASSIGNMENT DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27% (cont’d) To select another card in the system: a. Press the button associated with that card. For example, if button #3 were pressed (Station Ports 17 through 24) the station numbers assigned to the third card would be displayed. Station numbers on the third card are changed in the same manner by entering the position number (01 through 08) followed by the station number desired. When all the station ntimbers desired have been programmed, the system will have to reset to update the data. This is done so that the programming of station numbers can be done while the system is in use. LCD Display After dialing the station flexible port programming display: 123456789012345678901234 code (FLASH 52), the ADMIN station will receive the following Page 61 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a , HARDWARE FEATURES Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) Keyset Self Test Page 62 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a UNIT (DDIU) Description The Data Feature is a time division switched, point to point data transmission capability which permits simultaneous voice and data communications (same system but not same port). The Data Feature offers the ability to transmit data information between personal computers, printers, plotters, modems, CRT terminals, and main frame computer ports. To establish a Data call a Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) is required to be connected to each data communications device. Data information can be switched through the system at speeds of 300, 1200,2400,4800, 9600, 19.2K and 38.4K baud asynchronous. Installation The Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) is wired to the Stat-plus 1428 and Starplus 2856 like a digital telephone, requires one station port. and All connections to the DDIU are made on the back panel. The back panel has a modular jack and a DB-25 type connector. The modular jack, labeled KSU, is used to connect the DDIU to the station port of the system. The DB25 connector supports an W-232 connection and is used to connect the data device to the system. A green LED lights to indicate the DDIU is properly wired to the system. Page 63 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintrw Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a .a’ UNIT (DDIU) (cont’d) l-r g RR MDF STATION ~~CW&CTING 1 KSU Figure 2 - Digital Data Interface Wiring Page 64 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems - 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a UNIT (DDIU) (Cont’d) Connection of the individual data communication devices requires that the installer be familiar with data communications terms, and has access to the appropriate information for connecting the variety of data communications devices that may be encountered. This information consists of, but is not limited to: 1. Is the device configured as data terminal equipment (DTE), or data communications 2. What pin on the RS-232 type connector 3. What signal leads are required to make the device operate? equipment (DCE). performs what function? When planning the installation of the data feature, use a digital display phone at any location that is to originate a data connection. A DDIU can only be called; it cannot originate a connection. A digital display phone would typically be connected to a CRT terminal, or personal computer. A DDIU would typically be connected to a printer, or a MODEM. The station wiring for a digital display phone and a DDIU are identical. The data connector of the Digital Data Interface Unit (DDIU) is a 25 pin, type D connector Data Communications Equipment with the following pin configurations. Pin Use Direction 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 92 15 17 19 20 22 Receive Data Transmit Data Request To Send Clear To Send Data Set Ready Signal Ground Data Carrier Detect unassigned Secondary DCD Transmit Clock Receive Clock Secondary RTS Data Terminal Ready Ring Indicator into out into out out telephone (or DDIU) of telephone (or DDIU) telephone (or DDIU) of telephone (or DDIU) of telephone (or DDIU) out into out out out into into out of telephone (or DDIU) telephone (or DDIU) of telephone (or DDIU) of telephone (or DDIU) of telephone (or DDIU) telephone (or DDIU) telephone (or DDIU) of telephone (or DDIU) Page 65 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive which is configured as TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS DIGITAL TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DATA INTERFACE DCE I I of data 3xD IXD SIG GND TTS 3s l-m XR ICD RTS D-m DSFI DCD surs SDCD QM RI lxcu RXCLK slxl Figure configurations DCE lxD RXD SIGON 3 - STARPLUS 1428 AND 2856 Data Switching TF NO. 27a Page 66 of 72 Systems TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a UNIT (DDIU) (cont’d) The following diagram will aid in the design of cables to connect the many different communications devices. Vodavi Communications DIGITAL 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85280 (602) 443-6000 _ STARPLUS DIGITAL TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTlCE DATA INTERFACE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a UNIT (DDIU) (Cont’d) QNDI 1 QND 2Ro 3lu . sQ7 72Q ms4 4RT2 mJ3 BLlco DlR2a 2olnw me (IOSR iuP 11 QM Figure 4 - MODEM to DDIU Cable Page 67 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a UNIT (DDIU) (cont’d) Operation To establish a connection to any idle data port, a user with an associated DDIU dials the station number of the DDIU or the group access number of the groups that the DDIU has been inserted into or depresses a DSS button representing the DDIU. The key system will then determine the baud rate setting for the called DDIU and convert the users associated DDIU to the same baud rate. The system will then complete the connection. , A second method to establish a connection between two DDIU is done by the first attendant. The first attendant dials the extension number of one data unit. Dial tone is received and the display will show the BAUD RATE. Then the first attendant dials the station number of the second data unit, confirmation tone is heard. This connection will be maintained until the first attendant dials the station number of one DDIU followed by pressing the FLASH button. To break down an established connection the user should dial his associated button for the associated DDIU followed by depressing the ‘FLASH” button. A station user can configure his associated DDIU number or depress the DSS DDIU by: 1. The station user dials the DDIU access code [63T] on the dial pad. 2. Enter the three-digit extension number of the DDIU. The display will show the BAUD rate setting, the data length (8 or 9), and the number of stop bits (1 or 2). To change the baud rate: 1. Press the “HOLD” button. Then enter the one-digit baud rate desired. Press the ‘SPEED’ button to save any changes made. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 = = = = = = = 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19.2K 38.4K To change the character length: 1. Press the “TFlAN’ button. Then enter the one-digit character length desired, either 8 or 9. Press the ‘SPEED’ button to save any changes made. To change the number of stop bits: 1. Press the “MUTE” button. Then enter the one-digit stop bit desired. Press the ‘SPEED button save any changes made. TF NO. 27a Page 68 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTlCE DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a UNIT (DDIU) (Cont’d) Programming In ADMIN, enter station programming (Flash 50) Page B, Button #l and enter an ID of 7 followed by the associated station number or [##I#] in the case of a DDIU without an associated station. The Digital Data Interface Units (DDIU) in the system can be configured in ADMIN by: 1. Press the FLASH button and dial (511 on the dial pad. 2. Enter the three-digit extension number of the DDIU and depress the ‘HOLD” will show the present settings for the DDIU. button. The display To change the BAUD rate: 1. Press the BAUD HATE flexible button (Button #I). 2. Enter the one-digit baud rate desired. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3. = = = = = = = 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19.2K 38.4K Press the ‘HOLD’ button to save any changes made. To change the character length. 1. Press the CHARACTER LENGTH flexible button (Button #2). 2. Enter the one-digit character length desired, either 8 or 9. 3. Press the ‘HOLD’ button to save any changes made. To change the stop bits: 1. Press the STOP BIT flexible button (Button #3). 2. Enter the one-digit stop bit desired. 3. Press the HOLD button save any changes made. To select a different Data unit press button #20 and enter a new data unit station number. Page 69 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a UNIT (DDIU) (Cont’d) Conditions I 1. The System is transparent to the devices being connected. Therefore each DDIU must be configured with a specific baud rate, number of data bits and number of stop bits. This configuration will be done by the first attendant or in the case of an associated data unit can be configured by the user. 2. Data switching 3. Data ports can be arranged 4. Data ports do not have to be associated with a keyset, however to connect two DDlU devices one of them must be associated with a keyset unless the connection is made by the first attendant. 5. When the data connection the keyset. 6. Non associated 7. A DDIU has a DCE interface. Therefore device (printer, PC, etc.). is accomplished using the same wiring the telephone station uses for voice switching. in UCD Groups or Hunt Groups. has been completed, DDIU connections the baud rate used in the connection will be displayed on can be broken down by the first attendant. a straight through RS232 cable can be used connect to a DTE Each DDIU requires a digital terminal port. 8. LCD Display A station after dialing an associated DDIU will receive the following display: 123456789012345678901234 A station after dialing the programming code will receive the following display: 123456789012345678901234 Page 70 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 66260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a KEYSETSELFTEST Description The Star-plus Digital Key Systems contain a test mode feature that supports the offline testing of Digital keysets and DSS units. The term offline means that the unit under test is disconnected from the switch during the test operation. Keysets not under test continue to operate in the normal manner. Tests are provided to verify the keyset and DSS LED, LCD, and keyboard button operations. Operation The test mode is entered by taking a keyset’s handset off hook and by dialing SPEED 7#. This keystroke sequence disconnects the keyset from the system and brings up the Test Mode Menu on the keyset’s LCD. The test mode is exited by putting the handset back on hook. This reconnects the keyset to the system. Test Mode Menu The menu allows the operator to select a test mode by pressing the mode number at the dial pad. Modes: 1) Keyset LCD/LED Test 2) Keyset Button Test 3) DSS LED/Button Test The operator can always return to the main test menu by pressing ##. 1) Keyset LCD/LED Test This test outputs a series of continuously repeated LCD string messages to LCD lines 1 and 2. The set of strings consists of the letters ‘A’ through ‘x’ and ‘a’ through ‘x’. The next set of strings are: ‘PICKUP TRUCK SPEED ZONE!” I*** STANDING BACK ***” The strings are alternately displayed on lines 1 and 2 of the LCD display. In addition all the LEDs are flashed at the rate of 15 IPM. 2) Keyset BUTTON Test a) Pressing a keyset key turns on the LED and displays and LCD message identifying the key number. In addition switching the HTP switch from one position to another will cause the letter ‘H-POS’, ‘T-POS”, or ‘P-POS” to be displayed. b) Pressing dial pad keys displays an LCD message that indicates which digit was pressed. cl LEDs can be tested independently of the KEYS by pressing the flex LED number at the dial pad. For example, LED 10 is turned on by pressing dial pad digits ‘1” “0”. As each set of new numbers is entered the previously lit LED is turned off and the new LED is Page 71 of 72 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL TELEPHONE TF NO: 27a turned on. Invalid flex values (ex. 00,99) turn off currently lit LED. 3) DSS LED/BUTTON Test When the DSS test is selected and a DSS test is invoked ALL DSSs associated with the keyset running the test are placed in test mode. If no DSS unit is associated wit the keyset, the keyset display will indicate “NO DSS’. The DSS LED test will cause all the LEDs to flash at a 15 IPM rate. Once started the DSS LED test will continue until a DSS flex button is depressed. Pressing a DSS flex button turns on the flex key LED and displays an LCD message on the associated keyset identifying the flex key number (01 to 48). In addition, it turns off the previously selected flex LED. Conditions 4 1. Test mode disrupts the normal operation of a keyset or DSS. LCD Display: The Main Test mode menu is as follows: 123456789012345678901234 The Keyset BUTTON Test mode menu is as follows: 123456789012345678901234 The DSS BUTTON Test mode menu is as follows: 123456789012345678901234 Page 72 of 72 Vodavi Communications SyStemS 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 27a Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 ., TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE sTARPLUS ADDITIONAL FEATURES - STARPLUS@ SPD 1428/2856 Issue 1, November 1991 D@ftal Systems TF NO: 43 2/17&I Digital Systems A Key Station Features matrix is included in this techfact to identify the new software packages for the Stat-plus Digital Systems. The following list of new features are available with software version 2.3 or higher. The SPD 1428 KSU must have IRS level “S” or later, and the SPD 2858 CPB board must have IRS level “H” or later in order for these features to operate properly. CUSTOMER DATABASE PROGRAMMING Upload/Download Routine SYSTEM TIMERS Reminder Ring Timer (Button 18) Release Guard Timer (Button 19) NbEX!$ II-ICE=. SYSTEM FEATURES Call Cost Display (Button 11) Handset Volume Adjustment (Button 13) Call Qualifier Tone (Button 14) Privacy Release Tone Option (Flash 06, Button 1) Flash Rates (Programmable) (Flash 07, Buttons 1-4) CO L:NE Al-TRIBUTES DISA Programming Options (Button 7) Trunk Direction (Button 13) Ring Delay Timer (Button 14) STATION ATTRIBUTES CO Line Ringing Options (Reminder Ring) (Button 13) ICLID FEATURES (Features available with optional software) Caller Entered ICLID digits Expanded ICLID Ringing Assignments (Flash 43, Button 1) ACD FEATURES (Features available with optional software) ACD Group Expansion to 16 Groups/l6 Members (Flash 60, Flash 64) Guaranteed Message Announcement (Flash 60, Button 11) ACD Event Trace (Flash 63, Buttons 1 812) UCD FEATURES UCD Station Assignments (Flash 60, Page B, Buttons 1 thru 8) VOICE MAIL FEATURES (Features available with optional software) Enhanced Voice Mail Integration (Flash 65) Page 1 of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (@a 443aooo Key Station Nraturesl2.3 FEATURE tccount Codes Attendant Recall Automatic Call Bad< Timer Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Agent Positions Alternate ACD Group Assignments Group Member Status Guaranteed Message Announcement Incoming CO Direct Ringing No-Answer Recall Timer No-Answer Retry Timer OverRow Station Assignments ACD Event Trace Recorded Announcements (RAN) k&ground Music Battery Back-up (Memory) Busy Lamp Field (BLF) N=No additional hardware required TA!$;;; CALL PROCESSING NETWORK & COMBINATION TRUNKING PKG FEATURES YE;;;;;: 0 l l 0 0 ., ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED l 0 l N 0 l 0 N l l l N l 0 N l l N l l N l l N l 0 0 0 RAN Device(s) N l 0 N l a N l 0 N 0 0 a PCrrerminaUPrinter RAN Device(s) l Key Station Featb ‘es/2.3 Software I FEATURE Eall Announce - Privacy Call Back Call Cost Display Feature Call Forward: Preset ACD Groups Hunt Groups Off-Net Stations UCD Groups VM Groups Call Forward: Station All Calls Busy Busy/No Answer No Answer Off-Net Call Park Call Pick-up Directed Call Pick-up Group Pick-up Call Transfer Caller Eotered ICLID Digits Calling Station Tone Mode Option CampOn Camp-On Recall Canned Toil Restriction Centrex Compatibility N=No additional hardware required STANDARD FEATURES I I I CALL PROCESSING NETWORK TRUNKING& COMBINATION PKG FEATURES FE;;;;:: l Packages I. 1. IO ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED I N c Key Station Features/P.3 FEATURE Software Packages COMBINATION PKG ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED l N l NI l I N l I N l I N l I N l I N l N l PC/Terminal Printerfletminal Printer/Terminal l l l N I N=No additional hardware required ’ Key Station Featuresl2.3 Software Packages ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED COMBINATION PKG DISA Call Forwardin 0Pxmv PFw12v supply supply N N N l l N=No additional hardware required I N 1 Paging Equipment , I Key Statidn Feattired2.3 Software Packages FEATURE l N l N 0 N l 0 N=No additional hardware required N 34-BW14-ml l N 0 N 0 N 0 N 0 N a 0 a N N N l N 0 N l N c Key Station Featutes/2.3 FEATURE sFI”A”Tu”$s” Software “F”E;;;;E’s” Packages CALL PROCESSING NETWORK TRUNKING8, COMBINATION PKG FEATURES incoming Number/Name for SMDR Records Unanswered Call Management Idle Speaker Mode Incoming CO Lines Off-Net Forward via Speed Dial Intercom Calling Intercom Signaling Select K keyset Self Test I: Last Number Redial (LNR) LCD Interactive Display Least Cost Routing (LCR) 6-Digit Table Daily Start Time Tables Default LCR Data Base Exception Tables InserVDelete Tables LCR Routing for Toll Information Route List Tables Weekly Time Tables 3-Digit Table Local Number/Name Translation Table Loop Bqtton CO Line Access :eet Me Page Message Waiting Message Waiting Reminder Messages - Personalized Tone N=No additional hardware required ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED l l l .e ICLID Keyset ICLID Keyset l l l l l N l l l l l N l e l l l N l l l l l N l l l l l 34-Btn keyset l l l l l N l l l l l Exec Keyset l . N l l N l l N l l N l l N l l N l l N l l N l l N l l N l l l l l N l l l l l N l l l l l N l l l l l N l l l l l N l l l l l N c Key Station FEATURE Features/2.3 STANDARD FEATURES Software CALL NETWORK 8 COMBINATION PROCESSING TRUNKING PKG FEATURES ;;;;;;Ei Custom Messages Date and Time Entry to Personalized N=No additional hardware required ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED l l l l N l l l l N l l l l N l l l l I Music Source l l l l I N l l l l l l l l Exec Keyset N l l l l N l i Packages Ie I Ie I l I N l l l l l l l l l l l l N N N l l l l N l Ie Ie I l l l l l l l l 0 l l l l I N OHVO Keyset N N Key Station Featdres/2.3 FEATURE Pause Timer N=No additional hardware required Software Packages c Key Station Features/2.3 FEATURE N=No additional hardware required Software Packages Key Station FEATURE zoice Mail Groups (VM) In-Band Signaling Integration Message Waiting Indication Tone Mode Calling Option Transfer/Forward VM Disconnect Signal VM Transfer with ID Digits Volume Controls N=No additional hardware required Features/2.3 STANDARD FEATURES Et;;;:: Software Packages CALL PROCESSING NETWORK & COMBINATION TRUNKING PKG FEATURES ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED VM System VM System VM System VM System VM System VM System VM System l N STARPLUS’ Digiil TF NO: 43 Systems CUSTOMER Upload/Download DATABASE PROGRAMMING Routine Page2of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 STARPLUS@ Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 DATABASE UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ROUTINE Desctim: The Database Upload/Download database feature provides a maintenance facility which permits the user to download the database to a PC, when a software change is made or when the system needs to be initialized and re-programmed. In addition, the routine will facilitate the programming of a database on an in-house system which can be downloaded to a PC and then uploaded to a system in the field. After the system maintenance is completed, the file saved in the PC can then be uploaded to the system. NOTE: All trace modes (SMDR, ICLID Event, Maintenance download is performed! Using the PC to Upload/Download Event Traces, etc.) MUST be turned off befdre any thru Remote Administration A Personal Computer must be connected to the RS-232C port on the SPD 1428 Main Key Service Board or on the SPD 2856 System Central Processor Board (CPB) can be used for database programming. When entering the system remotely via a Personal Computer, access to the on-board modem is accomplished by accessing Port [199] either through a direct ringing assignment or through DISA or by being transferred to Port [199] by any internal station. 1. Connect one end of an RS-232C Serial cable from the RS-232C connector on the SPD 1428 Main Key Service Board to the desired Comm Port on the PC, or connect one end of an RS-232C Serial cable from the RS-232C connector on the Central Processor Board of the SPD 2856 System to the desired Comm Port on the Personal Computer. NOTE: Pins 2 & 3 on the Persona/ Computer end of the RS-232C serial cable MUST be reversed. Pins 6 & 20 MUST be jumpered together for proper operating of the upload/download routing . 2. Load a communication software package (i.e. Procomm) into the Personal Computer. Make the necessary changes to the following areas of the communications package. Save these permanent settings. ITEMS TO CHANGE CHANGE ..,,,,.:.. L..‘. : .7: .....’ ‘.I .,.,. 1::::, ...... ...... ., .;.:: .,. .; .; ,.::...” ‘..“.’ ’..’ .“““” ,:1:,.,:1:::.1,.,~~~~::~:.:~, :1 .’ ,...,;““‘, ,, ; ,,,. .“. ” ‘.‘I?f5&-~~efersy m + -rpj--:l(::‘:“il:~~~~~~~‘:::~.,:~:,~:::1.;:,._1:1 I Baud Rate 2400 Baud ,N for Parity,8 Bits,1 I IIII Stop Bit 1 II ‘I:;.:: j. .‘. ,,,,:,: ” ., ( .,. ,’ “‘, :. “~..~.‘,“.,’ ,, ... ., ( ,., ;, ‘,. ,,, ,,.,.... “( ‘, ,‘,.;:.: ( .;;..‘....., ,,, ;, :::‘;.:‘.:‘. ,.,. Sg’T(j :: ::. : p “..y.:: .;, ;;.:::::.i ‘..‘.‘.‘, .. ‘-:’ :~.~.‘.‘.~.‘..~..~.~..~.~.‘.~.‘.’.,.’.: ., ‘.:::. :::. .qyTI(-JNS: ~~~~si_‘j~:~~~::~~.:~.~:~~:~~’ ::.A:: .,.,., : “” ,,........ : I 11 Item C: Soft flow ctrl (XONIXOFR 1 ON Item A: Echo Locally Item D: Character OFF Pacing 0 Page3of56 Vcdavi Communications Systems II 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6oca STARPWS@Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 Item E: Line Pacing 0 item F: Pace Character 0 Item I: CR Translation (upload) None Item J: LF Translation (upload) None Item K: CR Translation (download) None Item L: LF Translation (download) None :,:.,’‘7.:::..‘.‘.‘.‘.‘,‘.~.~.‘.’ ‘.‘.‘,~.~. ‘7...‘,‘. :.1. :;:..~.~.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.’.~.’.’.7.’:.’.‘.‘.~.‘. .~.‘.::‘.‘.‘..‘.:‘.‘.‘.‘.‘. .‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘. ,... ... ,::~,~,~~~~~~~~~~~~:~:~:~:~:~~~~:~:~~~~~~:~~~~:~.~.~~~:~~~~~~ ‘...‘.‘:. :;:.::: . ..:::; .‘L’,‘,,..... ,,,..._,...........,, ..., ..,.. ,...., ...,_..,..,, :.. :.. .,’:.: .... ......’ ‘. .....’ ..:. ... ‘...: ‘.. ~~.~.... .:,.,.,,’,’.:.. ..:.:.. “’ ” ~ ?$+&g~~ ~~~~~~~~~optl6ns~~~~~~~~~~~::~~:~~~~~~~~~~~~:~~~:::~~~~~~~ :iii~~si~~~~~~:.~~ .,; .,;;;.... .,..... ,. .; . .,.;.,.. .,. ..........,., .,.,.,.,.,...,. .,“..,.....,.,...,.,........... ..... .,..,.,. ., ..... .. ; ; ..,.,..,..., .,..:‘:.,.. .’ .-. I Item C: Abort xfer if CD lost NO NOTE: Item C appears in Procomm Plus Version 2.01 or higher 3. Press the IEnrs;lkey on the PC. The following display will be seen on the Personal Computer 1428 Digital ltey-System Eng. Uer. Z.&l5 DATE: 08/14/92 ENTERPASSUOAD: 4. monitor. IIHE: 89:11:43 Enter the pasword p,/OD.Wl], and press t.he M key again. Proper entry of the passurord will result in the ADM> prompt. Proceed with programming referring to Figure 600-l in the Starplus Technical Manual for terminal characters that represent the keyset buttons. By entering a [?] from the terminal, a HELP screen will appear. TF NO. 43 Page4of56 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive SadMale, AZ 85260 STARPLUS@Digiil 5. Systems TF NO: 43 Enter the information on the following capture JloaItMPLusbdy? & 423 DIgItal Hey-Sgstm ng. ucr. t.eal!i DME: ml PtlssmnD: 6. ee/14/92 11m: 14:17:lz Press the @ + q keys. This will bring up the log screen on the PC monitor. Enter a path for the database file to be sent to or press m and the database file will be sent to the destination shown in the communications package default settings area. Enter Iql filename (CR for default): NOTE: The downloaded database can not be changed in the PC. The Upload/download routine is only a method to save an existing database. Any database changes can be made using the remote admin capabilities. 7. On the PC, press the m key to begin the downloading database is completely downloaded. 6. On the PC, press the routine. Confirmation q + q keys again to turn the log file off. Page5of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSysb7I.S tone will be heard when the 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 W2) 443-6m STARPLUS” l-F NO: 43 Digital systems The download file will contain a series of ASCII strings which will contain a checksum at the end of the string. The checksum will be verified when the system receives the string back. An error in the checksum will result in rejection of the string. In addition an error message will be sent to the PC when a string is received with an error. When transmission of the download file is complete, a confirmation tone will be heard. .The following is a list of strings and the order that they will be received in: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. , II 1’. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. I I II 29. Ii 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. II 35. 11 36. DB-VERSION SYS-TIMERS DB-VERSION RELAY-BOX (1 thru 7) NIGHT-MODE HUNT-GROUP (330 thru 337) CO-LINE (1 thru 28) STATION (100 thru 155) KEYSET-BUTTONS (100 thru 155) where equipped DSS-BUTTONS (100 thru 155) where equipped j UCD-GRP (550 thru 557) UCD-TIMERS VOICE-MAIL-GRP (440 thru 447) VOICE-MAIL-OUTPULSE ALLOW-TABLE-A ALLOW-TABLE-B DENY-TABLE-A DENY-TABLE-B OFFICE-CODE-TABLE AREA-CODE-TABLE 3sDIGIT-ROUTE-TABLE 6~DiGIJ~ROUJE~JABLE (table entry) EXCEPTION-CODE-TABLE ROUTE-LIST-TABLE (table entry) INS/DEL_TABLE (table entry) DAILY-START-TABLE WEEKLYSTART-TA%LE I ROUTE-FOR-555-1212 jI SYSTEM-SPEED-BIN 1 SJA-SPEED-BIN (station 100 thru 155) SPEED-DIR (directory entry) ICLIDJRANS-TABLE (trans table entry) ICLID-UAC-TABLE (uac table entry) I SPECIAL-JABLE 1I PORT-TO-STATION j PORT-TO-CO-LINE II -I I II II II Page6of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems MOO E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 VW 443-Mao STARPLUS@ Digiil 37. 38. TF NO: 43 systems STATUS-REQUEST END-OF-FILE Forward and backward compatibility will be maintained. If the file being uploaded from the PC contains less information in a string then is required by the system database, the system will maintain default information in the area not covered by the string. If the file being uploaded from the PC contains more information in a string than is required by the system database, the system will ignore the additional information. To upload a database file: 1. On the PC, enter the following information after the first ADM> prompt. Then press the GJ key. 1426 Digital I@--~ ng. tkr. z.eals DATE: ewl4/32 % m -aD: TIHEE: l6:11:86 2. On the PC, press the IZJ + [C] keys to clear the screen. Press the m an “A” to set the upload as an ASCII upload file. 3. This will bring up the ASCII upload file screen on the PC monitor. Xl XrloDDI il mDm 1) YtlODBl Mch) 6)YllODDC6U&ch) 0) Ill-XtXlDF2l El lX-XiQDRl-6 Cl aImPusEIIvE B+ II) KmlIl Sl SmLImx Yau 4. Selection: iI1 RI r) Ill Y) II 1) 2) 31 (press DImI ror key to bring up the upload screen. Enter fscl1 mu n3cll m.lNx KlD)DE)CI WJ’lODtYl IWDDl mx1 11 [MT 21 [FM 31 ASCII) Enter the path for the file to be uploaded to the system and press the fKJ key. The file will now be uploaded to the system. Confirmation tone will be heard at the completion of the upload routine. If the m key was Page 7of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 WJa 44.3-mo STARPLUS” Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 pressed during the download routine without a filename entered, the default filename will be: PCPLUS.LOG. NOTE: If the PCPLUSLOG file is not re-named or deleted before the next download downloaded information will append the existing LOG file instead of over-writing it. 5. routine is performed, the After the file is uploaded to the system, the ADM> prompt will be returned to the PC monitor. Enter an “M” at the prompt and press the IGJ key. , MIERPlBXMiI40 adaa EdtinfJ admln... DME: eeAiA2 TIME: lfm:s3 uit1ng mlnteMnr utility... , 6. On the PC, press the IZJ + [X] keys. Press the [Entsrlkey to exit Procomm and return to the DOS prompt. 7. After the upload procedure programming to take effect. is completed, the system MUST be reset for full activation Page8of56 Vodavi Communications Systems 8303 E. Raintree Drive !ScoHsdale, AZ 85260 of the database TF NO. 43 bw 44wooo STARPLUS@Digital Systems TF NO: 43 SYSTEM TIMERS Reminder Ring Timer Release Guard Timer Page9of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 6300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 STARPLUS” Dfgiil Systems TF NO: 43 A REMINDER RING TIMER Description: When a CO line rings at a busy station, the call rings at the station using a muted ring (default) signal. The CO Ringing Option feature allows a user to receive reminder ring at his station instead of muted ring. This timer provides a reminder ring every time the timer expires, as long as the incoming CO call has not hung up. If the user continues his present conversation and the CO party does not hang up, the Reminder Ring timer will expire and the user will receive another burst of ring. When the keyset user hangs up on his existing call, the ringing for the CO call will revert to normal ringing. Programming: If any System Timers are to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [Ol]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Press the REMINDER RING flexible button (Button #la). The following message is shown on the display phone: 3. Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds to 00-99 seconds in 1 sec. increments. A value of 00 disables the timer, therefore the user will only receive one burst of ring at the beginning of the call. 4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Default By default, the Reminder Ring Timer is set to 00 sec. and is variable from 00 to 99 seconds in 1 sec. increments. Page 10 of56 Vodavi CommunicalionsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scoltsdale, AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 W2) 443-6m STARPLUS@ Digi@ Systems TF NO: 43 SYSTEM TIMERS (Ccmt’d) B. Release Guard Timer Description: The Release Guard Timer is designed for the CO tine loop interface to accommodate the variations found from one Central Office to another. The timer is started whenever a CO line is released. If a user attempts to access a CO line before the Release Guard timer expires, his LED will illuminate indicating the CO line has been seized, however the CO line will not be seized until the timer expires. The user WILL NOT receive busy tone, but may get delayed CO dial tone if the timer is set to a large value. PrOgramming: If any System Timers are to be changed: 1. Press the RELEASE GUARD TIMER flexible button (Button #19). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds to 01-50 (0.1 sec. to 5.0 sec.) 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Defaut By default, the Release Guard timer is set for 3 for 300 milliseconds, and is variable from 100 milliseconds to 5 seconds. Page 11 of56 Vdavi CommunicationsSystems 83&l E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 STARPLUS’ Digiil TF NO: 43 Systems SYSTEM FEATURES Call Cost Display (Available with optional software) Handset Volume Adjustment Call Qualifier Tone Privacy Release Tone Option Flash Rates (Programmable) Page 12 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6ooo STARPLUS” Digital TP NO: 43 systems CALL COST DISPLAY Desaiptfon: The Call Cost Display Feature provides a means for a user to view the approximate cost of each call made. This approximate cost will also be printed as part of the SMDR record. The Call Cost Display will replace the call duration display when a call is made using LCR. This display is enabled in programming. The cost information is programmable by selecting one of the 16 route list tables and one of the four time periods. This allows the user to program four separate costs based on the time of day for each of 16 routes. The costs entered in the tables will be a cost for one minute, however, costs are calculated using a l/lOth of a minute value. These costs are rounded down and are based on the start time of the call, even if the call extends into a different time period. The SMDR printout will contain a cost calculated using a l/lOth of a minute increment, however the station display will update approximately every 30 seconds. The user must use LCR to get the call cost display. , Programming:, If any System Features are to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [05]. The following message is shown on the display phone: If Call Cost Display Feature is to be enabled: 2. 3. Press the CALL COST DISPLAY flexible button (Button #ll). depression, and the display will update with each depression. l LED on = Call Cost Display is enabled l LED off = Call Cost Display is disabled Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation This feature will toggle on and off with each tone is heard. The following message will be shown on the display for the LCR Route List table when the Call Cost display feature is enabled: ROXJTE .::... LiST:: TABLE’ ‘. ,.,‘,“.. :::,,X: .... ,$’ ii. ‘.’‘. :.:,:::‘.:;..‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.‘.~.~.~::‘.‘.‘.’ ‘.: ‘.:: .;,,‘.,,‘,.,‘,‘,,., ‘. : :,: ‘,‘,’ .’ : : ...” 1,E~TER;RR~~~~.CCC’~~..DD’~L:-I~WO~.~~.i:~ : ; ,..:.: ‘.‘.’:. ..““. ., ,. ,, ‘.” .: ‘,‘I ‘. Where: RR=Route List Table number 00-15; T=Time Period; CC&Cost for one minute $O.OO-$9.99; G= CO Line Group; DD= Insert/Delete Table reference 00-19; (## for none); L= LCR Class of Service Defautb By default, the Call Cost Display Feature is disabled. Page 13 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems @300E. Raintrw Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 Pm 4434ooo STARPLUS~ Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 HANDSET VOLUME ADJUSTMENT Description: This feature provides the user with a flexible button that can be programmed on their keyset. When programmed, allows the keyset or SLT user to increase/decrease the handset receiver gain while on a CO call or intercom call. This volume setting will be stored on a per station basis until changed. A. Keyset OperatIoni While on a CO call: 1. Press pre-programmed* , Handset Receiver Gain flex button to enter the volume adjustment mode. 2. Dial a one-digit entry [0] through [9] (O=lowest, 9=highest) on the dial pad, or press the [#] to increase or [%] to decrease the gain, one level at a time. (Default: 7 = Odb) The LCD will display the settings as they occur if a flex button has been programmed using the code [638]+[0]. 3. Press pre-programmed* Handset Receiver Gain flex button again to exit the volume adjustment NOTE: When the above procedure is used, your transmit path is momentarily interrupted depressed. mode. as the dial pad button is A flex button can be programmed to decrease the Handset Receiver Gain using the code [638]+[+#]. Another flex button can be programmed to increase the Handset Receiver Gain using the code [638]+[#]. A flex button can also be programmed to have a certain volume setting using the code [638]+[1 thru 91. *A Flex button must be programmed for this feature to operate using the code [638]+[0]. B. SLT Operation: While on a CO or intercom call: 1. Hookflash and dial the Handset Receiver Gain code [SSS] on the dial pad. 2. Dial a one-digit entry [0] through [9] (O=lowest, 9=highest) on the dial pad, or Press the [#] to increase or [+I+] to decrease the gain, one level at a time. (Default: 7 = Odb) 3. Hookflash again to return to call. 4. Repeat above procedures, if necessary. 5. Replace the handset to end the call. Programming: In System Features programming, Handset Receiver Gain feature must be enabled, Flash 05, Button #13. Page 14 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive scatsdale, AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6cm sTARPLUS@ Digital Systems CALL QUALIFIER TF NO: 43 TONE Description: This feature provides a means for an agent to enter codes on ACD type calls that identify the call. This feature provides up to four digits for the ACD SMDR reporting function which are compatible with the Basic ACD software package. This feature will permit up to 12-digits to be entered, however, only the first four digits are provided for in the SMDR record. Programming: If any System Features are to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [05]. The following message is shown on the display phone: If the Call Qualifier Confirmation 1. 2. Tone is to be enabled: Press the CALL QUALIFIER TONE OPTION flexible button (Button #14). This feature will toggle on and off with each depression, and the display will update with each depression. l LED on = Confirmation tone is enabled l LED off = Confirmation tone is disabled Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default By default, the Call Qualification Confirmation tone is heard. tone is disabled. Page 15 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 15300E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 t3w 443-6om Digiil STARPLUS’ systems TF NO: 43 PRIVACY RELEASE TONE OPTION Description: Privacy is insured on all communications in the system. If desired, the customer may elect to disable the Automatic Privacy feature, thus allowing up to three other stations to join in on an existing CO Line conversations. NOTE: Disabling of the privacy feature may be limited by federal, state or local law, so check the relevant laws in your area before disabling privacy. l Per CO Line Option: This feature allows each CO line to be individually programmed for maintaining security on such lines as Data lines, Private lines, or special is disabled on a CO line then, while in use, another station may enter the CO line button. A programmable warning tone is presented to all parties attempting to enter the conversation must also have privacy disabled. l privacy. This feature is useful for circuits requiring privacy. If privacy conversation simply by pressing the prior to actual cut-thru. The station Per Station Option Each station may be programmed to give the station the capability to join an existing conversation simply by pressing the CO line button that is in use. A programmable warning tone is presented to all parties when the station enters the conversation. The CO line must also have privacy disabled to allow the cut-thru. NOTE: Display stations will continue to receive the *CONFERENCE” display regardless of the warning tone setting. Programming: If the Privacy Release Tone needs to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [06]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Press the BARGE IN WARNING display phone: 3. TONE flexible button (Button #l). The following message is shown on the Enter a one-digit value on the dial pad to enable or disable the conference tone. [0] = Disabling of Conference tone [1] = Enabling of Conference tone 4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default tone is heard and the display will now update. By default, the Privacy Release Tone is enabled. Page 16 of 56 Vodavi CkmmunicalionsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive !k.dtsdale, AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 @@)44s6ooo Digiil STARPLUS” SystemS TF NO: 43 FLASH RATES (Programmable) Description: The flash rates for the following features can now be programmed 47 l l l l to 16 different options in admin programming: Incoming CO line ringing: defaults to 30 ipm flash Incoming intercom ringing: defaults to 120 ipm flutter Call Forward: defaults to 30 ipm flash Message Waiting: defaults to 15 ipm flash All other flash rates in the system are fixed at the rates shown in Table 400-13 DSS/BLF Button Visual Indicators, Table 400-14 CO Line. Button Visual Indicators, and Table 400-15 Function Button Visual Indicators in the Starplus Digital Systems Technical Manual, Issue 1, November 1991. Programming: If the flash rates need to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [07]. The following message is shown on the display phone: The available flash rates are as follows: l oo=off l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Steady On 30 ipm flash 60 ipm flash 240 ipm double wink 240 ipm flash 240 ipm flutter 460 ipm flash 480 ipm flutter 15 ipm flash 120 ipm flash 120 ipm flutter 480 ipm wink 240 ipm wink 240 ipm quad wink 480 ipm triple wink Page 17 of 56 Vcdavi CommunifzationsSystems 8300 E. FtaintreeDrive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TFNO. 43 (602) 443-6ow STARPLUS@ Digiii systems TF NO: 43 Flash Rates (Cont’d) A banning CO Line Ringing: 1, Press the INCOMING CO RINGING flexible button (Button #l). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter a two-digit value on the dial pad to correspond to one of the 16 available options. 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default tone is heard and the display will now update. By default, the Incoming CO Ringing is set for a 30 ipm flash. B. incoming intercom Ringing: 1. Press the INCOMING phone: ICM RINGING flexible button (Button #2). The following message is shown on the display 2. Enter a two-digit value on the dial pad to correspond to one of the 16 available options. 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default tone is heard and the display will now update. By default, the Incoming Intercom Ringing is set for 120 ipm flutter. C. Call Fonvarding: 1. Press the CALL FORWARD flexible button (Button #3). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter a two-digit value on the dial pad to correspond to one of the 16 available options. 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Defauk tone is heard and the display will now update. By default, the Call Forward is set for a 30 ipm flash. Page 18 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 83&l E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 65260 TF NO. 43 032) 443-woe STARPLUS@Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 Flash Rates (Cont’d) D. Message Waiting: 1. Press the MESSAGE WAITING flexible button (Button #4. The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter a two-digit value on the dial pad to correspond to one of the 16 available options. 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default: By default, the Message Waiting tone is heard and the display will now update. is set for a 15 ipm flash. Page 19 of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems WI E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 ?F NO. $3 w 44cwNJ STARPLUS” TF NO: 43 Dig&d systems CO LINE AlTRIBUTES DISA Programming Options (Button #7) Trunk Direction (Button #13) Ring Delay Timer (Button #14) Page 20 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443aoo STARPLUS” Digital Systems DISA PROGRAMMING TF NO: 43 OPTIONS Description: A line can be assigned as a DISA line during night service only or on a 24- hour basis. Additionally, is allowed to follow station forwarding during night service only or on a 24-hour basis. a DISA line An unlimited number of DISA lines can be .programmed into the system. A DISA access code can also be programmed. Incoming DISA callers may dial any valid internal station or access outside line groups. A CO line ringing at a station will follow preset forward or no-answer call forward using the preset forward timer the same as an initially ringing CO call does. It will follow direct forward and busy forward the same as an initially ringing CO call. If the preset forward timer is set to 06, the first forward of the DISA ringing call at a station will take 15 seconds. DISA callers-will be subjected to the Class of Service placed on the line accessed for outdialing. It is recommended that Loop Supervision be enabled when setting up DISA line(s). Refer to the following Sections in the Starplus Digital Technical Manual. Sec. 610.1, System Timers, Conference/DISA Timer allows the system administrator to control the length of time a DISA caller is allowed after establishing a “Trunk-to-Trunk” call. After expiration of the Conference Timer, a tone will be presented to both DISA parties, then one minute later the system will automatically release both trunks. The Conference Timer does not affect or control a DISA-to-Station call. Programming: If any CO line features are to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [40]. The following message is shown on the display phone: ~~SELECT’A’~CO”UNE’RANGE ?:. ,.::‘:. 2. Enter a four-digit number for the range of lines being programmed. that number twice (0101). 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Flexible button #20 (New Range) will be lit. The following message is shown on the display phone to indicate current programming of that line or group of lines. Where: If only one line is being programmed, enter XX-XX = CO Line Range (01-46) DT = DTMF or Dial Pulse CO = Line Type, CO or PBX UNA = Universal Night Answer enabled C = DISAJTrk-to-Trk enabled P = Privacy feature enabled LSX = Loop Supervision DSX = Type of DISA options FLXX t Flash Timer; GRPX = CO Line Group COSX =CO Line Class of Service Page 21 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSpiwms 83&l E. Rainlrse Drive ,sLcdtaa, A.2Bmo TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6ooo STARPLUS’ Digital Systems DISA Programming TF NO: 43 Options (Cont’d) 4. Press the DISA flexible button (Button #7). 5. Enter a one-digit value on the dial pad to indicate type of DISA desired. [0] [l] [2] [3] [4] 6. = = = = = No DISA (disable DISA) 24-Hour DISA Night DISA only 24-Hour DISA with forwarding Night DISA only with forwarding Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default tone is heard and the display will now update. By default, there are no outside lines assigned as DISA lines. Page 22 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems WO E. iiaintree Diva §izYdale, k 6250 TF NO. 43 WQ)4434ooo STARPLUS’ Digiil TF NO: 43 SyStemS TRUNK DIRECTION Descriphkn: CO Lines can be programmed incoming and outgoing. on a per CO tine basis for the type of CO Line desired: Incoming, Outgoing, or Both Incoming: Restricts the CO Line for incoming calls only: Users cannot press a CO line button or dial CO line access code to access a CO line. Users can answer a CO call and then transfer the call. Users can place call on hold, park the call, and other stations can pick-up the call. l Outgoing restricts the CO tine to outgoing calls only. Users can press a CO line button or dial CO line access code to access a CO line. Users can place call on hold, park the call, and other stations can pick-up the call. Incoming calls to this CO type are ignored. Callers receive ringback, no answer. l l Both incoming and outgoing type allows calls to be received or dialed out. Programming: 1. Press the TRUNK DIRECTION phone: 2. Enter a one-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds [0] [l] [2] [3] 3. = = = = flexible button. (Button #13). The following message is shown on the display to the desired trunk type: Out-of-Service (00s) Incoming only Outgoing only Both Incoming and Outgoing Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Default By default, all CO lines default to both incoming & outgoing type. Page 23 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Sadtsdale, AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 w4 443-woe STARPLUS” Dig&al Systems TF NO: 43 RING DELAY TIMER Desuipth: The Ring Delay timer has been added requirements. to the Starplus Digital Systems to accommodate ICLID interface The Ring Delay timer is started whenever a CO Line detects incoming ringing. When the timer expires, CO line ringing will be detected by digital terminals and Single Line telephones. The purpose of this timer is to wait until after the first ring cycle to be detected by the digital system in order for ICLID information to be passed down the CO line prior to being answered. Programming: 1. Press the RING DELAY TIMER flexible button (Button #14). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter a two-digit timer value on the dial pad between 00-20 which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default to 00 seconds to 20 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. By default, the Ring Delay timer is set at 00 (disabled) and is variable from 00 to 20 seconds. Page 24 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 STARPLUS” Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 STATION ATTRIBUTES CO Line Ringing Options , Page 25 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystertIS 8300 E. Raintrw Drive Scoltsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 W) 443-ml STARPLUS” Dig&al Systems TF NO: 43 CO UNE RINGING OPTIONS Desuiption: When a CO call rings at a busy station, the call rings at the station using a muted ring (default) signal. This option allows a user to receive a reminder ring at his busy station, instead of muted ring. In addition, a reminder ring timer has also been added to the system to provide the reminder ring every time the timer expires, as long as the incoming CO line remains connected. When the reminder ring option is used, the type of reminder ring tone is determined by the Tone Ring Option code [695] programmed on that keyset. It is also possible that this tone or a portion of this tone could be heard in the handset, depending on the keyset ring volume setting. Programming: , If station features are to be changed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [50]. The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter a six-digit number (100-155) for station range being programmed. programmed, enter that number twice. (i.e. 100100) If only one station is being 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Flexible button #20 (New Range) will be lit. The display updates to current programming for Page A: Where: XXX= Station Range A= Page “A” Features PA= Paging Access is allowed DD= Do Not Disturb is allowed CF= Conference is allowed -A= Executive Override is disabled,Exec PR= Privacy is enabled SP=System Speed Dial is allowed QU= Queuing is allowed PL= Preferred Line Answer is enabled OH= Off-Hook Voice Over is allowed FW=Call Forward is allowed LC= Forced LCR Enabled SB = ACD Supervisor Barge-in* M= CO Ringing option is muted Override Blocking is allowed ‘Feature available with optional software Page 26 of 56 Vodavi Commutcalions Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ85260 TF NO. 43 PQ) 443-6mo STAFIPLUS’ D@iil Systems Stathi Features - TF NO: 43 (Ccmt'd) CO LINE RINGING OPTIONS (Co&d) 4. 5. Press the RINGING OPTIONS flexible button (Page A, Button #14). This feature will toggle on and off with each depression, and the display will update with each depression. l LED on = Reminder Ring is allowed l LED off= Muted Ringing is allowed Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Defauk By default, Muted Related Programming: tone is heard. Ringing is allowed at all stations. Refer to Reminder Ring Timer, Flash 01, Button #18. Page 27 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 km 4434ooo sTARPLUS@ Digiil systems TF NO: 43 ICUD FEATURES (Optional Software) Caller Entered ICLID Digits (Guaranteed Expanded ICLID Ringing Assignments Message announcement) (Flash 60, Button #ll) (Flash 43, Button #l) Page 28 of 56 Vcdavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6ooo STARPLU~ Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 ICUD FEATURES A Caller Entered ICUD Digii (Guaranteed Message Announcement) Description: The Guaranteed Message announcement provides a means to force incoming callers to an announcement before being placed into an ACD Queue or routed to an agent. The outside callers are presented with a message before being routed to the ACD Group. Agents in an ACD Group with a Guaranteed Message enabled will receive incoming callers only after the caller has heard the designated recorded announcement in its entirety, or after the incoming caller dials up to 14 digits followed by a # (pound) key. These dialed digits will be inserted as ICLID incoming number identification. If the Guaranteed Message announcement is programmed in Admin, incoming ACD calls will be routed to the Guaranteed Message RAN before going to the ACD Group. If the ICLID option is selected, digits received before the announcement time-out will be captured and inserted as incoming ICLID number information, When the ICLID option is selected, a [#] will be recognized as a termination of the announcement and a [%I will be recognized as an entry error. An entry error will cause the ICLID number to be removed and the incoming caller can re-enter his phone number. Programming: 1. Press FLASH and dial [60]. The following message is shown on the display phone: ,,;,:::::,:j+#/& BBB”CCC DDQ ‘.”‘,,‘.‘.‘.L :::...,‘I.. L...“‘.‘. ““’ “‘... Where: = XX= ACD Group Number (550-557) = A= Page A Parameters = AAA= Alternate ACD Group Assignment = BBB= ACD Overflow Assignment = CCC= ACD Announcement Tables = DDD= ACD Supervisor Programming To program a Recorded Announcement: 1. Press the ANNOUNCEMENT 2. TBLS flexible button (Button #ll). Enter a three-digit sequence: = 1st Digit = Guaranteed Message. (forces incoming calls to an announcement Group or routing to an agent. before being placed in an ACD = 2nd Digit = RAN port specified for primary message. = 3rd Digit =RAN port specified for secondary message. 3. Press the pound (#) once as the 1st digit if no guaranteed message is desired. Page 29 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TFNO. 43 (602) 443-swo STARPLUS’ Digiil systems TF NO: 43 Example: an entry of #,2,3 = No Guaranteed Message will be heard, Port 2 will provide a primary message and Port 3 will provide a secondary message. l l an entry of 1,2,3 = Port 1 will provide the Guaranteed Message upon initially answering the call, Port 2 will provide a primary message and Port 3 will provide a secondary message. l an entry of 8,1,2 = Port 8 will provide the Guaranteed Message upon initially answering the call, Port 1 will provide a primary message and Port 2 will provide a secondary message. 4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation To erase Recorded Announcement(s), tone is heard and the display will now update. press the pound key three times [##I#] and press HOLD. Related Programming: Refer to Guaranteed Message timer, Flash 61, Button #7, Page 40 of this techfact. Refer to Techfact Notice #31, dated 5/26/93 for further programming information regarding each RAN Table. Also refer to Techfact Notice #30, dated 5/26/93 to enable the ICLID features. l l l . l A Guaranteed Message may be specified for each ACD Group. When a caller is routed to a recorded announcement that is programmed as a Guaranteed Message, the caller will not be pulled from the message if an agent becomes available. The caller will be allowed to listen to the announcement in its entirety. The RAN timers will control the length of the announcement. A Guaranteed Message timer is used to specify the delay time before the guaranteed answer the incoming call. This timer is defaulted to 5 seconds. message RAN will Enabling ICLID will permit incoming callers to enter digits during the Guaranteed Message RAN announcement. If a caller enters digits, the ICLID information received will be replaced with the caller inserted information. . If a caller enters digits while in the Guaranteed Message announcement, an interdigit time-out is set. This interdigit time-out defaults to 10 seconds. An entry of a [#] or an interdigit time-out will terminate the Guaranteed Message announcement and route the call. . Incoming ACD calls without ICLID enabled will route to the Guaranteed Message first. From there, they will be routed to the ACD Group that the call rang into. If the group is busy, the call will be routed per normal routing procedures. l l Incoming ACD calls with ICLID enabled are checked against the ICLID route number. If a number is not found in the ICLID route table, the call will be sent to If ICLID digits are entered while in the Guaranteed Message, those digits will be tables. If the digits entered are found, the call will be routed per the ICLID route call will be routed per the normal ACD routing procedures. Calls will only be routed to the Guaranteed Message one time. Page 30 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystem5 first and routed per the ICLID the Guaranteed Message first. compared with the ICLID route table. If no match is found, the 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 65260 TF NO. 43 (602) 4434ooo STARPLUS’ l l Digital systems Transferred TF NO: 43 calls to the group will not be routed to a Guaranteed Message. The telephone number in the Local Number/Name translation table must be programmed with dashes included if it is a 10 or 11 digit ICLID number. (i.e.: l-802-998-2200) This is not necessary for ICLID digits entered during the Guaranteed Message announcement. Page 31 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive SadMale, AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602)443ma STARPLUS” Dtgffl Systems TF NO: 43 ICUD FEATURES (Cont’d) B. Expanded ICUD Ringing Ass@unents Description: ICLID Ringing Assignments will provide a means to change the ring assignment based on the incoming number received. This feature permits the user to select one of 200 ringing routes for each entry in the name to number translation table. For example, this feature could be used to re-route selected customers to a specific ACD or UCD group and bypass the general attendant. Valid - three-diait destinations are: 020-099 = System Speed Bins 20-99, for off-net ringing. loo-155 = Station extension Numbers 199 = Direct Ringing to Modem 330337 = Hunt Groups 1-8 440-447 = Voice Mail Groups l-8 550-565 = ACD Groups l-16 550-557 = UCD Groups 1-8 Valid - Rina tvoes are: 0 = unassigned (to delete a station) 1 = Day Ringing 2 = Night Ringing 3 = Day & Night Ringing Keysets designated to ring on an incoming CO line but not designated to ring on the ICLID ring, may receive a ring cycle before the call is moved. The same ringing restrictions applied to CO line ringing will be applied to ICLID ringing. Defauk By default, no destinations or ringing assignments exist. Programming: If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. Refer to 600.2, Program Mode Entry (Key Station) in the Starplus Digital Technical Manual. If ICLID Ringing Assignments 1, need to be assigned or changed: Press FLASH and dial [43]. The following message is shown on the display phone: Where: - 000= ICLID Route Number 000-199 000-009 = SPD 1428; 000-199 SPD 2856 - XXX= ICLID Ringing Destination - Y= Ringing Type 2. Press the RING ASSIGNMENT programming. flexible button (Button #l). LED #l is lit indicating Route 000 is ready for I Page 32 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. FtaintreeDrive Scottsdale,AZ 65260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6ooo STARPLUS’ Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 3. Enter the three-digit destination (XXX) and the one-digit Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. ring type (Y) followed by the HOLD button, 4. Press Button #17 to display ring assignments. Assignments will be displayed in sets of 8 up to-the number programmed. Press Button #17 additional times to cycle to the next group of 8 ring assignments. The following format is used to display the assignments: Where: - DDD= Destination - R= D for Day, N = Night, B = Both Day & Night. Deleting a station (entering a 0 for ring type) only removes that station from the ring assignment. Multiple station assignments are accomplished by assigning another destination with ring status, DDDR, and pressing the HOLD button. This can be done for up to the maximum number of stations on the system. TF NO. 43 Page 33 of 56 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4436ooo STARPLUS@ Digiil TF NO: 43 SystemS ACD FEATURES (Optional Software) ACD Group Expansion to 16 Groups/l6 Guaranteed Message Announcement Members (Flash 60, Flash 64) (Flash 60, Button #Ill) ACD Event Trace (Flash 63, Buttons 1 & 2) Page 34 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 STARPLUS’ TF NO: 43 Dtgffl Systems AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Group Expensktn - Groups 550-557 Description: This feature is available with optional software. There can be 16 ACD groups of no more than 16 stations each (up to the system station maximum). The ACD groups use a pilot hunting technique. If the pilot number is dialed, the assigned stations in that ACD group are searched for the station which has been in an idle condition for the longest period of time. Each ACD Group may have an assigned Alternate ACD Group, an Overflow station and up to 16 stations as ACD members. The eight system RAN ports (tables) may also be referenced on a per ACD group basis. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD Group(s) programming area: PrograIl ming: 1. Press FLASH and dial [60]. The following message is shown on the display phone: :.~,:~~:.<,:‘&ji& Where: - XX= ACD Group Number (550557) - A= Page A Parameters - AAA= Alternate ACD Group Assignment - BBB= ACD Overflow Assignment - CCC= ACD Announcement Tables - DDD= ACD Supervisor Programming Page 35 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 WI ~ STARPLUS” AUTOMATIC 2. Digiil Systems TF NO: 43 CALL DISTRIBUTION (Cont’d) The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming ACD group 1 (550). To change ACD groups or enter additional ACD groups (550 to 557) press the appropriate flexible button and perform the following procedures for ACD Recorded Announcement Assignments (RAN) and Guaranteed Message Timer. Defautt By default, ACD Group Tables are empty. Related Programming: Refer to Techfact Notice #31, dated 5/26/93 for programming the ACD Ring Timer, ACD Message Interval Timer, ACD Overflow Timer, ACD No-Answer Recall Timer, ACD No-Answer Retry Timer; Also refer to the same Techfact Notice for assigning RAN device ports and message times. Page 36 of 56 Vcdavi Communkations Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-woe STARPLUS@Digiil AUTOMATIC Systems TF NO: 43 CALL DISTRIBUTION A ACD Recorded Announcement (Cont’d) &sQnment(s) (RAN) Desaiption: Optional Recorded Announcement device(s) may be connected to the system to provide an announcement if all stations in an ACD group are busy; Up to eight ports in the system may be assigned to provide a path to Recorded Announcement devices. incoming CO Callers will only be answered The Guaranteed Message being placed into an ACD being routed to the ACD incoming callers only after incoming caller dials up to number identification. and rOUt8d to the Overflow assignment if a RAN Table is assigned. announcement provides a means to force incoming callers to an announcement befOr Queue or routed to an agent. The outside callers are presented with a message before Group. Agents in an ACD Group with a Guaranteed Message enabled will receive the caller has heard the designated recorded announcement in its entirety, or after the 14 digits followed by a [#] pound. These dialed digits can be inserted as ICLID incoming If th8 Guaranteed Message announcement is programmed in Admin, incoming ACD calls will be routed to the Guaranteed Message RAN before going to the ACD Group. If the ICLID option is Selected, digits received before the announcement time-out will be captured and inserted as incoming ICLID number information. When the ICLID option is selected, a [#] will be recognized as a termination of the announcement and a [*] will be recognized as an entry error. An entry error will cause the ICLID number to b8 removed and the incoming caller can re-enter his phOn8 number. Programming: To program a Recorded Announcement: 1. Press the ANNOUNCEMENT 2. Enter a three-digit sequence: TBLS flexible button (Button #ll). - 1st Digit = Guaranteed Message. (forces incoming calls to an announcement Group or routing to an agent) before being placed in an ACD - 2nd Digit = RAN port specified for primary message. - 3rd Digit =RAN port specified for secondary message. 3. If no guaranteed message is desired, press the pound (#) key once as the 1st digit. EXampl8: an entry of #,2,3 = No Guaranteed 3 will provide a secondary message. l l Message will be heard. Port 2 will provide a primary message and Port an entry of 1,2,3 = Port 1 will provide the Guaranteed Message upon initially answering the call. Port 2 Will Page 37 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ85260 TF NO. 43 t3M 443-6m STARPLUS” Digiil SystemS TF NO: 43 provide a primary message and Port 3 will provide a secondary message. an entry of 8,1,2 = Port 8 will provide the Guaranteed Message upon initially answering the call. Port 1 will provide a primary message and Port 2 will provide a secondary message. l 4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation To erase Recorded Announcement(s), tone is heard and the display will now update. press the pound key three times [###I and press HOLD. COfldii l l l l A Guaranteed Message may be specified for each ACD Group. When a caller is routed to a recorded announcement that is programmed as a Guaranteed Message, the caller will not be pulled from the message if an agent becomes available. The caller will be allowed to listen to the announcement in its entirety. The RAN timers will control the length of the announcement. A Guaranteed Message timer is used to specify the delay time before the guaranteed answer the incoming call. This timer is defaulted to 5 seconds. message RAN will . Enabling ICLID will permit incoming callers to enter digits during the Guaranteed Message RAN announcement. If a caller enters digits, the ICLID information received will be replaced with the caller inserted information. . If a caller enters digits while in the Guaranteed Message announcement, an interdigit time-out is set. This interdigit time-out defaults to 10 seconds. An entry of a [#] or an interdigit time-out will terminate the Guaranteed Message announcement and route the call. . Incoming ACD calls without ICLID enabled will route to the Guaranteed Message first. From there, they will be routed to the ACD Group that the call rang into. If the group is busy, the call will be routed per normal routing procedures. l Incoming ACD calls with ICLID enabled are checked against the ICLID route number. If a number is not found in the ICLID route table, the call will be sent to If ICLID digits are entered while in the Guaranteed Message, those digits will be tables. If the digits entered are found, the call will be routed per the ICLID route call will be routed per the normal ACD routing procedures. l Calls will only be routed to the Guaranteed l Transferred first and routed per the ICLID the Guaranteed Message first. compared with the ICLID route table. If no match is found, the Message one time. calls will not be routed to a Guaranteed Message. Related Programming: Refer to Guaranteed Message timer, Flash 61, Button #7. Refer to Techfact Notice #31, dated 5/26/93 for further information regarding each RAN Table. Page 38 of 56 Vodati CommunicationsSystems MOO E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,A2 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6ooa STARPLUS@ Di@tal Systems AUTOMATIC TF NO: 43 CALL DISTRIBUTION (CcWd) B. ACD Station Ass@menl(s) Description: Any type of station (excluding DSWDLS Consoles) may be entered as valid stations in the order they are entered for the first round of calls only. After that on On-Hook time. The station with the longest On-Hook time will receive the If a specific station number is dialed, only that station is rung; no distribution ACD stations. Calls will be routed to the calls are routed to stations based next call. will be done if that station is busy. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD Station Assignments programming area: Any time .a display of the 2nd group of ACD Station assignments (default or changed) is needed, press the DISPLAY STATIONS button (Button #17). It will display the 2nd group of station assignments up to eight stations at a time. Button #19 will always shown the 1st eight stations programmed in the ACD Group. Button #17 will always display the 2nd group of eight stations programmed in the same group. To erase all stations, press the pound key three times [###I and press HOLD. NOTE: If an AC0 member is assigned to a specific ACD group and uses the login-logout codes to enter and exit an ACD group other fhan his own assigned group, the database programming for ACD sfations will be automatically changed to reflect the different group. Page 39 of 56 Vodavi t%mmunications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ &260 TFN0.43 (602) 4436030 STARPLUS’ Digital Systems AUTOMATIC TF NO: 43 CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD Station Assigrmnt(s) (Cont’d) (Cont’d) ProgrammIng: To program stations into a ACD group: 1. Press the Page ‘B” flexible button (Button #19). The following message is shown on the display phone. Where: - XX= ACD Group Number (550-557) - B= Page “B” parameters - ###= ACD Station assignments 2. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming ACD group 1 (550). To change ACD groups or enter further ACD groups (550 to 557) press the appropriate flexible button and perform the following procedures. 3. Enter the three-digit station numbers of the stations in the ACD group in the order in which they will be checked. The order is only relevant for the first call. After that, the rule is oldest idle. A maximum of 16 stations may be entered. 4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation If ACD Station assignments 1. tone is heard and the display will now update. in the 2nd Group of eight (Stations 9 thru 16) are to be viewed: Press the DISPLAY STATIONS flexible button (Page B, Button #17). The 2nd group of station assignments will be displayed. If no additional stations are assigned, beyond the 1st eight station, the display will show pound signs (#) instead of station assignments. Press the Page “B” flexible button (Button #19) again to return and view the 1st group of group of eight stations in the same ACD group. Page4Oof56 Vodavi G3mmunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive SaAbdale, AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6ooo STARPLUS~ Digital Systems AUTOMATIC TF NO: 43 CALL DISTRIBUTION (Cont’d) ACD TIMERS Desuiption: Seven timers for ACD operation are programmable on a system-wide basis. The ACD timers include: A Ring Timer, Message Interval Timer, an Overflow Timer, an Auto Wrap-Up Timer, a No/Answer Recall Timer, a No/Answer Retry Timer, and a Guaranteed Message Timer. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD Timers programming area. Programming: If ACD timers are to be changed: 1, Press FLASH and dial [61]. The following message is shown on the display phone: A Guaranteed Message Timer Description: This timer determines how long a call rings before being answered Guaranteed Message RAN feature ‘is added to an ACD Group. by Guaranteed Message RAN when the programming: To make a change to the ACD Guaranteed 1. Press the GUARANTEED the display phone. Message Timer: MESSAGE TIMER flexible button (Button #7). The following message is shown on Page 41 of 66 Vcdavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-sooO STARPLUS” Digiil TF NO: 43 Systems 2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default By default, the Guaranteed to 000-300 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. Message Timer is set for 5 sec. and is variable from 000 to 300 s6conds. Page 42 of 56 Vcdavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6ooo STARPLUS” Digital Systems AUTOMATIC TF NO: 43 CALL DISTRIBUTION (Cont’d) C. ACD Group Expansion - Groups 556-565 Description: This feature is available with optional software. There can be 16 ACD groups of no more than 16 stations each (up to the system station maximum). The ACD groups use a pilot hunting technique. If the pilot number is dialed, the assigned stations in that ACD group are searched for the station which has been in an idle condition for the longest period of time. Each ACD Group may have an assigned Alternate ACD Group, an Overflow station and up to 16 stations as ACD members. The eight system RAN ports (tables) may also be referenced on a per ACD group basis. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD Group(s) programming area: Programming: 1. Press FLASH and dial [84]. The following message is shown on the display phone: Where: - xX= ACD Group Number (5584585) - A= Page A Parameters - AAA= Alternate ACD Group Assignment - BBB= ACD Overflow Assignment - CCC= ACD Announcement Tables - DDD= ACD Supervisor Programming Page43of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 83W E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-woe Digiil STARPLUS’ AUTOMATIC 2. Systems TF NO: 43 CALL DISTRIBUTION (Cont’d) The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming ACD group 9 (558). To change ACD groups or enter additional ACD groups (558 to 565), press the appropriate flexible button and perform the following procedures for ACD Recorded Announcement Assignments (RAN) and Guaranteed Message Timer. Defauk By default, ACD Group Tables are empty. Related Programming: Refer to Techfact Notice #31, dated 5/26/93 for programming the ACD Ring Timer, ACD Message Interval Timer, ACD Overflow Timer, ACD No-Answer Recall Timer, ACD No-Answer Retry Timer; Also refer to the same Techfact Notice for assigning RAN device ports and message times. Page44of56 Vodavi CommunicafionsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 (602) 443-6ooo STARPLUS@ Digiil AUTOMATIC TF NO: 43 Systems CALL DISTRIBUTION (Ctid) B. ACD Station Ass@nment(s) Description: Any type of station (excluding DSS/DLS Consoles) may be entered as valid stations in the order they are entered for the first round of calls only. After that on On-Hook time. The station with the longest On-Hook time will receive the If a specific station number is dialed, only that station is rung; no distribution ACD stations. Calls will be routed to the calls are routed to stations based next call. will be done if that station is busy. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD Station Assignments programming area: I Any time a display of the 2nd group of ACD Station assignments (default or changed) is needed, press the DISPLAY STATIONS button (Button #17). It will display the 2nd group of station assignments up to eight stations at a time. Button #I 9 will always shown the 1st eight stations programmed in the ACD Group. Button #17 will always display the 2nd group of eight stations programmed in the same group. To erase all stations, press the pound key three times [###I and press HOLD. NOTE: If an ACD member is assigned to a specific ACD group and uses the login-logout codes to enter and exit an ACD group other than his own assigned group, the database programming for ACD stations will be automatically changed to reflect the different group. Page 45 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Aaintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 65260 TF NO. 43 wa 442-6w STARPLUS’ Digiil AUTOMATIC ACD Station Systems TF NO: 43 CALL DISTRIBUTION ASS@WIS~~(S) (Cont’d) (C~f~t’d) Programming: To program stations into a ACD group: 1. Press the Page ‘B” flexible button (Button #19). The following message is shown on the display phone. Where: - XX= ACD Group Number (558-565) - B= Page ‘B” parameters - ###= ACD Station assignments 2. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming ACD group 9 (558). To change ACD groups or enter further ACD groups (558 to 565), press the appropriate flexible button and perform the following procedures. 3. Enter the three-digit station numbers of the stations in the ACD group in the order in which they will be checked. The order is only relevant for the first call. After that, the rule is oldest idle. A maximum of 16 stations may be entered. 4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation If ACD Station assignments 1. tone is heard and the display will now update. in the 2nd Group of eight (Stations 9 thru 16) are to be viewed: Press the DISPLAY STATIONS flexible button (Page B, Button #17). The 2nd group of station assignments will be displayed. If no additional stations are assigned, beyond the 1st eight station, the display will show pound signs (#) instead of station assignments. Press the Page “B” flexible button (Button #19) again to return and view the 1st group of group of eight stations in the same ACD group. Page 46 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive Scottsdale,AZ 65260 TF NO. 43 Pw 443-6ow sTARPLus* Digital AUTOMATIC TF NO: 43 systems CALL DISTRIBUTION (Cont’d) C. ACD EVENT TRACE Desuiptkm: The ,ACD Event Trace feature provides an event trace output which interfaces with a customer-developed Reporting package ACD Pmgrmming: To enable ACD Event Trace options: 1. Press FLASH and dial [63]. The following message will be shown on the display phone: Where: X= Port for ACD Event Trace YYYY= Baud Rate of desired port. To Enable/Disable 1. 2. the ACD Event Trace: Press the ACD EVENT TRACE flexible button (Button #I). It will toggle on and off with each depression. l LED on = Event trace is enabled l LED off = Event trace is disabled Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Defautb By default, the ACD Event Trace is disabled. To Identify the Trace Port Assignment: 1. Press the ACD PRINT PORT flexible button (Button #2) to determine which port is to be used for the ACD Event Trace. 2. Enter a one-digit number for the ACD [l] [2] [3] [4] = = = = Port Port Port Port #l #2 #3 #4 Event Trace Port number: (“On-Board” RS-232C) (“On-Board” Modem) (I/O Expander Module RS-232C) (I/O Expander Module RS-422) The LCD displays the current baud rate based on which Port number is assigned to the ACD SMDR Port number. 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION tone is heard and the display will now update. (Cmt’d) TF NO. 43 Page 47 of 56 Vodati CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Dtive .wtsdale, AZ 85260 Pa 443-6oM STARPLuS* Digiil I-F NO: 43 SptEms ACD EVENT TRACE (Cont’d) To determine the Baud Rate: The ACD Port Baud Rate is programmed using Flash 15 Baud Rate Assignments. The LCD displays the current baud rate based on which Port number is assigned to the ACD SMDR Port number. Page46of56 Vcdavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 Pm 443-6m STARPLUS@Digital Systems TF NO: 43 UCD FEATURES UCD Station Assignments Page 49 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 6309 E. Raintree Drive !Scottsdaie,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 Pw 443-6m sTARPLUS@ Digiil UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION TF NO: 43 Systems (UCD) The following feature is available with software version 2.0 or higher. Description: There can be eight UCD groups of no more than eight stations each. The UCD groups use a pilot hunting technique. If the pilot number is dialed, the assigned stations in that UCD group are searched for the station which has been in an idle condition for the longest period of time. Each UCD Group may have an assigned Alternate UCD Group, an Overflow station and up to eight stations as UCD members. The two system RAN ports (tables) may also be referenced on a per UCD group basis. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the UCD Group(s) programming area: If the system is in the programming mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program here, enter the programming mode. Refer to Sec. 600.2, Program Mode Entry (Key Station) in the Starplus Digital Technical Manual. If UCD Groups are to be assigned: 1. Press FLASH and dial [60]. The following message is shown on the display phone: Page 50 of 56 Vodati CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ85260 TF NO. 43 W) 4434ooo STARPLUS@ Digttl Systems TF NO: 43 Where: 2. xX= UCD Group Number (550-557) A= Page A Parameters AAA= Alternate UCD Group Assignment BBB= UCD Overflow Assignment CC= UCD Announcement Tables The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming UCD group 1 (550). To change UCD groups or enter further UCD groups (550 to 557) press the appropriate flexible button and perform the following procedures. Defauk By default, UCD Group Tables are empty. Rebted Programming: In the Starplus Digital Manual, refer to Sec. 640.2, UCD Timers for setting the UCD Ring Timer, UCD Message Interval Timer, UCD Overflow Timer, UCD Answer Recall Timer, and UCD No-Answer Retry Timer;. Also refer to Sec. 640.3, UCD RAN Announcement Tables for assigning RAN device ports and message times. Page 51 of 56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive .scottadale,AZ a5260 TF NO. 43 wa 443-6ow STARPWS’ Digital Systems UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION TF NO: 43 (Cont’d) A UCD Ststbn A@nment(s): Desuipthn: Any type of station (excluding DSS/DLS Consoles) may be entered as valid UCD stations. Calls will be routed to station in the order they are entered for the first round of calls only. After that the calls are routed to stations based on On-Hook time. The station with the longest On-Hook time will receive the next call. If a specific station number is dialed, only that station is rung: no distribution will be done if that station is busy. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the UCD Station Assignment(s) programming area. To erase all stations, press the pound key three times [###I] and press HOLD. Progrsmmirg: To program stations into a UCD group: 1. Press the Page “B” flexible button (Page A, Button #19). The following message is shown on the display phone. Where: - XX= UCD Group Number (550557) - B= Page “6” parameters - ##I#= UCD Station assignments 2. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming UCD group 1 (550). To change UCD groups or enter further UCD groups (550 to 557), press the appropriate flexible button and perform the following procedures. 3. Enter the three-digit station numbers of the stations in the UCD group in the order in which they will be checked. A maximum of eight stations may be entered. 4. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Page 52 of 56 Vodati CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 W2) 4436oGu STARPLUS@ Digital Systems TF NO: 43 VOICE MAIL (Optional Software) Enhanced Voice Mail Integration Page 53 of 56 Vcdavi CommunicationsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive sootkdale, AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 w4 443-6m STARPLUS” TF NO: 43 Digital Systems VOICE MAfL GROUPS Enhanced Voice Mail lntegratiofl Description: To better accommodate Voice Mail systems, a Busy/No-Answer feature has been added to the system software. This feature provides a busy or no/answer message from the voice mail system when a device is fonnrarded to voice mail via a keyset or single line which has a busy, no-answer or a busy/no-answer forward to voice mail. This is accomplished via additional leave table entries per voice mail group. These tables control what “in-band” information is sent to the voice mail system under a busy or no-answer condition. An externally provided Voice Mail system or Auto Attendant must be connected to the Starplus Digital Key Telephone System for Voice Mail or Auto Attendant operation. Voice Mail automatically handles unanswered calls. Station users can then retrieve messages left at their stations. Auto Attendants can handle incoming calls and route callers to station users without intervention from the systems attendant. Direct incoming ring to Voice Mail/Auto Attendant groups can be done directly through CO Line Ringing Assignments. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the Voice Mail programming area: NOTE: By default, all Voice Mail stations are placed into Pickup Group 7. You may need to change the default setting. operation: If a user forwards his extension busy, no-answer, or busy/no-answer to voice mail and a call rings at the busy extension, the call will be forwarded to voice mail with the digits programmed in the busy leave table. With the additional digits, the voice mail system can provide a busy greeting to the caller. If a call rings at the user extension and he does not answer, the call will be forwarded to voice mail with the digits programmed in the No-Answer leave table. With the additional digits, the voice mail system can provide a no-answer greeting to the caller. In addition, to support voice mail systems that do not have supervised transfer, a recall from a station that was transferred from a voice mail port will recall to the attendant. Page54of56 Vodavi CommunicationsSystems 6300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale,AZ 85260 TF NO. 43 kw 443-6m STARPLW TF NO: 43 Digital S@ms PKgramm@: If the system is in the programming programming mode. mode, continue using the program codes. If starting to program herei enter the If Voice Mail Groups are to be programmed: 1. Press FLASH and dial [8!5]. The following message is shown on the display phone. Where: - G = Voice Mail group number (O-7) - AAA = Alternate group (440447) - LLL = “Leave” mail index. -R= “Retrieve” mail index from outpulsing table for retrieving messages (O-7) - XXX = Voice Mail station numbers (ports).(up to 8 max.) 2. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming voice mail group 440. To change Voice Mail groups or enter further Voice Mail groups, press the appropriate flexible button i-8 (440447) and perform the following procedures. NOTE: Certain programming will be required in the Voice Telephone System for proper operation. 1. Mail Box numbers station extension numbers. (100-155) 2. Tone Mode Calling transfer sequence(s) to force tone ringing to key telephones . l . Mail system connected to the Starplus Digital Key must match Statplus Digital Key Telephone System option (6#) must be programmed as leading digits in in the handsfree mode. If no table entries are programmed under button #lO for the no-answer leave table, the standard leave table programmed under button #lO is used. If no table entries are programmed under button #lO for the busy leave table, the standard programmed under button #lO is used. If a call transferred by a voice mail port is recalling and there is no attendant programmed call will continue to ring at the original station for three recall times and then be dropped. 6300 E. Raintree Drive scolisdale, in the system, the TF NO. 43 Page 55 of 56 Vcdati CommunicationsSystems leave table AZ 85260 (@m443-6ow STAFIPLUS~Digital Systems TF NO: 43 VOICE MAIL GROUPS (Cont’d) A Uave” Mall Index Entry Desaiptbm The “Leave” mail index specifies the outpulsing Table where the ‘in-band” digits required to connect a caller, forwarded into Voice Mall, to the called stations mail box are stored. Refer to Sec. 645.2 for programming entries into an outpulsing table. .._ To delete a ‘Leave” mail index entry, enter one pound [#] in the desired location on the keypad and press the HOLD button.(i.e.: Tables-l ,2,3 entered. To delete only Table 2, enter 1,#,3 and press HOLD). OpeIMOIX None Programming: To specify the “Leave” mail index (outpulsing table) to be accessed by a Voice Mail group: 1. Press the LEAVE flexible button (Button #lo). 2. Enter the three-digit “Leave” mail index on the dial pad. - 1st Digit = Standard Leave Table number (O-7). - 2nd Digit = Leave Table to utilize when station is forwarded to VM in a “No-Answer” condition. - 3rd Digit = Leave Table to utilize when station is forwarded to VM in a “Busy” condition. 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Page 56 d 56 Vodavi CommunicalionsSystems 8300 E. Raintree Drive swttedaie,AZ85260 TF NO. 43 (@a 443-6m TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE Starplus Dlgltal Systems -TF NO: 33 2/l/93 2x4 SLT Expander Module Description: The 2x4 SLT Expander Module is a two CO by four single line telephone Interface module that plugs onto the main key service board of the Basic KSU or the main key service board of the Expansion KSU through the use of two ribbon cables. This module is a combination board that contains the necessary circuitry to connect two CO/Centrex/PBX loop start lines and four single line telephones to the system. This card also contains a connector for adding one application module (i.e. DTMF Receiver) to the system. Message Waiting capability comes installed on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module. This circuitry provides message waiting voltage to single line telephones equipped with message waiting lamps, and supports up to four single line telephones message waiting lamps at 9OV dc typically across tip and ring. LEDs & Indicators: Two green LEDs indicate the presence of +5V & -5V dc. An extinguished absence of the associated voltage. LED indicates the CO Llne/Statlon Interfaces: The 2x4 SLT Expander Module provides the interface for two Central Office, Centrex or PBX loop start, lines. The protection circuitry necessary to allow the system to be classified as a fully protected system are located on the card for each CO circuit. The CO circuits are equipped with current sensing circuitry that identifies distant end disconnect (loop supervision). The module design also provides proper fusing or protection to comply with the requirements of UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2 No. 225 standards. CO lines are connected to the system via RJ-11 modular connectors mounted on the bottom edge of the board. The 2x4 SLT Expander module also provides the interface for four standard on-premise single line telephones (2500 type). Four 36V dc single line circuits are provided on the printed circuit board. These single line telephones can be equipped with a standard message waiting lamp (9OV T&R) that operate on the “tip” and “ring” leads. Additionally, each circuit may be individually optioned (software controlled) to provide a loop interrupt to the connected SLT or device. The card will support single line telephones up to 2000 feet from the Basic KSU. On-premise single line telephones should present a load to the port totaling a maximum ringer equivalence of 2.5. A molex connector (J4) is located on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module to provide ring generator capabilities. recommended that the Tellabs 8101, 30 Hz, SOVAC Ring Generator be used with this board. Page1 Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. TF NO. 33 of 11 Raintree Drive It is Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS 2 X 4 SLT EXPANDER MODULES (cont’d) CO Lines Connections: CO Lines are connected to the system via modular RJ-11 connectors 2x4 SLT Expander Module and accessed on the bottom of the Basic KSU. The 2x4 SLT Expander CO Line ports 5 and 6 (when installed on the Basic KSU) or ports 13 and 74 (when installed in the to the system through modular connectors J21 and J22 respectively. The pinouts of the modular follows. CO1 TIP mounted on the Module connects Expansion KSU) connector are as 1 1 CO1 RING Figure 1 - CO Lines Connectlons NOTE: Currently ALL CO Line modular cables must pass through a 1.2” thick,, 2-3/a” diameter,, round ferrite core fhree times prior to exiting the KSU in order to comply with FCC regulations. Up to five cables can be wrapped Gd one ferrite core. *If the 2x4 Station or SLT Expander Module is NOT installed in the Basic KSU and an Expansion KSU is part of the system configuration, CO Ports 5-6 and Station Ports 9-12 can be re-assigned Refer to Techfact Notice #TFN 27A for Flexible Port Assignment features. Statlons Connectlons: The station ports of the 2x4 SLT Expander Module are wired to the main distribution frame via a 25pair, (50-pin) male amphenol-type connector located on the main key service board or expansion key service board, connector Jl 1. A 25-pair cable with a 50-pin female amphenol-type connector is required to extend the station ports to the main distribution frame. The pinouts for the stations on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module activate ports 009 through 012 on connector Jl 1 as shown in Table 1 when installed on the main key service board in the Basic KSU. Also refer to Table 1 Basic KSU Jl 1 Station Connections. TF NO. 33 Page 2 of 11 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 65260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE Table 1 - 2 x 4 SLT Expander Module PAIR PIN COLOR 17 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 YUOR OFvfL YIJGN GNNL YUBN BNNL YUSL SINL VI/BL BWI VI/OR OFVVI VI/GN GNNI VI/BN BNNI VIISL SWI 18 19 20 21 22 23 .24 25 Page3of Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Jll DIGITAL SYSTEMS BKSU Connections DESIG Port 009 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 010 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 011 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 012 SLT Tip SLT Ring External Page Tip External Page Ring TF NO. 33 11 Scottsdale, AZ 86260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL 2 x 4 SLT EXPANDER FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS MODULE (cont’d) The pinouts for the stations on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module activate ports 025 through 028 on connector Jl 1 are shown in Table 2 2x4 SLT Expander Module Jl 1 EKSU Connections when installed on the main key service board in the Expansion KSU. Also refer to Table 2 Expansion KSU Jll Station Connections. Only the Xmit Tip (SLT Tip) and Xmit Ring (SLT Ring) leads are used when connecting SLT stations to the 2x4 SLT Expansion Module. Table 2 - 2 x 4 SLT Expander Module PAIR COLOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 I PIN I 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 YUOR OR/YL YUGN GNNL YUBN BNNL YUSL SlNL VIn3L BWI O&l VI/GN GNNI VI/BN BNNI VIISL SWI Jll EKSU Connections DESIG I Port 021 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 022 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 023 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 024 SLT Tip SLT Ring External Page Tip External Page Ring The Ji connector on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module allows the installation Appllcatlon Module(s) Connections: of one application module (i.e. DTMF receiver) to the system. Refer to Application Module(s) Installation for a description of the available application modules. Page4of Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 33 11 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Installation: 1. Remove power from both the Basic KSU and Expansion 2. Locate the Meaage Waiting Module and remove the two screws holding it to the 2x4 SLT Expander Module. Remove the Message Wafting Module to expose the hold down screw underneath. 3. Locate the J9 connector on the main service board of the Basic KSU or main key service board of the Expansion KSU and the Pl connector on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module. Refer to Figure 2 Basic KSU Application Card Locations. 4. Gently push the cable from the Pl connector on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module onto the J9 connector on the main key service board of the Basic KSU or main key service board of the Expansion KSU. 5. Locate the JlO connector on the main key service board of the Basic KSU or main key service board of the Expansion KSU and the P2 connector on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module. Refer to Figure 500-18 Basic KSU Application Card Locations. 6. Gently push the cable from the P2 connector on the 2x4 SLT Expander Module onto the JlO connector on the main key service board of the Basic KSU or main key service board of the Expansion KSU. 7. Secure the four screws attached to the 2x4 SLT Expander module to the main key service board of the Basic KSU or main key service board of the Expansion KSU. 8. Re-install the Message Waiting Module and secure it with the two mounting 9. Restore power to both the Basic KSU and Expansion KSU, if installed. Page5of Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive KSU, if installed. screws. TF NO. 33 11 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 J STARPLUS TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE DIGITAL SYSTEMS DSI 0 0 1 DS2 0 Pl __ ___ _- - - _- Figure 2 - 2 x 4 SLT Expander Page6of Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Module TF NO. 33 11 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 ’ STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) Description: The 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) is a four CO Line by eight single line telephone interface board. The card is a combination card that contains the necessary circuitry to connect four CO/Centrex/PBX loop start lines and eight standard on-premise single line telephones (2500 type) to the system. This card also contains one additional voice (transmit) path for external paging and a connector for adding one application module (i.e. DTMF Receiver or Dual DTMF/Taik-Back Page Module) to the system. The 4x8 SLT interface Board can be removed or inserted with power on the KSU. Refer to Figure 5 Basic KSU Equipment Cabinet for component layout and location of connectors. A moiex connector is located on the 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) to provide ring generator recommended that the Teiiabs 8101, 30 Hz, SOVAC Ring Generator be used with this board. NOTE: Only one Ring Generator system. capabilities. It is is required per system. At least one DTMF Receiver MUST be installed in the Message Waiting capability is installed onto the 4x8 SLT interface Board. This circuitry provides message waiting lamps to single line telephones equipped with message waiting lamps, and supports up to eight single line telephone Message Waiting lamps at 9OV ac typically across tip and ring. LEDs & indicators: Five red LEDs are located along the front edge of the 4x8 SLT interface Board, one for each CO Line to indicate when it is in use and one LED that monitors the contact operation of the multi use relay located on the board. Two green LEDs also located along the front edge of the 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) indicate the presence of +5V & -5V dc. CO Line/Station Interfaces: The 4x8 SLT interface Board (CSB) provides the interface for four Central Office, Centrex or PBX loop start,, lines. The protection circuitry necessary to allow the system to be classified as a fully protected system are located on the card for each CO circuit. The CO circuits are equipped with current sensing circuitry that identifies distant end disconnect (loop supervision). The card also provides proper fusing or protection to comply with the requirements of UL 1459 Second Edition and CSA C22.2 No. 225 standards. The 4x8 SLT interface Board does not support data devices for data switching. The 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) provides the control and interface for eight standard single line telephones (2500 type). Eight 36V dc single line circuits are provided on the printed circuit board. These single line telephones can be equipped with a standard Message Waiting Lamp (9OV T & R) that operate on the “tip” and “ring” leads. Additionally each circuit may be individually “optioned” (software controlled) to provide a loop interrupt to the connected SLT or device. The card will support single line telephones up to 2000 feet from the Basic KSU cabinet. On-premise single line telephones should present a load to the port totaling a maximum ringer equivalence of 2.5. Page7of Vodavi Communications Systems 6300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 33 11 Scottsdale, AZ 65260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL 4 x 8 SLT EXPANDER FACT NOTICE MODULES STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS (cont’d) . CO Lines Connections: CO Lines are connected to the system via modular RJ-14 connectors mounted to the front edge of the 4x8 SLT Interface Board and accessed through the bottom of the Basic KSU cabinet. Each 4x8 SLT Interface Board connects four CO Line ports to the system through modular connectors J2 and J3 found on each card. The pinouts of the modular connector are as follows: 4x8 SLT Interlace Board (CSS) W-14 Modular Jack Pinout Flgure 3 - 4 x 8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) RJ-14 Modular Jack Plnout NOTE: Currently ALL CO Line modular cables must pass through a 1.2” thick,, 2-3/8” diameter,, round ferrite core three times prior to exiting the KSU in order to comply with FCC regulations, Up to five cables can be wrapped around one ferrite core. c-tomour~ m 4X8in- hull RJ,,cj& m MOF cd ‘Q::.. “:::;; ..:::., .:....:,,‘7. ..,:,,‘.. .:.:.:.:...:,:,:.,“‘” k”r*m~ b Page8of Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 a E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 33 11 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Message Wait Circuitry $ 0 0 Station Connects (FUTURE) OptionalDual DTMF/ Talk-Back Page Module _-------Jqg# ----------Optional Single DTMF Receiver Module 514 I Pin #1 (blue) - N/C 1 Pin #2 (black) +f?i~@1 Pin #3 (red) - Ring I 1 Pin #4 (green) - Tip 1 Pin #5 (yellow) Gp-% Pin #6 (brown) - N/C I CJJ 1I II I C-5 I 4x8 SLT InterfaceBoard RJ-14 ModularJack Pinouts Figure 5 - 4 x 8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) TF NO. 33 Page 9 of 11 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 65260 (662) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS 4 x 8 SLT EXPANDER MODULE (cont’d) Statlons Connectlons: The station ports of the 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) are wired to the mainbistribution frame via a 25pair, (50-pin) female amphenol type connector located on the front edge of the board, connector Jl. A 25pair cable with a 50-pin male amphenol-type connector is required to extend the station ports to the main distribution frame. The pinouts are shown in Figure 3 Basic KSU Equipment Cabinet. NOTE: Currently the 25pair cable (supplied with the 4x8 SLT Interface Board) used to extend the stations to the MDF must be shielded,, with the exposed end of the shield closest to the Basic KSU cabinet. This cable must be used to comply with FCC Part 15 regulations. In addition the 25-pair cable must pass through a ferrite core before exiting the Basic KSU cabinet again to comply with FCC Part 15 regulations. Refer to Shielded Cable Terminations figure. External Paging Connections: The 4x8 SLT Interface Board will provide an external two-way page port when the Dual DTMF/Talk-Back Page Module (future) is installed. When this module is installed onto the 4x8 SLT Interface Board, it is wired to the Jl connector @O-pin male amphenol-type connector) on the Violet/Slate, Slate/violet pair of wires (pin’s 50 and 25). Refer to Table 500-9 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) for wiring information. Miscellaneous Relay Connections: Each 4x8 SLT Interface Board contains a miscellaneous relay (Kl) that can be used for Loud Bell, CO Line control, Power Fail, RAN, and other functions as software will allow. The relay provides both an Open and a Closed loop upon activation. Therefore, each relay may be used for various applications. The relay provides a dry output and is rated for 1 AMP at 24V dc. The relay is wired to the MDF via the Jl connector (50-pin male amphenol-type connector) on the Violet/Orange, Violet/Green and Brown/Violet wires(pin’s 47, 48 and 24). Refer to Table 3 4x8 SLT Interface Board (CSB) for wiring information. Application Module(s) Connections: The J14 connector on the 4x8 SLT Interface Board allows for the installation of one application module (i.e. Single DTMF receiver or the Dual DTMF/Talk-Back Page Module) to the system. Refer to Application Module(s) Installation for a description of the available application modules. Page 10 of 11 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 33 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS Table 3 - 4 x 8 SLT Interface PIN COLOR DESIGN 1 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 WHiBL BLfWH WH/OR ORIWH WH/GN GNIWH WH/BN BNWH WHISL SLIWH RDIBL BURD RD/OR OR/RD RDlGN GN/RD RBIBN BN/RD RD/SL SURD BWBL BUBK BWOR ORIBK BWGN GN/BK BWBN BNlBK BWSL SUBK YUBL BLNL YUOR ORNL YUGN GNNL YUBN BNNL YUSL SUYL VIiBL BWl VI/OR OR/VI VI/GN GNNI VIIBN BNNI VIIBN VIISL Port 001 SLT Tip SLT Ring 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 We Board (CSB) PAIR 2 only whe fhe Dualulfvf i lalk-Back Port 002 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 003 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 004 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 005 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 006 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 007 SLT Tip SLT Ring Port 008 SLT Tip SLT Ring Misc. Relay N.C. Misc. Relay N.O. Misc. Relay Common ‘External Page Tip *External Page Ring Pa! Module (tuture) IS mstalle TF NO. 33 Page 11 of 11 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Reintree Drive DIGITAL SYSTEMS Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602)443-6000 TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE Starplus Digital Systems TF NO: 31 5126193 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION (ACD) Description: The Basic ACD Software package is an optional software package available for the Starplus Digital Systems. When purchased, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) is not used and is replaced by the ACD functions identified in the following. Eight Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) groups can be programmed, each containing up to eight three-digit station numbers. Each group is assigned a pilot number. When this number is dialed, the first available agent in that group is rung. Calls are routed to the station that has been on-hook for the longest period of time. 1. Agent Posltlons A. B. C. D. E. 2. Agent Agent Agent Agent Group LoginfLogout w/Agent ID Feature Available/Unavailable Mode Help Request Call Qualification Member Status SupervIsor Posltlons A. B. C. D. Supervisor LogirVLogout Feature Supervisor Help Request and Station Assignment Supervisor Monitor w/Barge-In Feature Supervisor/Agent Calls in Queue Display 3. ACD Programmlng 4. ACD Timers 5. ACD RAN Announcement Tables 6. Modlfled SMDR Output for ACD Reporting Feature Page 1 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL 1. Agent Posltlons A. Agent LoglnlLogout FACT NOTICE w/Agent STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS ID Feature: Desctlptlon: The Agent LoginlLogout Feature provides a means for an agent to bg into one of the ACD groups and receive calls. The Agent ID entered in the bgin process identifies the agent and places that agent in the available agent list for the ACD group specified in the bgin process. This feature allows an agent to bg into any ACD group from any station in the system and receive calls. Each ACD Agent has a unique Agent ID code (0000-9999) which he uses during login and bgout procedures. This unique ID code is not verified or stored as part of the system database. Operation: The agent logs in by performing the following steps: 1. Dial the LOGIN CODE [572] on the dial pad, followed by the ACD group number (55x) that the agent is going to log into. or Press a pre-programmed* LOGIN flex button. 2. The agent enters his unique AGENT,ID code (0000-9999). The LOGIN flex button LED will be lit steady. Confirmation tone is heard and the agent is logged onto the ACD group. The ON/OFF LED will extinguish if the agent started the sequence in the handsfree mode. When the agent logs in, an ACD login event * sent to the SMDR port, if active. NOTE: The ACD Agent Log-in LED will only light for the ACD group that is assigned to that button. If a member is assigned to a specific ACD group and uses the login-logout codes to enter and exit an ACD group other than his assigned group, the database is changed to reflect the different group. For an agent to remove himself as an active agent from the ACD group: 1. Dial the LOGOUT CODE [571] on the dial pad, or Press a pre-programmed’ LOGOUT flex button. The LOGIN flex button LED will extinguish. When the agent logs out and removes himself from the ACD group, an ACD logout event is sent to the SMDR port, II active. Conditions: . If an agent logs into an ACD group from a station that is logged into another ACD group, the station will be automatically removed from the previous ACD group. . An agent may bg out, while in wrap-up, or unavailable. . An agent logging in will first be placed in wrap-up mode before receiving an ACD call. . If an agent attempts to log into an ACD group that already has eight members, that agent will receive error tone. . The Starplus digital system will not verify agent’s ID codes, other than requiring four digits to be entered. *Refer to FLEX Button programming in the Starplus Manual. Page 2 of 28 Vodavi Communications Sy8temr 8300 E. Raintrw Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (802) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Agent Posltlons (cont’d) B. Agent Avallable / Unavallable Mode: Description: Stations programmed into a ACD group may log off and on to their assigned ACD group by dialing an Available/Unavailable code. When an agent is in the Available mode, that agent will receive ACD calls in the normal manner. When an agent is in the Unavailable mode, that agent will no longer receive ACD type calls. However, the agent may receive non-ACD calls. Agents that have logged off by going Unavailable will receive a visual reminder that they are logged off with a flashing LED and/or an LCD display message. Operatlon: . To go Available: 1. Dial [566] on the dial pad, or Press the pre-programmed* Available/Unavailable button. You may now receive calls. Available/Unavailable button. You are now blocked from receiving ACD calls. To go Unavailable: 1. Dial (5661 on the dial pad or Press the pre-programmed’ *Refer to FLEX Button programming in the Stat-plus Manual. Page 3 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL Agent Posttlons C. FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS (cont’d) Agent Help Request: Description: This feature provides a means for an ACD agent to signal his assigned supervisor for assistance. While on a call, the agent can press the HELP button to signal the assigned supervisor. The supervisor may then respond by using his HELP button and his ACD Barge-In feature. Operation: While on a call in progress, the agent: 1. Presses his pre-programmed’ HELP flex button. Confirmation tone will be heard by the agent. The agent will see his HELP button illuminate if a supervisor is logged into his ACD group. ff no supervisor is logged in, the agent will receive a burst of error tone and his help button will not illuminate.The ACD supervisor station receives a “HELP” message if a member of one of the ACD groups he is assigned to. The help function also sends a Camp-On tone to the speaker of the supervisors keyset. The help message takes precedence over any other message and can be cleared by the supervisor by pressing his help button. At the time the supervisor receives a help request, he can press his help flex button followed by his override feature button to bridge onto the ACD group members call. The help button will place an intercom call to the station requesting help. The help message will be cleared after the supervisors help button is depressed. In add&on, the HELP message will be cleared if the agent was on a call and went back on hook before the supervisor could respond. In this case, the HELP message will be converted to a messarwait indication. The agent can also clear the HELP request by hitting his HELP button a second time. Conditions: . Up to five messages can be left at any supervisor station. . The supervisor can cancel the HELP request signal by depressing his flashing HELP button. In addition, a call will be placed to the agent requesting HELP. If the agent is on a call, the supervisor can press his Barge-In button to monitor the call or give assistance on the call. . The HELP feature access code will permit a single line telephone to access the HELP feature. While on a call, the SLT after doing a hook-flash can dial the HELP code 15741 to leave the HELP message. After the code is dialed, the SLT will be returned to his call. NOTE: Only digital terminals can activate this feature. ‘Refer to FLEX Button programming in the Starplus Manual. Page 4 of 28 Vodavi Communications System8 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (802) 443-8000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL Agent Positions D. FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DlGlTAL SYSTEMS (cont’d) Agent Call Quallflcatlon: Description: This feature provides a means for an Agent to enter codes on ACD type calls that identify the call. This feature permits up to lo-digits to be entered, however only the first four digits are provided for in the SMDR record. Operatlon: While on a call, the agent: 1. Press the pre-programmed* to complete the sequence. CALL QUALIFY flex button, followed by the four-digit qualify code. Enter a r] The QUALIFY button is programmed using flex code [570#]. If the agent wishes to enter his qualify code in a speed bin, he can do so using the standard speed bin programming sequence. Then when he programs his flex button, he can enter 570 followed by the bin number. This will provide an agent with a series of buttons with qualify codes under them. Conditions: . . . . . . Only digital key stations can operate this feature as it requires a flex button programmed as a qualify button. The outside party will not hear the (qualify code) account code being entered. The qualify code uses the first 4-digits of the account code. Therefore the account code record in the SMDR will contain the qualify code in the first 4-digits. The qualify code must be entered during CO talk state. A # can be entered in the qualify code, however it will not be recognized by the ACD reporting package. Speed dial entries can contain all digits including the l , which will terminate the entry and return the UCD agent to his CO party. ‘Refer to FLEX Button programming in the Starplus Manual. TF NO. 31 Page 5 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Agent Po&ions (Cont’d) E. Group Member Status: Description: This feature provides a means for an ACD supervisor to view the status of each of the eight ACD groups in the system individually.This display will tell the supervisor which stations are logged into the group, and if the station logged in is available, unavailable, out of service, in DND, or busy on a call. The supervisor can use this display to determine why there are a lot of queued calls in a specific group. Operatlon: The supervisor station logged onto the ACD group can bring up the group members display by: 1. Dial the supervisors group members display code (5731 on the dial pad, or Press the pre-programmed* flex button followed by the ACD group number (55x). 2. Dial an [‘I on the dial pad to scroll up to the next ACD Group, or Dial a [##I on the dial pad to scroll down to the previous ACD Group. To return to an idle display the supervisor returns to on-hook condition. _ Conditions: . To receive the supervisors group members status display the station must be logged in as a supervisor one of the ACD groups. . ACD supervisors will receive the members status display updated at the time they dial the code. . The status of the ACD agent will be displayed with a letter following the station number that the agent is logged in at. The status will be displayed with the following priority: (N) = Not Equipped (D) = Do not Disturb (0) = Out of service (U) = Unavailable (8) = Busy on a call (A) = Available i.e: lf an agent made a call while out of service his status would be out of service, not busy. TF NO. 31 Page 6 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443GoOO STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE 2. Supervisor Positions A. Supervisor LogWLogout Feature: STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Description: This feature provides a means for a supervisor to tog into one of the ACD groups. The Supervisor ID entered in the bgin process identifies the supervisor for the specific ACD group he is assigned to. This feature allows a supervisor to bg into any ACD group from any station in the system. However, to have the Supervisor Monitor w/Barge-In feature, the supervisor must bg in at a station with monitor barge-in capability. Each ACD Supervisor has a unique Supervisor ID code (0000-9999) which he uses during bgin and logout procedures. This unique ID code is not verified or stored as part of the system database. Operatlon: The supervisor logs in by performing the following steps: 1. Dial the LOGIN CODE (5761 on the dial pad, followed by the ACD group number (55x) that the agent is going to log into or Press a pre-programmed’ LOGIN flex button. (Flex button must have 576+55x programmed onto it.) 2. The supervisor enters his unique SUPERVISOR ID code (0000-9999). The LOGIN flex button LED will be lit steady. Confirmation tone is heard and the agent is logged onto the ACD group. The ON/OFF LED will extinguish if the supervisor started the sequence in the handsfree mode. When the supervisor logs in, an ACD login event is sent to the SMDR port, if active. For a supervisor to remove himself as an active supervisor from the ACD group: 1. Dial the LOGOUT CODE (5751 on the dial pad, or Press a pre-programmed* LOGOUT flex button. The LOGIN flex button LED will extinguish. When the supervisor logs out and removes himself from the ACD group, an ACD logout event is sent to the SMDR port, It active. Conditions: . If a supervisor logs into an ACD group from a station that is logged into another ACD group, the station will be automatically removed from the previous ACD group. . A supervisor may log out, while in wrap-up, or unavailable. . A supervisor logging in will first be placed in wrap-up mode before receiving an ACD call. . If a supervisor attempts to bg into an ACD group that already has a members, that supervisor will receive error tone. . The Starplus digital system will not verify supervisors ID codes, other than requiring four digits to be entered. ‘Refer to FLEX Button programming in the Starplus Manual. Page 7 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS SupervIsor Posltlons (cont’d) B. Supervlsor Help Request and Station Asslgnment: Descrlptlon: The HELP feature provides a means for an ACD agent to signal his assigned supervisor for assistance. The agent while on a call can press the HELP button to signal the assigned supervisor. The supervisor may respondby use of his HELP button and his ACD Barge-In feature. The ACD Supervisor Station Assignment feature provides a means to assign a supervisor to each ACD group. This supervisor station can receive the calls in queue display in real time, rece’ves No Answer/Out of Service, receives‘HELP” displays from the groups that the supervisor is assigned to and can barge in on active calls in his ACD group or groups. Opemtlon: The ACD supervisor’s 1. station logged in can receive the calls in queue display from any group he desires by: Dial the calls in queue code [577) on the dial pad, or Press the pre-programmed* CALLS IN QUEUE flex button, followed by the ACD group number (55x) that the supervisor is going to monitor. The ACD supervisor station logged in will also receive a station out of service (00s) message for any member of the ACD group that does not answer a call directed to his station by the ACD group. This message is displayed in real time and can be removed by reactivating the calls in queue display. In addition, the ACD supervisor station will receive a “HELP” message if a member of one of the AC0 groups he is assigned to presses his programmable help button. The help function will also send an announce tone to the speaker of the supervisors keyset. The help message will take precedence over any other message and can only be cleared by the supervisor pressing his HELP flex button. At the time the supervisor receives a help request, he can press his help flex button followed by his barge-in feature button to bridge onto the ACD group members call. The help button will place an intercom call to the station requesting help. The barge-in feature is activated by pressing the help response button or dialing the station number of the ACD member requesting help and hitting the barge-in button. The help message will be cleared affer the help button is depressed. When the supervisor barges in his mute button will be lii indicating that the parties he is monitoring can not hear him. lf the supervisor wishes to talk he must hit his mute button. *Refer to FLEX Button programming in the Starplus Manual. Page 8 of 28 Vodavi Communication* Systems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive TF NO. 31 scottsdele, AZ 85280 (802) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Supervisor Positions (cont’d) B. Supenrlsor Help Request and Statlon Asslgnment (cont’d) Conditions: . . . . A supervisor can be assigned in ADMIN to a group or groups to receive the help request and out of service (00s) message. tf a supervisor station is assigned in ADMIN, tt is considered logged in. In addition, a supervisor can dial a supervisor bgin code (576) followed by the ACD group that the supervisor is logging into and his four-digit ID number. A supervisor can only barge into a call from a member of one of the groups to which he is logged into. Out of Service (00s) and Help displays will take priority over normal call processing displays. However, Help displays will be the highest priority. An agent requesting help will receive confirmation tone if a supervisor is logged in at a station. He will receive programming error tone if there isn’t any supervisor logged in. Up to five HELP messages can be left at any supervisor station. A supervisor may be logged on to more than one group at a time. A station does not receive ACD calls when programmed as a supervisor, however a supervisor can bg on as a ACD agent and receive ACD calls. Only one supervisor is permitted per ACD group. To remove the warning tone from barge-in, use the yes/no option for Executive warning tone (FLASH 05, button 4). Page 9 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (802) 443-8000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DlGlTAL SYSTEMS Supervlsor Positions (cont’d) C. Supervlsor Monltor w/Bargeln Feature: Descrlptlon: The Supervisor Monitor with Barge-In feature provides a means for an ACD supervisor to monitor an agent’s call in progressor provide assistance in training ACD personnel. When used, a supervisor may intrude onto an agents call in a listen only mode or in a true conference mode. This feature is available with or without a warning tone. Operation: The ACD supervisor can intrude on an agent’s call in the listen only mode by: 1. Dial the three-digit station number of the agent’s station. Upon hearing busy tone, press the pre-programmed* Barge-In flex button. The Executive Over-ride Code [625] is used to program Supv Monitor with barge-in feature onto a flex button. The conversation in progress will be heard by the supervisor on the handset receiver and the supervisor’s Mute LED will be lit indicating that the supervisor’s transmit is muted. 2. If the supervisor wishes to participate in the conversation Mute button which removes mute. in a true conference mode, he can depress his NOTE: The use of silent monitor and barge-in is limited by federal law and may also be limited or prohibited stare or local law, so check the relevant laws in your area before employing these features. by Conditions: . . . . . Supervisors are granted the barge-in option if they log in at a station with the Supervisor Barge-In flag enabled. Supervisors can only barge-in on calls of members of the ACD that they are logged into. Warning tone is enabled and disabled using the Executive Override warning tone option (FLASH 05, button 4). A digital key or SLT may be intruded using this feature. Supewisor stations must be digital keysets. *Refer to FLEX Button programming in the Starplus Manual. TF NO. 31 Page 10 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Reintree Drive Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (scl2) 443-6000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS SupervIsor Posltlons (cont’d) D. Supervisor Queue Status Dlsplay Descrlptlon: This feature provides a means for an agent and ACD supervisor to view the status is an idle state display and will prompt a supervisor that his agents in the group all their calls. The display will tell the agent and his supervisor how many calls are togged into the ACD group, and the length of time in minutes that the oldest call of their ACD group. This display are having problems answering in queue, how many agents are has been in queue. The supervisor station logged onto the ACD group can obtain the calls in queue display by: 1. Dial the CALLS IN QUEUE code [57T] on the dial pad, or Press the pre-programmed* CALLS IN QUEUE flex button, followed supervisor wants to observe (55x). by the ACD group number the If the supervisor wants to change the display to a different group: 1. Dials the CALLS IN QUEUE code [577) on the dial pad, or Presses the pre-programmed* CALLS IN QUEUE flex button followed by the ACD group that he wishes to display. Conditions: . . . . . . . To receive the Supervisor’s Queue Status Display, the station must be logged in as a supervisor and diaf the flex code for the appropriate group. ACD supervisors will receive the Queue Status Display in real time. The Queue Status Display is only given when the ACD group member or supervisors station is not receiving a higher priority display, such as help or out of service, or other applicable off hook events are taking place at the station. The supervisors Queue Status Display is saved in battery backed memory. When a supervisor logs out of the group he is presently displaying, he must enter a new request for Queue Status Display. The Supervisor’s Queue Status Display can be updated by dialing the flex code followed by the group being observed. Dialing a different group will change the Queue Status Display to a different group. The Queue Status Display will give the following information: 55Y = ACD Group (550-557) CIQ:xx = Calls in queue AL:xx = Agents logged in 0C:mmm = Oldest call in minutes *Refer to FLEX Button programming in the Statplus Manual. TF NO. 31 Page 11 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintrw Drive soottsdsls, AZ 85280 (802) 4436000 STARPLUS A. TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS ACD Ring Timer Descrlptlon: The ACD Ring Timer determines recorded announcement. how long a call will ring into a busy ACD group before being presented to the first NOTE: A RAN Table must be specified in ACD programming for the ring timer to be in effect If a RAN Table is NOT specified, incoming CO callers will not be answered but will continue to receive ringback Programming: To make a change to the ACD Ring Timer: 1. Press the RING TIMER flexible button (Button #I). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter the three-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default: to 000300 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. By default, the ACD Ring Timer is set for 60 seconds, and is variable from 000 to 300 seconds. Page 20 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (w2) 4436000 STARPLUS 8. TECHNICAL ACD Message FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Interval Tlmer Descrlptlon: The ACD Message Interval Timer (MIT) determines the length of time a caller remains in queue (listening to if provided) between recorded announcements. MOH, Programmlng: To make a change to the ACD Message Interval Timer: 1. Press the MIT TIMER flexible button (Button #2). The following message is shown on the display phone: 2. Enter the three-digit timer value on the dial pad which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation to 000-600 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. NOTE: The ACD Ring and Message lntetval Timers only apply when RAN ports have been specified. If RAN ports are not specified, incoming callers will continue to receive ringbadc tone. Default: By defautt, the ACD Message Interval Timer is set for 60 seconds and is variable from 000 to 600 seconds. Page 21 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS C. TECHNICAL ACD Overflow FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGlTAL SYSTEMS Tlmer Descrlptlon: The ACD Overflow Timer determines the total length of time a caller will remain in queue for a particular ACD group. When the timer expires, the caller will be routed to the designated overflow station. The timer starts when an incoming call is answered and presented to the first recorded announcement. Transferred CO callers will overflow at the expiration of the Overflow Timer. Programmlng: To make a change to the ACD Overflow Timer: 1. Press the OVERFLOW phone: 2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default: TIMER flexible button (Button #3). The following message is shown on the display to 000-600 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. By defautf, the ACD Overflow Timer is set for 60 seconds and is variable from 000 to 600 seconds. Page 22 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 443-6000 STARPLUS D. TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE ACD Auto Wrap-Up STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Timer Description: After completion of a ACD call (on-hook) the agent will not be subjected to another ACD call for the duration of the Auto Wrap-Up timer allowing the agent to finish call related work or access other facilities. This will allow agents to remove themselves from the group (ie. DND, Call Forward) or originate another call. Programmlng: To make a change to the ACD Auto Wrap-up Timer: Press the AUTO-WRAP phone: 1. 2 TIMER flexible button (Button #4). The following message is shown on the display . Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default: to 000-999 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. By defautt, the ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer is set for 04 seconds and is variable from 000 to 999 seconds. Page 23 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (602) 4434000 STARPLUS E. TECHNICAL ACD NeAnswer FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Recall Timer Descrlptlon: If a call routed to a station via ACD is not answered by the ACD AgenVStation before the No-Answer Recall timer expires, the call will be returned to the ACD Queue with the highest priority. In addition, the station that failed to answer the ringing ACD call will be placed into an Out-Cf-Service (00s) state. Programmlng: To make a change to the ACD No-Answer Recall Timer: 1. Press the NO-ANSWER the display phone: 2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default: By defauff, seconds. RECALL TIMER flexible button (Button #5). The following message is shown on the ACD No-Answer to 000-300 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. Timer is at 000 (disabled) and is variable from 000 to : Page 24 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Soottsdale, A2 85260 (602) 4436000 STARPLUS F. TECHNICAL ACD No-Answer FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS Retry Timer Description: When the No-Answer Recall timer expires, a station that failed to answer the ringing ACD call is placed into an OutOf-Service (00s) state will be placed back in service if the agent hits hi available flex button or dials the available flex code. In addition, the agent will be placed back in service if the No-Answer Retry timer expires. If the agent does not answer his next ACD call, he will again be taken out-of-service. This cycle will continue until the station answers calls, logs out, or goes unavailable. Programmlng: To make a change to the ACD No-Answer Retry Timer: 1. Press the NO-ANSWER the display phone: 2. Enter the three-digit value on the dial pad which corresponds 3. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation Default: RETRY TIMER flexible button (Button #6). The following message is shown on to 000-999 seconds. tone is heard and the display will now update. By default, the ACD No-Answer Retry Timer is set for 300 seconds and is variable from 000 to 999 seconds. Page 25 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, At 85260 @w 448-8000 STARPLUS 5. TECHNICAL STARPLUS FACT NOTICE ACD RAN ANNOUNCEMENT DlGtTAL SYSTEMS TABLES Desctlptlon: Determines the type, index (port) number and message length for the eight available Recorded Announcements (RAN). There are eight RAN tables that can be programmed. Table 1 can be the answer port for unanswered incoming calls to a ACD group. Table 8 can provide the secondary message or vice versa. The buttons on the digital terminal are defined as shown below when entering the ACD RAN Announcement programming area: Tables , The type can be either a CO line port, or a SLT port. The index number specifies which circuit for the type G interface. The message length is used to match the maximum length of the message to the device that is used. Example: To program a table for CO line port: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the TABLE X flexible button (Buttons l-8). Dial (11 for CO port interface. Dial [Ol to 281 for CO line used. Enter message duration (000-300 sec.) Example: To program a table for an SLT port: 1. 2. 3. 4. Press the TABLE X flexible button (Buttons l-8). Dial [2] for SLT port interface. Dial [lo0 to 1551 for SLT station used. Enter Message duration (000-300 sec.) To clear entries in a Table, press the pound key once [#] followed by the HOLD button. Page 26 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, A2 85260 (602) 4434000 STARPLUS TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DIGITAL SYSTEMS ACD RAN Announcement Tables (cont’d) Programming: If RecordedAnnouncementdevices are installed to operate with ACD, these tables must be programed: a. Press FLASH and dial [62]. The following message is shown on the display phone: b. The top left button in the flexible button field will be lit for programming ACD RAN Announcemnt Table I. To change to ACD RAN Announcement Table 2, press flexible button #2. Repeat above for Tables 3 through 8. C. Enter a string of six, or seven digits on the dial pad. The order of data entry will be: Type Number: 1 = CO Port interface 2 = SLT Port interface Index (port) Number: 01-28 = CO Line Port loo-155 = SLT Station Port Message Time: 000-300 seconds d. Press the HOLD button to save the entry. Confirmation tone is heard and the display will now update. Note: When a CO port is designated as a RAN port, a relay and/or sensor should be programmed for Announcement Table 1 through 8. Page 27 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive as a RAN start TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (802) 443-6000 STARPLUS 6. TECHNICAL FACT NOTICE STARPLUS DlGlTAL SYSTEMS SMDR ENHANCEMENTS Description: The SMDR output has been enhanced to replace the “I” (incoming) and 7” (transferred) call types with an “A” designation to capture ACD call records. This modified SMDR output is only available with the ACD System software. Page 28 of 28 Vodavi Communications Systems 8300 E. Raintree Drive TF NO. 31 Scottsdale, AZ 85260 (802) 4436000 Starplus ’ 1428 In-Band Integration I Connecting Blocks J Ring Generator - 12x4 SLl-r m II I I n-*-1 _- pq I 1428 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 0 One 2 x 4 SLT expander card, each card provides 4 SLT circuits. Or one OPX box per VM port can be used. Each OPX box decreases EKT ports by one. 0 One RM (DTMF receiver module) installed on the 2 x 4 SLT card. This will provide two (2) DTMF receivers total on the system. If the system has an expansion KSU and 2 x4 or 4 x 8 card installed, an additional two (2) RM can be installed on these. This would bring the system total to four (4) DTMF receivers. OPX boxes contain their own DTMF receiver internally. l One ring generator unit is needed when using the 2 x 4 SLT board. The Tri-Output power supply can also be used for this function. One 48 volt power supply is needed if using the OPX box to connect to the AVP. Each OPX box draws 500 ma of current. SUPPORTEDFEATURES 0 Station forward to a personal greeting. l Message waiting on/off LED’s 0 Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call. 0 Outdial (to pager or specific number) l Multiple Return to Operator CONFIGURING THE 1428 WITH THE Starplus AVP 1. On the single line telephone ports that are to be assigned to the VM group disable the conference feature. Flash 50 XXX-XXX, button 3, LED should be OFF. Where XXX-XXX are the SLT extension range numbers to be assigned to the VM group. If you are using the supervised transfer feature, leave conference enabled on these ports. 2. Enter the VM group programming for Steps 3-4. 3. Enter the single line telephone 4. Enter the desired leave and retrieve tables for the VM group. Flash 65, button 10 is the leave table and button 11 is the retrieve table. Program the leave table as table 0, program the retrieve table as table 1. Steps 5-6 are accomplished 5. for VM group 1 (440). Flash 65, button 1. This button should be lit ports into a VM group (440447). in the Flash 66 programming Flash 65, button 12. field. Leave Table Programming: Press button 1 (Table 0). Enter a 0, then press the FRAN] button. Where 0 indicates a prefix digit, and TRAN button represents a pause based on the system pause timer. Press the HOLD button to update. Retrieve Table Programming: Press button 2 (Table 1). Enter a TRAN button represents a pause update. Press button 2 (Table 1). Enter a digit that inform the AVP that this 0 [TRAN] on the keypad. Where 0 indicates a prefix digit, and based on the system pause timer. Press the HOLD button to 1 [q on the keypad. Where 1 indicates a suffix digit, and * is the is a subscriber. Press the HOLD button to update. 6. Press button 9 (disconnect table) Enter: 9999999999 used by the AVP. Press the HOLD button to update. 7. Assign VM flexible buttons (440) on the stations. At each station perform the following: - where 999999999 is the disconnect code Press the SPEED button twice. Press the desired flexible button to be programmed. Dial 440 on the keypad. Press the ON/OFF button. CONFIGURING THE Starplus AVP The system must be taken off line to program. To do this press [SHIFT] t [FlO] at the same time. (You should be returned to the VODAVI menu.) GENERAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. SET UP Type [3] at the VODAVI menu and press the [ENTER] key to go to the UTILITY menu. Type [I] and press the [ENTER] key to load Starplus 1428 settings. If settings are already loaded you will be asked to override the current settings! Type [X] and press the [ENTER] key to return to the VODAVI menu. Type [2] and press the [ENTER] key to go to maintenance programming. Highlight the CONFIGURATION menu item and press the [DOWN ARROW key to pulldown the menu. Highlight the ENVIRONMENT menu item and press the [ENTER] key. Highlight the PHONE SYSTEM menu item and press the [ENTER] key. Highlight the LOAD PHONE SETTINGS menu item and press the [ENTER] key. CONFIGURING 9. 10. THE Starplus above has loaded the following configuration parameters: Dialing Prefixes Local Call = Long Distance = 8 Cont’d From the Phone.Sys list select 1428.PBX and press the [ENTER] key. L Press the [ESC] key until the highlight bar is on the CONFIGURATION menu item. The ten step procedure n AVP 9, (, = Pause) 9,1 Feature Prefixes Transfer Start = Set Message Wait = Clear Message Wait = Abort a Busy/No-Answer Reject a Caller = Transfer Connect = &,8# (& = hookflash) 420@ (@ = extension number) 421@ (@ = extension number) a, A, & n Mailboxes 100-l 27 and a disconnect mailbox of 999 1 Extensions 100-l 27 * This feature prefk is not programmed supervised transfer feature. by default. You should program this prefix if you are using the CALL OUT LINES The next step is to setup the lines that will be used to light message lights or perform outdial/notification functions. To do this 1. 2. 3. 4. Highlight pulldown Highlight Highlight To make the CONFIGURATION menu item and press the the menu. the SYSTEM menu item and press the [ENTER] the CALL OUT LINES menu item and press the a line active, highlight the line and enter a single [DOWN ARROW] key to key. [ENTER] key. digit value of 1-9. When assigning lines as call out types, please note the following: - The number you enter (l-9) corresponds to the EVENT HANDLER TO USE setting in the Class of Service programming - To reduce glare, assign call out lines from the last line in the system and work towards the first line. Ex: In a four line system, assign line 4 as the call out line. If you need more call out lines, then assign line 3, etc. CONFIGURING THE Starplus AVP Cont’d EVENT HANDLER This item is in the COS menu and is used to match certain COS with specific call out lines. For example, mailboxes 100-l 27 could have a COS with event handler 1. Their message light and notification functions would be performed on the call out lines marked with a 1. To program this function: 1. _ 2. Highlight the MODULES menu item and press the [DOWN ARROW] key to pulldown the menu, Highlight the GLOBAL SETTINGS menu item and press the [ENTER] key. 3. Highlight the CLASS OF SERVICE menu item and press the [ENTER],key. 4. Select the COS to program from the list presented by using the [UP/DOWN ARROW] keys to highlight the desired COS and press the [ENTER] key. Page 1 of 4 will be presented. , 5. Press the [PGDN] key twice to go to Page 3. (Page 3 of 4) 6. Use the [DOWN ARROW] TO USE. 7. Enter a one digit value [l-9] for the event handler item. 8. Press the [ESC] key three (3) times and then the [FlO] key to exit programming. key to highlight the last item on the page EVENT HANDLER VM PORT ASSIGNMENTS The Starplus AVP ships with all ports defautted to perform Voice Messaging for all time periods (24 hours a day). To change the port configurations, 1. 2. 3. 4. perform the following: Highlight the MODULES menu item and press the [DOWN ARROW] key to pulldown the menu. Highlight the GLOBAL SETTINGS menu item and press the [ENTER] key. Highlight the INITIATE CHANNELS menu item and press the [ENTER] key. Highlight the’DAYTIME SElTlNGS and press the [ENTER] key. At this point the port assignment screen will be presented. The screen should reflect the number of ports in your system with a default field at the top. The default field should be highlighted and should show Voice Messaging. The choices for port assignments are, Voice Messaging, Auto Attendant, and Menu Routing. The Other Modules function is not used and the Clear Line merely removes any function assigned to the port. 5. Move the highlight bar by pressing the [DOWN ARROW] to the first port. Press the [ENTER] key when the first port is highlighted. (The list of functions will appear.) 6. Highlight the desired function with the [UP/DOWN [ENTER] key at the desired function. ARROW] keys and press the For a detailed description sections are: Voice Messaging Auto Attendant Menu Routing of each function please refer to the Starplus AVP manual, The appropriate Page 620-l 2 Page 620-34 Page 620-56 Starplus @2856 In-Band Integration 2856 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Connecting Blocks Ring , Generator /4x8 - u ml’ L - SLT oud - pj * Telephone Interface - Board I 4x8 EKT 4= Stations V dc_ cl -40 Power ZjUPPlY 0 One 4 x 8 SLT expander card, each card provides 8 SLT circuits. Or one OPX box per VM port can be used. Each OPX box decreases EKT ports by one. 0 One RM (DTMF receiver module) installed on the 4 x 8 SLT card. This will provide one (1) DTMF receiver per 4 X 8 board. This can be increased to a maximum of seven (7) total on the system. These receivers do not have to be installed on SLT cards, they may be installed on EKT cards also. OPX boxes contain their own DTMF receiver internally. 0 One ring generator unit is needed when using the 2 x 4 or 4 x 8 SLT cards. The Tri-Output power supply can also be used for this function. A 48 volt power supply is needed when using the OPX box to connect to the AVP system. Each OPX box draws 500 ma of current. SUPPORTEDFEATURES 0 Station forward to a personal greeting. 0 Message waiting on/off LED’s. 0 Stations can transfer a caller directly to a mailbox without supervising the call. 0 Outdial (to a pager or specific number) 0 Multiple Return to Operator CONFIGURING THE 2856 WITH THE Starplus AVP 1. On the single line telephone ports that are to be assigned to the VM group disable the conference feature. Flash 50 XXX-XXX, button 3, LED should be OFF. Where XXX-XXX are the SLTLextension range numbers to be assigned to the VM group. If you are using the supervised transfer feature, leave conference enabled on these ports. 2. Enter the VM group programming for Steps 3-4. 3. Enter the single line telephone 4. Enter the desired leave and retrieve tables for the VM group. Flash 65, buttons 10 and 11. Program the leave table as table 0, program the retrieve table as table 1. Steps 5-6 are accomplished for VM group 1 (440). Flash 65, button 1. This button should be lit ports into a VM group (440-447’). Flash 65, button 12. in the Flash 66 programming field. 5. Leave Table Programming: Press button 1 (Table 0). Enter a 0, then press the FRAN] button. Where 0 indicates a prefix digit, and TRAN button represents a pause based on the system pause timer. Press the HOLD button to update. Retrieve Table Programming: Press button 2 (Table 1). Enter a 0 [TRAN] on the keypad. Where 0 indicates a prefix digit, and TRAN button represents a pause based on the system pause timer. Press the HOLD button to update. Press button 2 (Table 1). Enter a 1 [*] on the keypad. Where 1 indicates a suffix digit, and * is the digit that inform the AVP that this is a subscriber. Press the HOLD button to update. 6. Press button 9 (disconnect table) Enter: 9999999999 used by the AVP. Press the HOLD button to update. 7. Assign VM flexible buttons (440) on the stations. At each station perform the following: - where 9999999999 is the disconnect code Press the SPEED button twice. Press the desired flexible button to be programmed. Dial 440 on the keypad. Press the ON/OFF button. CONFIGURING THE Starplus AVP The system must be taken off line to program. To do this press [SHIFT (You should be returned to the VODAVI menu.) GENERAL 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. + (FlO] at the same time. SET UP Type [S] at the VODAVI menu and press the [ENTER] key to go to the UTILITY menu. Type [J] and press the [ENTER] key to load Starplus 2856 settings. If settings are already loaded you will be asked to override the current settings! Type [x] and’press the [ENTER] key to return to the VODAVI menu. Type [2] and press the [ENTER] key to go to maintenance programming. Highlight the CONFIGURATION menu item and press the [DOWN ARROW] key to pulldown the menu. Highlight the ENVIRONMENT menu item and press the [ENTER] key. Highlight the PHONE SYSTEM menu item and press the [ENTER] key. Highlight the LOAD PHONE SElTlNGS menu item and press the [ENTER] key. From the Phone Sys list select 2856.PBX and press the [ENTER] key. Press the [ESC] key until the highlight bar is on the CONFIGURATION menu item. CONFIGURING THE Starplus AVP Cont’d The ten step procedure above has loaded the following configuration n Dialing Prefixes Local Call = Long Distance = n parameters: 9. (8 = Pause) 9.1 Feature Prefixes Transfer Start = Set Message Wait = Clear Message Wait = Abort a Busy/No-Answer Reject a Caller = * Transfer Connect &,6# (& = hookflash) 420@ (@ = extension number) 421@ (@ = extension number) (L, & & 8 Mailboxes 100-l 55 and a disconnect mailbox of 999 n Extensions 100-l 55 l This feature prefix is not programmed supervised transfer feature. by default. You should program this prefix if you are using the CALL OUT LINES The next step is to setup the lines that will be used to light message lights or perform outdial/notification functions. To do this 1. 2. 3. 4. Highlight pulldown Highlight Highlight To make the CONFIGURATION menu item and press the [DOWN ARROWI key to the menu. the SYSTEM menu item and press the [ENTER] key. the CALL OUT LINES menu item and press the [ENTER] key. a line active, highlight the line and enter a single digit value of 1-9. When assigning lines as call out types, please note the following: - The number you enter (l-9) corresponds Class of Service programming to the EVENT HANDLER TO USE setting in the - To reduce glare, assign call out lines from the last line in the system and work towards the first line. Ex: In a four line system, assign line 4 as the call out line. If you need more call out lines, then assign line 3, etc. CONFIGURING THE Starplus AVP Cont’d EVENT HANDLER This item is in the COS menu and is used to match certain COS with specific call out lines. For example, mailboxes 100-l 55 could have a COS with event handier 1. Their message light and notification functions would be performed on the call out lines marked with a 1. To program this function: 1. 2. Highlight the MODULES menu item and press the [DOWN ARROW] key to pulldown the menu. Highlight the GLOBAL SETTINGS menu item and press the [ENTER] key. 3. Highlight the CLASS OF SERVICE menu item and press the [ENTER] key. 4. Select the COS to program from the list presented by using the [UP/DOWN ARROW) keys to highlight the desired COS and press the [ENTER] key. Page 1 of 4 will be presented. 5. Press the [PGDN] key twice to go to Page.3. (Page 3 of 4) 6. Use the [DOWN ARROW] TO USE. 7. Enter a one digit value [l-9] for the COS. key to highlight the last item on the page EVENT HANDLER VM PORT ASSIGNMENTS The Starplus AVP ships with all ports defaulted to perform Voice Messaging for all time periods (24 hours a day). To change the port configurations, 1. 2. 3. 4. Highlight the the menu. Highlight the Highlight the Highlight the perform the following: MODULES menu item and press the [DOWN ARROW] key to pulldown GLOBAL SETTINGS menu item and press the [ENTER] key. INITIATE CHANNELS menu item and press the [ENTER] key. DAYTIME SETTINGS and press the [ENTER] key. At this point the port assignment screen will be presented. The screen should reflect the number of ports in your system with a defautt field at the top. The defautt field should be highlighted and should show Voice Messaging. The choices for port assignments are, Voice Messaging, Auto Attendant, and Menu Routing. The Other Modules function is not used and the Clear Line merely removes any function assigned to the port. 5. 6. Move the highlight bar by pressing the [DOWN ARROW] to the first port. Press the [ENTER] key when the first port is highlighted. (The list of functions will appear.) Highlight the desired function with the [UP/DOWN _ [ENTER] key at the desired function. ARROW] keys and press the For a detailed descriptiqn sections are: Voice Messaging Auto Attendant Menu Routing of each function please refer to the Starpius AVP manual. The appropriate Page 620-l 2 Page 620-34 Page 620-56 STARPLUS Digital Systems Technical Training . I. Class Schedule 1. We start at 8:00 am andendat approximately5:00pm. 2. One 15 minutebreakin the morning,onein the afternoon. 3. Onehour for lunch. II. Objective To introduce the student to the hardware components,systeminstallation, and programming maintenanceof the Starplus Digital 1428and 2856Key TelephoneSystems. III.Introduce the Manual 1. Quick ReferenceTableof Content 2. List of Figures 3. List of Tables 4. IssueControl Sheet 5. Section100- Introduction 6. Section200 - KeyStationFeatureDescription* 7. Section210 - SingleLine TelephoneFeatureDescription* 8. Section220 - AttendantFeatureDescription* 9. Section300 - StationFeatureOperation* 10. Section310 - SLT FeatureOperation* 11. Section320 - AttendantFeatureOperation* 12. Section330 - LCD Displays* 13. Section400 - GeneralDescription 14. Section500- Installation 15. Section600 - CustomerDatabaseProgramming 16. Section610 - SystemParametersProgramming 17. Section620 - CO LinesAttributesProgramming 18. Section630 - StationAttributes Programming Page1 19. Section640 - Uniform CallDistribution(UCD) 20. Section750- ICLID Programming 21. Section645 - Voice Mail Programming 22. Section650 - ExceptionTablesProgramming 23. Section665 - Least Cost Routing(LCR) Programming 24. Section660 - InitializeDatabaseParameters 25. Section665 - PrintingSystemDatabaseParameters 26. Section700 - SystemCheckout 27. Section800 - MaintenanceandTroubleshooting 28. CustomerDatabaseProgrammingWorksheets 29. Digital SystemsPart Numbers 30. ICLID GeneralDescriptions *Featureandfeatureoperationquestionsmaybe addressed to the trainer,astime permits, prior to class,during breaks,andafter class. Thiswill helpto insurethe objectiveof the classis met: IV. Section 100 Introduction 1. RegulatoryInformation A. TelephoneCompanyNotification B. RingerEquivalenceNumber(1.9 ) C. UniversalSystemOrderingCode(USOC) RJ21X D. FCC RegistrationNumbers1428 a. Key System( direct button appearances ) DLPHKG-65152~KF-E b. Hybrid ( dial accesscodes) DLPI-IKG-65153~MF-E E. FCC RegistrationNumbers2856 a. Key System( direct button appearances) DLPI-IKG-65102~KF-E b. Hybrid ( dial accesscodes)DLPHKG-65lOI-MF-E F. Incidenceof Harm a. If the telephonecompanydeterminesthat the customerprovidedequipmentis causingharmto the telephonenetwork, the equipmentmust be removedfrom the network until repairsaremade. G. Changesin Service. Page2 a. Thelocaltelephonecompanymust notify the userof systemaffectingchangesin service. H. MaintenanceLimitations. a. Warrantywill be voidedif field repairsareattempted. I. Notice of Compliance. a. ClassA ComputingDevicewhich complieswith FCC part 15. b. CautionStatement 1) EquipmentgeneratesRF energy. 2) Any interferencecorrectionsarethe usersresponsibility. J. HearingAid Compatibility. a. All Keysetsdesignedto operateon the systemarehearingaid compatible. K. OPX Circuit. a. OL13C network circuit andRJl lC/W interface. L. CanadianRegulatoryInformation. M. UL/CSA SafetyCompliance V. General Description 1. The STARPLUSFamilyof Digital Key TelephoneSystems A. The 1428 - Flat PackDesign a. Satisfiesconfigurationsfrom 4x8 to 14x28. B. The 2856 - Card Cage a. Satisfiesconfigurationsfrom 4x8 to 28x56. C. BOTH usethe sameterminaldevices(Keysets,RelaySensorModule, Digital Data InterfaceUnit, andSLA/OPXModule). D. BOTH mayusestandard2500~typetelephones. E. BOTH Utilize PCM/TDM Digital SwitchingTechnique. a. Non-blockingsystems b. Tie Slots F. CO interfaces a. ALL CO interfacesaretransformprotected,classifiedasfully protected. G. On-lineprogrammingchanges,no interruptionsof communications (exceptions: flexibleport assignment). a. Call processingcontinuesasdatabaseis updated. Page3 b. Programmingchangesmaybe madefrom PORT 01 usinga Keysetor from a I/O Port usinga PC. c. ProgrammingChangesmay be madefrom On-board300BaudModem. VI.Common Equipment for the 1428. 1. BasicKSU with Power Supply. A. Wall Mountable“Flat Pack” Cabinet. B. ContainsKey ServiceBoard. a. 68000Microprocessor. b. Controlsall PCM/TDM circuitry. c. All control, switching,andinterfacecircuitry arecontainedon KSB. C. Capableof supporting4 CO/PBX/CentrexLinesand8 Digital Key Terminals( 4x8 systemin the basicconfiguration). D. ResetHalt Switch. E. GroundingLug ( P3 ). F. ProvidesOneDTMF Receiver. G. ProvidesOne RS-232CI/O Port @B-25) H. ProvidesOne Input Channelfor BackgroundMusic andMusic On Hold with volume adjustment. I. Providesan On-Board300BaudModem. J. OneExternalPagePath( all Pagepathsareone-wayin the DVX family ). K. Containsadditionalinterfaceconnectionsfor: a. Optional 1200BaudModem Module. b. 2x4 ExpanderModuleor 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule. c. OptionalI/O ExpanderModule( ONE - RS-232CDB25, andONE RS-422 RJ-14 ). d. ExpansionKSU InterfaceConnections. L. Power Supply. a. Requires117Vac f 10%input voltage. b. Requiresa DedicatedAC Circuit! c. Providesa filtered andregulated+12V dc and- 12Vdc to the mainKey Service Board. d. Protectedby a 1.5 Amp Slow-blofuse. e. Complieswith UL 1459SecondEdition. Page4 M. CPU andMemory. a. Responsible for all systemtones,systemtiming, stationsstatuscontrol, real time clock, watch dog timer andrecovery,PCB statusandpresence/absence of modules for automaticsoftwareconfigurationsetup,backupof customerdatabasevia a “supercap”. b. EPROM Memory containssystemprogrammingcode. c. RAM Memory containsCustomerDatabase. N. LEDs andIndicators: a. Four GreenLEDs. 1) DSl andDS5 - Presenceof +12V dc to four stationseach. 2) DS2 andDS3 - Presenceof +5V dc and-5V dc. b. One RedLed 1) DS4 - Indicates“Heart-Beat”( systemis processing). i) Blinks at a steadyrate duringnormalsystemactivity. 0. CO/StationInterfaces a. Four CO Interfaces 1) RJ-11 Modular Jacks 2) Current SensingCircuitry for distantenddisconnect(Loop Supervision, enabledon a per CO Line basis) b. Eight StationInterfaces 1) Two Channel64K arrangement 2) Minimum Two TwistedPairrequiredper Station( four pair recommended). 3) StationsInterfaceto BKSU Via 25-PairMale AmphenolConnector. 2. ExpansionKSU with power supply. A. Providesadditionalcircuitry for four CO/PBX/CentrexLinesandEight Digital Key Terminals(4x8). B. Interfacesto the BKSU via Two ribboncables( mountsimmediatelyto the right of the BKSU ). C. Allows connectionof ONE additionalExpanderModule. a. 2x4 ExpanderModule b. 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule. c. 4x8 ExpanderModule. D. OneExternalPagePath. E. Providesinterfacefor the connectionof ONE additionalDTMF ReceiverModule. F. Power Supply Page5 a. Requires117V*lOoh inputvoltage. b. Providesa filtered andregulated+12V dc and- 12V dc to the ExpansionKey ServiceBoard. c. Protectedby a 1.5Amp Slow-blofuse. d. Complieswith UL 1459SecondEdition. G. LEDs andIndicators: a. Four GreenLEDs. 1) DSl andDSS- Presenceof +12V dc to four stationseach. 2) DS2 andDS3 - Presenceof +5V dc and-5V dc. H. CO/StationInterfaces a. Four CO Interfaces 1) RJ-11Modular Jacks 2) Current SensingCircuitry for distantenddisconnect(Loop Supervision, enabledon a per CO Line basis) b. Eight StationInterfaces 1) Two Channel64K arrangement 2) MinimumTwo TwistedPair requiredper Station( four pair recommended). 3) StationsInterfaceto BKSU Via 25Pair Male AmphenolConnector. 3. 2x4 ExpanderModule A. 2 CO Line by 4 Digital Key TerminalModule a. Installsin the BasicKSU or the ExpansionKSU B. LEDs andIndicators a. DSl indicatespresenceof +12V dc to key stations b. DS2 andDS3 indicatethe presenceof -5V dc and+5V dc. C. ProvidesInterfaceCircuitry for anadditionalDTMF Receivermodule. 4. 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule A. Two (2) CO Line by Four (4) 2500type SingleLine Station. B. Installsin the BasicKSU or the ExpansionKSU. C. LEDs andIndicators. a. DSl indicatespresenceof +12V dc to key stations. b. DS2 andDS3 indicatethe presenceof -5V dc and+5V dc. D. Supports2500~typeSinglelineTelephones with messagewait ( standard). E. 36 Volt Circuits. Page6 F. Loop Interrupt is passedto SLT ports whenenabledandreceivedfrom telco ( 700 ms ). G. RequiresRing generatorfor operation. H. ProvidesInterfaceCircuitry for an additionalDTMF Receivermodule. 5. 4x8 ExpanderModule. A. 4 CO Linesby 8 Digital Key Terminals B. Installsm in the ExpansionKSU. C. ProvidesInterfaceCircuitry for anadditionalDTMF Receivermodule. a. Four GreenLEDs. 1) DSl andDS2 - Presenceof +12V dc to four stationseach. 2) DS3 andDS4 - Presenceof +SV dc and-5V dc. D. 25-PairAmphenolCableProvidedfor Interfaceto MDF. VII.Common Equipment for the 2856 1. ComponentsNecessaryto Operatethe System. A. EquipmentCabinetwith Power Supply(KSU) B. CentralProcessingBoard ( CPB ) C. 4x8 Key InterfaceBoard (CKB) D. 4x8 SLT InterfaceBoard (CSB) 2. 2856 Main Cabinet A. ContainsEight Card Slots B. DedicatedCPU Slot C. ContainsPower Supply D. CableRaceway E. GroundingLug. 3. Power Supply. A. Providesfiltered/unregulated 12V dc to all systemcards. B. Provides-5V dc to backplane. C. Requiresa 117Vac &lo% dedicatedAC outlet. D. On/Off Switch. E. 5 Amp Slow-blofuse protected. Page7 4. CentralProcessorBoard ( CPB ) A. 68000Microprocessor. a. Controlsall PCM/TDM circuitry. b. All control, switching,andinterfacecircuitry arecontainedon CPB. B. ResetHalt Switch. C. Contains& DTMF Receivers( optionallyprovided). D. ProvidesOneRS-232CI/O Port ( RJ-45) E. ProvidesOneInput Channelfor BackgroundMusic andMusic On Hold with volume adjustment. F. Providesan On-Board300 BaudModem. G. Containsadditionalinterfaceconnectionsfor: a. Optional 1200BaudModemModule. b. OptionalI/O ExpanderModule( ONE - RS-232C,RJ-45, andONE RS-422, RJ-14). H. LEDs andIndications a. Two GreenLEDs 1) Indicatethe presenceof -5V dcand + 5V dc. b. Red LED 1) Indicatessystem“Heart Beat” ( systemis processing). I. J3 Jumper a. EnablesBattery Back-upof systemdatabase. b. Must be in “on” positionfor propersystemoperation. 5. 4x8 Key InterfaceBoard A. 4 CO Linesby 8 Digital Key Terminals. B. One ExternalPagepath. C. ProvidesInterfaceCircuitry for an additionalDTMF Receivermodule. D. LEDs andIndicators. a. Five RedLEDs. 1) Top four IndicateCO in Use. 2) Bottom LED IndicatesRelayStatus. b. Two GreenLEDs Indicatepresenceof +5V dc and- 5V dc. E. 25-PairAmphenolCableProvidedfor Interfaceto MDF. a. Split FerriteblocksRequiredfor FCC part 15 Compliance. , Page8 F. Two RJ-14’sprovideCO interface. a. Two CO’sper Jack. b. FerriteCore Requiredfor FCC part 15Compliance. 6. 4x8 SLT InterfaceBoard A. 4 CO Linesby Eight 2500Typetelephones. B. m ExternalPagepath( current). C. ProvidesInterfaceCircuitry for an additionalDTMF Receivermodule. D. LEDs andIndicators. a. FiveRed LEDs. 1) Top four IndicateCO in Use. 2) Bottom LED IndicatesRelayStatus. b. Two GreenLEDs Indicatepresenceof +5V dc and- 5V dc. E. 2%PairAmphenolCableProvidedfor Interfaceto MDF. a. Split FerriteblocksRequiredfor FCC part 15 Compliance. F. Two R&14’sprovideCO interface. a. Two CO’sper Jack. b. Ferrite Core Requiredfor FCC part 15Compliance. G. RequiresRing Generatorfor Operation. H. ProvidesMessageWait Circuitry. a. SupportsStandard9OVdc messagewait indication. I. Loop Interrupt is passedto SLT ports whenenabledandreceivedfrom telco ( 700 ms ). VIII.Additional Modules 1. I/O Modules A. 1428- I/O Module a. OneRS-232CDB 25 b. OneRS-422RJ-14 B. 2856- I/O Module a. OneRS-232CRJ-45 b. OneRS-422RJ-14 2. 1200BaudModemModule 3. DTMF ReceiverModule Page9 IX.Digital Terminal Description 1. 34-Button Terminal A. ThreeDifferent Models a. 34-ButtonExecutiveTerminalhasa 48 CharacterLCD display b. 34-ButtonEnhancedTerminalhasNO display. c. 34-buttonExecutive/PCTerminalhasa 48 CharacterLCD Displayanda RS-232 Output for ICLID informationinterfaceto a PersonalComputer. B. Digital TerminalsRequireTwo-pair to operate. C. The LCD Displayis Dividedinto ThreeFields. a. FieldOne - Current Status(top line,24 characters). b. FieldTwo - Date (left half of bottom line, 12 characters). c. FieldThree- Time of Day (right half of bottom line,twelve characters). D. Buttons andLEDs a. Super-BrightLEDs on all keys,except the Dial Pad, b. Button Definitions 1) 12Dial Key Pad 2) 28 FlexibleButtons 3) On/Off button (fixed) 4) Mute button (fixed) 5) Speedbutton (fixed) 6) Flashbutton (fixed) 7) Transferbutton (fixed) 8) Hold button (fixed) E. Speakerphone Description a. b. c. d. Handsfreetwo way conversation. Mute. Terminatecall with the On/Off button. AutomaticPre-selectionallowsthe speakerphone to be enabledby pressinga button (i.e.. DSS, CO Line, Page.....etc..) e. Programmableoptionsallow for full speakerphone or monitor/on-hookdialing capabilitiesandno speakerphone operation. F. Volumecontrols. a. Slideswitchesprovidethe abilityto adjustthe ring volumeandthe speaker volume. Page10 1) Speakervolumeadjustsall voice signalssentto the speaker(i.e.. Speakerphone Conversations,BackgroundMusic, Pageannouncements) 2) Ring Volumeadjustsall tone signalssentto the speaker. i) Muted ringingwill be proportionatelyquieterthan normalringingbasedon the volumesetting. G. H-T-P Switch- Threepositionslideswitchwhich controlsthe methodof receiving intercomcalls. a. Hand&e (I-I) Position- Upon hearinga tone burst andvoice announcement over the speakerthe User canreplyhandsfiee. b. Privacy(P) Position- The stationuserreceivesa tone burst and a vice announcement overthe speaker.the microphoneis deactivatedfor privacy,the usermust eithergo off-hook or pressthe Mute key to reply. c. Tone(T) Position- Standardtone ring notifiesof anincomingcall andthe user answersby goingoff-hook or pressingthe On/Off button for speakerphone operation. d. Switchselectionmay beoverriddenby useof the ForcedToneRing option. H. Directory Tray I. Wall Mountable 2. 34-Button Digital Terminal(Enhanced) A. InformationAbout ExecutiveTerminalAppliesExceptNo LCD Display. 3. 34-ButtonExecutive/PCInterfaceTerminal(ICLID) A. InformationAbout ExecutiveTerminalApplies. B. Equippedwith RS232CI/O channel. a. 2400bps,No-Parity, 8 Data Bits, 1 StopBit. C. A PersonalComputerMay Be Interfacedwith the TerminalTo ReceiveICLID information,via VodaviCall TrackerSoftware. D. A programwhich runson a PC maycontrolkey actionson the terminaland also receiveICLID information. WouldRequireSoftwareDevelopmentBy Independent Programmer. 4. 14-ButtonDigital Terminal A. Digital TerminalsRequireTwo-pair to operate. B. Buttons andLEDs a. Super-BrightLEDs on all keysexceptthe Dial Pad. b. Button Definitions 1) 12 Dial Key Pad 2) 8 FlexibleButtons Page11 3) On/Off button (fixed)) 4) Mute button (fixed) 5) Speedbutton (fixed) 6) Flash(fixed) 7) Transferbutton (fixed) 8) Hold button (fixed) C. Speakerphone Description a. Hand&x intercomtwo-way conversation. b. Terminatecall with the On/Off button. c. AutomaticPre-selectionallowsthe speakerphone to be enabledby pressinga button (i.e.. DSS, CO Line, Page.... .etc..) D. Volumecontrols. E. H-T-P Switch - Threepositionslideswitchwhich controlsthe methodof receiving intercomcalls. a. Handsfree(H) Position- Upon hearinga tone burst andvoice announcement over the speaker,the User canreplyhandsfree. b. Privacy(P) Position- The stationuserreceivesa tone burst anda one-way announcement over the speaker.The speakerhone microphoneis deactivatedfor privacy,the usermust eithergo off-hook or pressthe Mute key to reply. c. Tone (T) Position- Standardtone ring notifiesof an incomingcall andthe user answersby goingoff-hook or pressingthe On/Off button for speakerphone operation. d. Switch selectionmaybe overriddenby useof the ForcedToneRing option. F. Directory Tray G. Wall Mountable 5. Digital Direct StationSelector/Direct Line Selector@SS/DLS)Console A. 48 Buttons (3 columnsby 16rows), eachhaveanassociatedSuperBright LED for statusindication. B. ThreeMaps- 1428and2856 a. Map 1 - CO Lines 1-14, Stations100-127,andReleaseKey, AttendantOverride key, All Pagekey andthe first threeCallParklocations(supportsa 14x28 configuration). b. Map 2 - CO Lines l-28, Stations100-l 13, andfirst threepark locations,release key, AttendantOverridekey, andAll Call page(supportsa 28x12configuration). c. Map 3 - Stations114-l55 andinternalpagezonesone,two, andthree (Last 42 Stations). C. Readthis Important NOTE concerningflexiblebuttonsprogrammedfor features. Page12 : The followingfeaturesare not allowedto be programmedonto DSSIDLS Consoleflexiblebuttons: ACD Agent or SupervisorLogin, Do Not Disturb, Call Forward, Camp-on,Available/Unavailable, PersonalPark, VoiceMail, and HeadsetMode. Thefeaturesmaystill be programmedonto the keysetfl Consolesmaybe associated with a station. No Duplicate Maps 1 and2 permitted,more thanoneMap 3 maybe associatedwith a station. 6. SLT Adapter/ Off-PremiseExtensionModule A. Usesa Digital TerminalPort B. Requires-48 Volts DC, 500ma of Powerfrom separatelyprovidedPower Supply. C. Usesa “Precise”tone plan. D. ProvidesonePowerFailtransfercircuit. E. DTMF only, doesnot supportpulsedialing. 7. Relay/ SensorInterfaceModule A. Usesa Digital TerminalPort B. ProvidesThreeProgrammable Dry RelayContacts. a. ProgrammableOptions 1) ExternalPage 2) RAN start 3) PowerFail Transfer 4) Loud Bell Control 5) CO Line Control C. ProvidesThreeSensingCircuits. a. ProgrammableOptions 1) RANEnd 8. DDIU - Digital Data InterfaceUnit A. Usesa Digital TerminalPort B. Works in conjunctionwith a Station(like DSS/DLSConsole). C. Usedto establisha SerialData Connectionbetweentwo Serialdevices(Data Intercom). a. Modem Sharing. b. Printer Sharing c. May be usedto extendthe rangeof SMDR Printer further awayfrom the KSU. 1) RS232recommendscablesshorterthan 5Ofi. Page13 9, PFTU - PowerFail TransferUnit A. Providesthe relaytransfercircuitsfor up to 12 CO Linesin the eventof a Power Failure. B. Controlledby a RelaySensorModuleProgrammedfor PowerFail Transfer. C. A customerprovided12Volt DC Power Supplyis requiredto operatethe unit. Page14 System Check-Out I. Installation Check-Out List 1. Power REQUIREMENTS. A. The Systemrequiresa DedicatedBranchCircuit. a. A good definitionof the circuit is the useof a constant,separatelyfused,dedicated only to providingpower to the KSUs power supplies,117volt plusor minus5%, 15Ampere,SinglePhase,3-wire (parallelbladewith ground)power outlet located within 5 feet of the KSU. KEEPTHE POWERDEDICATED TO THE SYSTEM. 2. PreliminaryProcedures A. Test SystemGround a. Ground Systemin accordancewith the installationinstructions(DO NOT PLUG SYSTEMIN). b. Using a DVM setfor DC Ohms,placeoneleadon the backplanegroundlug, place the oppositeleadon the groundof the power outlet. The readingshouldbe no higherthan 5 ohms. Switchthe meterto AC Volts andtake a readingat the same two groundpoints. The readingshouldbe no higherthan .SVac. If eitherreading is out of tolerance,havethe AC Outlet testedandinspectthe point to which the KSU is groundedto insurethat it hasnothingwhichcouldinhibit the flow of current to ground. B. Make surethat the NICAD batteryon the CPU is strappedin th on osition( Super Q Cap hasno enablestrapon 1428). C. Inspectall socketedintegratedcircuitson the CPU andperipheralcardsfor proper seating. D. Inspectthe MDF for shortedwiring. E. Make sureall cardsareproperlyseatedin the proper slotsandthat all amphenol connectorsaresecurelyin place. F. When all of the aboverequirementsaremet proceedto the PowerUp Sequence. 3. Power Up Sequence A. Plug in the systempower cord. B. Turn on the power supply. C. Observethe Heart-BeatLED(s) on the CPU, look for a continuouspattern of flashing. D. PressandHold the RESETButton locatedon the CPU for five seconds.Releasethe Button. Page15 E. After the LEDs return to their pattern,enterthe programmingmodeeitherfrom Station100or via the RS232communications port on the CPU andINITIALIZE the DATABASE (Flash80, button 8, Hold). F. The Systemis now readyfor programming. Page16 Customer Database Programming I. Introduction 1. FlexibleProgrammingallowsthe systemto be tailoredto the customersneeds. 2. No interruptionsin call processingwhile programmingthe database. A. Exceptionis flexibleport assignment.Requiresa resetso systemcan assigntime slots. 3. Methodsof Programming. A. From Station100(port 01) usinga ExecutiveDisplayTerminal. a. b. c. d. Enter the programmingmodeby dialing**3226. The On/Off Key on the terminalis lit. The Systemis readyto program. Refer to Figure600-3ProgrammingButton Mappingfor Terminallayout while in programmingmode. B. From anASCII terminal. a. May be eitheron-sitevia direct connectionto the RS-232Cport on the CPB (RS232Cmaybe configuredfor 300, 1200,2400,or 4800Baud) or Remotelyvia the on-board300baudmodem(1200Baudif the optional1200BaudModem Moduleis installed). b. TerminalDevicemustbe configuredfor SelectedBaudRate, 8 databits, 1 stop bit, andno parity ( xxxx,8,N,l). c. Whenpurchasinga cable,buy onewith pinsthat arenot fixed but canbe configured. d. ProgramMode Entry. 1) Onceconnectedto the systemhit the ReturnKey. 2) Prompt will appear. i) ThePromptshowsthe Systemtime anddate,andthe SoftwareVersion. Thisis the bestway to find out the softwareversionwithout interrupting service. 3) Enter the password. 4) The Systemis readyto program. 5) Refer to Figure600-l - Data TerminalCodesCrossReference,the table providesa oneto onecrossreferenceof keystrokes,allowingdigitalterminal programmingto be emulatedon the ASCII terminal. - i) Plus(+) andMinus (-) proceedingthe terminalentry maybe usedto toggle on/off enable/disable features. Page17 ii) Whilein programmingenteringa questionmark (?) will return the Remote AdministrationKey Definitions. 4. Data BaseProgrammingStructureandIndications A. Oncethe databaseis enteredprogrammingof attributesis facilitatedusingData Field (FLASH or ProgramCodes)codes. a. Data Fieldsareusedasa methodof Dividingthe Databaseinto Sectionsof Related Attributes, muchlike drawerswithin a file cabinet.Relateditemsare grouped togetherandthen anindividualitem is changedby makingthe properprogram entry, muchlike accessinga file within the drawerandmod@ingsomeof the informationwithin the file. B. The Hold Key on the terminalis usedto saveprogrammingentries. a. Pressinghold writes informationto the databaseandsavesit. You haveaccessed your file in the cabinet,changedthe datain the tile, andnow you arereturningthe file to its locationin the cabinetandclosingthe drawer. The datais savedat that locationuntil it is readyto be modifiedagain. b. Ifan error is madein dataentry, do not pressthe Hold Key, simplyre-enterthe Data Fieldcodeor pressthe On/Off key or hangthe terminalup. C. ConfirmationsTone a. Confirmationtone is issuedwhena valid entry is madein the database programmingmode. b. ConfirmationTonehasa frequencyof 1471Hertz andlastsa durationof 1.4 seconds,soundingonly once. D. Error Tone a. ProgrammingError Toneis providedwhenan invalidentry is madewhile in the programmingmode. b. ProgrammingError Tonehasa frequencyof 1471Hertz anda cadenceof 0.2 secondson / 0.2 secondsoff repeatedsixtimes. 5. Beginningto Program. A. Oncethe programmodehasbeenentered. a. Pressthe Flashbutton. b. Enter the two-digit field number. c. Enter customerData. d. Presshold andlistenfor eitherconformationtone or error tone. e. Repeatthe stepsuntil all datais entered. 6. Initialization. A. SYSTEMDATABASE MUST BE INITIALIZED WHEN THE SYSTEMIS INSTALLED OR WHEN THE DATABASEHAS BEEN CORRUPTED. Page18 a Flash80, PressFlexibleButton Eight (8), andPressHold. System will initialize andreset. B. Do C. CustomerData Worksheets a. Preparethe worksheetsprior to attemptingprogramming. b. Savethe sheetsandupdateeachtime programmingchangesaremade. c. Usefulwhenprogrammingbecauseit containsmost of the informationnecessary to programthe entiresystem(ProgramCode,Button Map, Function,Format of Entry, Default Value). Very little supplemental informationnecessaryto move aroundthe system. 7. DatabaseUpload/Download A. Systemmaybe saved(downloaded)on a PersonalComputerif a the databaseneedsto be initializeddueto corrupt data,a restore(upload)mayperformed. a. As a suggestion,alsodo a DatabasePrintoutto a Zogfile in the PC. 1) Thisis accomplished muchin the sameway asthe databasedownload. Instead of usingCOM 86 ?I’from the terminalsubstitutea different log file name andusea CO&M4 85 I instead. B. The Parametersgivenare from ProcommPlus,Version2.01 or higher(availablefrom a softwareretailer). Other communications packagesmaybe used,but it is important the they programis capableof havingthe parameterssetto the listedvalues. C. Communications Parameters Change Parameters: AM +.P .. Baud Rate 12400 Baud, N for Parity, 8 Bits, 1 Stop Bit ... .. ‘EMup Options: Alt +$. T&imii@l optins: .,: Item C: Soft Flow Control &ON/xOFF) ON ,’ . . protocDl uptious: “.. ... .: Item A: Echo Locally OFF 0 Item D: Character Pacing Item E: Line Pacing 0 Item F: Pace Character 0 ktem I: CR Translation (U&ad) IItem J: LF Translation (Upload) None I None It-em K: CR Translation IDownload~ None Item L: LF Translation (Download) .. ,’ .:. :. ,’ EJIemroptions ..‘: ;Ge,d fiot@.&l opb& ;,::q ... .. y,:::r.. 1 NO Item C: Abort xfe’eiif CD Lost INote: Item C appears in Proccom Plus Versions 2.01 or Higher. : .:, Items to Change ‘, Page19 I E. DownloadInstructions a. Connectan RS232-CSerialCablefrom the compurterto an I/O port on the System. b. Load the ProcommPlussoftwareon the computer. Updatethe parametersin ProcommPlusto the settingsgivenabove. C. Pressthe EN7ER key on the computer. A prompt will display,requestingthe systempasswordbe entered. Typethe word VODAKi’andpressIW7IX d. On the keyboardpressCGA444 86 W. e. On the keyboardpressALT and thenFI key simultaneously. Thiswill opena log file in ProcmmPlus. E Namethe databaseandpressenter. key againto beginthe downloadprocess. 8. Pressthe ENK?ZR h. After the databaseis downloadedfrom the system,presstheALTand thenFI key simultaneously.Thiswill closethe Log File. i. EnterA4on the key board. to exit ProcommPlus. i PressALT and thenX key simultaneously F. UploadInstructions a. ConnectanRS232-CSerialCablefrom the computerto an I/O port on the System. b. Load the ProcommPlussoftwareon the computer. Updatethe parametersin ProcommPlusto the settingsgivenabove. c. Pressthe IWZ7% key on the computer. A prompt will display,requestingthe systempasswordbe entered. Typethe word F’ODAF7andpressENTER. d. On the keyboardpressCOMMA 86 Q. e. PressEiVTH on the key board. f Pressthe PGUP key on the keyboard. g. Pressthe A key on the key board(selectionof ASCII asthe filetype). h. Type in the filenameof the databasewhichwas downloadedandpressEhVER. i. After the file uploadhasbeencompletedpressM andEiViZK j. Pressthe ALT and thenX keyssimultaneously, andpressENi’ER. k. After the Uploadis completedthe systemMUST be resetfor full activation. II. SystemsParameters Programming .......................... 1. SystemTimers ............................................................ 610-l 610-l A. SystemHold Recall ................................................... .610-2 B. ExclusiveHold Recall ................................................ .610-2 C. AttendantRecallTimer ............................................... .6 1O-3 Page20 D. Transfer Recall Timer ................................................ .6 1O-3 E. Preset Foward Timer ................................................. .610-4 F. Call Forward No/Answer Timer ...................................... G. Pause Timer .......................................................... .610-4 .610-5 H. CallParkRecallTimer .610-5 I. ................................................ ConferenceDISA .................................................... J. Paging Time Out Timer ............................................... .6 1O-6 K. CO Ring Detect Timer ................................................ L. SLT DTMF Receiver Timer .......................................... .610-7 M. Message Wait Reminder Tone ........................................ N. SLT Hook Flash Timer ............................................... .610-8 .610-8 0. SLT Hook Flash Debounce Timer .................................... .610-9 P. SMDR Call Qualification Timer .............................. Q. Automatic Call Back Timer ................................. .610-6 .610-7 TF-27a 430f 72 TF-27a 44 of 72 2. System Features Programming ........................................... 610-10 A. Attendant Override .................................................. 61O-l 1 B. HoldPreference 610-11 ..................................................... C. External Night Ring ................................................. D. Executive Override Warning Tone ................................... 610-12 E. Page Warning Tone ................................................. 610-13 F. Background Music Channel .......................................... 610-13 G. LCREnable 610-14 ......................................................... H. Account Codes - forced ............................................. I. Group Listening ............................................ 610-12 610-14 TF-27a 39 of 72 J. Idle Speaker Mode ......................................... TF-27a 41 of 72 K. Music-on-Hold TF-27a 42 of 72 ............................................. 3. Attendant Station Assignment ........................................... 6 lo- 15 4. System Time and Date .................................................. 610-15 5. PBX Dialing Codes ..................................................... 610-16 6. Executive/Secretary Pairs ......................................... Page 21 .: .... 6 lo- 16 6lo- 17 7. Relay/SensorModule Programming ..................................... A. Programminga relayfor externalpage ............................... 610-18- B. Programminga relayfor RAN Starting ............................... 610-18 C. Programminga relayfor PowerFailureTransfer ..................... 610-18 D. Programminga relayfor Loud Bell Control .......................... 610-19 E. Programminga relayfor CO Line Control ............................ 610-19 F. AssignRelay/SensorInterfaceModuleto a Station ................... 610-20 G. Programsensingcircuit asRAN Sensing(RAN END) circuit ......... 610-20 8. BaudRate Assignment .................................................. 610-21 9. AccessCodes ........................................................... 61O-22 A. DISA AccessCode .................................................. 6 1O-22 B. DatabaseAdministrationPassword .................................. 6 1O-22 10. StationMessageDetail Recording(SMDR) .............................. 6 1O-23 A. SMDR Enable/Disable............................................... 6 1O-23 B. Long Distance/LocalAssignment .................................... 610-23 C. Characterprint Assignment.......................................... 6 1O-24 D. BaudRate Display ................................................... 61O-24 E. SMDR Port Assignment............................................. 6 1O-24 11. WeeklyNight Mode Schedule........................................... 610-25 A. Automatic/ManualOperation ........................................ 6 1O-25 B. Day of Weekprogramming .......................................... 610-25 12.Directory Dialing ................................................ 13.Hunt Groups ............................................................ TF-27a5 of 72 610-26 A. Hunt GroupProgramming ........................................... 610-26 B. Station/PilotHuntingAssignment.................................... 610-26 14.Local Number/NameTranslationTable ......................... III.CO Line Attributes Programming ........................... 1. Introduction .............................................................. 2. DTMF/ Dial PulseProgramming.................................. Page22 TF-27a 15 of 72 620-l .620-l : ....... .620-2 3. CO/PBX Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620-2 4. UniversalNight Answer(UNA)Programming ............................ .620-2 5. DISA Trunk-to-Trunk (Per CO Line) ..................................... .620-3 6. 7. Loop SupervisionProgramming ........................................... 620-5 DISA Programming ...................................................... -620-5 8. 9. FlashTimer Programming , .620-4 Privacy .................................................................. ..620- ............................................... 6 10.Line Group Programming ................................................ .620-6 11. Classof Service(COS) Programming..................................... .620-7 12. CO Line RingingAssignments............................................ .620-8 TF-27a54 of 72 13. CO Line IdentificationDisplay .................................. 14.Dial Pulseparameters .................................................... .620-9 TF-27a59 of 72 15.FlexiblePort Assignment ....................................... IV.Station Attributes Programming ............................. 630-l .630-l 1. Introduction .............................................................. Page A Features ..630- 2 1. PagingAccess........................................................... 630-3 2. Do Not Disturb ........................................................... 3. ConferenceEnable/Disable (Per Station) .................................. 4. ExecutiveOverride ................................... .630-3 TF27a45 of 72 and630-4 5. Privacy(Per Station) ..................................................... .630-5 6. SystemSpeedDial Access ................................................ .630-6 7. Line Queuing .630-6 ............................................................ 8. PreferredLine Answer ................................................... .630-7 9. Off-Hook VoiceOver .................................................... -630-7 10. Call Forwarding .......................................................... .630-8 11.ForcedLeast Cost Routing ................................................ 630-8 Page B Attributes Programming 1. Introductionto PageB Attributes ........................................ Page23 .630-g Page B Feature Programming 1. StationIdentification ....... : ............................................ 630-10 _ 2. StationClassof Service ................................................. 630-12 3. Speakerphone/Headset Programming .................................... 630-13 4. Pick-up Group (s) Programming......................................... 630-13 5. PagingZone(s) Programrning ........................................... 630-14 6. PresetCall ForwardProgramming....................................... 630-15 7. CO Line Group Access .................................................. 630-16 8. Off-Hook PreferenceProgramming ...................................... 630-17 9. FlexibleButton Programming............................................ 630-18 10. DisplayFlexibleButtonsProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630-20 ll.DigitalDataInterfaceUnit@DIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TF-27a63 of72 12.FlexiblePort AssignmentFeature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TF-27a60 of 72 VIII.Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TF-31 1. ACD Programming A. Alternate ACD Group Assignment B. ACD Overflow StationAssignment C. ACD RecordedAnnouncementAssignment(s) (RAN) D. ACD SupervisorProgramming E. ACD StationAssignment(s) 2. ACD Timers A. ACD Ring Timer B. ACD MessageInterval Timer C. ACD Overflow Timer D. ACD Auto Wrap-Up Timer E. ACD No-AnswerRecallTimer F. ACD NoAnswer Retry Timer G. ACDRAN AnnouncementTables IX.Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..a..... 640- 1 Page24 1. UCD Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640-l A. Alternate UCD Group Assignment................................... .640-l . B. UCD Overflow StationAssignment................................... .640-2 Assignment(s) (RAN) ................ C. UCD RecordedAnnouncement .640-2 D. UCD StationAssignment(s) .......................................... .640-2 UCD Timers ............................................................. .640-3 A. UCD Ring Timer ..................................................... .640-3 B. UCD MessageInterval Timer ......................................... .640-4 C. UCD Overflow Timer ................................................ .640-4 D. UCDAuto Wrap-Up Timer .......................................... ..640 -4 E. UCD No-Answer Timer .............................................. .640-4 UCD RAN AnnouncementTables ........................................ .640-g X. Voice Mail Groups (VM) ..................................... 645-l 1. VoiceMail Programming................................................. .645-l A. AlternateVoice Mail Group .......................................... .645-2 B. “Leave”Mail Index Entry ............................................. .645-2 C. “Retrieve” Mail Index Entry .......................................... .645-2 D. StationAssignment(s) ................................................ .645-3 2. VoiceMail OutpulsingTable .............................................. 645-4 A. Voice mail In-BandSignaling......................................... .645-4 B. VoiceMail DisconnectTable ......................................... .645-5 3. Voice Mail In-BandSignalmg ............................................ .645-6 A. VoiceMail In-BandDigits ............................................ .645-6 B. VoiceMail Transfer/Forward ............................... XI.Exception Tables Programming .............................. TF-27a52 of 72 650-l 1. ExceptionTablesProgramming........................................... .650- 1 2. RelatedItems To Toll Restriction ......................................... .650-2 A. CO/r;BX Lines ....................................................... .650-2 B. ForcedAccountCodes ........................................ Page25 :. ..... .650-2 C. SLT DTMF Receivers ........................................... . . . . . 650-2 D. LCR vs. Toll Restriction ......................................... . . . . . 650-3 _ 3. Toll RestrictionProgramming ....................................... . . . . .650-4 A. EnteringToll TableProgramming ................................ . . . . .650-4 B. Allow TableProgramming....................................... . . . . . 650-5 C. Deny TableProgramming ........................................ . . . . . 650-7 D. SpecialTableProgramming ...................................... . . . . . 650-8 E. DisplayingToll TableEntries .................................... . . . . . 650-9 XII.Least Cost Routing (LCR) ................................. . 655-l .655-l 1. Introduction ............................................................. A. LCR Operation ...................................................... .655-l 2. LCR TablesProgramming............................................... ,655-3 A. 3-Digit Area/OfficeCodeTable ...................................... 1655-4 B. 6-Digit Office CodeTable ........................................... .655-5 C. ExceptionCodeTable ........... . ... . . . . . . . . . .655-6 D. Route List Table ................. . ... . . .655-7 E. Insert DeleteTable .............. . .., . . . 655-8 F. Daily Start Time Table ........... . ... . . .655-g G. WeeklyScheduleTable .......... .... . 655-10 ... . 655-11 .... . 655-12 H. LCR Routingfor Toll Information I. Default LCR Database........... XIII.Initialize Database Parameters ............................. 1. Introduction .............................................................. 660-l .660-l A. Initialize SystemParameters.......................................... .660-2 B. InitializeCO Line Attributes .......................................... .660-4 C. Initialize StationAttributes ........................................... .660-5 D. InitializeGroup Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660-7 .660-8 E. InitializeExceptionTables . . . . . . . F. Initialize SystemSpeedNumbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..‘...... Page26 .660-g G. InitializeLCR Tables ................................................ 660-l 0 H. Initialize SystemDatabaseandReset(All Parameters)................ 660-l 1 . I. Initialiie ICLlD Parameters.......................................... 660-12 J. InitializeDirectory DialingTableParameters......................... 660-14 K. InitializeHunt Group Parameters.................................... 660-l 5 L. InitializeACD or UCD GroupParameters ........................... 660-l 6 M. InitializeVM GroupParameters ..................................... 660-l 7 N. SystemReset ........................................................ 660-18 XIV.Printing System Database Parameters ...................... 665-l 1. Introduction .............................................................. ,665-l 2. Printing SystemParameters............................................... .665-2 3. Printing CO Line Attributes .............................................. .665-4 4. Printing StationAttributes ................................................. 665-6 5. Printing Group Parameters ............................................... .665-8 6. PrintingExceptionTables ............................................... 665-10 7. Printing SystemSpeedBins ............................................. 665-12 8. PrintingLCR Tables..................................................... 665-14 9. PrintingEntire SystemDatabase......................................... 665-24 XV.System Checkout XVI.Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700-l and Troubleshooting .......................... 800-l 1. PrintedCircuit Board TroubleshootingCharts ............................. 800-I A. 1428BKSU TroubleshootingTable ................................... .800-l B. 1428EPROM Memory Size ........................................... 800-l C. 1428StaticMemory Size ............................................. .800-l D. 2856CPB TroubleshootingTable ...................................... 800-2 E. 2856CPB StaticRAM Memory Size .................................. 800-2 F. 2856CPB EPROM Memory Size ...................................... 800-3 G. 4x8 Key InterfaceBoardTroubleshootingTable ....................... 800-3 Page27 H. 4x8 SLT InterfaceBoardTroubleshootingTable ...................... .800-3 I. DTMF ReceiverModule .............................................. .800-3 - J. I/O Module ........................................................... .800-3 K. SingleLine TelephoneAdapter(OPX) ................................ .800-3 XVII.Customer DatabaseProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A XVIII.Digital SystemsPart Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B XKICLID General Descriptions ......................... Appendix C 1. ICLID GeneralDescriptions ................................................. C-l A. Introduction ............................................................. C-l B. SystemConfiguration.................................................... C-l C. CallingName/NumberDisplay ........................................... C-2 D. IncomingNumber/NameSMDR ......................................... C-2 E. UnansweredCall Management........................................... C-2 F. Local NameTranslation ................................................. C-2 G. ICLID DisplayPhoneOperation ......................................... C-2 H. ImplementationPlan ..................................................... C-4 Page28 I STARPLUS 1428 Configuration BASIC KSU EXPANSION 4X8 300 BAUD MODEM 1 DTMF RECEIVER 1 RS 232C I/O PORT 1 EXTERNAL PAGE PORT (1 -WAY) MUSIC ON HOLD INPUT MUSIC ON HOLD ADJUSTMENT POT (R40) SUPER CAPACITOR RAM BACKUP POWER SUPPLY 1.5 AMP, 250 VAC SLO-BLOW RUSE SYSTEM HEARTBEAT INDICATION (RED LED) GROUNDING LUG (P3) RESET BUTTON KSU 4X8 1 EXTERNAL PAGE PORT (1 -WAY) POWER SUPPLY 1.5 AMP, 250 VAC SLO-BLOW FUSE GROUNDING LUG (P3) Installs in the Basic KSU Installs in the ExDansion KSU 2x4 ExpanderModuleQ& 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule ExpansionI/O Module 1200BaudModem 2x4 ExpanderModulem 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule m 4x8 ExpanderModule 1 -DTMF ReceiverModule 4x8 Expander Module * The •i indicates an installed component. Jf the 2x4 Station or SLT Expander Module is not installed in the Basic KSU and an Exoansion KSU is installed. CO Ports 5-6 and Station Ports 9-12 can be re-assimed usine flexible mrt assimment. 2x4 SLT EXPANDER MODULE 2 CO/CENTRBX/PBX LINES (LOOP START) FOUR STANDARD SINGLE LINE TELBPHON-E (2500) PORTS NO EXTBRNAL PAGE ZONE + 5 VOLT DC E5VOLT DC INDICATIONS (GREEN LED@ RING GENERATOR INPUT (CABLE PROVIDED) STANDARD MESSAGE WAITING INDICATION ‘ Page29 4x8 EXPANDER MODULE 4 CO/CENTREX/PBX LINES (LOOP START) EIGHT DIGITAL STATION PORTS 1 EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE PER CARD (I-WAY) + 5 VOLT DC AND -5VOLT DC INDICATIONS (GREEN LEDs) TWO +12 VOLTS DC INDICATIONS (GREEN LEDs) GROUND WIRE (CONNECT TO LUG IN EXPANSION KSU) ONLY MOUNTS IN THE EXPANSION KSU 2x4 EXPANDER MODULE 2 CO/CENTREX/PBX LINES (LOOP START) FOUR DIGITAL STATION PORTS . 1 EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE PER CARD (I-WAY) (J2) + 5 VOLT DC AND -5VOLT DC INDICATIONS (GREEN LEDs) +12 VOLTS DC INDICATION (GREEN LED) DTMF RECEIVER mw MODULE PROVIDES ONE DTMF RECEIVER ONE MAY BE ADDED TO ANY 4X8 EXPANSION MODULE, 2X4 EXPANDER MODULE, OR 2x4 SLT EXPANDER MODULE ONE RECEIVER WILL SUPPORT EIGHT SLTs WlTH LIGHT TO MODERATE TRAFFIC INCREASE RECEIVERS WHEN VOICE MAIL OR AUTO ATTENDANT IS INSTALLED EXPANSION I/O MODULE OOM) FOR THE 1428 MOUNTS IN THE BASIC KSU 1 RS-232C I/O PORT @B-25) 1 RS-422 I/O PORT (RJ-14) l PROGRAMABLE OPTIONS 300, 1200,2400,4800, !WO BAUD 1200 BAUD MODEM MODULE I (MM) MOUNTS IN THE BASIC KSU PROVIDES ENHANCED MODEM SPEED OF 1200 BAUD Page 30 TARPLUS 1428 CONFIGURATION NOTES NOTES: , 1. TheExpansionKSU, 2x4 ExpanderModule, 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule, andthe 4x8 ExpanderModule eachmayhaveone additionalDTMP ReceiverModuleinstalledon the module,this yieldsa maximum systemcapacityof 4. 2. TheBasicKSU, ExpansionKSU, 2x4 ExpanderModule,2x4 SLT ExpanderModule, andthe 4x8 ExpanderModule eachhaveGreenLED indicatorsfor +5 Volts DC and-5 Volts DC. 3. TheBasicKSU, ExpansionKSU, 2x4 ExpanderModule,andthe 4x8 ExpanderModule eachhaveGreen LED indicatorsfor +12 Volts DC (Oneper four Digital Key terminals). 4. The 2x4 and4x8 ExpanderModuleshaveanExternalPagePort, this yieldsa maximumsystemcapacity of 4 externalpagezones. All ExternalPageZonesAre I-Wav! The 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule providesNO ExternalPagecapability. 5. All ExternalPagingrequirescustomerprovidedpageamplifier,speakersandpower supplyfor operation. 6. If a 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule is installedin the systemit requiresa Ring Generator(Tellabs8101)be provided. 7. If Off PremiseExtension(OPX) Modulesare installeda -48 Volt DC Power Supplyis required. Each OPX moduleconsumes500maof current. To arriveat a currentrating for a power supplyMultiply the Number of OPX Modulesby 0.5, this will equalthe currentrating, in Amps, of the -48 Volt de power supplyrequired. 8. If RelayClosureis Requiredfor anyapplication,an optionalRelaySensorModule (RSM) is required. The unit providesthreerelaysandthreesensingcircuits. Relaysarerated at 24 Vdc, 1 ampandrequire customerprovidedpower supply. 9. EachOPX Module, RSM, or Digital Data InterfaceUnit requiresoneDigital Key StationPort for connection. 10. Additionall/O ports maybe addedusingthe IOM (1 RS-232CDB25, 1 RS-422RJ-14 ), 11. If enhancedmodemspeedis requireda 1200Baud Modem Module maybe addedto the BasicKSU. 12. The BasicKSU, ExpansionKSU, 2x4 Expander Module, 2x4 SLT ExpanderModule, andthe 4x8 ExpanderModule eachuseRJ-11Jacksfor CO interface. The pinout is shownin the inset. . I Pin 8 1 (bhm) -N/C Pin 12 (b&k) . N/C Pin #S (rad) _ Ring 1 Ph L4 (Qrren) -Tap ( Pln#S (yallow) - N/C Pln M (brown) - N/C 1 A N G liie!e RJ-11 13. If Loop Supervisionis providedby telco, andLoop * Supervisionis enabledon a CO Line which is engaged’ in conversationwith an SLT Port, andthe outsideparty disconnects the call. A Loop Supervisionsignal of 700msdurationwill beprovidedto the connectedSLT or device. Page31 STARPLUS 2856 CONFIGURATION COMPONENTS NECCESSARY FOR SYSTEM OPERATION EquipmentCabinetwith PowerSupply(KSU) CentralProcessing Board 4x8 Key StationInterfaceBoard QlJ 4x8 SLT InterfaceBoard ADDITIONAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS DTMF ReceiverModule(RMJ 1200BaudModemModule ExpansionI/O Module EOUIPMENT CABINET WITH POWER SUPPLY ww POWER SUPPLY ON/OFF SWITCH EIGHT CARDSLOT BACKPLANE GROUNDING LUG FERRITEKIT 5AMP 250 VAC SLO-BLOW FUSE CENTRAL PROCESSING BOARD PW 300 BAUD MODEM BATTERY FOR BACK-UP OF RAM MEMORY (J3) RESET BUTTON SYSTEM HEARTBEAT INDICATION (RED LED) + 5 VOLT DC AND -5VOLT DC INDICATIONS (GREEN LED@ MUSIC ON HOLD INPUT (RCA JACK) MUSIC ON HOLD ADJUSTMENT POT (R5) RS-2332C INPUT/OUTPUT PORT (RJ-45) NO - DTMF RECEIVERS ON CPB 4x8 KEY INTERFACE (CW BOARD 4 CO/CENTREX@BX LINES (LOOP START) EIGHT DIGITAL STATION PORTS 1 EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE PER CARD (l-WAY) 1 PROGRAMMABLE MULTI USE RELAY PER CARD RELAY STATUS LED INDICATOR CO LINE IN USE LED INDICATOR + 5 VOLT DC AND -5VOLT DC INDICATIONS (GREEN LEDs) 125 PAIR SHIELDED CABLE CURRENTLY PROVIDED Page32 4x8 SLT INTERFACE (CW BOARD 4 COICENTREXIPBX LINES (LOOP START) EIGHT STANDARD SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE (2500) PORTS w EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE 1 PROGRAMMABLE MULTI USE RELAY PER CARD RELAY STATUS LED INDICATOR CO LINE IN USE LED INDICATOR + 5 VOLT DC AND -5VOLT DC INDICATIONS (GREEN LEDs) 125 PAIR SHIELDED CABLE CURRENTLY PROVIDED RING GENERATOR INPUT STANDARD MESSAGE WAlTING INDICATION DTMF RECEIVER uw MODULE PROVIDES ONE DTMF RECEIVER ONE MAY BE ADDED TO ANY 4X8 CARD REQUIRED FOR DISA REQUIRED FOR SINGLE LINE TELEPHONES ONE RECEIVER WILL SUPPORT EIGHT SLTs WITH LIGHT TO MODERATE TRAFFIC INCREASE RECEIVERS WHEN VOICE MAIL OR AUTO ATTENDANT IS INSTALLED -NO DTMF RECEIVERS ARE PRESENT UNTIL YOU ADD THEM EXPANSION I/O MODULE FOR THE 2856 (IOW MOUNTS ON THE CPB 1 RS-232C I/O PORT (RJ-45) 1 RS-422 I/O PORT (RI-14) l PROGRAMABLE OPTIONS 300, 1200,2400,4800,9600 BAUD 1200 BAUD MODEM MODULE (MM) MOUNTS ON THE CPB PROVIDES ENHANCED MODEM SPEED OF 1200 BAUD Page 33 TARPLUS 2856 CONFIGURATION NOTES NOTES: 4 1. If the 4x8 SLT InterfaceBoard(CSB) is used,at leastoneDTMF ReceiverModule (RM) must be installedin the system. Onemodulewill supportup to eight SLTswith light to moderatetrafhc. 2. If DISA is usedat leastoneDTMF ReceiverModule(RM) mustbe installedin the system. 3. The 4x8 SLT InterfaceBoard (CSB) requiresa ring generatorbe usedwith the board, a Tellabs8101,3OHz,90 Vat Ring Generatormaybe used. Only one ring generatorper system is required. 4. Whenusingmore than one4x8 SLT InterfaceBoard (CSB) in a system,makesurethat both ring generatorcableshaveidenticalpolarity. Use a DVM to continuitycheckthe cablesto identity properpolarity. 5. The ferrite kit which comeswith the KSU will supportupto a 16x32configuration(four 4x8 Cards),beyondthis configurationan additionalferrite kit mustbe used. 6. The Ferrite kit mustbe properlyinstalledto complywith FCC regulations(seeinstallation manualfor detatils). 7. There aretwo RJ-14slocatedon the ’ front edgeof eachCKB andCSB they areusedto interfacethe CO Linesto the system. ThePinoutsfor thejacks are shownin the inset . -8. 9. \ - TANG Installationof the battery strap(J3) on the CPB is requiredfor propersystem operation. \ Pin # 1 (blue) #2 (black) Pin #3 Pin #4 FPin L Ping6 Pin RJ-14 (red) (green) (yellow) 116 (brown) -N/C -Ring i - Ring 1 -Tip 1 - Tip 2 - N/C JACK If Off PremiseExtension(OPX) Modulesareinstalled,a -48 V DC Power Supplyis required. EachOPX Moduleconsumes500maof current. To arrive at a currentrating for the power supplyMultiply the Numberof OPX Modulesby 0.5, this will equalthe currentrating, in Amps, of the -48 volt DC power supplyrequired. 10. EachOPX Module, RSM, or Digital Data Interfaceunit requiresoneDigital Key StationPort for connection. 11. IfLoop Supervisionis providedby telco, andLoop Supervisionis enabledon a CO Line which is engagedin conversationwith an SLTPort, andthe outsideparty disconnectsthe call. A Loop Supervisionsignalof 7OOms durationwill be providedto the connectedSLT or device. Page34 STARPLUS DIGITAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS TERMINAL TERMINAL DEVICES DEVICES EnhancedDigital Terminal ExecutiveDigital DisplayTerminal BasicDigital Terminal Digital Direct StationSelector/DirectLine SelectorConsole@SS/DLS) SLT Adapter/OffPremiseExtensionModule (OPX) RelaySensorModule(RSM) Digital Data InterfaceUnit (DDIU) ADDITIONAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS PowerFail TransferUnit (PFTU) EXECUTIVE DIGITAL DISPLAY TERMINAL 34 BUTTONS 48 CHARACTER LCD DISPLAY 12 DIAL KEY PAD 28 FLEXIBLE BUTTONS* ON/OFF BUTTON* MUTE BUTTON* SPEED BUTl-ON* FLASH BUlTON* TRANSFER BUTTON* HOLD BUTTON* SPEAKERPHONE SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROL RING VOLUME CONTROL H-T-P SWITCH DIRECTORY TRAY WALLMOUNTABLE K-STYLE HANDSET *EACH HAVE A SUPER BRIGHT LED Page35 ENHANCED DIGITAL TERMINAL 34 BUTTONS 12 DIAL KEY PAD 28 FLEXIBLE BUlTONS* ON/OFF BUTTON* MUTE BUTTON* SPEED BUTTON* FLASH BUlTON* TRANSFER BU’ITON* HOLD BU’lTON* SPEAKERPHONE SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROL RING VOLUME CONTROL H-T-P SWITCH DIRECTORY TRAY WALL MOUNTABLE K-STYLE HANDSET BASIC DIGITAL TERMINAL 12 DIAL KEY PAD 8 FLEXIBLE BUTTONS* ON/OFF BUlTON* MUTE BUlTON* SPEED BUTTON* FLASH BU+lTON* TRANSFER BUTTON* HOLD BU-ITON* HANDSFREE INTERCOM ON-HOOK MONITOR DIALING SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROL RING VOLUME CONTROL H-T-P SWITCH DIRECTORY TRAY WALLMOUNTABLE K-STYLE HANDSET *EACH HAVE A SUPER BRIGHT LED Page 36 DIGITAL DSWDLS CONSOLE 48 BUTTONS EXPANDABLE TO 96 BUTTONS WALLMOUNTABLE EACH DSS/DLS REQUIRES A KEY STATION PORT FOR OPERATION ’ THREE MAPPING OPTIONS MAP l* - FIRST 14 CO LINES, 28 STATIONS, FIRST THREE CALL PARR LOCATIONS, RELEASE, ATTENDANT OVERRIDE, AND ALL CALL PAGE BUTTON. MAP 2* - 28 CO LINES, FIRST 14 STATIONS, FIRST THREE CALL PARK LOCATIONS, ATTENDANT OVERRIDE, AND ALL CALL PAGE BUTTON MAP 3* - STATIONS 114-155, CALL PARR LOCATIONS 223-225, INTERNAL PAGE ZONES l-3 *ALL BUTTONS EXCEPT CO LINE KEYS AND RELEASE KEYS ARE USER PRQG RAMMABLE. PROGRAMMTN G USER KEYS WHICH REQUIRE LAMFING ONTO A DSS/DLS CONSOLE IS NOTPERMITTED. SLT / OFF PREMISE EXTENSION Pw MODULES PROVIDES ONE LONG LOOP EXTENSION REQUIRES A -48 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY INTERNALLY EQUIF’PED WITH A DTMF RECEIVER REQUIRES ONE DIGITAL TERMINAL PORT FOR OPERATION PROVIDES ONE POWER FAIL TRANSFER CIRCUIT RELAY SENSOR MODULE PROVIDES THREE Pt$.? R4MMABLE RELAYS LOUD BELL CONTROL, CO LINE CONTROL CONTACTS, RAN START CONTACTS, PAGE RELAY, POWER FAIL CONTACT PROVIDES THREE SENSING CIRCUITS l RANSTOP REQUIRES ONE DIGITAL TERMINAL PORT FOR OPERATION REQUIRES EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE TO DRIVE EQUIPMENT OPERATED BY RELAYS I RELAY RATINGS ARE 24 VOLT DC, 1 AMP l Page 37 DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE @DW UNIT POINT TO POINT INTERNAL DATA TRANSMISSION (DATA INTERCOM) APPLICATIONS l PRIWI’ER SHARING, MODEM SHARING, EXTENDING SMDR OUTPUT OVER 50 FEET FROM THE KSU, SMALL FILE TRANSFERS PROGRAMMABLE DATA RATES l 300,1200,2400,4800,9600,19.2K, 38.4K BAUD DB-25 FEMALE SERIAL PORT REQUIRES ONE DIGITAL TERMINAL PORT FOR OPERATION POWER FAIL TRANSFER UNIT (PFTU) 12 TRANSFER CIRCUITS . WILL TRANSFER TIP AND RING OF TWELVE CO LINES TO TIP AND RING OF TWELVE SLT’s IN THE EVENT OF A POWER OUTAGE, CO ARE RESTORED TO THE SYSTEM WHEN POWERRETURNS REQUIRES 12 VOLT POWER SUPPLY FOR OPERATION TEST SWITCH Page 38 STARPLUS DIGITAL TERMINAL OPERATIONS OPERATIONS Flexible Button Programming H-T-P Switch Volume Controls FLEXIBLE BUTTON PROGRAMMING l IF YOU HAVE BU?TONS ON YOUR TELEPHONE WHICH HAVE NOT BEEN ASSIGNED IN DATABASE ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMIN GASCOLINES,POO GROUP, OR LOOP BUTI-ONS, THEY MAY BE USER PROGRAMMED AT TELEPHONE AS A FEATURE OR SPEEDDIAL BUTTON. IF THE BU-ITON WHICH YO WISH TO CHANGE IS DESIGNATED AS A CO LINE POOL OR LOOP BUlTON,4 MUST FIRST BE IMARKED AS A MULTI-FUNCTION Bu?TON IN DATABASE IUMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING. TO PROGRAM FLEXIBLE BUlTONS: 1.PRESSTHE SPEEDBUTrON TWICE. 2. PRESSTHE ASSIGNED BUTTON TO BE PROGRAMMED. 3. DIAL THE DESIRED FLEXIBLE By-TON PROGFWMMING CODE. 4. PRESS THE ON/OFF KEY TO END OR REPEAT STEPSTWO AND THREE TO CONTINUE PROGRAMMIN G ADDITIONAL BUTT’ONS. TO ERASE FLEXlBLE BUTI’ONS: I. PRESSTHE SPEEDBUTrON TWICE. 2. PRESSTHE BU-ITON TO BE ERASED. 3. PRESSTHE RASH BUITON. 4. PRESSTHE ON/OFF KEY TO END. I loo-155 2Wl 228 33lw 4wl 55wl 566 567 571 572 55[vl 573 574 575 576 55[vl 577 55[vl 601 602 603 604 620 621 623 624 625 626 627 628 631 632 633[22] 633 00 FLEXIBLE BUTTON PROG RAMMING CODES STATION INTERCOM NUMBERS CALL PARK LOCATION (sy&m) PERSONAL PARK HUNT GROUP PILOT NUMBERS O-7 VOICE MAIL GROUP PILOT NUhiBERS O-7 ACDNCD GROUP PILOT NUMBERS O-7 ACD/‘UCD AVAILABLE’UNAVAILABLE ACDAJCD CALLS IN QUEUE DISPLAY ACD AGENT LOGGUT ACD AGENT LOGIN ACD GROUP MEMBER STATUS ACD AGENT HELP ACD SUPERVISOR LOGOUT ACD SUPERVISOR UJGIN ACD SUPERVISOR QUEUE STATUS ATIXNDANT OVERRIDE ATTENDANT DISABLE CO LINE ACCESS CO LINE OFF-NET FORWARD NIGHT SERVICE CAMP43N LINE QUEUE MESSAGE WAIT CONFEIiENCE FXECUTIVE OVERRIDE LC!t LINE QUEUE CANCEL ACCOUNT CODE ENTER OHVO DO NOT DISTURB BACKGROUND MUSIC PERSONALIZED MESSAGES CLEAR PERSONALIZED MESSAGES 634 635 640 695 70 71 72 73 74 75 760 76[01 76iPl 77 9 Ml ;iPEEDl [SPEED]+[*] [SPEED]+[#] YY I HEADSET MODE k-l ICLID DISPLAY (UNANSWERED CALLS) ALL CALL FORWARD DISTINCTIVE RING i ALL CALL PAGE (INTERNAL & EXTERNAL INTERNAL PAGE ZONE 1 INTERNAL PAGE ZONE 2 INTERNAL PAGE ZONE 3 INTERNAL PAGE ZONE 4 INTERNAL ALL CALL PAGE EXTERNAL ALL CALL PAGE ’ EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE 1-7 EXTERNAL PAGE 1-7 MEET-ME PAGE ANSWER (i” LEAST COST ROUTING ACCES $ 1/1 GROUP CALL PICK-UP 0 . UNIVERSAL NIGHT ANSWER (UNA) SPEED DIAL ACCESS l+ (STATION 00-19) (20-99 SYSTEM) SAVE NUh4BER REDIAL LAST NUMBER REDIAL YY = SPEED DIAL BIN NUMBERS ZZ = PERSONALIZED MESSAGES U = UCD/ACD GROUP NUMBER O-7 C = CALL PARK LAXATION O-7 H = HUNT GROUP NUMBER O-7 V = VOICE MAIL GROUP NUMBER O-7 P = EXTERNAL PAGE ZONE NUMBER 1-7 H-T-P SWITCH USERS MAY SELECT THE METHOD BY WHICH THEY RECEIVE INTERCOM CALLS AND SIGNALS. OPERATION l HANDSFREE (H) (LEFT POSITION ) - THE STATION USER, UPON HEARING A TONE BURST AND A VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT MAY REPLY HANDSFREE. l TONE RINGING (T) (CENTER l%XITION) - A STANDARD TONE RING NOTIFIES THE PARTY OF AN INCOMING INTERCOM CALL. THE CALLED PARTY ANSWERS BY LIFTING THE HANDSET OR MOVING THE SWITCH TO THE HANDSFREE PQSITION OR PRESSING THE ON/OFF BUTTON. l PRIVACY (P) (RIGHT POSITION) - THE STATION USER RECEIVES A BURST OF TONE AND A VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT OVER THE SPEAKER THE MICROPHONE IS DEACTIVATED FOR PRIVACY. THE CALLED PARTY MUST LIFT THE HANDSET OR PRESS THE MUTE BUTTON TO REPLY. l AN OVERRIDE OF THE H AND P SWITCH POSITIONS IS PROVIDED FOR VOICE MAIL OR AUTO ATTENDANT TRANSFERS. TONE MODE RINGING BY BE FORCED BY DIALING 6# AND THE CALLED PARTIES EXTENSION NUMBER VOLUME CONTROLS SEPARATE SLIDE SWITCHES ARE LOCATED ON THE FRONT OF THE DIGITAL TERMINALS TO CONTROL THE VOLUME OF VOICE AND TONE SIGNALS PRESENTED TO THE TERMINAL SPEAKER l l THE SPEAKER VOLUME CONTROLS ALL VOICE SIGNALS PRESENTED TO THE SPEAKER I.E. SPEAKERPHONE CONVERSATION, BACKGRGUND MUSIC, AND PAGE ANNOUNCEMENTS. l THE RINGING VOLUME CONTROLS ALL TONE PRESENTED TO THE SPEAKER I.E. RINGING, CAMP-ON. RINGING WILL BE PROPORTIONATELY QUIETER THAN RINGING, BASED ON THE SWITCH SETTING. Page 40 SIGNALS MUTED NORMAL I
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 560 Page Mode : UseOutlines Has XFA : No Page Layout : SinglePage Mod Date : 2002:02:06 21:58:44-06:00 Producer : Photoshop PDF Plug-in 1.0 Creation Date : 1999:05:17 10:43:17Z Author : ez-manuals.com Modify Date : 2002:02:06 21:58:44-06:00 Create Date : 1999:05:17 10:43:17Z Metadata Date : 2002:02:06 21:58:44-06:00 Creator : ez-manuals.comEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools